2022 Jeep Grand Cherokee L 92

Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing
what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of 2022 GRAND CHEROKEE/GRAND CHEROKEE L
your Jeep® brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly OWNE R ’S MANUAL
to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
2022 GRAND CHEROKEE

GRAND CHEROKEE L
U. S. Canada
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une Second Edition
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 22_WL_OM_EN_USC
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios,
right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
used in substitution therefore. cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. reference source for common questions.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca
Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com. (Canada) or your local Jeep® brand dealer.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, or use public transportation.
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area WARNING
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
22_WL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................ 10 1
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................17 2
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 95 3
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ............................................................................................... 122 4
5 MULTIMEDIA ..............................................................................................................................203 5
6 SAFETY ........................................................................................................................................249 6
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ....................................................................................................309 7
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................334 8
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................... 400
9
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .................................................................................................... 407
10
11 INDEX ............................................................................................................................................... 411
11
INTRODUCTION VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — DRIVER AND PASSENGER MEMORY

IF EQUIPPED ...........................................................26 SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED .................................... 34
SYMBOLS KEY........................................................ 11
To Arm The System ..........................................26 Programming The Memory Feature ................35
ROLLOVER WARNING .......................................... 11
To Disarm The System .....................................26 Linking And Unlinking The Key Fob
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ......... 12 Rearming Of The System .................................27 To Memory........................................................35
SYMBOL GLOSSARY.............................................. 12 Security System Manual Override...................27 Memory Position Recall ...................................36
Tamper Alert .....................................................27 SEATS .................................................................. 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE DOORS.....................................................................27 Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) —
KEYS ........................................................................ 17 Manual Door Locks ..........................................27 If Equipped .......................................................36
Key Fob .............................................................17 Power Door Locks ...........................................28 Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats)....................37
SENTRY KEY ........................................................... 21 Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry ...........28 Power Adjustment (Front Seats) —
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................. 22 Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit......................31 If Equipped ......................................................42
Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition .........................22 Automatic Door Locks — Power Adjustment (Rear Seats) —
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .......................... 23 If Equipped........................................................31 If Equipped .......................................................44
How To Use Remote Start................................23 Child-Protection Door Lock System — Power Seatback Massage — If Equipped .......45
To Exit Remote Start Mode .............................24 Rear Doors .......................................................31 Heated Seats — If Equipped ...........................46
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation — STEERING WHEEL ..................................................32 Ventilated Seats — If Equipped .......................46
If Equipped........................................................25 Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Head Restraints .............................................47
Remote Start Comfort Systems — Column — If Equipped......................................32 MIRRORS ............................................................... 50
If Equipped........................................................25 Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column — Inside Rearview Mirror.....................................50
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer If Equipped........................................................32 Illuminated Vanity Mirrors ..............................51
Activation — If Equipped ..................................25 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ............33 Outside Mirrors ................................................52
Remote Start Abort Message ..........................25 UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION Outside Automatic Dimming Mirrors —
QUICK TIPS — IF EQUIPPED ..................................33 If Equipped .......................................................52
Introducing Voice Recognition.........................33 Power Mirrors ...................................................52
Basic Voice Commands ...................................33 Automatic Power Folding
Get Started .......................................................34 Mirrors — If Equipped.......................................53
Additional Information .....................................34 Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .........................53
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped .....53
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER Headlights On Automatically With Wipers ......60 INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT............... 75
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED ............................. 54 Headlight Illumination On Approach ...............61 Storage .............................................................75
Before You Begin Programming Headlight Delay ................................................61 Sun Screens — If Equipped .............................77
HomeLink®.......................................................54 Lights-On Reminder .........................................61 USB/AUX Control..............................................77
Erasing All The HomeLink® Channels ............54 Fog Lights — If Equipped .................................62 Electrical Power Outlets...................................79
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling Turn Signals......................................................62 Power Inverter — If Equipped ..........................81
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device ...................54 Lane Change Assist — If Equipped..................62 Wireless Charging Pad — If Equipped ............81
Programming HomeLink® To A Garage Automatic Headlight Leveling — WINDOWS ............................................................. 82
Door Opener .....................................................55 If Equipped........................................................62 Power Window Controls...................................82
Programming HomeLink® To A Battery Saver ....................................................62 Wind Buffeting .................................................83
Miscellaneous Device ......................................56 INTERIOR LIGHTS ..................................................63 POWER SUNROOF ................................................ 84
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Courtesy Lights.................................................63 Single Pane Power Sunroof — If Equipped ....84
Button ...............................................................56 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ..............64 Dual Pane Power Sunroof — If Equipped .......85
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming .........56 Windshield Wiper Operation............................65 HOOD....................................................................... 87
Security .............................................................57 Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped ...............66 Opening The Hood ...........................................87
Troubleshooting Tips........................................57 Rear Wiper And Washer ..................................66 Closing The Hood .............................................87
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................. 58 Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped ........67 LIFTGATE................................................................. 88
Headlight Switch ..............................................58 CLIMATE CONTROLS..............................................67 To Unlock/Open The Liftgate ..........................88
Multifunction Lever ..........................................59 Automatic Climate Control Descriptions To Lock/Close The Liftgate..............................88
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) — And Functions...................................................67 Adjustable Power Liftgate Height....................89
If Equipped .......................................................59 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ............73 Hands-Free Liftgate — If Equipped .................90
High/Low Beam Switch....................................59 Climate Voice Recognition...............................74 Cargo Area Features ........................................91
Automatic High Beams — If Equipped.............59 Operating Tips .................................................74 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ............. 94
Flash-To-Pass....................................................60
Automatic Headlights ......................................60
Parking Lights And Panel Lights......................60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II...... 120 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION .............................129
INSTRUMENT PANEL Onboard Diagnostic System Ignition Park Interlock................................... 130
(OBD II) Cybersecurity ................................... 120 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER......................................... 95 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE (BTSI) System ............................................... 130
Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....................96 PROGRAMS.......................................................... 121 8-Speed Automatic Transmission ............... 130
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER......................................... 97 SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED............................134
Instrument Cluster Descriptions .....................98 STARTING AND OPERATING FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION......................134
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY ........................ 99 Quadra-Trac I Operating Instructions/
Location And Controls......................................99 STARTING THE ENGINE ...................................... 122
Automatic Transmission ............................... 122 Precautions — If Equipped............................ 134
Engine Oil Life Reset .................................... 101 Quadra-Trac II Operating Instructions/
Display And Messages .................................. 103 Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Ignition................... 122
Normal Starting ............................................. 122 Precautions — If Equipped............................ 134
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items ..... 104 Shift Positions ............................................... 135
Head Up Display (HUD) — AutoPark ........................................................ 123
If Engine Fails To Start.................................. 124 Shifting Procedures....................................... 135
If Equipped ................................................... 107 Quadra-Trac II System — If Equipped........... 136
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Cold Weather Operation
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ............................ 125 Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect —
Message — Electrical Load Reduction If Equipped ................................................... 136
Actions — If Equipped ................................. 108 After Starting ................................................. 125
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ......... 125 SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED........................137
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ................110 Selec-Terrain Mode Selection ...................... 137
Red Warning Lights ....................................... 110 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS ........ 125
Instrument Cluster Display Messages......... 138
Yellow Warning Lights ................................... 113 PARKING BRAKE................................................. 126
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED ............................138
Yellow Indicator Lights .................................. 117 Electric Park Brake (EPB) ............................. 126
Description .................................................... 138
Green Indicator Lights................................... 118 Auto Park Brake ............................................ 127
Air Suspension Modes .................................. 140
White Indicator Lights ................................... 119 SafeHold ........................................................ 128
Instrument Cluster Display Messages......... 141
Blue Indicator Lights ..................................... 120 Hold ‘N Go — If Equipped ............................. 128
Operation....................................................... 141
Gray Indicator Lights ..................................... 120 Brake Maintenance Mode ............................ 128
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY — ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM — ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................142 IF EQUIPPED ........................................................ 155 IF EQUIPPED ........................................................173
POWER STEERING...............................................142 Operation ....................................................... 155 Active Lane Management Operation ........... 173
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .............143 Turning Active Driving Assist On Or Off........ 157 Turning Active Lane Management On
Autostop Mode .............................................. 143 Indications On The Display ........................... 159 Or Off.............................................................. 174
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not System Status ............................................... 160 Active Lane Management Warning
Autostop......................................................... 143 System Operation/Limitations ..................... 160 Message ........................................................ 174
To Start The Engine While In Autostop PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST Changing Active Lane Management
Mode .............................................................. 144 SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ................................... 161 Status............................................................. 176
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start ParkSense Sensors....................................... 162 PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ..............176
System ........................................................... 144 ParkSense Display ........................................ 162 Zoom View ..................................................... 177
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start ParkSense Warning Display ......................... 165 Viewing At Speed........................................... 178
System ........................................................... 144 Enabling And Disabling ParkSense.............. 165 TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..................178
System Malfunction ...................................... 144 Service The ParkSense Park Assist FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...................179
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS .............................144 System ........................................................... 165 NIGHT VISION CAMERA SYSTEM —
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ...................... 145 Cleaning The ParkSense System ................. 166 IF EQUIPPED ........................................................180
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM — ParkSense System Usage Precautions........ 166 Detection Range ........................................... 181
IF EQUIPPED.........................................................153 Side Distance Warning System .................... 167 Service The Night Vision System.................. 182
Activation/Deactivation ................................ 154 PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST Night Vision System Limitations................... 182
Traffic Sign Assist Modes.............................. 154 SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED..................................... 169 SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM —
Indications On The Display ........................... 154 Enabling And Disabling The ParkSense IF EQUIPPED.........................................................183
Active Park Assist System............................. 169 Zoom View ..................................................... 185
Parallel/Perpendicular Parking Space REFUELING THE VEHICLE ..................................185
Assistance Operation .................................... 170
Exiting The Parking Space ............................ 172
VEHICLE LOADING ............................................186 Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I 3RD PARTY APPS................................................234

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) .......... 186 (Single-Speed Transfer Case without REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH AMAZON
Payload .......................................................... 186 4WD LOW Range) Four-Wheel Drive FIRETV BUILT-IN — IF EQUIPPED ......................235
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)................ 186 Models ........................................................... 197 Overview ........................................................ 235
Tire Size.......................................................... 187 Recreational Towing — Quadra–Trac II Getting Started .............................................. 236
Rim Size ......................................................... 187 with 4WD LOW Range ................................... 197 Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment with
Inflation Pressure .......................................... 187 DRIVING TIPS ...................................................... 200 Amazon FireTV Built-in from the Radio........ 236
Curb Weight ................................................... 187 On-Road Driving Tips..................................... 200 Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment with
Loading .......................................................... 187 Off-Road Driving Tips .................................... 200 Amazon FireTV Built-in from the Rear
TRAILER TOWING ..............................................187 Screens.......................................................... 236
Common Towing Definitions......................... 187 MULTIMEDIA Accessing Rear Seat Entertainment with
Trailer Hitch Classification............................ 190 UCONNECT SYSTEMS ......................................... 203 Amazon FireTV Built-in from the Passenger
Trailer Towing Weights CYBERSECURITY ................................................. 203 Screen — If Equipped.................................... 236
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) .............. 190 UCONNECT SETTINGS......................................... 204 First Time Starting Up
Trailer Hitch Receiver Cover Removal — (Using the Rear Screens).............................. 237
Customer Programmable Features ............. 204
If Equipped..................................................... 192 Rear Screen Fly-out Menu ............................ 237
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ............. 229
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................... 192 Parental Controls
Radio Operation ............................................ 229
Towing Requirements .................................. 193 (Using the Rear Screens).............................. 238
Media Mode................................................... 229
Towing Tips ................................................... 195 Pairing The Remote
PASSENGER SCREEN — IF EQUIPPED.............. 229
RECREATIONAL TOWING (Using the Rear Screens).............................. 238
Passenger Screen Permissions.................... 229
(BEHIND MOTORHOME) .....................................196 Media Sources Input (Using the Radio
Home Screen................................................. 230
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another and Rear Screens) ........................................ 238
Audio And Video ............................................ 231
Vehicle............................................................ 196 Rear Seat Entertainment Remote Control .. 239
Rear Seat Entertainment
Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Rear Seat Entertainment with Amazon
With Amazon FireTV Built-In —
Models ........................................................... 197 FireTV Built-in Streaming (Using the
If Equipped..................................................... 233
Radio and Rear Screens).............................. 240
HDMI Projecting ............................................ 233
Device Manager ............................................ 233
Navigation...................................................... 234
Camera .......................................................... 234
Rear Screen Entertainment with SAFETY IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

Amazon FireTV Built-in Apps/Games
SAFETY FEATURES.............................................. 249 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS .........................309
(Using the Rear Screens) .............................. 241
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 249 ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM— IF EQUIPPED .......309
Are We There Yet? ......................................... 241
Drowsy Driver Detection (DDD) — JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING .........................313
Rear Seat Entertainment with Amazon
If Equipped..................................................... 250 Preparations For Jacking .............................. 313
FireTV Built-in 3rd Party Apps —
Rear Seat Reminder Alert (RSRA) ................ 251 Jack Location................................................. 314
If Equipped..................................................... 241
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...... 251 Spare Tire Stowage....................................... 315
Using The Video USB Port............................. 242
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS.......................... 257 Spare Tire Removal....................................... 316
Play Video Games.......................................... 242
Headphones Operation................................. 242 Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) ........................ 257 Jacking Instructions ..................................... 318
Rear Climate Controls ................................... 243 Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With JUMP STARTING ..................................................322
Legal Notice ................................................... 245 Mitigation....................................................... 261 Preparations For Jump Start ........................ 322
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED ...................245 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Jump Starting Procedure .............................. 323
(TPMS)............................................................ 264 REFUELING IN EMERGENCY ..............................325
Off-Road Pages Status Bar .......................... 245
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .................... 269 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ...........................326
Vehicle Dynamics ......................................... 246
Accessory Gauges ........................................ 246 Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....... 269 MANUAL PARK RELEASE ..................................326
Pitch & Roll ................................................... 246 Important Safety Precautions ...................... 269 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ..............................328
Selec-Terrain — If Equipped ......................... 247 Seat Belt Systems ........................................ 270 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE..........................329
Suspension — If Equipped ............................ 247 Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) ...... 277 Rear Wheel Drive Models ............................. 330
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE Child Restraints ............................................ 290 All Wheel Drive Models ................................. 330
SAFETY TIPS ........................................................ 305 Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped.......... 331
PHONES ................................................................248
Transporting Passengers.............................. 305 Tow Eye Usage — If Equipped ...................... 331
Regulatory And Safety Information .............. 248
Transporting Pets ....................................... 306 ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
Connected Vehicles ...................................... 306 (EARS) ...................................................................333
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR).........................333
The Vehicle ................................................... 306
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle............................ 307
Exhaust Gas................................................... 308
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ......................... 308
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TIRES..................................................................... 378 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

Tire Safety Information ................................. 378
SCHEDULED SERVICING ....................................334 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) ........400
Tires — General Information ......................... 385
Maintenance Plan ......................................... 335 BRAKE SYSTEM ...................................................400
Tire Types....................................................... 389
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ....................................339 WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
Spare Tires — If Equipped............................. 390
2.0L Engine ................................................... 339 SPECIFICATIONS..................................................400
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care......................... 391
3.6L Engine.................................................... 340 Torque Specifications ................................... 400
Snow Traction Devices ................................. 393
5.7L Engine.................................................... 341 FUEL REQUIREMENTS.........................................401
Tire Rotation Recommendations ................ 395
Checking Oil Level .................................... 342 2.0L Engine ................................................... 401
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
Adding Washer Fluid .................................... 342 3.6L Engine .................................................. 401
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES ................... 395
Maintenance-Free Battery ........................... 343 5.7L Engine ................................................... 401
Treadwear...................................................... 395
Pressure Washing ......................................... 343 Reformulated Gasoline ................................ 402
Traction Grades............................................. 396
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE .....................................343 Materials Added To Fuel .............................. 402
Temperature Grades..................................... 396
Engine Oil....................................................... 344 Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ........................ 402
STORING THE VEHICLE ...................................... 396
Engine Oil Filter ............................................. 344 Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
BODYWORK ......................................................... 396
Engine Air Cleaner Filter ............................... 345 Vehicles ......................................................... 402
Air Conditioner Maintenance........................ 345 Protection From Atmospheric Agents ......... 396
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ...... 403
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection ................... 348 Body And Underbody Maintenance.............. 397
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Body Lubrication............................................ 348 Preserving The Bodywork ............................. 397
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline ..................... 403
Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 349 INTERIORS .......................................................... 398
Fuel System Cautions ................................... 403
Exhaust System ............................................ 351 Seats And Fabric Parts ................................. 398
FLUID CAPACITIES ..............................................404
Cooling System .............................................. 353 Plastic And Coated Parts .............................. 398
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...................405
Brake System ............................................... 356 Leather Surfaces........................................... 399
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................406
Automatic Transmission ............................... 357 Glass Surfaces ............................................. 399
Front/Rear Axle Fluid ................................... 358
Transfer Case ............................................... 358
Fuses.............................................................. 359
Bulb Replacement ........................................ 378
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................ 407 WARRANTY INFORMATION................................409

FCA US LLC Customer Center....................... 407 MOPAR® PARTS .................................................409
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center............... 407 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ..........................409
FOR YOUR VEHICLE ............................................407
Mexico............................................................ 408 In The 50 United States And
Prepare For The Appointment ...................... 407
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands................ 408 Washington, D.C............................................ 409
Prepare A List ................................................ 407
Customer Assistance For The Hearing In Canada ...................................................... 409
Be Reasonable With Requests..................... 407
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .................... 408 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ..........................410
Service Contract ........................................... 408 GENERAL INFORMATION....................................410
10
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer,
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality. The all-new
Jeep® Grand Cherokee/Grand Cherokee L continues to build on its proud legacy as the most celebrated SUV ever, while raising the bar in luxury and
performance. With legendary 4x4 capability, this vehicle breaks new ground in exceptional performance, comfort, and functionality. We have improved on-road
refinement and premium styling and craftsmanship inside and out. With an unsurpassed blend of refined sophistication, dynamic performance, cutting edge
technologies, and levels of elegance, the new Jeep® Grand Cherokee/Grand Cherokee L carries an attractive presence and capability that is uncommon in its
class, unquestionably Jeep® brand, and unmistakably world class.
The all-new Jeep® Grand Cherokee/Grand Cherokee L is a specialized utility vehicle and can go places and perform tasks that are not intended for conventional
passenger vehicles. It handles and maneuvers differently from many passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road, so take time to become familiar with your
vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version of this vehicle was designed for on-road use only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use in other severe
conditions suited for a four-wheel drive vehicle. Be sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls, particularly those used for braking, steering, transmission, and
transfer case shifting. Always observe federal, state, provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle
correctly may result in loss of control or a collision Ú page 200.
Please take the time to read all of these publications carefully before driving your vehicle for the first time. Following the instructions, recommendations, tips,
and important warnings in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated in the
text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content introduced
throughout the Owner's Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in
this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims at a constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For
this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized
dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep® best, have factory-trained technicians, genuine Mopar® parts, and care about
your satisfaction.
11
SYMBOLS KEY ROLLOVER WARNING

These statements are against operating Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of
WARNING! procedures that could result in a collision, bodily vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of 1
injury and/or death. gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
These statements are against procedures that wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all vehicles
CAUTION! can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is
could result in damage to your vehicle.
out of control, it may roll over while some other vehicles may not.
A suggestion which will improve installation,
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions
NOTE: operation, and reliability. If not followed, may result
that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
in damage.
result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier carefully.
TIP:
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information on
a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information
pertaining to the topic.
Rollover Warning Label

If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major cause of
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings. severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the universal use
of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or more each
year and could reduce disabling injuries by two million annually. In a rollover
crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
12
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS Red Warning Lights

WARNING! Door Open Warning Light
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its Ú page 111
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in serious
injury or death. Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning Light
Ú page 111
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to Ú page 111
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the definition of
each symbol Ú page 110. Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
NOTE: Ú page 112
Warning and Indicator lights are different based upon equipment options and
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear. Hood Open Warning Light
Red Warning Lights Ú page 112
Air Bag Warning Light Liftgate Open Warning Light

Ú page 110 Ú page 112
Brake Warning Light Night Vision Animal Warning Light

Battery Charge Warning Light Night Vision Pedestrian Warning Light

13
Red Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights
Oil Pressure Warning Light Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light 1
Oil Temperature Warning Light Electric Park Brake Warning Light

Rear Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning Light
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning Light
Transmission Temperature Warning Light Service Active Lane Management Warning Light
Vehicle Security Warning Light Active Lane Management Warning Light

Active Driving Assist - Driver Inattentiveness Warning Light Low Fuel Warning Light
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light

Ú page 115
14
Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights
Night Vision Animal Warning Light Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
Night Vision Pedestrian Warning Light Active Driving Assist - Driver Inattentiveness Warning Light
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL) Active Driving Assist Fault Warning Light
Service 4WD Warning Light Air Suspension Fault Warning Light

Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning Light

Ú page 115 Yellow Indicator Lights
Sway Bar Indicator Light

Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light Ú page 117
Ú page 116
4WD Low Indicator Light

Service Stop/Start System Warning Light Ú page 118
Ú page 116
Air Suspension Active Indicator Light

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warning Light Ú page 117
Ú page 116
15
Yellow Indicator Lights Green Indicator Lights
Maximum Payload Exceeded Indicator Light Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target Light 1
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected

Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height Indicator Light
Indicator Light
Ú page 117
Ú page 118
Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator Light Auto HOLD Indicator Light

Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light Front Fog Indicator Light

Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light Active Lane Management Indicator Light
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator Light Night Vision Active Indicator Light
NEUTRAL Indicator Light Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light

16
Green Indicator Lights White Indicator Lights
Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator Light Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
Sport Mode Indicator Light Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light

Stop/Start Active Indicator Light Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light

Turn Signal Indicator Lights Active Driving Assist On Indicator Light

Active Driving Assist - Driver Attentive Indicator Light

Ú page 118 Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light

Ú page 120
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Indicator Light

Ú page 119 Gray Indicator Lights
Night Vision Suppressed Indicator Light

Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light
Ú page 120
Ú page 119
17
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS NOTE:
 The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if
KEY F OB the key fob is located next to a mobile phone, 2
laptop, or other electronic device. This may
Your vehicle is equipped with a key fob which result in poor performance.
supports Passive Entry, Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE), Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ (if equipped), Remote  If your vehicle is equipped with a Wireless
Start (if equipped), and remote power liftgate Charging Pad, the key fob may not be detected
(if equipped) operation. The key fob allows you to if it is placed within 6 inches (15 cm) of the pad
lock or unlock all doors and liftgate, as well as Ú page 81.
activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to  With the ignition in the ON position and the
approximately 66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not vehicle moving at 2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE
need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the commands are disabled.
system. The key fob also contains an emergency
key, which is stored in the rear of the key fob. Key Fob
NOTE: 1 — LED Indicator
In vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the key
2 — Unlock
fob will operate at distances up to 328 ft (100 m).
3 — Lock
4 — Remote Start
5 — Power Liftgate
6 — Panic
7 — Emergency Key
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
In case the ignition switch does not change NOTE: NOTE:

positions with the push of a button, the key fob  If the vehicle is unlocked with the key fob, and  The doors have to be open and then closed in
may have a low or fully depleted battery. A low key no door is opened within 60 seconds, the order for the vehicle to check for the presence of
fob battery can be verified by referring to the vehicle will relock and the Vehicle Security a key fob; the Key Left Vehicle feature will not
instrument cluster, which will display directions to system will arm (if equipped). activate until all of the doors are all closed.
follow.
 If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate is  These alerts will not be activated in situations
For more information on ignition positions, see open, the doors will lock. The doors will unlock where the vehicle’s engine is left running with
Ú page 22. again automatically if the key is left inside the the key fob inside.
NOTE: passenger compartment, otherwise the doors
Using The Key Fob To Open Vehicle
A low key fob battery condition may be indicated by will stay locked.
a message in the instrument cluster display, or by
Windows — If Equipped
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the first
the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key fob light push of the unlock button through Uconnect From outside of the vehicle, push and release the
no longer illuminates after a key fob button is Settings Ú page 204. unlock button on the key fob, and within five
pushed, then the key fob battery requires seconds push and hold the unlock button for up to
replacement Ú page 410. Key Left Vehicle Feature seven seconds. All vehicle door windows will open.
To Lock/Unlock The Doors And Liftgate If a valid key fob is no longer detected inside the NOTE:
vehicle while the vehicle’s ignition system is in the
Push and release the unlock button on the key fob  This feature is enabled through Uconnect
ON/RUN or START position, the message “Key Left
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five Settings Ú page 204.
Vehicle” will be shown in the instrument cluster
seconds to unlock all the doors and the liftgate. To display along with an interior chime. An exterior  Vehicle must be equipped with front and rear
lock all the doors and the liftgate, push the lock audible and visual alert will also be activated to auto up/down windows.
button once. warn the driver.
If enabled within the Uconnect system, the turn The vehicle’s horn will rapidly chirp three times
signals will flash and the illuminated entry system along with a single flash of the vehicle’s exterior
will be activated when the doors are unlocked. lights.
When the doors are locked, the turn signals will
flash and the horn will chirp.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob 2. Hold the key fob with the button side facing
down, and locate the small rectangular gap on
The replacement battery model is one CR2450
the left side between the housing and the back
battery.
cover of the key fob. Use a small flat-bladed
NOTE: tool to pry apart the two halves of the key fob.
 Customers are recommended to use a battery Make sure not to damage the seal during 2
obtained from Mopar®. Aftermarket coin removal.
battery specifications may not meet the original
OEM coin battery specifications.
 Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard- Emergency Key Removal
ouswaste/perchlorate for further information.
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
 Do not touch the battery terminals that are on 2 — Emergency Key
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
 Do not replace the coin battery if the LED on the
key fob above the top row buttons blinks when
a button is pressed. The coin battery should last
a minimum of three years with normal vehicle Pry Apart Key Fob Halves
usage.
1. Remove the emergency key (2) by pushing
the emergency key release button (1) on the
side of the key fob, and pulling the emergency
key out with the other hand.
Emergency Key Removed

3. Next, locate the gap on the right side of the key

fob, which is positioned farther to the edge
than the left side gap. Pry open the right side,
and remove the back cover.
4. Remove the battery by using your thumb to
slide the battery downward and back toward
the key ring.
Battery Removal Pocket Key Fob Battery Replacement

NOTE: 6. To assemble the key fob case, line up the top
When replacing the battery, ensure the (+) sign on edge of the back cover with the top of the fob,
the battery is facing upward. Avoid touching the and press the edges into the interlocking
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause hinges until all edges snap together with no
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean large visual gaps.
it with rubbing alcohol. 7. Reinsert the emergency key until it locks
Key Fob Battery Location 5. Replace the battery by using your thumb to into place.
push down and slide the battery under the
NOTE: small lip on the top edge of the opening. NOTE:
You can also insert a screwdriver or similar The key fob battery should only be replaced by
tool into the battery removal pocket to pry the qualified technicians. If the battery requires
battery out. replacement, see an authorized dealer.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button

WARNING! WARNING! ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
 The integrated key fob contains a coin cell  Always remove the key fobs from the vehicle prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,
battery. Do not ingest the battery; there is a and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle only key fobs that are programmed to the vehicle
chemical burn hazard. If the coin cell battery is unattended. can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The
swallowed, it can cause severe internal burns
 Always remember to place the Keyless
system cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from 2
in just two hours and can lead to death. another vehicle.
Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the OFF position.
 If you think a battery may have been swal- After placing the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
lowed or placed inside any part of the body, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on
seek immediate medical attention. authorized dealer. This procedure consists of after the bulb check, it indicates that there is a
 Keep new and used batteries away from chil- programming a blank key fob to the vehicle problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light
dren. If the battery compartment does not electronics. A blank key fob is one that has never begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates
close securely, stop using the product and been programmed. that someone attempted to start the engine with
keep it away from children. NOTE: an invalid key fob. In the event that a valid key fob
 When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer system is used to start the engine but there is an issue
Programming And Requesting Additional serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an with the vehicle electronics, the engine will start
authorized dealer. and shut off after two seconds.
Key Fobs
 Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut to If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
Programming the key fob may be performed by an
match the vehicle locks. vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than
authorized dealer.
10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the
NOTE:
 Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
SENTRY KEY electronics. Should this occur, have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible by an authorized
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents dealer.
another vehicle. unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed or
 Only key fobs that are programmed to the
activated. Operation is automatic, regardless of
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
NOTE:
CAUTION!
 If the ignition position does not change with a
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not push of the ignition button, and the instrument
compatible with some aftermarket remote cluster displays a message such as “Key Fob
starting systems. Use of these systems may Not Detected”, the key fob may have a low or
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of depleted battery. In this situation, a back up
security protection. method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side
All of the key fobs provided with your new vehicle opposite of the emergency key) against the
have been programmed to the vehicle electronics START/STOP ignition button and push to
Ú page 410. START/STOP Ignition Button operate the ignition switch.
1 — OFF  Replacement of the key fob battery is

IGNITION SWITCH 2 — ON/RUN
recommended.
KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION

The push button ignition can be placed in the
This feature allows the driver to operate the following modes:
ignition switch with the push of a button as long as
the key fob is in the passenger compartment. OFF
The START/STOP ignition button has several  The engine is stopped
operating modes that are labeled and will  Some electrical devices (e.g. power locks,
illuminate when in position. These modes are OFF, alarm, etc.) are still available
ON/RUN, and START. ON/RUN
 Driving position
Depleted Key Fob Battery Procedure
 All electrical devices are available
(e.g. climate controls, heated seats, etc.)
START
 The engine will start
(when foot is on the brake pedal)
NOTE: NOTE:
WARNING! Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob may
 The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
 When exiting the vehicle, always place the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ system if it is located next reduce this range Ú page 410.
ignition in the OFF position, remove the key to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
fob from the vehicle, and lock your vehicle. device, or in the cupholders near aluminum WARNING!
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with cans; these devices may block the key fob’s  Do not start or run an engine in a closed 2
access to an unlocked vehicle. wireless signal and prevent the Keyless Enter ‘n garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
Go™ system from starting the vehicle. Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
 Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
 For more information on the engine starting
is dangerous for a number of reasons. A child can cause serious injury or death when
procedure, see Ú page 122.
or others could be seriously or fatally injured. inhaled.
Children should be warned not to touch the  When opening the driver's door and the ignition
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear is in the ON/RUN position (engine not running),  Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
selector. a chime will sound to remind you to place the of the Remote Start system, windows, door
ignition in the OFF position. In addition to the locks or other controls could cause serious
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, chime, the message “Ignition ON” will display in injury or death.
or in a location accessible to children, and do the cluster.
not leave Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the
ON/RUN position. A child could operate power
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED HOW TO USE R EMOTE S TART
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
Push and release the Remote Start button on the
This system uses the key fob to start the
 Do not leave children or animals inside parked key fob twice within five seconds. The vehicle
engine conveniently from outside the
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup doors will lock, the parking lights will flash, and the
vehicle while still maintaining security.
may cause serious injury or death. horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the
The system has a range of approximately
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in the
328 ft (100 m).
Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle. Pushing
CAUTION! Remote Start is used to defrost windows in cold the Remote Start button a third time shuts the
weather, and to reach a comfortable climate in all engine off.
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for thieves. ambient conditions before the driver enters the
Always remove key fob from the vehicle and lock vehicle.
all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
NOTE: All of the following conditions must be met before

the engine will remote start: WARNING!
 If the Remote Start button on the key fob is
pushed too rapidly during activation, the vehicle  Gear selector in PARK  Do not start or run an engine in a closed
may not start. garage or confined area. Exhaust gas contains
 Doors closed
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and
 With Remote Start, the engine will only run for  Hood closed colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and
15 minutes.
 Liftgate closed can cause serious injury or death when
 Remote Start can only be used twice. inhaled.
 Hazard switch off
 If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low,
 Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)  Keep key fobs away from children. Operation
the vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 of the Remote Start system, windows, door
seconds.  Battery at an acceptable charge level
locks or other controls could cause serious
 The parking lights will turn on and remain on  System not disabled from previous Remote injury or death.
during Remote Start mode. Start event
 Headlight animation (if equipped) will occur  Vehicle Security Light is flashing TO EXIT R EMOTE START M ODE
when Remote Start is activated, if “Headlight  Ignition in OFF position
Illumination On Approach” is enabled within To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote Start
Uconnect Settings.  PANIC button is not pushed system, either push and release the unlock button
 Fuel level meets minimum requirement on the key fob to unlock the doors, or unlock the
 For security, power window and power sunroof
 Vehicle Security system is not signaling an intru-
vehicle using Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry
operation (if equipped) are disabled when the
sion via the door handles, and disarm the Vehicle
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode.
Security system (if equipped). Then, prior to the
 The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN posi-  Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated end of the 15 minute cycle, push and release the
tion before the Remote Start sequence can be START/STOP ignition button.
repeated for a third cycle.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off if REMOTE START C OMFORT SYSTEMS — This includes the OFF button on the climate
the Remote Start button on the key fob is pushed controls, which will turn the system off.
again, or if the engine is allowed to run for the I F E QUIPPED
entire 15 minute cycle. Once the ignition is placed When Remote Start is activated, the front and rear
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD W IPER
in the ON/RUN position, the climate controls will defrost will automatically turn on in cold weather. DE–ICER A CTIVATION — I F EQUIPPED
resume the previously set operations The heated steering wheel and driver heated seat
When Remote Start is active and the outside 2
(temperature, blower control, etc.). feature will turn on if selected in the comfort menu
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C),
NOTE: screen within Uconnect Settings Ú page 204. In
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting
warm weather, the driver vented seat feature will
 To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system Remote Start will resume its previous operation. If
automatically turn on when Remote Start is
will disable for two seconds after receiving a the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the timer
activated, if programmed in the comfort menu
valid Remote Start request. and operation will continue Ú page 204.
screen. The vehicle will adjust the climate control
 For vehicles equipped with the Keyless settings depending on the outside ambient REMOTE START ABORT M ESSAGE
Enter ‘n Go™ — Passive Entry feature, the temperature.
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start The following messages will display in the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
Button” will display in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP ignition The climate controls will automatically adjust to remote start or exits Remote Start prematurely:
button. the optimal temperature and mode settings  Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
depending on the outside ambient temperature.
REMOTE START F RONT DEFROST This will occur until the ignition is placed in the ON/  Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
ACTIVATION — IF E QUIPPED RUN position where the climate controls will  Remote Start Cancelled — Liftgate Open
resume their previous settings.  Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
When Remote Start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below, the For more information on ATC and climate control  Remote Start Cancelled — Too Cold
system will automatically activate front defrost for settings, see Ú page 67.
 Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
15 minutes or less. The time is dependent on the NOTE:
 Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault
ambient temperature. Once the timer expires, the These features will stay on through the duration of
system will automatically adjust the settings Remote Start until the ignition is placed in the  Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset
depending on ambient conditions. See “Remote ON/RUN position. The climate control setting will The instrument cluster display message stays
Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped” in the next change, and exit automatic operation, if manually active until the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
section for detailed operation. adjusted by the driver while the vehicle is in position.
Remote Start mode.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED  Push the lock button on the exterior Passive
Entry door handle with a valid key fob avail-
NOTE:
 The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or
The Vehicle Security system monitors the vehicle able in the same exterior zone Ú page 28. disarm the Vehicle Security system. Use of the
doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ door key cylinder when the alarm is armed will
 Push the lock button on the key fob.
Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the sound the alarm when the door is opened.
Vehicle Security system is armed, interior switches 3. If any doors are open, close them.
for door locks and liftgate release handle are  The Vehicle Security system remains armed
disabled. If something triggers the alarm, the When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the when the power liftgate is opened using the lift-
Vehicle Security system will provide the following Vehicle Security Light (located in the lower right gate button on the key fob. If someone enters
audible and visible signals: portion of the instrument cluster display) will begin the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
to flash every two seconds until it is disarmed. door from the inside, the alarm will sound.
 The horn will pulse
NOTE:  If Passive Entry (if equipped) is used to unlock
 The turn signals will flash If the system is armed by pushing the lock button the liftgate, the Vehicle Security system is
 The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument on the interior door panel, the Vehicle Security disarmed and the rest of the vehicle doors will
cluster will flash Light will flash rapidly for about 15 seconds once remain locked unless all doors are set to unlock
the door is closed, then slow down to every two on first press within Uconnect Settings.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM seconds.  When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security TO DISARM T HE S YSTEM interior power door lock switches will not unlock
system: the doors.
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed in The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed using
The Vehicle Security system is designed to protect
the OFF position. any of the following methods:
your vehicle. However, you can create conditions
 Make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition  Push the unlock button on the key fob. where the system will give you a false alarm. If one
system is OFF.  Grab the Passive Entry door handle to unlock of the previously described arming sequences has
the door Ú page 28. occurred, the Vehicle Security system will arm
2. Perform one of the following methods to lock
regardless of whether you are in the vehicle or not.
the vehicle:  Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to
If you remain in the vehicle and open a door, the
 Push lock on the interior power door lock disarm the system.
alarm will sound. If this occurs, disarm the Vehicle
switch with the driver and/or passenger Security system.
door open.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the

battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
DOORS
Security system will remain armed when the MANUAL D OOR L OCKS
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will flash,
and the horn will sound. If this occurs, disarm the The front doors can be manually unlocked with a
Vehicle Security system. single pull of the inside door handle. The driver’s 2
door can also be manually unlocked by inserting
REARMING O F T HE SYSTEM the emergency key into the lock cylinder on the
If something triggers the alarm and no action is outside door handle.
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system will NOTE:
turn the horn off after a 29 second cycle (with five When using the emergency key to unlock the Emergency Lock Lever (Driver’s Door Shown)
seconds between cycles and up to eight cycles if outside door handle, make sure the handle of the
the trigger remains active) and then rearm itself. emergency key is pointing toward the rear of the NOTE:
vehicle. This will ensure the handle can be pulled  The emergency lock lever is only accessible
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE all the way out while the key is in the lock cylinder. when the door is open.
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you lock The rear doors can be manually unlocked with a  Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
the doors using the emergency lock lever double pull of the inside door handle. Vehicle Security system.
Ú page 27. Each door can be manually locked by inserting the
WARNING!
TAMPER A LERT emergency key into the emergency lock lever and
sliding the lever upward. The emergency lock lever  For personal security and safety in the event
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security is located on the door latch face of each door. of a collision, lock the vehicle doors before you
system in your absence, the horn will sound three drive as well as when you park and leave the
times and the exterior lights will blink three times vehicle.
when you disarm the Vehicle Security system.
 When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
key fob from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
(Continued)
Rear Passenger Power Door Locks

WARNING!
Power door lock buttons are located on each rear
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with door trim panel. Push the lock button to lock all
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil- doors and liftgate, and the unlock button to unlock
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is all doors and liftgate.
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — PASSIVE
Children should be warned not to touch the E NTRY
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear
selector. The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, Power Door Lock Switches
and a feature of Keyless Enter ‘n Go™. This feature
or in a location accessible to children, and do The driver’s door will unlock automatically if the allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s)
not leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in keys are detected inside the vehicle when the door without having to push the key fob lock or unlock
the ON/RUN position. A child could operate lock button on the front door panel is used to lock buttons.
power windows, other controls, or move the the door, then the door is closed. The horn will also If equipped, the rear doors will also have Passive
vehicle. chirp to alert the driver. This will occur for two Entry capabilities.
attempts. On the third attempt, the doors will lock
NOTE:
POWER D OOR L OCKS even if the key is inside.
 Passive Entry may be programmed on/off
The power door lock buttons are located on each
NOTE:
through Uconnect Settings Ú page 204.
If the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
front door panel. Push the lock button to lock all  The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
laptop, or other electronic device, the wireless
doors and liftgate, or the unlock button to unlock Passive Entry system if it is located next to a
signal may get blocked, and the driver’s door may
all doors and liftgate. mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device;
not unlock automatically.
When the doors are locked, an indicator light in the these devices may block the key fob's wireless
If the door lock button is pushed while the ignition
lock button will illuminate. signal and prevent the Passive Entry handle
is in the ON/RUN position and the driver's door is
open, the doors will not lock. from locking/unlocking the vehicle.
 Passive Entry unlock initiates illuminated Grabbing the front passenger door handle (or a Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
approach (low beams, license plate lamp, rear handle when equipped with four-door Passive (FOBIK-Safe)
parking lights, door handle pocket lights [if Entry) will unlock all doors and the liftgate To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
equipped]) for whichever time duration is set automatically. locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your vehicle,
between 0, 30, 60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry the Passive Entry system is equipped with an
unlock also initiates two flashes of the turn automatic door unlock feature which will function if 2
signal lamps. the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
 If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/ There are five situations that trigger a FOBIK-Safe
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle, the search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
unlock and lock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.  A lock request is made by a valid Passive Entry
key fob while a door is open.
 The doors may lock and unlock when water is
sprayed on the Passive Entry door handles, if  A lock request is made by the Passive Entry door
the key fob is located outside of the vehicle handle while a door is open.
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the handle.  A lock request is made by the door panel switch
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
 Passive Entry lock initiates one horn chirp and
while the door is open.
one flash of turn signal lights. These settings NOTE:  When the Vehicle Security system is in pre-arm
can be programmed on/off within Uconnect  Either the driver door only or all doors will unlock or armed status and the liftgate transitions from
Settings Ú page 204. when you grab hold of the front driver’s door opened to closed.
 If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and handle, depending on the selected setting in the  When the liftgate transitions from open to
no door is opened within 60 seconds, the Uconnect system Ú page 204. closed and Remote Start is active.
vehicle will relock and will rearm the Vehicle  All doors will unlock when the front passenger
Security system (if equipped). (or a rear door when equipped with four-door
To Unlock From The Driver Or Passenger Side Passive Entry) door handle is grabbed regard-
less of the driver’s door unlock preference
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft setting.
(1.5 m) of the door handle, grab the handle to
unlock the vehicle. Grabbing the driver’s door
handle will unlock the driver door automatically.
When any of these situations occur, after all open NOTE:

doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will be  After touching the door handle lock icon, you
executed. If it detects a Passive Entry key fob must wait two seconds before you can lock or
inside the vehicle, the vehicle will unlock and alert unlock the doors using any Passive Entry door
the customer. handle. This is done to allow you to check if the
NOTE: vehicle is locked by pulling the door handle,
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a valid without the vehicle unlocking.
Passive Entry key fob is detected inside the  If Passive Entry is disabled using the Uconnect
vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors when Settings, the key protection described in
any of the following conditions are true: "Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
 The doors are manually locked using the emer- Touch The Door Handle Lock Icon To Lock (FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/functional.
gency lock lever. NOTE:  The Passive Entry system will not operate if the
 Three attempts are made to lock the doors Do NOT grab the door handle when touching the key fob battery is depleted.
using the door panel switch and then the doors lock icon. This could unlock the door(s). To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
are closed.
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built
 There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the into the electronic liftgate release button. With a
vehicle within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
door handle. liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release button
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate for a power open on vehicles equipped with Power
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs Liftgate. Pull the electronic liftgate handle and lift
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of a Passive Entry door handle, for Manual Liftgate vehicles.
touch the lock icon on the door handle to lock all
four doors and liftgate.
Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

AUTOMATIC UNLOCK D OORS ON E XIT CHILD-P ROTECTION DOOR LOCK

The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles SYSTEM — R EAR DOORS
with power door locks after the following sequence To provide a safer environment for small children
of actions: riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock 2
enabled within Uconnect Settings system.
Ú page 204. To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat
2. All doors are closed. blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate
3. The gear selector was not in PARK, then is the dial to the lock or unlock position. When the
Electronic Liftgate Handle placed in PARK. system on a door is engaged, that door can only be
opened by using the outside door handle even if
1 — Passive Entry Lock Button 4. Any door is opened. the inside door lock is in the unlocked position.
2 — Electronic Liftgate Release Button
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS —
To Lock The Liftgate I F E QUIPPED
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft The auto door lock feature default condition is
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry lock enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
button located on the outside liftgate door handle. automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
NOTE: 15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature is
The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock all enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per
doors and the liftgate Ú page 410. written request of the customer. Please see an
authorized dealer for service.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE: STEERING WHEEL WARNING!

 When the Child-Protection Door Lock system is
engaged, the door can be opened only by using MANUAL T ILT/TELESCOPING STEERING Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
the outside door handle even though the inside Adjusting the steering column while driving or
door lock is in the unlocked position.
C OLUMN — IF E QUIPPED driving with the steering column unlocked, could
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
 After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen Failure to follow this warning may result in
Lock system, always test the door from the
or shorten the steering column. The tilt/ serious injury or death.
inside to make certain it is in the unlocked
position. telescoping lever is located below the steering
wheel at the end of the steering column.
 After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock POWER T ILT/T ELESCOPING STEERING
system, always test the door from the inside to COLUMN — IF E QUIPPED
make certain it is in the locked position.
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
WARNING! upward or downward. It also allows you to lengthen
or shorten the steering column. The power tilt/
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision. telescoping steering column lever is located below
Remember that the rear doors can only be the multifunction lever on the steering column.
opened from the outside with the
Child-Protection locks engaged (locked).
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children. Manual Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Handle
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors, To unlock the steering column, push the lever
check for effective engagement by trying to open a downward (toward the floor). To tilt the steering
door with the internal handle. Once the column, move the steering wheel upward or
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged, it is downward as desired. To lengthen or shorten the
impossible to open the doors from inside the steering column, pull the steering wheel outward
vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be sure to or push it inward as desired. To lock the steering
check that there is no one left inside. column in position, push the lever upward until Power Tilt/Telescoping Steering Control Location
fully engaged.
Use the four-way control to adjust the steering

column.
The heated steering wheel button is located on the
center of the instrument panel below the radio
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
NOTE: screen, and within the climate or controls screen of QUICK TIPS — IF EQUIPPED
For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory the touchscreen.
Settings, you can use your key fob or the memory  Push the heated steering wheel button once to I NTRODUCING V OICE RECOGNITION
switch on the driver's door trim panel to return the turn the heating element on. Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these 2
tilt/telescopic steering column to saved positions  Push the heated steering wheel button a second helpful quick tips. It provides the key Voice
Ú page 34. time to turn the heating element off. Commands and tips you need to know to control
NOTE: your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR) system.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
The engine must be running for the heated BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
steering wheel to operate.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or The basic Voice Commands below can be given at
For information on use with the Remote Start
driving with the steering column unlocked, could any point while using your Uconnect system.
system, see Ú page 25.
cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Failure to follow this warning may result in Push the VR button or say the vehicle’s Wake
WARNING! Up word, “Hey Uconnect” or “Hey Jeep®”. The
serious injury or death.
 Persons who are unable to feel pain to the factory default Wake Up word is set to “Hey
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness, Uconnect” and can be reprogrammed through the
HEATED S TEERING WHEEL — diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, Uconnect Settings. After the beep, say:
I F EQUIPPED alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical  “Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
conditions must exercise care when using the  “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
The steering wheel contains a heating steering wheel heater. It may cause burns
element that helps warm your hands in Commands.
even at low temperatures, especially if used
cold weather. The heated steering wheel for long periods.  “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts again.
has only one temperature setting. Once Notice the visual cues that inform you of your Voice
the heated steering wheel has been turned on, it  Do not place anything on the steering wheel
Recognition system’s status.
will stay on until the operator turns it off. The that insulates against heat, such as a blanket
heated steering wheel may not turn on when it is or steering wheel covers of any type and mate-
already warm. rial. This may cause the steering wheel heater
to overheat.
GET S TARTED ADDITIONAL I NFORMATION

The VR button is used to activate/deactivate © 2021 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar and
your Voice Recognition system. You can also use Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar
the system’s “Wake Up” word to activate voice Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC.
recognition. The “Wake Up” word can be set SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 204. trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Ú page 410.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition: For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a week)
 Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
passenger conversations are examples of noise
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
that may impact recognition.
 Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
1 — For Vehicles Equipped With Navigation: Push
The Voice Recognition Button To Begin Radio, Me-
DRIVER AND PASSENGER MEMORY
 Each time you give a Voice Command, first push dia, Navigation, Climate, Start Or Answer A Phone SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
the VR button or say the “Wake Up” word, Call, And Send Or Receive A Text
This feature allows the driver, and if equipped, also
wait until after the beep, then say your Voice 1 — For Vehicles Not Equipped With Navigation: the front passenger to save up to two different
Command. Push The Phone Button To Answer An Incoming memory profiles for easy recall through a memory
Phone Call switch. Each memory profile saves desired position
 You can interrupt the help message or system
prompts by pushing the VR button and saying a 2 — Push To Access Tile Mode On The Instrument settings for the following features:
Voice Command from the current category. Cluster Driver’s Side
3 — Push The Hang Up Button To End A Call
 You can also interrupt the help message or  Seat position
Currently In Progress
system prompts by speaking. This feature is  Easy Entry/Exit seat (if equipped)
called “barge-in” and can be set through the
Uconnect Settings Ú page 204.  Side mirrors
 Power tilt and telescopic steering column
(if equipped)
 A set of desired radio station presets
Passenger’s Side (If Equipped) PROGRAMMING T HE M EMORY FEATURE LINKING A ND U NLINKING T HE KEY FOB
 Seat Position
To create a new memory profile, perform the T O MEMORY
The memory settings switches are located on the following: Your key fobs can be programmed to recall one of
front door panels, next to the door handle, and
NOTE: two saved driver’s side memory profiles.
consists of three buttons:
Saving a new memory profile will erase the NOTE: 2
 The set (S) button, which is used to activate the selected profile from memory.
memory save function. Before programming your key fobs you must select
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN the “Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob” feature
 The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to recall position (do not start the engine). through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 204.
either of two saved memory profiles. 2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired To program your key fobs, perform the following:
preferences (i.e., seat, side mirror, power 1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
tilt/telescopic steering column [if equipped], position.
and radio station presets).
2. Select a desired driver’s side memory profile,
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the 1 or 2.
memory switch.
3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and
4. Within five seconds, push and release either of release the set (S) button on the memory
the memory buttons (1) or (2). The instrument switch.
cluster display will indicate which memory
position has been set. 4. Within five seconds, push and release button
(1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set”
NOTE: (1 or 2) will display in the instrument cluster.
Memory Setting Buttons
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle 5. Push and release the lock button on the key
NOTE: in PARK, but the vehicle must be below 5 mph fob within 10 seconds.
 Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, each (8 km/h) to recall a memory profile.
can be linked to either driver’s side memory NOTE:
position 1 or 2. Your key fobs can be unlinked from your driver’s
 Front passenger memory settings cannot be side memory settings by pushing the set (S) button,
linked to a key fob. and within 10 seconds, pushing the unlock button
on the key fob.
MEMORY POSITION R ECALL WARNING! WARNING!

NOTE:  It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside  Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
Memory Recall is available when not in PARK, if the or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h). riding in these areas are more likely to be seri- your chest. In a collision you could slide under
 To recall a memory settings profile using the ously injured or killed. the seat belt and be seriously or even fatally
memory switches, push memory button (1) or injured. Use the recliner only when the vehicle
 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
(2) on the memory switch. is parked.
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
 To recall the driver’s side memory settings using seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these
the key fob, push the unlock button on the key areas are more likely to be seriously injured or Manual Front Passenger Seat Forward/
fob linked to memory position 1 or 2. killed. Rearward Adjustment
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat Some models may be equipped with a manual
memory buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2), or by
and using a seat belt properly. front passenger seat. The passenger seat can be
pushing any of the seat adjustment switches.
adjusted forward or rearward by using a bar
When a recall is canceled, the seat and power tilt/
located by the front of the seat cushion, near the
telescopic steering column (if equipped) will stop MANUAL A DJUSTMENT floor.
moving. A delay of one second will occur before (F RONT S EATS) — I F E QUIPPED
another recall can be selected.
WARNING!
SEATS
 Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint system dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
of the vehicle. could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be adjusted properly and you could
be injured. Adjust the seat only while the
vehicle is parked.
(Continued)
Adjustment Bar
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar located MANUAL A DJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
under the seat cushion and move the seat forward
or rearward. Release the bar once you have Vehicles equipped with third row seating may have
reached the desired position. Then, using body a second row bench seat, or second row captain’s
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat chairs. Vehicles equipped with only second row
seating, will have a second row bench seat.
to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. 2
WARNING! WARNING!
 Adjusting a seat while driving may be Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could of the seatback. This could impair visibility or
result in loss of control which could cause a Recline Lever become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop
collision and serious injury or death. or collision.
 Seats should be adjusted before fastening the WARNING!

seat belts and while the vehicle is parked. Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that NOTE:
Serious injury or death could result from a the shoulder belt is no longer resting against You may experience deformation in the seat
poorly adjusted seat belt. your chest. In a collision you could slide under cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are
the seat belt, which could result in serious injury left folded for an extended period of time. This is
or death. normal and by simply unfolding the seats to the
Manual Front Passenger Seatback open position, over time the seat cushion will
Adjustment — Recline return to its normal shape.
To recline, lean forward slightly and lift the lever
located on the outboard side of the seat. Then,
push the seat rearward to the desired position and
release the lever. To return the seatback to its
normal position, lean forward and lift the lever. To
ensure the seatback is latched, use body pressure
to lean forward and rearward.
Second Row Bench Seat — If Equipped To return the seatback to its normal position, lean SECOND ROW BENCH FOLD FLAT SEAT
forward and lift the lever. To ensure the seatback
To provide additional storage area, each rear seat
SECOND ROW BENCH SEAT FORWARD/REAR- is latched, use body pressure to lean forward and
can be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo
WARD ADJUSTMENT — IF EQUIPPED rearward.
space and still maintains some rear seating room.
Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front of NOTE:
the seat near the floor and release it when the seat Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be necessary
is at the desired position. Then, using body to position the front seat to its mid-track position.
pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat Also, be sure that the front seats are fully upright
to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched. and positioned forward. This will allow the rear seat
to fold down easily.
To lower the seatback, pull upward on the recline
lever located on the outboard side of the seat, and
let the seatback fold forward automatically.
Rear Seat Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
Rear Seat Adjustment Bar your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious injury
SECOND ROW BENCH SEAT RECLINE ADJUST- or death.
MENT
To recline, lean forward slightly and lift the lever Second Row Bench Seat Folded Flat
located on the outboard side of the seat. Then,
push the seat rearward to the desired position and To raise the seatback, fold the seatback up into its
release the lever. original position and lock it into place.
SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS FORWARD/

WARNING!
REARWARD ADJUSTMENT
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked Lift up on the adjusting bar located at the front of
into position. If the seatback is not securely the seat near the floor and release it when the seat
locked into position the seat will not provide the is at the desired position. Then, using body
proper stability for child seats and/or pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat 2
passengers. An improperly latched seat could to be sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
cause serious injury.
SECOND ROW BENCH SEAT EASY ACCESS FOR

THIRD ROW — IF EQUIPPED Access To Third Row Seats
If the vehicle is equipped with third row seating, the To return the seat to a sitting position, unfold the
second row seats can tip forward to allow seatback upright until it locks and push the seat
passengers to easily access the third row seats. rearward until the track locks.
Pull upward on the easy entry lever located on the Second Row Captain’s Chairs —
outboard side of the seatback, then tip and slide If Equipped
the entire seat forward.
Vehicles equipped with third row seating may be
equipped with second row captain’s chairs. Rear Seat Adjustment Bar
Easy Entry Lever Location

SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS RECLINE To Raise The Rear Seats

WARNING!
ADJUSTMENT Fold the seatbacks upward to their original
To recline, lean forward slightly and lift the lever Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that position, and lock them into place.
located on the outboard side of the seat. Then, the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
push the seat rearward to the desired position and your chest. In a collision you could slide under WARNING!
release the lever. To return the seatback to its the seat belt, which could result in serious injury
or death. Be certain that the seatback is securely locked
normal position, lean forward and lift the lever. To into position. If the seatback is not securely
ensure the seatback is latched, use body pressure locked into position the seat will not provide the
to lean forward and rearward. SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIRS FOLD FLAT proper stability for child seats and/or
SEATS passengers. An improperly latched seat could
The second row seatbacks can be folded flat to cause serious injury.
carry cargo.
Pull upward on the recline lever located on the SECOND ROW CAPTAIN’S CHAIR EASY ACCESS
outboard side of each second row seat, and guide FOR THIRD ROW
the seatback down into the folded position. The second row seats can tip forward to allow
passengers to easily access the third row seats.
Pull upward on the easy entry lever located on the
outboard side of the seatback, then tip and slide
the entire seat forward.
Rear Seat Recline Lever
Second Row Captain’s Chairs Folded Flat

To return the seat to a sitting position, unfold the

seatback upright until it locks and push the seat
rearward until the track locks.
Manual Folding Third Row — If Equipped
Both third row seats can be folded forward to
increase the cargo area. To lower either seat, pull
2
on the release handle located on the back of the
seat and lower the seat using the pull strap located
next to the release handle.
Easy Entry Lever Location NOTE: Third Row Folded
The second row seats must be in their full upright
position or folded flat when folding the third row To raise the seat, pull the seat toward you using
seats. the strap located on the back of the seat.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked
into position. If the seatback is not securely
locked into position the seat will not provide the
proper stability for child seats and/or
passengers. An improperly latched seat could
cause serious injury.
Access To Third Row Seats
Release Handles
POWER ADJUSTMENT (F RONT SEATS) — Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

WARNING!
I F EQUIPPED The seat can be adjusted both forward and
 Adjusting a seat while driving may be
rearward. Push the seat switch forward or
Some models may be equipped with 12-way power rearward. The seat will move in the direction of the dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could
driver and front passenger seats. The power seat switch. Release the switch when the desired result in loss of control which could cause a
switches are located on the outboard side of the position has been reached. collision and serious injury or death.
seat. There are three switches that control the
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down  Seats should be adjusted before fastening the
movement of the seat cushion and the seatback.
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or Serious injury or death could result from a
down. Pull upward or push downward on the rear of poorly adjusted seat belt.
seat switch, the seat will move in the direction of
the switch. Release the switch when the desired  Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
position has been reached. the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down the seat belt, which could result in serious
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in injury or death.
two directions. Pull upward or push downward on
the front of the seat switch, the front of the seat
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. CAUTION!
Power Seat Switches Release the switch when the desired position has
been reached. Do not place any article under a power seat or
1 — Cushion Extender Switch impede its ability to move as it may cause
Reclining The Seatback damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may
2 — Seat Switch
The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward become limited if movement is stopped by an
3 — Seatback And Bolster Adjustment Switch obstruction in the seat's path.
or rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or
rearward, the seat will move in the direction of the
switch. Release the switch when the desired
position is reached.
Seatback Bolster Adjustment Cushion Extender Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped

The front driver and passenger seatback bolsters The cushion can be extended forward a few inches This feature provides automatic driver seat
can be extended outward, or retracted inward by (centimeters) to increase thigh support. Push the positioning to enhance driver mobility when
pushing the bolster adjustment button located in cushion extender switch forward or rearward to entering and exiting the vehicle.
the center of the seatback switch. extend or retract the cushion. Release the switch The distance the driver seat moves depends on
Push the top of the button to extend the bolsters, when the desired position has been reached. where you have the driver seat positioned when
2
or push the bottom of the button to retract the Power Lumbar — If Equipped you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF position.
bolsters.  When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger
seats may also be equipped with power lumbar. position, the driver seat will move about
The power lumbar switch is located on the 2.4 inches (6 cm) rearward if the driver seat
outboard side of the power seat. Push the switch position is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches
forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the (6.8 cm) forward of the rear stop. The seat will
switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support. return to its previously set position when you
Pushing upward or downward on the switch will place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON/RUN posi-
raise and lower the position of the support. tion.
 The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
when the driver seat position is less than 0.9 of
an inch (2.3 cm) forward of the rear stop. At this
position, there is no benefit to the driver by
Seatback Bolster Adjustment Button
moving the seat for Easy Exit or Easy Entry.
1 — Extend Seatback Bolsters When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry
2 — Retract Seatback Bolsters and Easy Exit positions are stored in each memory
setting profile Ú page 34.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled or disabled
Power Lumbar Switch within the Uconnect system Ú page 204.
POWER A DJUSTMENT (R EAR SEATS) — CAUTION!

NOTE:
The head restraints will lower automatically as
I F EQUIPPED Do not place any article under a power seat or necessary when the power seat begins to move
impede its ability to move as it may cause when the vehicle is in PARK, and a rear door or the
WARNING! damage to the seat controls. Seat travel may liftgate is open.
 Adjusting a seat while driving may be become limited if movement is stopped by an The rear switch bank allows multiple power folding
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could obstruction in the seat's path. positions for the second and third row seats. The
result in loss of control which could cause a second row seats can be folded using these
collision and serious injury or death. Rear Seat Power Folding Seatbacks — switches, while the third row can be folded or
unfolded.
 Seats should be adjusted before fastening the If Equipped
seat belts and while the vehicle is parked.
If the vehicle is equipped with third row seating, the
Serious injury or death could result from a
second and third rows may be equipped with
poorly adjusted seat belt.
power folding seatbacks.
 Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that A one-touch power folding seat switch is located in
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against the right rear trim panel inside the cargo area, as
your chest. In a collision you could slide under part of a switch bank.
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death. NOTE:
The third row seat belts may interfere with the
 Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the power folding of the seat. Place the seat belt
third row stow clip when using the seat belt to webbing behind the stow clip before stowing or
restrain an occupant. The seat belt will not be Rear Panel Power Switch Bank
opening the seat. When the seat is in the desired
positioned properly on the occupant and they position, remove the webbing from the stow clip so 1 — Second Row Left Side Fold
could be more seriously injured in an accident that it is ready for use. Never leave the seat belt in 2 — Second Row Right Side Fold
as a result. the stow clip when it is used to restrain an
3 — Third Row Left Side Fold/Unfold
occupant.
4 — Third Row Right Side Fold/Unfold
There are also power folding switches for the third The massage feature can be turned on/off through Intensity Levels:
row seats located on the C-pillar (just behind the the massage button located on the door panel  High
rear doors on the trim panels). near the handle, or through the Comfort screen on
the radio.  Med
 Low
 Off 2
Massage Types:
 Waterfall
 Lower Back
 Extend
 Low Extend
 Rock Climb
C-Pillar Power Folding Switches (Left Side Shown) The selected settings will save in the system’s
Door Panel Massage Button memory when turned off, and will resume the next
1 — Third Row Left Side Fold/Unfold
2 — Third Row Right Side Fold/Unfold Once activated by either method, the massage time the system is turned on.
controls screen will display on the radio screen, NOTE:
and “Massage Type” and “Intensity Level” can be  The engine must be running for the power seat-
POWER S EATBACK M ASSAGE — selected for the activated seat. back massage to operate.
I F EQUIPPED There are four intensity levels and five massage  The massage feature will turn off after
types that can be selected. 20 minutes of use. However, if the massage
The driver’s and front passenger’s seatbacks may
be equipped with power massage. type or intensity level is changed, the timer then
resets.
HEATED S EATS — IF E QUIPPED  Push the heated seat switch once to turn the HI You can choose from HI, MED, LO, or OFF heat
setting on. settings. Indicator lights in each switch illuminate
WARNING!  Push the heated seat switch a second time to indicating the level of heat in use.
turn the MED setting on.  Push the heated seat switch once to turn the HI
 Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
 Push the heated seat switch a third time to turn setting on.
skin because of advanced age, chronic illness,
diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, the LO setting on.  Push the heated seat switch a second time to
alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical  Push the heated seat switch a fourth time to turn the MED setting on.
condition must exercise care when using the turn the heating elements off.  Push the heated seat switch a third time to turn
seat heater. It may cause burns even at low NOTE: the LO setting on.
temperatures, especially if used for long  Push the heated seat switch a fourth time to
periods of time.  Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes. turn the heating elements off.
 Do not place anything on the seat or seatback The level of heat selected will stay on until the
 The engine must be running for the heated
that insulates against heat, such as a blanket operator changes it.
seats to operate.
or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to
overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been over-  The level of heat selected will stay on until the NOTE:
heated could cause serious burns due to the operator changes it. The engine must be running for the heated seats to
increased surface temperature of the seat. operate.
system, see Ú page 25. VENTILATED S EATS — I F EQUIPPED
Front Heated Seats Rear Heated Seats — If Equipped Located in the seat cushion and seatback are fans
The front heated seats control buttons The two second row outboard seats may that draw the air from the passenger compartment
are located on the center stack below the be equipped with heated seats. There and move air through fine perforations in the seat
radio screen or within the Uconnect are two heated seat switches that allow cover to help keep the occupant cooler in higher
system. You can gain access to the the rear passengers to operate the seats ambient temperatures.
control buttons through the climate screen and the independently. The heated seat switches for each
controls screen. heater are located on the rear of the center
console.
Front Ventilated Seats Rear Ventilated Seats — If Equipped HEAD R ESTRAINTS

The ventilated seats control buttons are The two second row outboard seats may Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of
located on the center stack below the be equipped with ventilated seats. The injury by restricting head movement in the event of
radio screen or within the Uconnect rear ventilated seat control switches are a rear impact. Head restraints should be adjusted
system. The fans operate at three located on the rear of the center console so that the top of the head restraint is located
speeds, HI, MED and LO. and allow the rear passengers to operate the seats 2
above the top of your ear.
 Press the ventilated seat switch once to choose independently. The fans operate at three speeds:
HI. HI, MED, and LO. Push the ventilated seat switches WARNING!
to toggle through the speeds, or to turn the feature
 Press the ventilated seat switch a second time off.  All occupants, including the driver, should not
to choose MED. operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
There are two ventilated seat switches
 Press the ventilated seat switch a third time to the head restraints are placed in their proper
choose LO.  Press the ventilated seat switch once to choose positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
HI. injury in the event of a crash.
 Press the ventilated seat switch a fourth time to
turn the ventilation off.  Press the ventilated seat switch a second time  Head restraints should never be adjusted
to choose MED. while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
NOTE:
 Press the ventilated seat switch a third time to with the head restraints improperly adjusted
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate. choose LO. or removed could cause serious injury or
 Press the ventilated seat switch a fourth time to death in the event of a collision.
system, see Ú page 25. turn the ventilation off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
Front Head Restraints To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the top of
the head restraint toward the front of the vehicle WARNING!
Your vehicle is equipped with front four-way driver
as desired and release. To adjust the head  All occupants, including the driver, should not
and passenger head restraints.
restraint rearward, pull the top of the head operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the restraint to the forward most position and release. the head restraints are placed in their proper
head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push The head restraint will return to the rear most positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
the adjustment button, located at the base of the position. injury in the event of a crash.
head restraint, and push downward on the head
restraint.  Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
NOTE:
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
The head restraints should only be removed by
or removed could cause serious injury or
qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If
death in the event of a collision.
either of the head restraints require removal, see
an authorized dealer.
Head Restraints — Second Row Captain’s
Chairs (If Equipped)
If the second row is equipped with captain’s chairs,
the head restraints are not adjustable or
Upright Position
removable. They automatically fold forward when
the seatback is folded, and do not return to their
normal position when the seatback is raised. After
returning the seatback to its upright position after
a folding operation, raise the head restraint until it
locks in place.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button
Forward Adjustment
The center head restraint has one adjustment

WARNING! position, and can be adjusted up or down when the WARNING!
 All occupants, including the driver, should not seat is occupied. Pull up on the head restraint to  All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until raise it. To lower the head restraint, push the operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until
the head restraints are placed in their proper adjustment button located on the base of the head the head restraints are placed in their proper
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck restraint, and push downward on the head positions in order to minimize the risk of neck 2
injury in the event of a crash. restraint until it locks into place. injury in the event of a crash.
 Head restraints should never be adjusted NOTE:  Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle The center head restraint is not removable. while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
with the head restraints improperly adjusted with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or or removed could cause serious injury or
death in the event of a collision. death in the event of a collision.
Head Restraints — Second Row Bench Third Row Head Restraints — If Equipped
(If Equipped) The third row head restraints are not adjustable or
If the second row is equipped with a bench seat, removable, but can be folded for improved visibility
the head restraints on the outboard seats are not when the vehicle is in REVERSE, and there are no
adjustable or removable. They automatically fold occupants in the seats.
forward when the seatback is folded, and do not Press the “Headrest Fold” button within
return to their normal position when the seatback Center Seat Head Restraint Adjustment Button the Controls menu of the Uconnect
is raised. After returning the seatback to its upright system to power fold the third row head
NOTE:
position after a folding operation, raise the head restraints.
For information on child restraint tethering, see
restraint until it locks in place. The head restraints will also automatically fold
Ú page 269.
when the seatbacks are folded forward using the
release handles on the backs of the seats from the
cargo area.
NOTE: Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be You can turn the feature on or off through the
 The head restraints must be raised manually reduced by moving the small control under the Uconnect system Ú page 204.
when occupying the third row. mirror to the night position (toward the rear of the
vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set in
 Do not fold if there are passengers seated in the
the day position (small control forward toward the
third row seats. windshield).
WARNING!
 All occupants, including the driver, should not
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until Automatic Dimming Mirror
the head restraints are placed in their proper Digital Rearview Mirror — If Equipped
positions in order to minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash. The Digital Rearview Mirror provides a high
definition, wide and unobstructed view of the road
 Head restraints should never be adjusted behind while driving.
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle
Position the mirror in the regular Automatic
with the head restraints improperly adjusted
Adjusting Rearview Mirror Dimming Mirror mode, then activate the Digital
or removed could cause serious injury or
Rearview Mirror mode.
death in the event of a collision.
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped To activate the Digital Rearview Mirror, pull the
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, on/off control lever on the bottom of the mirror
MIRRORS and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center rearward toward the driver.
on the view through the rear window.
I NSIDE REARVIEW M IRROR This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
Manual Mirror — If Equipped glare from vehicles behind you.
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, NOTE:

and right. The mirror should be adjusted to center The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is disabled
on the view through the rear window. when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the
driver’s view.
NOTE:
 The Digital Rearview Mirror is not as effective
during nighttime driving in low light applications
due to low ambient light levels. In the event that
it provides the user with less than expected
vision, the mirror can be reverted to a normal 2
reflective electrochromatic mirror by pushing
Digital Rearview Mirror the control/toggle forward in the vehicle and
putting the mirror into Automatic Dimming
1 — On/Off Control/Toggle Mirror mode.
2 — Menu Button  When the rear window washer is activated by Lift Cover On Vanity Mirror
3 — Left Scroll Button pushing the windshield wiper/washer lever
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature —
4 — Right Scroll Button forward, the rear backup and digital rearview
mirror (if equipped) cameras are also washed. If Equipped
For more information, see Ú page 66. The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
Push the menu button next to the on/off control/
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor to
toggle to access the following mirror options: I LLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS block out the sun.
 Brightness To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down 1. Fold down the sun visor.
 Tilt one of the visors. 2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
Use the left and right buttons to scroll through Lift the cover to reveal the mirror. The light will turn 3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
menu options. on automatically.
4. Extend the sun visor blade for additional sun
When not in use, push the on/off forward toward
blockage.
the windshield to return the mirror to the regular
Automatic Dimming Mirror. NOTE:
The sun visor blade can also be extended while the
sun visor is against the windshield for additional
sun blockage through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS OUTSIDE AUTOMATIC DIMMING

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside MIRRORS — IF E QUIPPED
mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic The outside mirrors will automatically adjust for
with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is
inside mirror. controlled by the inside automatic dimming mirror.
The mirrors will automatically adjust for headlight
WARNING! glare when the inside mirror adjusts.
Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away POWER M IRRORS
than they really are. Relying too much on side The power mirror control switch is located on the
convex mirrors could cause you to collide with driver's side door trim panel.
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
To adjust a mirror, rotate the control switch to the
mirror when judging the size or distance of a
mirror you want to adjust (L) or (R). Then push the
vehicle seen in a side convex mirror. Power Mirror Switch
switch in the direction that you want the mirror to
move. 1 — Neutral Position
Outside Mirrors Folding Feature 2 — Left Mirror
All outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved 3 — Control Switch
either forward or rearward to resist damage. The 4 — Right Mirror
hinges have three detent positions: 5 — Power Folding Position
 Full forward position
 Full rearward position NOTE:
 Normal position Once adjustment is complete, rotate the knob
to the neutral position to prevent accidental
movements.
Power Folding AUTOMATIC POWER F OLDING NOTE:

If the mirrors were folded manually, by using the
To fold the door mirrors in using the Power Folding MIRRORS — IF E QUIPPED power folding mirror switch on the driver’s door
Mirror function, rotate the control switch to the
power folding position. Rotating the control to the When enabled within Uconnect Settings panel, they will not automatically unfold.
left, right, or neutral position will return the mirrors Ú page 204, the exterior mirrors will automatically
fold when the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
HEATED M IRRORS — I F EQUIPPED 2
to the driving position.
position, and after the doors are locked and These mirrors are heated to melt frost or
If the power mirror control switch is moved again
closed. ice. This feature will be activated
during door mirror folding (from closed to open
position and vice versa), the movement direction is The exterior mirrors will auto-fold in the following whenever you turn on the rear window
reversed. situations after the ignition is placed in the OFF defroster (if equipped) Ú page 67.
position:
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors TILT SIDE MIRRORS I N REVERSE —
 Pushing the lock button on the door panel
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if
before the door is opened.
I F E QUIPPED
the following occurs:
NOTE: Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse provides automatic
 The mirrors are accidentally blocked while outside mirror positioning which will aid the
folding. If the doors are already locked, push the lock
button again. driver’s view of the ground rearward of the front
 The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/ doors. Outside mirrors will move slightly downward
 Opening the door, then pushing the lock button
unfolded (by hand or by pushing the power from the present position when the vehicle is
on the door panel, followed by closing the door.
folding mirror switch). shifted into REVERSE. Outside mirrors will then
 After exiting the vehicle, close the doors then return to the original position when the vehicle is
 The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
push the lock button on the key fob. shifted out of REVERSE position. Each stored
 The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving memory setting will have an associated Tilt Side
 After exiting the vehicle, close the doors then
speeds. Mirrors In Reverse position.
touch the lock icon on the Passive Entry door
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold handle. NOTE:
them by turning the switch (this may require The Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse feature can be
If the exterior mirrors were folded automatically,
multiple switch activations to synchronize the turned on and off using the Uconnect system
they will unfold when the ignition is placed in the
driver and passenger mirror). This resets them to Ú page 204.
ON/RUN position.
their normal position.
Power mirror position can be saved as part of the
Driver Memory Settings (if equipped) Ú page 34.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER  To operate HomeLink®, push and release any
of the programmed HomeLink® buttons. These
ERASING ALL THE H OMELINK®
(HOMELINK®) — IF EQUIPPED buttons will activate the devices they are C HANNELS
programmed to with each press of the corre- To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
sponding HomeLink® button.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
 The HomeLink® indicator light is located above position.
the center button Ú page 410.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink®
BEFORE YOU BEGIN PROGRAMMING buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or until
the HomeLink® indicator light flashes.
HOMELINK®
For efficient programming and accurate NOTE:
transmission of the Radio Frequency (RF) signal, it Erasing all channels should only be performed
is recommended that a new battery be placed in when programming HomeLink® for the first time.
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is Do not erase channels when programming addi-
HomeLink® Buttons And Indicator Light being programmed to the HomeLink® system. tional buttons.
Make sure your hand-held transmitter is
Use this QR code to access your
programmed to activate the device you are trying
I DENTIFYING WHETHER YOU HAVE A
digital experience.
to program your HomeLink® button to. R OLLING C ODE O R N ON-R OLLING C ODE
 HomeLink® replaces up to
three hand-held transmitters Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of the DEVICE
that operate devices such as garage before you begin programming.
Before programming a device to one of your
garage door openers, motor- It is recommended that you erase all the channels HomeLink® buttons, you must determine whether
ized gates, lighting or home of your HomeLink® before you use it for the first the device has a rolling code or non-rolling code.
security systems. The HomeLink® unit is time.
powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
 The HomeLink® buttons that are located in the
overhead console or sunvisor designate the
three different HomeLink® channels.
Rolling Code Devices PROGRAMMING H OMELINK® TO A NOTE:

Make sure the garage door opener motor is
To determine if your device has a rolling code, a GARAGE DOOR OPENER plugged in before moving on to the rolling code/
good indicator is its manufacturing date. Typically,
devices manufactured after 1995 have rolling To program any of the HomeLink® buttons to non-rolling code final steps.
codes. A device with a rolling code will also have a activate your garage door opener motor, proceed Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
“LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located where the as follows:
NOTE: 2
antenna is attached to the device. The button may NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate rolling
not be immediately visible when looking at the All HomeLink® buttons are programmed using this code final step 2, after completing rolling code
device. The name and color of the button may vary procedure. You do not need to erase all channels final step 1.
slightly by manufacturer. when programming additional buttons. 1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
NOTE: 1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the button position. button. This can usually be found where the
you normally use to operate the device. 2. Place the garage door opener transmitter hanging antenna wire is attached to the
Non-rolling Code Devices 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the garage door opener motor. Firmly push and
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will not HomeLink® button you wish to program, while release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
have a rolling code. These devices will also not keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in view. 2. Return to the vehicle and push the
have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button. 3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you programmed HomeLink® button three times
want to program while you push and hold the (holding the button for two seconds each
garage door opener transmitter button you are time). If the garage door opener motor
trying to replicate. operates, programming is complete.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the 3. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
HomeLink® indicator light. The HomeLink® confirm that the garage door opener motor
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly. operates. If the garage door opener motor
Once this happens, release both buttons. does not operate, repeat the final steps for the
rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps PROGRAMMING H OMELINK® TO A 1. Place the ignition to the ON/RUN position,
without starting the engine.
1. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink® MISCELLANEOUS D EVICE
button and observe the HomeLink® indicator 2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink® button
light. If the HomeLink® indicator light stays Refer to “Programming HomeLink® To A Garage until the HomeLink® indicator light begins to
on constantly, programming is complete. Door Opener” in this section for the procedure on flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
how to program HomeLink® to a miscellaneous button.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink® button to
device, as it follows the same procedure. Be sure
confirm that the garage door opener motor 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
to determine if the device has a rolling code, or
operates. If the garage door opener motor Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink® To A
non-rolling code before beginning the
does not operate, repeat the steps from the Garage Door Opener” and follow all remaining
programming process.
beginning. steps.
NOTE:
WARNING!
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require trans- CANADIAN/GATE OPERATOR
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
 Your motorized door or gate will open and seconds of transmission, which may not be long
P ROGRAMMING
close while you are programming the universal enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal during For programming transmitters in Canada/United
transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if programming. Similar to this Canadian law, some States that require the transmitter signals to
people or pets are in the path of the door or U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out in the “time-out” after several seconds of transmission:
gate. same manner. The procedure may need to be
Canadian Radio Frequency (RF) laws require
performed multiple times to successfully pair the
 Do not run your vehicle in a closed garage or transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after
device to your HomeLink® buttons.
confined area while programming the trans- several seconds of transmission, which may not be
ceiver. Exhaust gas from your vehicle contains REPROGRAMMING A S INGLE long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the signal
Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and during programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous
HOMELINK® B UTTON some U.S. gate operators are designed to time-out
when inhaled and can cause you and others to To reprogram a single HomeLink® button that has in the same manner.
be severely injured or killed. been previously trained, without erasing all the It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
channels, proceed as follows. Be sure to cycling process to prevent possible overheating of
determine whether the new device you want to the garage door or gate motor.
program the HomeLink® button to has a rolling
code, or non-rolling code.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. NOTE: SECURITY

NOTE:  If the indicator light stays on constantly,
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™, programming is complete and the garage
turn in your vehicle.
place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. Make door/device should activate when the
sure while programming HomeLink® with the HomeLink® button is pushed. To do this, push and hold the two outside buttons
engine on that your vehicle is outside of your  To program the two remaining HomeLink®
for 20 seconds until the indicator flashes. Note 2
garage, or that the garage door remains open at all that all channels will be erased. Individual
buttons, repeat each step for each
times. channels cannot be erased.
remaining button. DO NOT erase the
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 inches channels. The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is disabled
(3 to 8 cm) away from the HomeLink® button when the Vehicle Security system is active.
you wish to program while keeping the If you unplugged the garage door opener/device
HomeLink® indicator light in view. for programming, plug it back in at this time. TROUBLESHOOTING TIPS
3. Continue to push and hold the HomeLink® Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button If you are having trouble programming
button while you push and release (cycle) your (Canadian/Gate Operator) HomeLink®, here are some of the most common
hand-held transmitter every two seconds until To reprogram a channel that has been previously solutions:
HomeLink® has successfully accepted the trained, follow these steps:  Replace the battery in the garage door opener
frequency signal. The indicator light will flash hand-held transmitter.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
slowly and then rapidly when fully trained.  Push the LEARN button on the garage door
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® button
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to change opener to complete the training for a rolling
until the indicator light begins to flash after
flash rates. When it changes, it is code.
20 seconds. Do not release the button.
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds or  Did you unplug the device for programming and
longer in rare cases. The garage door may 3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” remember to plug it back in?
open and close while you are programming.
Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink®
button and observe the indicator light.
If you have any problems, or require assistance,

please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Internet at HomeLink.com for information or HEADLIGHT SWITCH
assistance.
The headlight switch is located on the left side of
WARNING! the instrument panel, next to the steering wheel.
The headlight switch controls the operation of the
 Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a
headlights, parking lights, instrument panel lights,
dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the and fog lights (if equipped).
garage while programming the transceiver.
Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death.
Headlight Switch (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)
 Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the universal 1 — Rotate Headlight Control
transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if 2 — Push Front Fog Light Control
people, pets or other objects are in the path of 3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by Federal safety
standards. This includes most garage door NOTE:
opener models manufactured after 1982. Do Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a head-
not use a garage door opener without these Headlight Switch light switch with an AUTO and ON detent but
safety features. without an OFF detent. Headlights will be deacti-
1 — Rotate Headlight Control vated when the headlight switch is placed in the
2 — Push Front Fog Light Control parking lights position. However, the Daytime
3 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along with
4 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight MULTIFUNCTION L EVER  If allowed by law in the country in which the
switch clockwise. When the headlight switch is on, vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running
the parking lights, taillights, license plate light and The multifunction lever is located on the left side of Lights can be turned on and off using the Ucon-
instrument panel lights are also turned on. To turn the steering column. nect system Ú page 204.
off the headlights, rotate the headlight switch back  On some vehicles, the Daytime Running Lights
to the O (off) position. may deactivate, or reduce intensity, on one side 2
For vehicles sold in Canada, rotate the headlight of the vehicle (when a turn signal is activated on
switch clockwise from the parking lights and that side), or on both sides of the vehicle (when
instrument panel lights position to the AUTO the hazard warning lights are activated).
position for automatic headlights. Rotate to the
second detent to turn on headlights, parking lights, HIGH/LOW B EAM SWITCH
and instrument panel lights operation. Multifunction Lever Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument
NOTE: panel to switch the headlights to high beams.
 Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) — Pulling the multifunction back toward the steering
and fog light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter I F E QUIPPED wheel will turn the low beams back on, or shut the
and less susceptible to stone breakage than high beams off.
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) come on
glass lights. Plastic is not as scratch resistant as whenever the engine is running, and the low AUTOMATIC HIGH B EAMS —
glass and therefore different lens cleaning
procedures must be followed.
beams are not on. The lights will remain on until I F E QUIPPED
the ignition is placed in the OFF or ON/RUN
 To minimize the possibility of scratching the position, or the parking brake is engaged. The low The Automatic High Beam Headlight system
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping beams must be used for normal nighttime driving. provides increased forward lighting at night by
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with automating high beam control through the use of a
NOTE:
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing. digital camera mounted on the inside rearview
 For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime mirror. This camera detects vehicle specific light
CAUTION! Running Lights will automatically deactivate and automatically switches from high beams to low
when the front fog lights are turned on. beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other abrasive materials
to clean the lenses.
NOTE: AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS NOTE:

 The Automatic High Beam Headlight system can Vehicles sold in Canada are equipped with a head-
This system automatically turns the headlights on light switch with an AUTO and ON detent but
be turned on or off by selecting or deselecting
or off according to ambient light levels. To turn the without an OFF detent. Headlights will be deacti-
“Auto High Beam” within Uconnect Settings
system on, rotate the headlight switch vated when the headlight switch is placed in the
Ú page 204.
counterclockwise to the AUTO position. When the parking lights position. However, the Daytime
 The headlight switch must also be turned to the system is on, the headlight time delay feature is Running Lights (DRLs) will be activated along with
AUTO position after Automatic High Beams is also on. This means the headlights will stay on for the front and rear marker lights. The DRLs may be
enabled within Uconnect Settings for the up to 90 seconds after you place the ignition into deactivated when the parking brake is engaged.
feature to activate. the OFF position. The headlight time delay can be
 Automatic High Beams will only activate when programmed 0/30/60/90 seconds within the HEADLIGHTS O N A UTOMATICALLY W ITH
the vehicle speed is above 22 mph (35 km/h). Uconnect system Ú page 204. WIPERS
 Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and To turn the automatic system off, move the
If your vehicle is equipped with Automatic
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will headlight switch out of the AUTO position.
Headlights, it also has this
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer to NOTE: customer-programmable feature. When your
the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other obstruc- The engine must be running before the headlights headlights are in the automatic mode and the
tions on the windshield or camera lens will will come on in the automatic mode. engine is running, they will automatically turn on
cause the system to function improperly. when the wiper system is on. This feature is
If the windshield or Automatic High Beam PARKING LIGHTS AND PANEL L IGHTS programmable through the Uconnect system
Headlight Control mirror is replaced, the mirror To turn on the parking lights and instrument panel Ú page 204.
must be re-aimed to ensure proper performance. lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise. To NOTE:
See a local authorized dealer. turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight When your headlights come on during the daytime,
switch back to the O (off) position.
FLASH-TO-P ASS the vehicle will monitor outside brightness and
decide if the instrument panel needs to be dimmed
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights or not Ú page 63.
by lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you.
This will cause the high beam headlights to turn on,
and remain on, until the lever is released.
HEADLIGHT ILLUMINATION ON NOTE: HEADLIGHT DELAY

Proximity Wake-Up may not activate under the
APPROACH following conditions: To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a
When enabled, the headlights, exterior door headlight delay that will leave the headlights on for
 After numerous consecutive activations, in
handle pocket lights (if equipped), and interior approximately 90 seconds. This delay is initiated
order to conserve the vehicle’s battery
when the ignition is placed in the OFF position
lights will illuminate when the unlock button on the
 After the vehicle’s engine has been off for 2
key fob is pushed as the operator is approaching while the headlight switch is on, and then the
several days headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can
the vehicle. This feature can be turned on/off, and
the length of time the headlights stay on can be Headlight Animation — If Equipped be canceled by either turning the headlight switch
programmed for up to 90 seconds within Uconnect on then off, or by placing the ignition in the ON/
When “Headlight Illumination On Approach” is
Settings Ú page 204. RUN position.
turned on, and set to a time value above zero, the
Proximity Wake-Up — If Equipped exterior lights illuminate in a theatrical manner NOTE:
during approach to the vehicle. This feature is The headlight delay time is programmable through
This feature is enabled/disabled within the Uconnect Settings Ú page 204.
activated in the following situations:
Uconnect system, and is activated when the
operator approaches the driver’s door,  Proximity Wake-Up (if equipped) is activated LIGHTS-O N R EMINDER
passenger’s door, or liftgate with a valid key fob on  Remote Start is activated
their person. Some exterior and interior lights will If the headlights or parking lights are left on after
 The unlock button on the key fob is pushed the ignition is placed in the OFF position, a chime
illuminate in order to provide an increased sense
of welcome and security as the operator NOTE: will sound when the driver’s door is opened.
approaches the vehicle in the dark. “Headlight For Headlight Animation to activate with Remote
Illumination On Approach” must be selected and Start or with the push of the unlock button,
set to a time value other than zero within Uconnect “Greeting Lights” must also be selected within the
Settings for Proximity Wake-Up to activate. Uconnect system.
The doors may be locked or unlocked for this
feature to activate, as long as the ignition is in the
OFF position, or during a Remote Start event. It will
not activate if the doors are locked and the ignition
was placed in the ON/RUN position.
FOG LIGHTS — I F EQUIPPED The fog lights will operate only when the parking LANE CHANGE ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
lights are on, or when the vehicle headlights are on
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the parking low beam. An indicator light located in the Tap the multifunction lever up or down once,
lights or the low beam headlights, and push the fog instrument cluster display will illuminate when the without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
light button on the headlight switch. fog lights are on. The fog lights will turn off when signal (right or left) will flash three times then
the button is pushed a second time, when the automatically turn off.
headlight switch is rotated to the off position, or
the high beam is selected.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHT LEVELING —
Cornering Lights
IF E QUIPPED
The cornering lights are a feature to improve This feature prevents the headlights from
visibility at night while turning the vehicle. When interfering with the vision of oncoming drivers.
activated, a light incorporated in the front fog light Headlight leveling automatically adjusts the height
will illuminate on the side of the vehicle the of the headlight beam in reaction to changes in
steering wheel is rotated or the turn signal vehicle pitch.
indicator is on. It can be activated through the BATTERY SAVER
Fog Light Button Uconnect system Ú page 204.
To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load
TURN SIGNALS shedding is provided for both the interior and
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the exterior lights.
arrows on each side of the instrument cluster will If the ignition is placed in the OFF position and any
flash to show proper operation of the front and rear door is left ajar for 10 minutes or the overhead
turn signal lights. console Dome On switch is left on for 10 minutes,
NOTE: the interior lights will automatically turn off.
If either light remains on and does not flash, or NOTE:
there is a very fast cluster turn indicator flash rate, Battery saver mode is canceled if the ignition is in
check for a defective outside light bulb. the ON/RUN position.
Fog Light Button (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)

If the headlights remain on while the ignition is Dimmer Controls

placed in the OFF position, the exterior lights will
The dimmer controls are inboard and adjacent to
automatically turn off after eight minutes. If the
the headlight switch located on the left side of the
headlights are turned on and left on for eight
instrument panel.
minutes while the ignition is in the OFF position,
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the exterior lights will automatically turn off.
the right dimmer control upward will increase the
2
INTERIOR LIGHTS brightness of the instrument cluster lights.
Rotating the left dimmer control will adjust the
COURTESY LIGHTS interior light levels of the ambient lighting on the
instrument panel and doors. Certain ambient lights
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the Courtesy Lights may be color customizable Ú page 64.
front doors are opened or the Dome ON button is 1 — Reading Light On/Off Buttons
pushed on the overhead console. If your vehicle is
2 — Dome Defeat Button
equipped with Remote Keyless Entry and the
unlock button is pushed on the key fob, the 3 — Ambient Light
courtesy and dome lights will turn on. When a door 4 — Dome ON Button
is open and the interior lights are on, pressing the
Dome Defeat button on the overhead console will Rear Courtesy/Reading Lights
cause all of the interior lights to turn off.
Located above the rear passenger seating in both
Front Map/Reading Lights — If Equipped second and third rows, along the trim, are
The overhead console lights can also be operated courtesy/reading lights. The courtesy lights turn on
individually as reading lights by pushing the when a door or the liftgate is opened. The lights will
also turn on when the unlock button on the key fob Dimmer Controls
corresponding buttons.
is pushed. 1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
The courtesy lights also function as reading lights. 2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
Push the reading light button to turn these lights
on while inside the vehicle. Push the reading light
button a second time to turn each light off.
Multicolor Ambient Lighting — If Equipped WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

The color of certain ambient lighting inside of the
The windshield wiper/washer lever is located on
vehicle can be selected within the Apps menu on
the right side of the steering column. The front
the radio screen, or within Uconnect Settings
wipers are operated by rotating a switch, located
Ú page 204. Brightness is adjusted using the
on the end of the lever.
ambient light dimmer control on the headlight
switch.
Five colors can be selected for the following two
zones inside of the vehicle:
Dimmer Controls (Vehicles Sold In Canada Only)  Zone 1:
 Instrument panel decorative ambient lights
1 — Ambient Light Dimmer Control
 Door panel decorative ambient lights
2 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
 Zone 2:
NOTE:  Front seat footwell areas below the instru-

ment panel
 Multicolor ambient lighting for first and second Multifunction Lever
rows, and overhead white ambient lighting in  Lighting below the second row seats
the second and third row (if equipped) seating  Map pocket lighting on all four door panels 1 — Pull For Front Washer
areas, may not be equipped in the vehicle. 2 — Rotate For Rear Wiper Operation
These areas can be set to different colors, or if the
 The dimming of lighting linked to the headlight SYNC button is selected within the settings menu, 3 — Rotate For Front Wiper Operation
status (i.e. radio screen brightness) is program- all colored lights will be set to the same color 4 — Push Forward For Rear Washer
mable through the Uconnect system automatically. 5 — Push Up For Mist
Ú page 204.
NOTE:
All other ambient lighting inside of the vehicle will
remain white, and the ambient light dimmer
control switch will adjust all ambient lighting at the
same time.
WINDSHIELD WIPER O PERATION cycle every second to a maximum of approximately  Due to washer pump packaging, the front
36 seconds between cycles. The delay intervals camera washers will run out of fluid before the
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch will double in duration when the vehicle speed is Low Washer Fluid Warning Light is activated.
within the wiper lever. Rotate the switch at the end 10 mph (16 km/h) or less. When the front camera washers stop func-
of the lever upward, to the first detent past the tioning, add fluid to the washer fluid reservoir to
intermittent settings for low-speed wiper
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph resume function. 2
operation. Rotate the switch at the end of the lever
upward to the second detent past the intermittent (16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
WARNING!
settings for high-speed wiper operation. To turn the Windshield Washer Operation
windshield wipers off, rotate the switch within the Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
To use the washer, pull the lever rearward toward could lead to a collision. You might not see other
lever all the way down to OFF. you and hold. If the lever is pulled while on the vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden
intermittent setting, the wipers will turn on and icing of the windshield during freezing weather,
CAUTION! operate for several wipe cycles after the lever is warm the windshield with the defroster before
Always remove any buildup of snow that released, and then resume the intermittent and during windshield washer use.
prevents the windshield wiper blades from interval previously selected. If the lever is pulled
returning to the “park” position. If the windshield while the wipers are in the off position, the wipers
wiper switch is turned off, and the blades cannot will operate several cycles, then turn off. Mist
return to the “park” position, damage to the NOTE: Use the Mist feature when weather conditions
wiper motor may occur.  As a protective measure, the pump will stop if make occasional usage of the wipers necessary.
the switch is held for more than 20 seconds. Push the lever upward to the MIST position and
Once the switch is released the pump will release for a single wiping cycle.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather
resume normal operation. NOTE:
conditions make a single wiping cycle with a  If the front window washer feature is activated, The Mist feature does not activate the washer
variable pause between cycles desirable. Rotate all of the front cameras (if equipped) on the pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on
the switch at the end of the wiper lever to the first vehicle will be washed as well. the windshield. The wash function must be used in
detent position, and then turn the switch at the end order to spray the windshield with washer fluid.
of the lever to select the desired delay interval. For information on wiper care and replacement,
There are four delay settings, which allow you to see Ú page 349.
regulate the wipe interval from a minimum of one
RAIN S ENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED The Rain Sensing system has protective features REAR WIPER AND WASHER
for the wiper blades and arms. It will not operate
This feature senses rain or snowfall on the under the following conditions: The rear wiper/washer is operated by rotating a
windshield and automatically activates the wipers. switch, located at the middle of the lever.
 Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit — The Rain
Rotate the end of the windshield wiper lever to one Rotate the center portion of the lever
Sensing feature will not operate when the igni-
of the four detent positions to activate this feature. upward to the first detent for intermittent
tion is first placed in the ON/RUN position, when
The sensitivity of the system is adjustable from the the vehicle is stationary and the outside operation and to the second detent for
windshield wiper lever. Wiper sensitivity position temperature is below 32°F (0°C), unless the continuous rear wiper operation.
1 is the least sensitive, and wiper sensitivity wiper control on the windshield wiper lever is Rear Window Washer Operation
position 4 is the most sensitive. moved, the vehicle speed becomes greater than Pushing the windshield wiper lever
NOTE: 3 mph (5 km/h) or the outside temperature forward activates the rear window
 The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when
rises above freezing. washer. If the lever is pushed while on
the wiper switch is in the low, high, or OFF posi-  Neutral Wipe Inhibit — The Rain Sensing feature the intermittent setting, the wipers will
tion. Only in one of the intermittent positions. will not operate when the ignition is placed in turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after
 The Rain Sensing feature may not function prop-
the ON/RUN position, when the transmission the lever is released, and then resume the
erly when ice or dried saltwater is present on the gear selector is in the NEUTRAL position and the intermittent interval previously selected. If the
windshield. vehicle speed is less than 3 mph (5 km/h), lever is pushed while the wipers are in the off
unless the wiper control on the windshield wiper position, the wipers will operate several wipe
 Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or sili- lever is moved, the vehicle speed is greater than cycles, then turn off.
cone may reduce rain sensor performance. 3 mph (5 km/h) or the gear selector is moved
NOTE:
 The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on and out of the NEUTRAL position.
If equipped with a backup camera washer, when
off through the Uconnect system Ú page 204.  Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles the rear window washer is activated, the rear
equipped with the Remote Start system, Rain backup camera and digital rearview mirror
Sensing wipers are not operational when the (if equipped) cameras are also washed.
vehicle is in the Remote Start mode. Once the
operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, rain
sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has
been selected, and no other inhibit conditions
(mentioned previously) exist.
WINDSHIELD WIPER D E-ICER — CLIMATE CONTROLS

I F EQUIPPED The Climate Control system allows you to regulate
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield the temperature, air flow, and direction of air
Wiper De-Icer feature that may be activated under circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
the following conditions: located on the touchscreen and on the instrument 2
panel below the radio.
 Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield
Wiper De-Icer shall be activated automatically in AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
the case of a cold weather manual start with full
front defrost, and when the ambient tempera-
DESCRIPTIONS AND F UNCTIONS
ture is below 33°F (0.6°C). Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 8.4–inch Display
 Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield
Temperature Controls
Wiper De-Icer shall be activated automatically Max A/C Button
when the rear defrost is turned on and when the
ambient temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C). Press and release to change the current
setting. The MAX A/C indicator
 Activation By Remote Start Operation — When illuminates when MAX A/C is ON.
Remote Start is active and the outside ambient Performing this function again will cause
temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C), the the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode
Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate. Exiting and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off. Pressing
Remote Start will resume its previous operation. other setting buttons will also cause the MAX A/C
If the Windshield Wiper De-Icer was active, the Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1–inch Display to turn off.
timer and operation will continue. Temperature Controls
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touch-
screen.
A/C Button AUTO Button If MAX Defrost mode is turned off, the Climate
Control system will return to the previous setting.
Press and release to change the current The AUTO button automatically controls
MAX Defrost automatically turns off after
setting. The A/C indicator illuminates the interior cabin temperature by
20 minutes.
when A/C is on. adjusting distribution and amount of
airflow. Air Conditioning (A/C) may be Rear Defrost Button
active during AUTO operation to improve Press and release the button on the
Recirculation Button performance. Performing this function will cause touchscreen, or push and release the
Press and release the Recirculation the system to switch between manual mode and button on the faceplate, to turn on the
button to change the system between automatic modes Ú page 73. AUTO mode is highly rear window defroster and the heated
recirculation mode and outside air mode. recommended for efficiency. outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost
Recirculation can be used when outside MAX Defrost Button indicator illuminates when the rear window
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high defroster is on. The rear window defroster
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in Push the MAX Defrost button to change
automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable if the current airflow setting to Defrost
conditions exist that could create fogging on the mode. The indicator illuminates when
CAUTION!
inside of the windshield. The A/C can be this feature is on. Performing this
deselected manually without disturbing the mode function will cause the automatic climate controls Failure to follow these cautions can cause
control selection. Continuous use of Recirculation to change to manual mode, and the following damage to the heating elements:
mode may make the inside air stuffy and window settings will occur:
 Use care when washing the inside of the rear
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode if  The blower speed increases to full (all LEDs on) window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners
not recommended. Recirculation mode may  The rear blower is off on the interior surface of the window. Use a
automatically adjust to optimize customer soft cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping
 The air conditioning compressor is turned on
experience for warming, cooling, dehumidification, parallel to the heating elements. Labels can
etc. (A/C LED off)
be peeled off after soaking with warm water.
 Both driver and passenger temperature controls
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may  Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
lead to excessive window fogging. The are set to HI
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
Recirculation feature may be unavailable if  Defrost mode is selected (LED on) surface of the window.
conditions exist that could create fogging on the  Rear defroster is turned on (LED on)
inside of the windshield.  Keep all objects a safe distance from the
 The air recirculation is turned off (LED off) window.
Rear Climate Control Button SYNC Button The speed can also be selected using the blower
control buttons on the touchscreen. Use the small
Press and release this button on the Press the SYNC button on the
blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the
climate control touchscreen to access touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature
large blower icon to increase the blower setting.
the rear climate controls. The Rear on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates
Blower speed can also be selected by pressing the
Climate indicator will illuminate when the when SYNC is on. SYNC is used to
rear climate controls are ON. synchronize the front passenger temperature and
blower bar area between the icons on the 2
touchscreen.
rear passenger temperature, mode, and blower
Driver And Passenger Temperature
settings with the driver temperature, mode, and Mode Control
Switches blower settings. Changing the front passenger Select Mode by pressing one of the Mode
These switches provide the driver and passenger temperature or rear passenger temperature, buttons on the touchscreen, or the
with independent temperature control. mode, and blower settings while in SYNC will faceplate, to change the airflow
Lift the driver’s or passenger’s side automatically exit this feature. distribution mode. The airflow
toggle switch on the faceplate upward, or NOTE: distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes
press and slide the temperature bar The SYNC setting is only available on the touch- from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,
towards the red arrow button on the screen. defrost outlets and demist outlets.
touchscreen for warmer temperature settings.
Blower Control Panel Mode
Depress the driver’s or passenger’s side
Blower Control is used to regulate the Air comes from the outlets in the
toggle switch on the faceplate downward,
amount of air forced through the Climate instrument panel. Each of these outlets
or press and slide the temperature bar
Control system. There are several blower can be individually adjusted to direct the
towards the blue arrow button on the
speeds available. flow of air. The air vanes of the center
touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
Blower speed can be controlled by lifting blower outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and
toggle on the instrument panel to increase blower down or side to side to regulate airflow direction.
speed, or depress the toggle for lower blower There is a shut-off wheel located next to the air
speed. vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow
from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode Combine Modes Controlling The Rear Climate Controls

Air comes from the instrument panel Dual Level Combination From The Front ATC Panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount Front Defrost and Panel Mode
of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets. Tri-Level Combination
NOTE: Front Defrost, Panel Mode, and Floor Mode

Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets
The driver or front passenger can
and warmer air from the floor outlets.
combine two or three of the modes
For more information on selecting modes, see described by selecting them
Ú page 70 individually on their side of climate
Floor Mode control screen. Combine modes by
pressing each icon on the Front ATC Panel Uconnect 5 NAV With 10.1–inch Display
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight
touchscreen. Rear Controls
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Mix Mode Climate Control OFF Button
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, Press and release this button to turn the
and side window demister outlets. This Climate Control ON/OFF.
setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the
windshield.
Front ATC Panel Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 8.4–inch Display
Rear Controls
The Three-Zone and Four-Zone ATC system allows REAR LOCK BUTTON REAR BLOWER CONTROL
for adjustment of the rear climate controls from
Press and release this button to lock out Rear Blower Control is used to regulate
the front ATC panel.
the rear manual temperature controls the amount of air forced through the rear
To change the rear system settings: from adjusting the rear temperature and climate system. There are several blower
 Press the “Rear” button on the touchscreen to blower settings. The LOCK REAR speeds available. The speeds can be
display the rear climate controls. The control indicator will illuminate when LOCK REAR is on. selected using the buttons on the touchscreen. 2
functions now operate the rear system. Use the small blower icon (or blower icon with the
FRONT CLIMATE BUTTON downward arrow) to reduce the blower setting, and
 Press the “Front” button on the touchscreen to
Press and release to return to the Front the large blower icon (or blower icon with the
return to the front climate controls.
Climate Control Screen. upward arrow) to increase the blower setting.
NOTE: Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower
If equipped with a Four-Zone ATC system, the left bar area between the icons.
and right sides of the rear passenger zones can be SYNC BUTTON
adjusted separately from the front or rear ATC REAR MODE CONTROL
Press the SYNC button on the
panel. touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature The rear airflow distribution modes
REAR AUTO BUTTON on/off. The SYNC indicator will illuminate can be adjusted so air comes from
when SYNC is on. SYNC is used to the headliner outlets, the floor
Press and release this button on the synchronize the front passenger temperature and outlets, or both. Select the arrow
touchscreen to change the current rear passenger temperature, mode, and blower icons individually on the front climate
setting. The REAR AUTO indicator will settings with the driver temperature, mode, and control screen. Combine modes by
illuminate when REAR AUTO is on. This blower settings. Changing the front passenger pressing both icons.
feature automatically controls the rear interior temperature or rear passenger temperature,
cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution mode, or blower settings while in SYNC will
and amount. Toggling this function will cause the automatically exit this feature. REAR CLIMATE CONTROL OFF BUTTON
rear system to switch between manual mode and To manually set the rear blower controls
automatic modes Ú page 73.
NOTE:
The SYNC setting is only available on the to off, press the Rear Climate Control/
touchscreen. Blower Off button.
Rear Automatic Temperature Control AUTO BUTTON REAR MODE CONTROL

The AUTO button automatically controls Push the rear mode button to adjust
the interior cabin temperature by airflow distribution. The rear mode
adjusting distribution and amount of settings are shown in the rear display.
airflow. Performing this function will The rear airflow distribution mode can be
cause the system to switch between manual mode adjusted so air comes from the headliner outlets,
and automatic modes Ú page 73. the floor outlets, or both.
REAR TEMPERATURE CONTROL PANEL MODE

These buttons provide the left and right side of the Air comes from the outlets in the
rear seating area with independent temperature headliner. Each of these outlets can be
control. individually adjusted to direct the flow of
Rear Automatic Climate Controls air. Moving the air vanes of the outlets to
Push the Up button on the faceplate for
The rear ATC system has floor air outlets at the rear warmer temperature settings. one side will shut off the airflow.
right side of the third row seats and overhead BI-LEVEL MODE
outlets at each outboard rear seating position. The Push the Down button on the faceplate
system provides heated air through the floor Air comes from both the headliner outlets
for cooler temperature settings.
outlets or cool, dehumidified air through the and the floor outlets.
headliner outlets.
The rear system temperature control buttons are REAR BLOWER CONTROL
NOTE:
located on rear of the front center console. Use the blower button with the “down” In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode
NOTE: arrow to reduce the blower setting, and is designed to provide cooler air out of the head-
If equipped with a Four-Zone ATC system, the left the blower button with the “up” arrow to liner outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
and right sides of the rear passenger zones can be increase the blower setting. The rear
adjusted separately from the front or rear ATC blower setting is shown in the display. FLOOR MODE
panel. Air comes from the floor outlets.
REAR TEMPERATURE LOCK Once the desired temperature is shown on the rear NOTE:
display, the ATC System will automatically achieve It is not necessary to move the temperature
The Rear Temperature Lock symbol on
and maintain that comfort level. When the system settings. The system automatically adjusts the
the rear display is illuminated when the
is set up for your comfort level, it is not necessary temperature, mode and fan speed to provide
rear controls are locked by the front
to change the settings. You will experience the comfort as quickly as possible.
system.
greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to To provide you with maximum comfort in the 2
Rear Lock function automatically. automatic mode, during cold start-ups, the blower
Pressing the Rear Temperature Lock button on the fan will remain on low until the engine warms up.
Uconnect touchscreen will illuminate a lock symbol
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
The fan will engage immediately if the Defrost
in the rear display. The rear temperature and air (ATC) mode is selected, or by changing the front blower
source are then controlled from the front Uconnect knob setting.
system.
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the front Automatic Manual Operation Override
Rear seat occupants can only adjust the rear ATC
Temperature Control (ATC) Panel and the This system offers a full complement of manual
control when the Rear Temperature Lock button is
word “AUTO” will illuminate in the front ATC override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
turned off.
display, along with two temperatures for the ATC display will be turned off when the system is
The rear ATC is located on the rear of the front driver and front passenger. The system will being used in the manual mode.
center console. then automatically regulate the amount of NOTE:
 Press the Rear Temperature Lock button on the airflow. The system will not automatically sense the
front Uconnect touchscreen a second time to 2. Adjust the temperature you would like the presence of fog, mist or ice on the windshield.
turn the Rear Temperature Lock icon off in the system to maintain, by adjusting the driver, Defrost mode must be manually selected to clear
rear display. passenger, and rear temperatures. Once the the windshield and side glass.
 Push a rear blower button, adjust the tempera- desired temperature is displayed, the system
ture using the rear up and down arrows, and will achieve and automatically maintain that
select a control mode to suit the rear occupant’s comfort level.
needs. 3. When the system is set up for your comfort
 ATC is selected by pushing the AUTO button on level, it is not necessary to change the
the rear climate control faceplate. settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
CLIMATE VOICE R ECOGNITION NOTE: Window Fogging

Refer to the chart at the end of this section for Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild,
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep suggested control settings for various weather
everyone comfortable while you keep moving rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
conditions. windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase
ahead (if vehicle is equipped with climate
controls). Summer Operation the front blower speed. Do not use the
The engine cooling system must be protected with Recirculation mode without A/C for long periods,
Push the VR button. After the beep, say one of the as fogging may occur.
following commands: a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper
corrosion protection and to protect against engine Outside Air Intake
 “Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees” overheating. OAT coolant (conforming to
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of
 “Set the passenger temperature to 70 degrees” MS.90032) is recommended. For more
the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may information, see Ú page 405.
leaves. Leaves collected in the air intake may
only be used to adjust the interior temperature of Winter Operation reduce airflow, and if they enter the air distribution
your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to To ensure the best possible heater and defroster box, they could plug the water drains. In Winter
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if performance, make sure the engine cooling months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
equipped. system is functioning properly and the proper slush, and snow.
OPERATING T IPS amount, type, and concentration of coolant is Cabin Air Filter
used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
The Climate Control system filters out dust and
Winter months is not recommended, because it
CAUTION! pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to
may cause window fogging.
service your cabin air filter, and to have it replaced
Interior air enters the Rear Automatic
Vacation/Storage when needed.
Temperature Control system through an intake
grille, located in the right side trim panel behind For information on maintaining the Climate Control Stop/Start System — If Equipped
the third row seats. The heater outlets are system when the vehicle is being stored for an
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control system
located in the right side trim panel, just behind extended period of time, see Ú page 396.
may automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin
the rear doors. Do not block or place objects comfort. Customer settings will be maintained
directly in front of the inlet grille or heater upon return to an engine running condition.
outlets. The electrical system could overload
causing damage to the blower motor.
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped Operating Tips Chart INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer is a heating element
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS STORAGE
located at the base of the windshield.
Set the mode control to
It operates automatically once the following Glove Compartment
conditions are met: (Panel Mode),
(MAX A/C) on, and The glove compartment is located on the 2
 Activation By Front Defrost passenger side of the instrument panel.
Hot Weather And blower on high. Roll
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer activates auto- Vehicle Interior Is Very down the windows for a
matically during a cold weather manual start Hot minute to flush out the
with full defrost, and when the ambient hot air. Adjust the
temperature is below 33°F (0.6°C). controls as needed to
 Activation By Rear Defrost achieve comfort.
The Windshield Wiper De-Icer activates auto- Turn (A/C) on and
matically when the Rear Defrost is operating Warm Weather set the mode control to
and the ambient temperature is below 33°F
(Panel Mode).
(0.6°C).
 Activation By Remote Start Operation Cool Sunny Operate in (Bi-Level
Mode).
When the Remote Start is activated and the Glove Compartment Release Handle
outside ambient temperature is less than 33°F Set the mode control to
(0.6°C) the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will acti- To open the glove compartment, pull the release
Cool & Humid (Floor Mode) and
vate. Exiting Remote Start will resume its handle.
Conditions turn (A/C) on to
previous operation. If the Windshield Wiper keep windows clear.
De-Icer was active, the timer and operation will
continue. Set the mode control to
(Floor Mode). If
windshield fogging
Cold Weather
starts to occur, move
the control to (Mix
Mode).
Front Center Console Sunglasses Bin Door

The front center console contains both an upper At the front of the console a compartment is
and a lower storage area. provided for the storage of a pair of sunglasses.
To open the upper storage compartment, pull the The storage compartment access is a “push/push”
upper paddle release lever. design. Push the chrome pad on the door to open.
Push the chrome pad on the door to close.
To open the lower storage compartment, pull the
lower paddle release lever.
Rear Center Console

1 — Console Cupholders
2 — Open Lower Storage Area
3 — Covered Storage Compartment
To open the covered storage compartment, pull

Sunglasses Bin Door the upper paddle release lever on the front of the
lid.
Storage Compartment Release Levers Rear Full Center Console — If Equipped
The storage compartment may also be lifted
1 — Upper Compartment Release Lever The rear full center console contains both an upper forward. Pull the paddle release lever located on
2 — Lower Compartment Release Lever and a lower storage area. the back of the console lid.
Lift upward on the larger of the release levers to

access the lower storage compartment.
SUN S CREENS — IF E QUIPPED To lower the sun screen, gently lift the tab upward
to disengage the hooks, and feed the screen back
Sun screens are available for the second row into the base sill.
seating windows. The screens store in the sill trim
panels, and the tops of the windows are equipped USB/AUX C ONTROL
with hooks that the sun screens attach to when
This feature allows an external USB device to be 2
pulled up.
plugged into one of the USB ports, located in the
Gently pull up on the tab to raise the sun screen. center stack of the instrument panel.
Continue pulling the sun screen until the tab is
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB port will
near the top of the window.
activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
Rear Paddle Release Lever Once the screen is completely to the top of the features, if equipped. For further information, refer
window, extend the top bar of the sun screen over to “Android Auto™” or “Apple CarPlay®” in the
When the second row seats are folded flat, lifting
the two hooks attached to the top of the window. Owner’s Manual Supplement.
the console forward provides a flat load floor
surface from the cargo area. There is also access NOTE:
to the storage compartment from the third row. Two devices can be plugged in at the same time,
and both ports will provide charging capabilities.
CAUTION! Only one port can transfer data to the system at a
time.
Remove any items stored in the console
cupholders or devices with cords routing through For example, if a device is plugged into the Type A
upper storage area. Damage may occur to upper USB port and another device is plugged into the
console lid and device cables when upper Type C USB port, a message will appear and allow
storage compartment is lifted forward. you to select which device to use.
Sun Screen Extended

The following messages will appear when a NOTE:

non-phone device is plugged into the smaller and If the device’s battery completely discharges, it
larger USB ports, and when a phone device is may not communicate with the Uconnect system
plugged into the smaller and larger USB ports: until a minimum charge is attained. Leaving the
 “A new device is now connected. Previous device connected to the USB port may charge it to
connection was lost”. the required level.
 “(Phone Name) now connected. Previous Using This Feature
connection was lost”. By using a USB cable to connect an external
 “Another device is in use through the same USB device:
port. Please disconnect the first device to use USB/AUX Ports  The device can be played on the vehicle’s sound
the second device”. system, providing the artist, track title, and
Plugging in a phone or another USB device may 1 — USB C Port album information on the radio display.
cause the connection to a previous device to be 2 — USB A Port (Standard USB) NOTE:
lost. 3 — AUX Port Depending on track configuration, track infor-
Connecting AUX Or The External USB mation may not be present on the radio display.
Device Once a device is connected to the USB port, it will  The device can be controlled using the radio
begin charging and is ready for use with the buttons to play and browse the contents of the
Use a connection cable to connect an external USB device.
system. Type C and Type A charge-only USB ports
device to the vehicle’s USB port, or use an auxiliary
can be used at the same time but cannot be used  The audio device battery charges when plugged
cable to connect a device to the vehicle’s AUX port.
simultaneously while playing media. When both into the USB port.
Both are located below the climate controls.
Type C and Type A charge-only USB ports are in use
they will be charged at a reduced rate.
By using an auxiliary cable to connect an external In the third row, a set of two USB ports can be used ELECTRICAL P OWER OUTLETS
device: to charge a device. These ports are charge only.
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp)
 The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s
power outlets that can be used to power cellular
sound system. The Uconnect system will not
phones, small electronics and other low powered
display information related to the artist, track
electrical accessories. The power outlets are
title, and album information. 2
labeled with either a “key” or a “battery” symbol to
NOTE: indicate how the outlet is powered. Power outlets
When using the AUX port, the external device labeled with a key symbol are powered when the
cannot be controlled using the radio buttons. The ignition switch is in the ON/RUN position, while the
device will not charge. outlets labeled with a battery symbol are
For further information, refer to the Uconnect connected directly to the battery and powered at
Owner’s Manual Supplement. all times.
Second And Third Row USB Ports Third Row USB Ports NOTE:
The second row USB ports can be used to charge 1 — Charge Only Type C USB Port  All accessories connected to the battery
an external device. powered outlets should be removed or turned
2 — Charge Only Type A USB Port
off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the
battery against discharge.
NOTE:  Do not exceed the maximum power of
Charge unsupported devices with the Charge Only 160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
USB ports. If an unsupported device is plugged into 160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is exceeded the
a Media USB port, a message will display on the fuse protecting the system needs to be
touchscreen that the device is not supported by replaced.
the system.
 Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow
the fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can
Center Console Rear USB Ports cause damage not covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located inside the storage

area on the center stack of the instrument panel, WARNING!
below the climate controls.  If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
 Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle's battery, even when
not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventu-
Rear Cargo Power Outlet (Three Row Seating) ally, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle's
NOTE: battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
The rear cargo power outlet can be changed from
starting.
Front Power Outlet battery powered to powered by ignition in the
ON/RUN position by switching the cargo area  Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
The rear cargo power outlet is located in the right power outlet fuse from F44B to F44A in the rear coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
rear cargo area when the vehicle is equipped with power distribution center Ú page 359. degrade the battery even more quickly. Only
three row seating. When the vehicle is equipped use these intermittently and with greater
with two row seating, the cargo area outlet is WARNING! caution.
located on the left side trim panel.
To avoid serious injury or death:  After the use of high power draw accessories,
 Only devices designed for use in this type of or long periods of the vehicle not being started
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt (with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle
outlet. must be driven a sufficient length of time to
allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's
 Do not touch with wet hands. battery.
 Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
(Continued)
POWER I NVERTER — IF E QUIPPED WARNING!

Your vehicle may be equipped with a 15 Watt
3 Amp Qi wireless charging pad located inside of
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet To avoid serious injury or death: the storage area below the climate controls. This
located on the back of the center console to charging pad is designed to wirelessly charge your
convert DC current to AC current. This outlet can  Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
Qi enabled mobile phone. Qi is a standard that
power cellular phones, electronics and other low  Do not touch with wet hands. allows wireless charging of your mobile phone. 2
power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts.
 Close the lid when not in use. Your mobile phone must be designed for Qi
Certain video game consoles exceed this power
wireless charging. If the phone is not equipped
limit, as will most power tools.  If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an with Qi wireless charging functionality, an
electric shock and failure. aftermarket sleeve or a specialized back plate can
be purchased from your mobile phone provider or
WIRELESS C HARGING PAD — a local electronics retailer. Please see your
phone’s Owner’s Manual for further information.
I F E QUIPPED
The wireless charging pad is equipped with an
anti-slip mat to hold your mobile phone in place,
and an LED indicator light.
LED Indicator Status:
 No Light: Charging pad is idle or searching for a
device.
Power Inverter
 Blue Light: Device is detected and is charging.
The power inverter is designed with built-in  Red Light/Flashing: Internal error or foreign
overload protection. If the power rating of object is detected.
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter
automatically shuts down. Once the electrical
device has been removed from the outlet the Wireless Charging Pad
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on
electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
NOTE: There is a single switch on the front passenger

door and rear passenger doors which operate the WARNING!
 All vehicle doors must be closed for the wireless
charging pad to operate. windows for only that door. Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power windows.
 Using a phone case may interfere with wireless
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
charging.
in a location accessible to children, and do not
 If the phone moves on the pad causing the red leave the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the
light to illuminate, the phone will have to be ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
picked up and placed back on the charging pad unattended children, can become entrapped by
to resume charging. the windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in serious
CAUTION! injury or death.
The key fob should not be placed on the
charging pad or within 6 inches (15 cm) of it. Automatic Window Features
Doing so can cause excessive heat buildup and Driver’s Door Power Window Switches
damage to the fob. Placing the fob in close Both the driver and front passenger windows, and
NOTE: if equipped, both rear windows, may have
proximity of the charging pad blocks the fob from
being detected by the vehicle and prevents the  The power window switches remain active for up Auto-Down and Auto-Up operations.
vehicle from starting. to 10 minutes after the ignition has been placed Auto-Down Feature
in the OFF position. Opening a vehicle front door
will cancel this feature. For windows equipped with the AUTO feature, push
the window switch down to the second detent,
WINDOWS  The window controls will operate only when release, and the window will go down
the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the ON/RUN automatically.
POWER W INDOW CONTROLS position.
To stop the window from going all the way down
The power window controls, located on the driver's  The power windows may be operated from during the Auto-Down operation, pull up or push
door trim panel, operate the window movement for outside of the vehicle by using the key fob. For down on the switch briefly.
all four power windows. more information, see Ú page 18.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection Reset Auto-Up

For windows equipped with the AUTO feature, lift Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
the window switch up to the second detent, and window may need to be reset. To reset Auto-Up:
release; the window will go up automatically.
Front Doors
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window 2
completely and continue to hold the switch up
switch briefly.
for an additional two seconds after the
To close the window part way, lift the window window is closed.
switch briefly and release it when you want the
Rear Doors
window to stop. Power Window Lockout Switch
1. Pull the window switch up to close the window
If the window runs into any obstacle during
completely and continue to hold the switch up
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go
for an additional two seconds after the
WIND B UFFETING
back down. Remove the obstacle and use the
window is closed. Wind buffeting can be described as the perception
window switch again to close the window.
2. Release the window switch, and within five of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound
NOTE: seconds, pull the window switch up again for in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting
Any impact due to rough road conditions may an additional two seconds. with the windows down, or the sunroof (if
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly equipped) in certain open or partially open
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch Window Lockout Switch positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be
lightly and hold to close the window manually. minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
The window lockout switch on the driver's door trim
windows open, open the front and rear windows
WARNING! panel allows you to disable the window controls on
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting
the rear passenger doors. To disable the window
There is no anti-pinch protection when the occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
controls, push and release the window lockout
window is almost closed. To avoid personal opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
button (the indicator light on the button will turn
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fingers window.
on). To enable the window controls, push and
and all objects from the window path before release the window lockout button again (the
closing. indicator light on the button will turn off).
POWER SUNROOF WARNING!

Push the switch forward and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will close
SINGLE P ANE POWER S UNROOF —  Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, automatically from any position. The sunroof will
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never close fully and stop automatically.
I F EQUIPPED leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a During Express Open or Express Close operation,
The power sunroof switches are located on the location accessible to children. Do not leave any other movement of the sunroof switch will stop
overhead console between the courtesy/reading the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the the sunroof.
lights. ON/RUN position. Occupants, particularly
Manual Open/Close
unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may rearward to full open.
result in serious injury or death. To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in
 In a collision, there is a greater risk of being the forward position.
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. Any release of the switch during open or close
You could also be seriously injured or killed. operation will stop the sunroof movement. The
Always fasten your seat belt properly and sunroof will remain in a partially opened position
make sure all passengers are also properly until the switch is operated and held again.
secured. NOTE:
 Do not allow small children to operate the If the sunshade is in the closed position when
Power Sunroof Switches
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body Express or Manual Open operation is initiated the
1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof parts, or any object, to project through the sunshade will automatically open with the sunroof
2 — Venting Sunroof sunroof opening. Injury may result. glass.
Venting The Sunroof
Opening And Closing The Sunroof Push and release the Vent button within one half
second and the sunroof will open to the vent
Express Open/Close
position. This is called “Express Vent”, and it will
Push the switch rearward and release it within occur regardless of sunroof position. During
one-half second and the sunroof will open Express Vent operation, any other actuation of the
automatically from any position. The sunroof will switch will stop the sunroof.
open fully and stop automatically.
Pinch Protect Feature Sunroof Maintenance

WARNING!
This feature will detect an obstruction in the Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to
opening of the sunroof during Express Close clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and  Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the clear out any debris that may have collected in the or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically tracks. leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or in a
retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs. location accessible to children. Do not leave 2
DUAL P ANE POWER S UNROOF — the Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ Ignition in the ON/
NOTE: RUN position. Occupants, particularly unat-
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result I F E QUIPPED
tended children, can become entrapped by
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will The power sunroof switches are located on the the power sunroof while operating the power
disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual overhead console between the courtesy/reading sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result
Mode. lights. in serious injury or death.
Sunshade Operation  In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
the sunshade will open automatically as the You could also be seriously injured or killed.
sunroof opens. Always fasten your seat belt properly and
NOTE: make sure all passengers are also properly
The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is secured.
open.  Do not allow small children to operate the
Ignition Off Operation sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other body
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up parts, or any object, to project through the
to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition sunroof opening. Injury may result.
switch is placed in the OFF position. Opening either Power Sunroof Switches
front door will cancel this feature. 1 — Opening/Closing Sunroof
NOTE: 2 — Venting Sunroof
Ignition Off time is programmable through the 3 — Opening/Closing Sunshade
Uconnect system Ú page 204.
Opening And Closing The Sunroof Any release of the switch during open or close If the sunroof is open or vented, the sunshade
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The cannot be closed beyond the half open position.
The sunroof has two programmed automatic stops
sunroof will remain in a partially opened position Pushing the sunshade close switch when the
for the sunroof open position: a comfort stop
until the switch is operated and held again. sunroof is open/vented and the sunshade is at half
position and a full open position. The comfort stop
NOTE: open position will first automatically close the
position will minimize wind buffeting in the interior.
If the sunshade is in the closed position when sunroof prior to the sunshade closing.
Express Open/Close
Express or Manual Open operation is initiated the Express Open/Close
Push the switch rearward and release it within sunshade will automatically open to the half open Push the sunshade switch rearward and release it
one-half second and the sunroof will open position prior to the sunroof opening. within one-half second, the sunshade will open to
automatically to the comfort stop position. Push
Venting The Sunroof the half open position and stop automatically.
the switch rearward and release it again to
Push and release the Vent button within one half Push and release the switch again from the half
continue to the full open position.
second and the sunroof will open to the vent open position and the sunshade will open to the
Push the switch forward and release it within full open position and stop automatically.
position. This is called “Express Vent” and it will
one-half second and the sunroof will close
occur regardless of sunroof position. During Push the sunshade switch forward and release it
automatically from any position. The sunroof will
Express Vent operation, any movement of the within one-half second and the sunshade will close
close fully and stop automatically.
switch will stop the sunroof. automatically.
During Express Open or Express Close operation,
any other movement of the sunroof switch will stop
NOTE: During Express Open or Express Close operation,
If the sunshade is closed, it will automatically open any other actuation of the sunroof switches will
the sunroof.
to half open position prior to the roof opening to stop the sunshade in a partially open position.
Manual Open/Close the vent position. Manual Open/Close
To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch Opening And Closing The Power Sunshade Push and hold the sunshade switch rearward, the
rearward to open to the comfort stop position.
The sunshade has two programmed open sunshade will open to the half open position and
Push and hold the switch rearward again to
positions: half open and full open positions. When stop automatically. Push and hold the sunshade
continue to open to full open.
operating the sunshade from the closed position, switch again and the sunshade will open to the full
To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the sunshade will always stop at the half open open position.
the forward position. position regardless of express or manual open Push and hold the switch forward and the
operation. The switch must be pushed again to sunshade will close and stop at full closed position.
continue on to full open position.
Releasing the switch while the sunshade is in

motion will stop the sunshade in a partially open
HOOD
position. OPENING T HE HOOD
Pinch Protect Feature To open the hood, two latches must be released.
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
1. Pull the release lever located at the bottom of 2
the driver’s side of the instrument panel.
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically
retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
NOTE: Safety Latch Location
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will CLOSING THE H OOD
disable and the sunroof must be closed in Manual
Mode. In one continuous motion, pull down on the front
Ignition Off Operation edge of the hood with moderate force until the
angle is below the crossover point (where the gas
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up props are no longer resisting) and let the hood
to approximately 10 minutes after the ignition continue to fall closed from its own inertia.
switch is placed in the OFF position. Opening either Hood Release
front door will cancel this feature. 2. Reach under the hood from outside the WARNING!
NOTE: vehicle, move the safety latch to the left and
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving
Ignition Off time is programmable through the lift the hood.
your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it
Uconnect system Ú page 204. could open when the vehicle is in motion and
Sunroof Maintenance block your vision. Failure to follow this warning
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to could result in serious injury or death.
clean the glass panel. Periodically check for and
clear out any debris that may have collected in the
tracks.
LIFTGATE NOTE:
When you push the electronic liftgate release
TO LOCK/CLOSE THE L IFTGATE
There are several different ways to close the
TO UNLOCK/O PEN THE LIFTGATE button, either only the liftgate will unlock, or all the
liftgate:
doors and the liftgate will unlock, depending on the
The power liftgate may be opened by selected setting in the Uconnect system  Manually (grab the liftgate closing handle and
pushing the liftgate button on the key fob Ú page 204. pull in a downward motion)
or by pushing the electronic liftgate
NOTE:  Key fob
release button.
 Use the power door lock switch on either front  Hands-free (if equipped)
Push the liftgate button on the key fob twice within
door trim panel or the key fob to lock and unlock
five seconds to open the power liftgate. Once the  Liftgate close button in the cargo area
the liftgate.
liftgate is open, pushing the button twice within With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
five seconds a second time will close the liftgate.  The driver's door lock cylinder will not lock or
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Passive Entry
unlock the liftgate. button located to the left of the electronic liftgate
release button, will lock the vehicle only.
WARNING!
If the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate can be closed
Driving with the liftgate open can allow by pushing the liftgate close button located in the
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You cargo area on the left rear trim panel, near the
and your passengers could be injured by these liftgate opening. If the liftgate is in motion, pushing
fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when you are the liftgate close button a second time will reverse
operating the vehicle. the liftgate operation.
NOTE:
The liftgate can also be opened manually by
Liftgate Entry
pushing the electronic liftgate release button and
1 — Passive Entry Button pulling upward in one fluid motion.
2 — Electronic Liftgate Release Button
2. Push and hold the liftgate close button,

located on the left side trim panel inside the
cargo area, for three seconds. An audible
chime will be heard to let you know the height
has been saved.
2
To set the saved height setting to a new setting,
proceed as follows:
1. Open the liftgate, then manually push the
liftgate upward to its full open position.
Liftgate Close Button 2. Manually pull the liftgate down to the new Liftgate Service Release
desired height and hold the liftgate close
ADJUSTABLE POWER LIFTGATE HEIGHT button for three seconds until the audible
2. From inside the gate, an eyelet can be seen.
Place the screwdriver in the eyelet.
The maximum height that the liftgate will open can chime is heard.
3. Rotate the screwdriver handle to actuate the
be adjusted and saved so that the liftgate will only
Power Liftgate Malfunction Procedure: lever and release the latch.
open to the desired height. To set a desired height,
proceed as follows: 1. In the event of a power malfunction to the 4. If liftgate is left open for an extended period of
liftgate, the liftgate can be released by time, the liftgate may need to be closed
1. Open the liftgate fully, then manually pull
accessing the service release feature in the manually to reset power liftgate functionality.
down on the liftgate to the desired height.
latch. This can be done using a 3 mm
diameter screwdriver.
HANDS-FREE L IFTGATE — IF E QUIPPED When a valid kicking motion is completed, the  There are pinch sensors attached to the side of
liftgate will chime, the hazard lights will flash and the liftgate opening. Light pressure anywhere
the liftgate will open after approximately one along these strips will cause the liftgate to
second, or close after approximately three return to the open position.
seconds. These settings can be enabled or  If the power liftgate encounters multiple
disabled through Uconnect Settings Ú page 204. obstructions within the same cycle, the system
NOTE: will automatically stop. If this occurs, the liftgate
 Opening or closing the Hands-Free Liftgate must be operated manually.
requires a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft  The power liftgate will release, but not power
(1.5 m) of the liftgate handle. If a valid Passive open, in temperatures below −12°F (−24°C).
Entry key fob is not within 5 ft (1.5 m), the lift- Be sure to remove any buildup of snow or ice
gate will not respond to any kicks. from the liftgate before opening the liftgate.
Hands-Free Liftgate Activation Zone  The Hands-Free Liftgate feature may be turned  If the liftgate is left open for an extended period
To open or close the liftgate using hands-free on or off through the Uconnect system of time (approximately one hour), the liftgate
activation, use a straight in and out kicking motion Ú page 204. may need to be closed manually to reset power
under the vehicle activation zone in the general  The Hands-Free Liftgate feature should be liftgate functionality.
location below the rear license plate. The turned off during jacking, tire changing, manual
activation zone is about 1.8 ft (0.5 m) from side to car wash, and vehicle service. WARNING!
side. Do not move your foot sideways or in a  Driving with the liftgate open can allow
 The Hands-Free Liftgate feature can be acti-
sweeping motion or the sensors may not detect the poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
vated by any metallic object making a similar
motion. You and your passengers could be injured by
in-and-out motion under the rear fascia/
NOTE: bumper, such as cleaning using a metal broom. these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when
The activation zone is the same for vehicles you are operating the vehicle.
 The Hands-Free Liftgate will only operate when
equipped with or without a trailer tow package. the transmission is in PARK.  If you are required to drive with the liftgate
 If anything obstructs the Hands-Free Liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed,
while it is opening or closing, the liftgate will and the climate control blower switch is set at
automatically reverse to the closed/open posi- high speed. Do not use the recirculation
tion, provided it meets sufficient resistance. mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position. Additional storage can be found under the storage
However, because the gas pressure drops with lid. To access the lower storage, lift the handle and
temperature, it may be necessary to assist the raise the storage lid.
props when opening the liftgate in cold weather.
NOTE:
Allow the power system to open the liftgate. 2
Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may
activate the liftgate obstacle detection feature and
stop the power operation or reverse its direction.
WARNING! Tie-Down Hooks (Vehicles With Third Row Seating)

During power operation, personal injury or cargo
damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel
path is clear. Make sure the liftgate is closed
Lift Storage Lid Handle
and latched before driving away.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks
CARGO AREA FEATURES The cargo tie-downs, located on the cargo area
sides, should be used to safely secure loads when
Cargo Storage the vehicle is moving.
The load floor is designed for a maximum load of NOTE:
300 lb (136 kg). The cargo tie-downs are designed for a maximum
There is a removable storage bin located on the load of 300 lb (136 kg). Tie-Down Hooks (Vehicles Without Third Row Seating)
left side of the rear cargo area.
WARNING! WARNING!
 Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a  Place as much cargo as possible in front of the
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or rear axle. Too much weight or improperly
accident, a tie-down could pull loose and allow placed weight over or behind the rear axle can
the child seat to come loose. A child could be cause the vehicle to sway.
badly injured. Use only the anchors provided
 Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
for child seat tethers.
top of the seatback. This could impair visibility
 To help protect against personal injury, or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden
passengers should not be seated in the rear stop or accident.
cargo area. The rear cargo space is intended Rear Cargo Cover
for load carrying purposes only, not for
Retractable Cargo Area Cover —
passengers, who should sit in seats and use WARNING!
seat belts. If Equipped
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle
The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
The weight and position of cargo and could cause injury. It could fly around in a
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting
passengers can change the vehicle center of sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle.
or protect passengers from loose cargo.
gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor
control resulting in personal injury, follow these To cover the cargo area: or in the passenger compartment. Remove the
guidelines for loading your vehicle: 1. Grab the cover at the center handle and pull cover from the vehicle when taken from its
over the cargo area. mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
 Do not carry loads that exceed the load limits
described on the label attached to the left 2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the
door or left door center pillar. slots in the pillar trim cover.
 Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. 3. The liftgate may be opened with the cargo
Put heavier objects as low and as far forward cover in place.
as possible.
(Continued)
Foldable Cargo Area Cover — If Equipped To store the foldable cargo area cover, reverse the
installation steps and replace the cover into its
The purpose of this cover is for privacy, not to
storage pouch.
secure loads. It will not prevent cargo from shifting
or protect passengers from loose cargo.
Step 2
3. Hook the straps to the outside post of the rear
head restraint on each side.
Folding The Cargo Cover
Foldable Cargo Area Cover 1 — Remove Cover From Vehicle
To cover the cargo area: 2 — Twist Cover
1. Remove the folded cover from the storage 3 — Push Twisted Cover Inward
pouch, and unfold using a twisting motion. 4 — Place Folded Cover In Pouch
2. Insert the pins on the ends of the cover into the
slots on each side of the pillar trim.
WARNING!
In a collision, a loose cargo cover in the vehicle
Step 3 could cause injury. It could fly around in a
sudden stop and strike someone in the vehicle.
NOTE: Do not store the cargo cover on the cargo floor
The liftgate may be opened with the cargo cover in or in the passenger compartment. Remove the
place. cover from the vehicle when taken from its
mounting. Do not store it in the vehicle.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED NOTE:

If any cargo (or any metallic object) is placed over CAUTION!
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may  To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle,
loads on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. experience interruption of satellite radio reception. do not exceed the maximum roof rack load
The load must not exceed 150 lb (68 kg), and For improved satellite radio reception, place the capacity of 150 lb (68 kg). Always distribute
should be uniformly distributed over the luggage rear crossbar in the forward of the two rear heavy loads as evenly as possible and secure
rack crossbars. crossbar positions. the load appropriately.
NOTE:  Long loads which extend over the windshield,
See an authorized dealer to order and install WARNING!
such as wood panels or surfboards, or loads
Mopar® crossbars built specifically for this roof Cargo must be securely tied down before driving with large frontal area should be secured to
rack system. your vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack the vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting
crossbars. The roof rack does not increase the in personal injury or property damage. Follow  Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
total load carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
the total load of cargo inside the vehicle plus that your roof rack. on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to natural
on the external rack does not exceed the maximum causes or nearby truck traffic, can add sudden
vehicle load capacity. Place one crossbar in the upward lift to a load. This is especially true on
forward position. Place the rear crossbar in one of CAUTION! large flat loads and may result in damage to
the two rear optional positions based on the load the cargo or your vehicle.
 To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle,
being secured.  The use of vehicle systems that would adjust
do not carry any loads on the roof rack without
To move the crossbars, loosen the attachments, the crossbars installed. The load should be the ride heights (such as Selec-Terrain modes
located at the upper edge of each crossbar, secured and placed on top of the crossbars, Rock or Mud) is not recommended when using
approximately eight turns using the anti-theft not directly on the roof. If it is necessary to the Roof Luggage Rack to carry a load.
wrench provided with the Mopar® crossbars. place the load on the roof, place a blanket or
Then, move the crossbar to the desired position, some other protection between the load and
keeping the crossbars parallel to the rack frame. the roof surface.
Once the crossbar is in the desired position, (Continued)
retighten with the wrench to lock the crossbar into
position.
95
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Holding the OK button on the Instrument Cluster Display controls located on the steering wheel will allow you to change your display from Digital to Analog.
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ESCRIPTIONS WARNING!

3. Tachometer
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
1. Speedometer A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or per minute (RPM x 1000).
 Indicates vehicle speed. others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
4. Fuel Gauge
2. Temperature Gauge coolant. It is recommended to call an authorized
dealer for service if your vehicle overheats  The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
 The temperature gauge shows engine fuel tank when the Keyless Push Button
Ú page 353.
coolant temperature. Any reading within the Ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
normal range indicates that the engine
 The fuel pump symbol points to
cooling system is operating satisfactorily. CAUTION! the side of the vehicle where the
 The pointer will likely indicate a higher fuel door is located.
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
temperature when driving in hot weather,
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
up mountain grades, or when towing a NOTE:
reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed The Instrument Cluster Warning Indicators will illu-
vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the upper limits of the normal operating minate briefly for a bulb check when the ignition is
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
range. first cycled.
the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine
off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 97
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Holding the OK button on the Instrument Cluster Display controls located on the steering wheel will allow you to change your display from Analog to Digital.
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ESCRIPTIONS WARNING!

4. Fuel Gauge
 The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
1. Tachometer A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or fuel tank when the Keyless Push Button
 Indicates the engine speed in revolutions others could be badly burned by steam or boiling Ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
per minute (RPM x 1000). coolant. It is recommended to call an authorized
 The fuel pump symbol points to
2. Speedometer dealer for service if your vehicle overheats
the side of the vehicle where the
Ú page 353.
 Indicates vehicle speed. fuel door is located.
3. Temperature Gauge
NOTE:
 The temperature gauge shows engine CAUTION! The Instrument Cluster Warning Indicators will illu-
coolant temperature. Any reading within the Driving with a hot engine cooling system could minate briefly for a bulb check when the ignition is
normal range indicates that the engine damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge first cycled.
cooling system is operating satisfactorily. reads “H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
 The pointer will likely indicate a higher vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
temperature when driving in hot weather, the pointer drops back into the normal range. If
up mountain grades, or when towing a the pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed off immediately and call an authorized dealer for
the upper limits of the normal operating service.
range.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY LOCATION AND CONTROLS

Your vehicle will be equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information to
the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode,
opening/closing of a door will activate the display
for viewing, and display the total miles, or
kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important 3
information about your vehicle’s systems and
features. Using a driver interactive display located
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
on the instrument panel, your instrument cluster
display can show you how systems are working and 1 — Up Arrow Button
give you warnings when they are not. The steering Instrument Cluster Display/Controls Location
2 — OK Button
wheel mounted controls allow you to scroll through 1 — Instrument Cluster Display Screen 3 — Menu Button
the main menus and submenus. You can access 2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls 4 — Left Arrow Button
the specific information you want and make
selections and adjustments. 5 — Down Arrow Button
The system allows the driver to select information 6 — Right Arrow Button
by pushing the following buttons mounted on the
steering wheel:
1. Up Arrow Button 6. Right Arrow Button

Push and release the up arrow button to Push and release the right arrow button to
scroll upward through the main menu. access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
2. OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the infor- Display Options
mation screens or submenu screens of a main Holding OK will also allow you to change your
menu item. Push and hold the OK button for display to Digital or Analog.
one second to reset displayed/selected fea-
 Digital theme will be the default theme
tures that can be reset.
 Menu screen times out after 10 seconds. Press Menu Button
3. MENU Button OK to reactivate
 Navigate Left or Right to highlight desired Tile
Push the MENU button to access/select the in-  Speedometer must always be present
formation screens or submenu screens of the  Press OK to select the tile and navigate to the
 Relevant warning notifications and other pop-up selected submenu and press OK again to add
Home Screen display. Push and hold the OK
info will still be displayed in the main screen your selection to your tile view
button to enter edit mode. area (In this case the speed moves to the top)
 The main menu options are Main Menu, Vehicle
4. Left Arrow Button Custom Tile Configuration Info, Navigation, Audio, and Off Road
Push the left arrow button to return to the To customize the instrument cluster further, you The instrument cluster display is located in the
main menu from an info screen or submenu are able to select up to five tiles to display center portion of the cluster and consist of multiple
item. information based on your needs. sections:
5. Down Arrow Button  Press the MENU button for the Home Screen  Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will
display illuminate in black under normal conditions,
Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu. yellow for non critical warnings and red for crit-
ical warnings
 Submenu Dots — Whenever there are
submenus available, the position within the
submenus is shown here
 Reconfigurable Telltales/Information  Unstored Messages ENGINE OIL LIFE RESET

 Gear Selector Status (PRND) This message type is displayed indefinitely or
Oil Change Required
 Driver Interactive Display (Compass, Temp, until the condition that activated the message is
cleared. Examples of this message type are Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
Range to Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average Fuel
“Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal is left on) and indicator system. The “Oil Change Required”
Economy, Current Fuel Economy and Time)
“Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle with the message will display in the instrument cluster
 Air Suspension Status — If Equipped lights on). display for five seconds after a single chime has
 Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Status — If Equipped sounded, to indicate the next scheduled oil change
 Unstored Messages Until RUN
interval. The engine oil change indicator system is 3
The instrument cluster display will normally display These messages deal primarily with the Remote duty cycle based, which means the engine oil
the main menu or the screens of a selected feature Start feature. This message type is displayed change interval may fluctuate, dependent upon
of the main menu. The main display area also until the ignition is in the RUN state. Examples of your personal driving style.
displays pop-up messages that consist of this message type are “Remote Start Canceled -
approximately 60 possible warning or information Unless reset, this message will continue to display
Door Ajar” and “Press Brake Pedal and Push
messages. These pop-up messages fall into each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
Button to Start.”
several categories: position. To turn off the message temporarily, push
 Five Second Unstored Messages and release the OK or arrow buttons. To reset the
 Five Second Stored Messages
When the appropriate conditions occur, this oil change indicator system (after performing the
When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message takes control of the main scheduled maintenance), refer to the following
type of message takes control of the main display area for five seconds and then returns to procedure.
display area for five seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An example of this
the previous screen. Most of the messages of message type is “Automatic High Beams On.”
this type are then stored (as long as the condi-
tion that activated it remains active) and can be
reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item.
Examples of this message type are “Right Front
Turn Signal Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure.”
Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ 4. Push and hold the OK button to reset oil life. If Secondary Method Of Resetting Engine Oil Life
Ignition conditions are met, the gauge and numeric 1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
Use the steering wheel instrument cluster display display will update to show 100%. If conditions ENGINE START/STOP button and place the
controls for the following procedure(s): are not met a pop-up message of “To reset oil ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not start
life engine must be off with ignition in run” will the engine).
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the be displayed (for five seconds), and the user
ENGINE START/STOP button and place the will remain at the Oil Life screen. 2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly, three
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not start times within 10 seconds.
the engine). 5. Push and release the up or down arrow 3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the
button to exit the submenu screen. ENGINE START/STOP button once to return the
2. Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu to ignition to the OFF position.
NOTE:
“Vehicle Info.” If the indicator message illuminates when you start NOTE:
3. Push and release the right arrow button to the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not If the indicator message illuminates when you start
access the “Oil Life” screen. reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure. the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
DISPLAY A ND MESSAGES
Includes the following, but not limited to:
Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to R Front Seat Belts Unbuckled Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled
Doors Open Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled Traction Control Off
Vehicle Speed Too High To Shift to D Washer Fluid Low Oil Pressure Low
Hood Open Oil Change Due Fuel Low 3
Shift Not Allowed Service Anti-lock Brake System Service Electronic Throttle Control
Service Shifter Service Power Steering Cruise Off
Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to P Cruise Ready ACC Override
Service Transmission Cruise Set To XXX mph or km/h Cruise Set To XXX km/h
Liftgate Open Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) Service Tire Pressure System
Door Open Park Brake Engaged Brake Fluid Low
Service Air Bag Warning Light Lights On Engine Temperature Hot
Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset Right Front Turn Signal Light Out Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out
Service Air Bag System Left Front Turn Signal Light Out Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out
Remote Start Canceled Liftgate Open Ignition or Accessory On Vehicle Not In Park
Remote Start Canceled Time Expired Remote Start Active Push Start Button Remote Start Canceled Fuel Low
Remote Start Canceled Hood Open Remote Start Canceled Door Open Close Fuel Door
Check The Rear Seat
The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the white or yellow telltales area on the left, and the green or red telltales area on the right.
I NSTRUMENT CLUSTER D ISPLAY MENU  Vehicle Info MAIN MENU

I TEMS  Fuel Economy Push and release the up or down arrow
 Gauge Summary button until the Drive menu title is displayed in the
The instrument cluster display can be used to view
 Oil Life instrument cluster display.
the main menu items for several features. Use the
 Tire Pressure Speedometer
up and down arrow buttons to scroll through
the driver interactive display menu options until  Stop/Start — If Equipped Push and release the up or down arrow
the desired menu is reached. button until the Speedometer menu title is
 Trip
NOTE: displayed in the instrument cluster display. Push
 Trip A and release the OK button to toggle units (mph or
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.  Trip B km/h) of the speedometer. Hold the OK button to
 Navigation toggle between Analog and Digital speedometer.
Home Screen
 Map Display Night Vision — If Equipped
Press the Menu button to display the Home
Screen.  Off Road While viewing the Speedometer menu
 Terrain Status — If Equipped
title, push and release the left or
Push and release the left or right arrow
button to highlight the desired selection. Push and right arrow button until the Night
 Vehicle Dynamics
Vision menu title is displayed in the instrument
release the OK button to select. Press the up or  Pitch & Roll cluster display. Pedestrian/Animal icons will be
down arrow button to select a different screen  Stored Messages displayed in the top left location Ú page 180.
within the selected category. If the Menu button is
pressed in this view, the instrument cluster will  Messages
return to the previously displayed screen.  Settings
Home Screen Options  Screen Setup
 Main Menu  Head Up Display — If Equipped
 Speedometer
 Driver Assist — If Equipped
 Night Vision — If Equipped
Driver Assist — If Equipped NOTE:  If the Tire Pressure system requires service,
While viewing the Speedometer menu title, push The Range feature is not able to be reset through “Service Tire Pressure System” is displayed.
the instrument cluster display controls. Tire Pressure is an information only function, and
and release the left or right arrow button
until the Driver Assist menu title is displayed in the Gauge Summary cannot be reset Ú page 264.
instrument cluster display. The Driver Assist  Coolant Temperature — If Equipped Stop/Start Status — If Equipped
screen indicates the current status of ACC, Active Displays the current temperature of the coolant.  Display current status of Stop/Start system.
Lane Management and Active Driving Assist/
 Transmission Temperature
Assist+/Pilot. Push and release the OK button TRIP 3
again to change between Zoomed In and Zoomed Displays the actual transmission temperature.
Out view (“Press OK to Zoom In” will display when  Oil Temperature Push and release the up or down arrow
in Zoomed Out view/“Press OK to Zoom Out” will button until the Trip menu title is displayed in the
Displays the actual oil temperature.
display when in Zoomed In view). instrument cluster display. Toggle the left or
 Oil Pressure
right arrow button to select Trip A or Trip B. The
VEHICLE INFO Displays the actual oil pressure. Trip information will display the following:
Push and release the up or down arrow  Battery Voltage
 Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or km)
button until the Vehicle Info title is highlighted in Displays the current voltage level of the battery. traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
the instrument cluster display. Push the left or Oil Life  Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average
right arrow button to scroll through the  Displays the current oil life of the vehicle. fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of
information submenus. Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Fuel Economy  Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time of
 If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle icon is
 Average Fuel Economy displayed with tire pressure values in each travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
 Current Fuel Economy corner of the icon. Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
 Range To Empty  If one or more tires have low pressure, “Inflate
Tire To XX” is displayed with the vehicle icon and
 Press the OK button to reset the average fuel
the tire pressure values in each corner of the
economy
icon with the pressure value of the low tire are
displayed in a different color than the other tire
pressure value.
NAVIGATION — IF EQUIPPED AUDIO Screen Setup

Push and release the up or down arrow Push and release the up or down arrow Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Navigation display title is button until the Audio Menu title is highlighted in button until the Settings Menu title is highlighted in
highlighted in the instrument cluster display. the instrument cluster display. This menu will the instrument cluster display. Push and release
display the audio source information, including the the OK button to enter the submenus and follow
OFF ROAD Song name, Artist name, and audio source with an the prompts on the screen as needed. The Settings
accompanying graphic. feature allows you to change what information is
Push and release the up or down arrow
displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the
button until the Off Road Menu title is highlighted. STORED MESSAGES location that information is displayed.
Push the left or right arrow button to scroll
the submenus. Push and release the up or down arrow Upper Left
button until the Messages Menu item is
 Terrain Status — If Equipped Fuel Economy
highlighted. This feature shows the number of None Time
 Selec-Terrain Status Current
stored warning messages. Pushing the left or
 Air Suspension Status right arrow button will allow you to see what the Fuel Economy
Outside Temp Trip B Distance
 Vehicle Dynamics stored messages are. Average
 Wheel Articulation Range To

SETTINGS Compass Trip A Distance
Empty (RTE)
 Transfer Case Status — If Equipped
NOTE:
 Steering Angle The Head Up Display (HUD) – If Equipped feature
 Sway Bar Status — If Equipped Settings are available at any vehicle speed Upper Right
 Axle Lock Status — If Equipped
Ú page 107. Fuel Economy
None Time
Current
 Pitch And Roll
Fuel Economy
 Vehicle Pitch Outside Temp Trip B Distance
Average
 Vehicle Roll
Range To
Compass Trip A Distance
Empty (RTE)
Current Gear NOTE:

 On Menus with (show/hide) can push the OK button to
choose whether to show or hide this menu on the
 Off
instrument cluster display.
Tachometer — Digital Theme Only Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default Settings)
 Show with Digital Theme  Restore
 Hide with Digital Theme  Cancel
Odometer 3
HEAD U P DISPLAY (HUD) —
 Show
I F E QUIPPED HUD ON/OFF
 Hide
NOTE: When “Display On” is selected, the HUD will
Favorite Menus The HUD feature Settings are available at any display on the windshield. When it is not
Trip Off Road vehicle speed. selected, it will not display on the windshield.
Main Menu
(Show/Hide) (Show/Hide) Push and release the up or down arrow  Content and Layout
Navigation button until the Settings Menu icon/title is
Vehicle Info Messages  Simple: Speed, Speed Limit
(Show/Hide) highlighted in the instrument cluster display. Push
 Standard: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation
Audio and release the left or right arrow button
Settings until the HUD Menu icon/title is highlighted in the
(Show/Hide)
instrument cluster display. Push and release the
OK button to enter HUD. Use the up or
down arrow button to select a setting, then
push and release the OK button to adjust the
setting.
 ON/OFF
 Display Height
 Brightness
NOTE:
 The HUD basic settings (Brightness, Display
Height and Non Custom layouts), are controlled
through the Settings Screen in the Instrument
Cluster Ú page 99.
NOTE:
If current theme is set to Digital, tachometer will
Standard Mode Advanced Mode not display while in the Settings menu.
When “Standard” mode is selected, the HUD When “Advanced” mode is selected, the HUD BATTERY SAVER O N/BATTERY S AVER
image is split into thirds with the speed limit displays the vehicle speed, turn-by-turn naviga- MODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL L OAD
indicator shown to the left, vehicle speed in the tion, speed limit, driver assist function(s), and
center, and turn-by-turn navigation to the right. current gear. REDUCTION ACTIONS — I F EQUIPPED
 Advanced: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation,  Custom 1: Speed, Speed Limit This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent Battery
Driver Assist (ACC/Cruise, Active Lane  Custom 2: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation Sensor (IBS) to perform additional monitoring of
Management, Active Driving Assist), Gear the electrical system and status of the vehicle
 Custom 3: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation,
battery.
Driver Assist (ACC/Cruise, Active Lane
Management, Active Driving Assist)
 Custom 4: Speed, Speed Limit, Navigation,
Driver Assist (ACC/Cruise, Active Lane
Management, Active Driving Assist), Gear
In cases when the IBS detects charging system The electrical loads that may be switched off (if  Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are equipped), and vehicle functions which can be long parking periods).
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions will affected by load reduction:  The vehicle was parked for an extended period
take place to extend the driving time and distance  Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel of time (weeks, months).
of the vehicle. This is done by reducing power to or
turning off non-essential electrical loads.  Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors  The battery was recently replaced and was not
 HVAC System charged completely.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a risk  115 Volt AC Power Inverter System  The battery was discharged by an electrical load
of battery depletion to the point where the vehicle left on when the vehicle was parked. 3
 Audio and Telematics System
may stall due to lack of electrical supply, or will not  The battery was used for an extended period
restart after the current drive cycle. Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or with the engine not running to supply radio,
more of the following conditions: lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appliances
When load reduction is activated, the message
 The charging system cannot deliver enough like vacuum cleaners, game consoles and
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will
appear in the instrument cluster. electrical power to the vehicle system because similar devices.
the electrical loads are larger than the capability What to do when an electrical load reduction
These messages indicate the vehicle battery has a of the charging system. The charging system is
low state of charge and continues to lose electrical action message is present (“Battery Saver On” or
still functioning properly. “Battery Saver Mode”)
charge at a rate that the charging system cannot
 Turning on all possible vehicle electrical loads During a trip:
sustain.
(e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and interior
NOTE: lights, overloaded power outlets +12 Volt,  Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
 The charging system is independent from load 115 Volt AC, USB ports) during certain driving  Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte-
reduction. The charging system performs a diag- conditions (city driving, towing, frequent rior)
nostic on the charging system continuously. stopping, etc.).  Check what may be plugged in to power
 If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it may  Installing options like additional lights, upfitter outlets +12 Volt, 115 Volt AC, USB ports
indicate a problem with the charging system electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms  Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
Ú page 111. and similar devices.
 Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip: RED WARNING LIGHTS If the light remains on when the parking brake has
 Check if any aftermarket equipment was been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical Active Driving Assist - Driver mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and review Inattentiveness Warning Light a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or
specifications if any (load and Ignition Off Draw that a problem with the Brake Booster has been
This light illuminates when driver
currents). detected by the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) /
inattentiveness has been continually
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
 Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance, detected, warning the driver to place
case, the light will remain on until the condition has
driving time and parking time). their hands on the steering wheel.
been corrected. If the problem is related to the
 The vehicle should have service performed if Air Bag Warning Light brake booster, the ABS pump will run when
the message is still present during consecutive This warning light will illuminate to applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation
trips, and if the evaluation and driving pattern of indicate a fault with the air bag, and will may be felt during each stop.
the vehicle did not help to identify the cause. turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb The dual brake system provides a reserve braking
check when the ignition is placed in the capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ON/RUN position. This light will illuminate with a hydraulic system. A leak in either half of the dual
single chime when a fault with the air bag has been brake system is indicated by the Brake Warning
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in the
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If Light, which will turn on when the brake fluid level
instrument panel together with a dedicated
the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or in the master cylinder has dropped below a
message and/or acoustic signal when applicable.
turns on while driving, have the system inspected specified level.
These indications are indicative and precautionary
at an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
and as such must not be considered as exhaustive The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
and/or alternative to the information contained in Brake Warning Light NOTE:
the Owner’s Manual, which you are advised to read This warning light monitors various brake The light may flash momentarily during sharp
carefully in all cases. Always refer to the functions, including brake fluid level and cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
information in this chapter in the event of a failure parking brake application. If the brake conditions. The vehicle should have service
indication. All active telltales will display first if light turns on it may indicate that the performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
applicable. The system check menu may appear parking brake is applied, that the brake fluid level
different based upon equipment options and If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
is low, or that there is a problem with the Anti-Lock necessary.
current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional Brake System reservoir.
and may not appear.
Battery Charge Warning Light Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning

WARNING!
This warning light will illuminate when the Light
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is battery is not charging properly. If it stays This warning light will illuminate to
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have on while the engine is running, there may indicate a problem with the ETC system.
failed. It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You be a malfunction with the charging If a problem is detected while the vehicle
could have a collision. Have the vehicle checked system. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as is running, the light will either stay on or
immediately. possible. flash depending on the nature of the problem.
This indicates a possible problem with the Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely and 3
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System electrical system or a related component. completely stopped and the transmission is placed
(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake in the PARK position. The light should turn off. If
Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD Door Open Warning Light the light remains on with the vehicle running, your
failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn on along This indicator will illuminate when a door vehicle will usually be drivable; however, see an
with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to the ABS is ajar/open and not fully closed. authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.
system is required.
NOTE:
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be NOTE: This light may turn on if the accelerator and brake
checked by turning the ignition switch from the OFF If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single pedals are pressed at the same time.
position to the ON/RUN position. The light should chime. If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light running, immediate service is required and you
should then turn off unless the parking brake is Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
may experience reduced performance, an
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does Warning Light elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
not illuminate, have the light inspected by an This warning light will turn on when vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
authorized dealer. there's a fault with the EPS system when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position
The light also will turn on when the parking brake Ú page 142. and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light
is applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN does not come on during starting, have the system
position. WARNING! checked by an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Continued operation with reduced assist could
This light shows only that the parking brake is
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
applied. It does not show the degree of brake appli-
should be obtained as soon as possible.
cation.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Liftgate Open Warning Light Oil Pressure Warning Light
Light This warning light will illuminate when the This warning light will illuminate to
This warning light warns of an liftgate is open. indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
overheated engine condition. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
engine coolant temperature is too high, vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
NOTE: possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
this indicator will illuminate and a single
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single chime will sound when this light turns on.
chime will sound. If the temperature reaches the
chime.
upper limit, a continuous chime will sound for four Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
minutes or until the engine is able to cool; Night Vision Animal Warning Light corrected. This light does not indicate how much oil
whichever comes first. The Night Vision Animal Warning Light is in the engine. The engine oil level must be
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over will illuminate in red when an animal is checked under the hood.
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning (A/C) detected directly in the vehicle’s path, Oil Temperature Warning Light
system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission near the headlights, and a collision is
possible Ú page 180. This warning light will illuminate to
into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the
indicate the engine oil temperature is
temperature reading does not return to normal, If enabled, a chime will sound and a video pop-up high. If the light turns on while driving,
turn the engine off immediately and call for service may display when a detection occurs. stop the vehicle and shut off the engine
Ú page 326.
Night Vision Pedestrian Warning Light as soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to
Hood Open Warning Light The Night Vision Pedestrian Warning return to normal levels.
This warning light will illuminate when the Light will illuminate in red when a
hood is left open and not fully closed. pedestrian is detected directly in the
vehicle’s path, near the headlights, and a
collision is possible Ú page 180.
NOTE:
If enabled, a chime will sound and a video pop-up
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
may display when a detection occurs.
chime.
Rear Seat Belt Reminder Indicator Transmission Temperature Warning Vehicle Security Warning Light —
Light — If Equipped Light — If Equipped If Equipped
This light indicates when a rear seat belt This warning light will illuminate to warn This light will flash at a fast rate for
is unbuckled in the second row. When of a high transmission fluid temperature. approximately 15 seconds when the
the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN This may occur with strenuous usage vehicle security system is arming, and
position, and if a seat belt in the second such as trailer towing. If this light turns then will flash slowly until the vehicle is
row is unbuckled, a light corresponding to the on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle or disarmed.
specific seat will turn on in the upper right portion slightly faster, with the transmission in PARK (P) or
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS 3
of the instrument cluster display, momentarily NEUTRAL (N), until the light turns off. Once the light
replacing the configurable corner information. If a turns off, you may continue to drive normally. Active Driving Assist - Driver
second row seat belt that was buckled at the start
of the trip is unbuckled, the Rear Seat Belt WARNING! Inattentiveness Warning Light
Reminder Light will change from the buckled to the This light illuminates when driver
If you continue operating the vehicle when the inattentiveness has been detected,
unbuckled symbol, and a chime will sound
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is warning the driver to place their hands on
Ú page 269.
illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, the steering wheel.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light come in contact with hot engine or exhaust
This warning light indicates when the components and cause a fire. Active Driving Assist Fault Warning Light
driver or passenger seat belt is This light will turn on when the Active
unbuckled. When the ignition is first Driving Assist system has detected a
placed in the ON/RUN position and if the CAUTION! fault.
driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound Continuous driving with the Transmission
and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, eventually cause severe transmission damage
the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on or transmission failure.
continuously and a chime will sound Ú page 269.
Air Suspension Fault Warning Light Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
This light will illuminate when there is a Warning Light — If Equipped Warning Light — If Equipped
fault detected in the air suspension This warning light will indicate when the This warning light indicates the ESC is off.
system. ESC system is Active. The ESC Indicator Each time the ignition is turned to ON/
Light in the instrument cluster will come RUN, the ESC system will be on, even if it
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning on when the ignition is placed in the ON/ was turned off previously.
Light RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should
go out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator Service Active Lane Management Warning
This warning light monitors the ABS. The
light will turn on when the ignition is Light comes on continuously with the engine Light — If Equipped
placed in the ON/RUN or position and running, a malfunction has been detected in the This warning light will illuminate when the
may stay on for as long as four seconds. ESC system. If this warning light remains on after Active Lane Management system is not
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been operating and requires service. Please
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake see an authorized dealer.
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
system is not functioning and service is required as as soon as possible to have the problem Active Lane Management Warning Light —
soon as possible. However, the conventional brake diagnosed and corrected. If Equipped
system will continue to operate normally,
assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.  The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi- The Active Lane Management Warning
cator Light come on momentarily each time the Light will be solid yellow when the vehicle
If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is approaching a lane marker. The
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.
is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the brake warning light will flash when the vehicle is
system inspected by an authorized dealer.  The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
crossing the lane marker Ú page 173.
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive. Low Fuel Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to  This light will come on when the vehicle is in an When the fuel level reaches
indicate the Electronic Park Brake is not ESC event. approximately 2 gal (7.5 L), this light will
functioning properly and service is turn on and a chime will sound. The light
required. Contact an authorized dealer. will remain on until fuel is added.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas
cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light CAUTION!
If Equipped
after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator
This warning light will illuminate when the the light stays on through several typical driving Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
windshield washer fluid is low styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive vehicle control system. It also could affect fuel
Ú page 342. normally and will not require towing. economy and driveability. If the MIL is flashing,
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to severe catalytic converter damage and power
Night Vision Animal Warning Light
alert serious conditions that could lead to loss will soon occur. Immediate service is
The Night Vision Animal Warning Light immediate loss of power or severe catalytic required. 3
will illuminate in yellow when an animal is converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced
approaching or is in the vehicle’s path by an authorized dealer as soon as possible if this
Ú page 180. Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
occurs.
Night Vision Pedestrian Warning Light This warning light will illuminate to signal
WARNING! a fault with the 4WD system. If the light
The Night Vision Pedestrian Warning stays on or comes on during driving, it
Light will illuminate in yellow when a A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as means that the 4WD system is not
pedestrian is approaching or is in the referenced above, can reach higher functioning properly and that service is required.
vehicle’s path Ú page 180. temperatures than in normal operating We recommend you drive to the nearest service
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
slowly or park over flammable substances such
Warning Light (MIL) as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator result in death or serious injury to the driver, Warning Light
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard occupants or others. This light will turn on when the ACC is not
Diagnostic System called OBD II that operating and needs service
monitors engine and automatic Ú page 145.
transmission control systems. This warning light
will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON/RUN
position before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the ignition switch from OFF
to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
CAUTION! proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
Light — If Equipped
Do not continue driving with one or more flat responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
This warning light will illuminate to even if underinflation has not reached the level to
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the
indicate a fault in the Forward Collision trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. If a
Warning System. Contact an authorized telltale.
tire puncture occurs, repair immediately using
dealer for service Ú page 261.
the dedicated tire repair kit and contact an Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — authorized dealer as soon as possible. malfunction indicator to indicate when the system
If Equipped is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction
This warning light will illuminate when the Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should indicator is combined with the low tire pressure
Stop/Start system is not functioning be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the telltale. When the system detects a malfunction,
properly and service is required. Contact inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle the telltale will flash for approximately one minute
an authorized dealer for service. manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire and then remain continuously illuminated. This
inflation pressure label. If your vehicle has tires of sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When
a different size than the size indicated on the
Warning Light vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
The warning light switches on and a should determine the proper tire inflation pressure system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
message is displayed to indicate that the for those tires. pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
tire pressure is lower than the occur for a variety of reasons, including the
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
recommended value and/or that slow installation of replacement or alternate tires or
equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a low tire
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is
tire duration and fuel consumption may not be functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the
guaranteed. malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should
tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
Should one or more tires be in the condition stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
mentioned above, the display will show the inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
indications corresponding to each tire. significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Air Suspension Aerodynamic Height Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light —

CAUTION!
Indicator Light— If Equipped If Equipped
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
This light will illuminate when the air The Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator light will
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
suspension system is set to the illuminate if a fault is detected, it will be
and warning have been established for the tire
Aerodynamic setting Ú page 138. indicated by a yellow ‘HOLD!’ indicator
size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable
light that will stay on as long as the fault
system operation or sensor damage may result
Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator Light— condition exists.
when using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket If Equipped Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF 3
wheels can cause sensor damage. Using This light will illuminate when the vehicle Indicator Light — If Equipped
aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire is automatically lowered from ride height
This indicator light illuminates to indicate
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to position downward for easy entry and exit
that FCW is off Ú page 261.
become inoperable. After using an aftermarket of the vehicle.
tire sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Max Payload Exceeded Indicator Light
sensor function checked. Light — If Equipped This light indicates that the maximum
This light will illuminate when the air payload may have been exceeded or load
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light suspension system is set to the Off-Road leveling cannot be achieved at its current
This light will illuminate when there is a 1 setting Ú page 138. ride height.
fault in the sway bar disconnect system NEUTRAL Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 136. Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator
Light — If Equipped This light alerts the driver that the 4WD
power transfer case is in the NEUTRAL
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS This light will illuminate when the air mode and the front and rear driveshafts
suspension system is set to the Off-Road are disengaged from the powertrain.
Air Suspension Active Indicator Light — 2 setting Ú page 138.
If Equipped Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will illuminate when the air This indicator light will illuminate when
suspension system is actively adjusting the front sway bar is disconnected
the ride height Ú page 138. Ú page 136.
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Active Lane Management Indicator Light —
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle Target Detected Indicator Light — If If Equipped
is in the 4WD Low mode. The front and Equipped The Active Lane Management indicator
rear driveshafts are mechanically locked light illuminates solid green when both
This will display when the ACC is set and
together forcing the front and rear lane markings have been detected and
the vehicle in front is not detected
wheels to rotate at the same speed. Low range the system is “armed” and ready to
Ú page 145.
provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide provide visual and torque warnings if an
increased torque at the wheels Ú page 134. Auto HOLD Indicator Light — If Equipped unintentional lane departure occurs Ú page 173.
GREEN INDICATOR L IGHTS Auto HOLD keeps your vehicle at a Night Vision Active Indicator Light —
complete stop without you having to keep If Equipped
Active Driving Assist - Driver Attentive your foot on the brake pedal. Once
Indicator Light This light alerts the driver that the Night
engaged a green “HOLD” indicator will
Vision Warning System status is Active
This light will turn on when the system appear in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Ú page 180.
detects that the driver is attentive and is Cruise Control SET Indicator Light —
actively steering the vehicle. Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light
If Equipped
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With This indicator light will illuminate when This indicator light will illuminate when
the cruise control is set to the desired the parking lights or headlights are
Target Light — If Equipped turned on Ú page 58.
speed Ú page 144.
This will display when the ACC is set and
the vehicle in front is detected Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped Rear Seat Belt Fastened Indicator
Ú page 145. Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when
the front fog lights are on Ú page 58. This light indicates when a rear seat belt
has been buckled in the second row. A
telltale will display in the upper right
corner of the instrument cluster display
to correspond to the specific seating position once
the seat belt has been buckled Ú page 269.
Sport Mode Indicator Light WHITE INDICATOR L IGHTS Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light —
This light will turn on when Sport Mode is If Equipped
Active Driving Assist On Indicator Light
active. This light indicates when the rear
This light will turn on when the system is passenger seats are unoccupied, and will
turned on, but is not actively providing illuminate in the upper right portion of
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — steering to the vehicle. the instrument cluster display,
If Equipped momentarily replacing the configurable corner
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready
This indicator light will illuminate when information. 3
the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” Indicator Light — If Equipped
Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light —
mode Ú page 143. This light will turn on when ACC has been
turned on, but is not set Ú page 145. If Equipped
Turn Signal Indicator Lights This light will turn on when Selec-Speed
Control is activated.
When the left or right turn signal is
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light To activate Selec-Speed Control, assure
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the This indicator light will illuminate when the vehicle is 4WD Low and push the button on the
corresponding exterior turn signal lamps the cruise control is ready, but not set Instrument Panel.
will flash. Turn signals can be activated when the Ú page 144.
NOTE:
multifunction lever is moved down (left) or up If the vehicle is not in 4WD Low, “To Enter
(right). Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator
Selec-Speed Shift to 4WD Low” will appear in the
NOTE: Light — If Equipped instrument cluster display.
 A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is This indicator shows when the HDC
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either feature is turned on. The lamp will be on
turn signal on. solid when HDC is armed. HDC can only
be armed when the transfer case is in the
 Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if 4WD Low position and the vehicle speed is less
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate. then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are not
met while attempting to use the HDC feature, the
HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
BLUE INDICATOR L IGHTS ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC S YSTEM
High Beam Indicator Light Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated (OBD II) CYBERSECURITY
This indicator light will illuminate to Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a
indicate that the high beam headlights system monitors the performance of the connection port to allow access to information
are on. With the low beams activated, emissions, engine, and transmission control related to the performance of your emissions
push the multifunction lever forward systems. When these systems are operating controls. Authorized service technicians may need
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the high properly, your vehicle will provide excellent to access this information to assist with the
beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward performance and fuel economy, as well as engine diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
(toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn off the high emissions well within current government emissions system Ú page 203.
beams. If the high beams are off, pull the lever regulations.
toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to If any of these systems require service, the OBD II WARNING!
pass” scenario. system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light  ONLY an authorized service technician should
(MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes and other
GRAY I NDICATOR L IGHTS information to assist your service technician in
connect equipment to the OBD II connection
port in order to read the VIN, diagnose, or
Night Vision Suppressed Indicator making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually service your vehicle.
be driveable and not need towing, see an
Light — If Equipped authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.  If unauthorized equipment is connected to the
This light alerts the driver that the Night OBD II connection port, such as a
Vision Warning System status is CAUTION! driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Suppressed Ú page 180.
 Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause  Be possible that vehicle systems,
further damage to the emission control including safety related systems, could be
system. It could also affect fuel economy and impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
driveability. The vehicle must be serviced occur that may result in an accident
before any emissions tests can be performed. involving serious injury or death.
 If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is  Access, or allow others to access, infor-
running, severe catalytic converter damage mation stored in your vehicle systems,
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate including personal information.
service is required.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see
an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is ready, vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
you must do the following: failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to more than drive your vehicle as you normally would
pass an inspection of your vehicle's emissions 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine. in order for your OBD II system to update. A
control system. Failure to pass could prevent recheck with the above test routine may then
vehicle registration. NOTE: indicate that the system is now ready.
For states that require an Inspection and If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system
3
Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies start this test over.
is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during
the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the normal vehicle operation you should have your
functioning and is not on when the ON position, you will see the Malfunction vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station.
engine is running, and that the OBD II system is Indicator Light (MIL) symbol come on as part of The I/M station can fail your vehicle because the
ready for testing. a normal bulb check. MIL is on with the engine running.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle was things will happen:
recently serviced, recently had a depleted battery  The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system then return to being fully illuminated until
should be determined not ready for the I/M test, you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine.
your vehicle may fail the test. This means that your vehicle's OBD II
system is not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
 The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the ignition
in the off position or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
122
STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE WARNING! CAUTION!
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,  Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle,  Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has
adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten your or in a location accessible to children, and do come to a complete stop.
seat belt, and if present, instruct all other not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped
occupants to buckle their seat belts.  Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
with Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the
position. A child could operate power
WARNING! engine is at idle speed.
windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
 Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a  Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
 Do not leave children or animals inside parked
complete stop, then shift the automatic trans- foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up
mission into PARK and apply the parking may cause serious injury or death.
brake. KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ — IGNITION
 Always make sure the keyless ignition node is AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION This feature allows the driver to operate the
in the OFF position, key fob is removed from ignition switch with the push of a button, as long as
the vehicle and vehicle is locked. The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL (N) or
the Remote Start/Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ key fob is
PARK (P) position before you can start the engine.
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with in the passenger compartment.
Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving
access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving chil-
dren in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for
gear. NORMAL STARTING
a number of reasons. A child or others could CAUTION! To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE START/
be seriously or fatally injured. Children should STOP Button
be warned not to touch the parking brake, Damage to the transmission may occur if the
1. The transmission must be in PARK (P).
brake pedal or the gear selector. following precautions are not observed:
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing
(Continued)  Do not shift from REVERSE (R), PARK, or
the ENGINE START/STOP button once.
NEUTRAL into any forward gear when the
engine is above idle speed.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
3. The system takes over and attempts to start NOTE: AUTOPARK

the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the If the gear selector is not in PARK, and the ENGINE
starter will disengage automatically after START/STOP button is pushed once with the AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
10 seconds. vehicle speed below 5 mph (8 km/h), the engine placing the vehicle in PARK (P) should the
will shut off and the ignition will remain in the situations on the following pages occur. It is a
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine
ON/RUN position. If vehicle speed drops below back-up system and should not be relied upon as
prior to the engine starting, push the ENGINE
1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the vehicle may AutoPark the primary method by which the driver shifts the
START/STOP button again.
Ú page 123. vehicle into PARK.
To Turn Off The Engine Using The ENGINE START/ ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With The conditions under which AutoPark will engage
STOP Button Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or are outlined on the following pages.
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push NEUTRAL Position) 4
and release the ENGINE START/STOP button.
WARNING!
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar
2. The ignition will return to the OFF position. to an ignition switch. It has three positions: OFF,  Driver inattention could lead to failure to place
ON/RUN, and START. To change the ignition the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A VISUAL
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE
positions without starting the vehicle and use the CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK by verifying
START/STOP button must be held for two
accessories, follow these directions: that a solid (not blinking) “P” is indicated in
seconds or three short pushes in a row with
1. Start with the ignition in the OFF position. the instrument cluster display and on the gear
the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h)
selector. If the "P" indicator is blinking, your
before the engine will shut off. The ignition will 2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to vehicle is not in PARK. As an added precau-
remain in the ON/RUN position until the gear place the ignition in the ON/RUN position. tion, always apply the parking brake when
selector is in PARK and the button is pushed 3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a exiting the vehicle.
twice to the OFF position. second time to return the ignition to the OFF
 AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
4. If the gear selector is not in PARK and the position.
ENGINE START/STOP button is pushed once designed to replace the need to shift your
with the vehicle speed above 5 mph (8 km/h), NOTE: vehicle into PARK. It is a back-up system and
the instrument cluster will display a “Vehicle should not be relied upon as the primary
Only press one pedal at a time while driving the
Not In Park” message and the engine will method by which the driver shifts the vehicle
vehicle. Torque performance of the vehicle could
remain running. Never leave a vehicle out of into PARK.
be reduced if both pedals are pressed at the same
the PARK position, or it could roll. time. If pressure is detected on both pedals simul-
taneously, a warning message will display in the
instrument cluster Ú page 95.
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns off The message “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P then Additional customer warnings will be given when
the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark. Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument cluster. both of these conditions are met:
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions NOTE:  Vehicle is not in PARK
are met: In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be  Driver’s door is ajar
 Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed displayed in the instrument cluster. In these cases,
the gear selector must be returned to “P” to select The message “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
transmission displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
desired gear.
 Vehicle is not in PARK chime will continue until you shift the vehicle into
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
 Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less vehicle may AutoPark.
NOTE: ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed is PARK by looking for the "P" in the instrument
For Keyless Enter ‘n Go™ equipped vehicles, the 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less.
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will cluster display and on the gear selector. As an
The message “Vehicle Speed is Too High to Shift to added precaution, always apply the parking brake
change to the ON/RUN position. After 30 minutes
P” will be displayed in the instrument cluster if when exiting the vehicle.
the ignition switches to OFF automatically, unless
vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h).
the driver turns the ignition switch OFF. I F E NGINE F AILS T O S TART
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits the WARNING!
vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle may If the engine fails to start after you have followed
AutoPark. If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h), the "Normal Starting" procedure and has not
the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until experienced an extended park condition (i.e.,
AutoPark will engage when all of these conditions parked for more than 30 days), it may be flooded.
the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/
are met: Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL position can
 Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed roll. As an added precaution, always apply the and hold it there while the engine is cranking. This
transmission parking brake when exiting the vehicle. should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is
 Vehicle is not in PARK flooded. The starter motor will engage
automatically, run for 10 seconds, and then
 Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h) or less 4WD LOW — If Equipped
disengage. Once this occurs, release the
 Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled AutoPark will be disabled when operating the accelerator pedal and brake pedal, wait 10 to
 Driver’s door is ajar
vehicle in 4WD LOW. 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
The message “AutoPark Disabled” will be procedure.
 Brake pedal is not pressed
displayed in the instrument cluster.
WARNING! COLD WEATHER OPERATION ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

 Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into
(B ELOW –22°F OR −30°C) A long break-in period is not required for the engine
the throttle body air inlet opening in an To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result use of an externally powered electric engine block vehicle.
in flash fire causing serious personal injury. heater (available from an authorized dealer) is Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
recommended. (500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds
 Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to
up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
get it started. Vehicles equipped with an auto- AFTER S TARTING
matic transmission cannot be started this Brief full-throttle acceleration within the limits of
way. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.
converter and once the engine has started, will decrease as the engine warms up. Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be 4
ignite and damage the converter and vehicle. detrimental and should be avoided.
 If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is
booster cables may be used to obtain a start The engine block heater warms the engine, and a high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
from a booster battery or the battery in permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the changes should be consistent with anticipated
another vehicle. This type of start can be cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical climate conditions under which vehicle operations
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 323. outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension cord. will occur Ú page 343.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
CAUTION!
least one hour to have an adequate warming effect
CAUTION! on the engine. Never use non-detergent oil or straight mineral
To prevent damage to the starter, do not The engine block heater cord is coiled and oil in the engine or damage may result.
continuously crank the engine for more than strapped right behind the engine air cleaner filter
10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds assembly from the manufacturer. NOTE:
before trying again. A new engine may consume some oil during its first
WARNING! few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
Remember to disconnect the engine block should be considered a normal part of the break-in
heater cord before driving. Damage to the and not interpreted as a problem. Please check your
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause oil level with the engine oil indicator often during the
electrocution. break-in period. Add oil as required.
PARKING BRAKE If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the

parking brake will automatically engage whenever
ELECTRIC P ARK B RAKE (EPB) the transmission is placed into PARK. If your foot is
on the brake pedal, you may notice a small amount
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB that offers of brake pedal movement while the parking brake
simple operation, and some additional features is engaging.
that make the parking brake more convenient and The parking brake will release automatically when
useful. the ignition is ON, the transmission is in DRIVE or
The parking brake is primarily intended to prevent REVERSE, the driver seat belt is buckled, and an
the vehicle from rolling while parked. Before attempt is made to drive away.
leaving the vehicle, make sure the parking brake is Electric Park Brake Switch To release the parking brake manually, the ignition
applied. Also, be certain to leave the transmission switch must be in the ON/RUN position. Put your
in PARK. To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on the
switch momentarily. You may hear a sound from foot on the brake pedal, then push the EPB switch
You can engage the parking brake in two ways: the back of the vehicle while the parking brake down momentarily. You may hear a sound from the
 Manually, by applying the parking brake switch. engages. Once the parking brake is fully engaged, back of the vehicle while the parking brake
the BRAKE telltale light in the instrument cluster disengages. You may also notice a small amount of
 Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park Brake
and an indicator on the switch will illuminate. If movement in the brake pedal. Once the parking
feature in the Customer Programmable
your foot is on the brake pedal while you apply the brake is fully disengaged, the BRAKE telltale light
Features section of the Uconnect settings.
parking brake, you may notice a small amount of in the instrument cluster and the LED indicator on
The parking brake switch is located on the the switch will extinguish.
brake pedal movement. The parking brake can be
instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel
applied even when the ignition switch is OFF but NOTE:
(below the headlamp switch).
the BRAKE telltale light will not illuminate, When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
however, it can only be released when the ignition front wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade
is in the ON/RUN position. and away from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply
NOTE: the parking brake before placing the gear selector
The EPB fault light will illuminate if the EPB switch in PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission
is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the locking mechanism may make it difficult to move
released or applied position. The light will extin- the gear selector out of PARK.
guish upon releasing the switch.
WARNING! WARNING! WARNING!

 Never use the PARK position as a substitute  Always fully apply the parking brake when Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
for the parking brake. Always apply the leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause engaged, or repeated use of the parking brake
parking brake fully when parked to guard damage or injury. Also be certain to leave the to slow the vehicle may cause serious damage to
against vehicle movement and possible injury transmission in PARK. Failure to do so may the brake system. Be sure the parking brake is
or damage. allow the vehicle to roll and cause damage or fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so
injury. can lead to brake failure and a collision.
 When exiting the vehicle, always turn the igni-
tion OFF, secure the key fob, and lock your
vehicle. In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
CAUTION! system, a yellow EPB fault light will illuminate. This 4
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on may be accompanied by the BRAKE telltale light
access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
with the parking brake released, a brake system flashing. In this event, urgent service of the EPB
dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system system is required. Do not rely on the parking
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
serviced by an authorized dealer immediately. brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
others could be seriously or fatally injured.
Children should be warned not to touch the AUTO PARK BRAKE
parking brake, brake pedal or the gear If exceptional circumstances should make it
selector. necessary to engage the parking brake while the The EPB can be programmed to be applied
vehicle is in motion, maintain upward pressure on automatically whenever the vehicle is at a
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, standstill and the transmission is placed in PARK.
the EPB switch for as long as engagement is
or in a location accessible to children, and do Auto Park Brake is enabled and disabled by
desired. The BRAKE telltale light will illuminate,
not leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless customer selection through the customer
and a continuous chime will sound. The rear stop
Enter ‘n Go™ in the ON/RUN position. A child programmable features section of the Uconnect
lamps will also be illuminated automatically while
could operate power windows, other controls, Settings Ú page 219.
the vehicle remains in motion.
or move the vehicle.
To disengage the parking brake while the vehicle is Any single Auto Park Brake application can be
 Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged in motion, release the switch. If the vehicle is bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the release
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brought to a complete stop using the parking position while the transmission is placed in PARK.
brake failure and a collision. brake, when the vehicle reaches approximately
(Continued) 3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking brake will remain
engaged.
SAFEHOLD stop until the driver applies the accelerator pedal. BRAKE MAINTENANCE M ODE
Hold ‘N Go can be activated or deactivated by
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that pushing the HOLD button located on the switch We recommend having your brakes serviced by an
will place the transmission in PARK, and engage bank. authorized dealer. You should only make repairs
the parking brake automatically if the vehicle is left for which you have the knowledge and the right
unsecured while the ignition is in ON/RUN. equipment. You should only enter Brake
The parking brake will automatically engage if all of Maintenance Mode during brake service.
the following conditions are met: When servicing your rear brakes, it may be
 The vehicle is at a standstill. necessary for you or your technician to push the
rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the EPB
 There is no attempt to press the brake pedal or system, this can only be done after retracting the
accelerator pedal. EPB actuator. Fortunately, actuator retraction can
 The seat belt is unbuckled. be done easily by entering the Brake Maintenance
 The driver door is open. Mode through the Uconnect Settings in your
vehicle. This menu-based system will guide you
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by pushing through the steps necessary to retract the EPB
HOLD Switch
the EPB switch while the driver door is open. Once actuator in order to perform rear brake service.
manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled The following conditions must be met for
again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph (20 km/h) Hold ‘N Go to activate: Maintenance Mode has requirements that must be
or the ignition is turned to the OFF position and met in order to be activated:
 Driver’s door is closed
back to ON again.  The vehicle must be at a standstill.
 Driver's seat belt is fastened
HOLD ‘N G O — IF E QUIPPED  Vehicle is at a standstill
 The parking brake must be unapplied.
 The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.
Hold ‘N Go is a comfort feature that allows the  Forward gear is selected
driver to remove their foot from the brake pedal While in Maintenance Mode, the EPB fault lamp
 ACC is not engaged
once the vehicle has come to a stop. The vehicle will flash continuously while the ignition is ON.
must be held at a standstill for a predetermined  EPB is not applied
amount of time by hydraulic braking. The EPB will  ParkSense Active Park Assist System auto
then engage and continue to hold the vehicle at a parking maneuver is not activated
When brake maintenance work is complete, the

following steps must be followed to reset the WARNING! WARNING!
parking brake system to normal operation:  Your vehicle could move and injure you and  Unintended movement of a vehicle could
 Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill. others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all
move the transmission gear selector out of vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while
 Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle,
 Apply the EPB Switch. sure the transmission is in PARK before always come to a complete stop, then apply
exiting the vehicle. the parking brake, shift the transmission into
WARNING! PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When the
 The transmission may not engage PARK if the
You can be badly injured working on or around a ignition is in the OFF position, the transmis-
vehicle is moving. Always bring the vehicle to a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for complete stop before shifting to PARK, and
sion is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle 4
which you have the knowledge and the right against unwanted movement.
verify that the transmission gear position indi-
equipment. If you have any doubt about your cator solidly indicates PARK without blinking.  When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle Ensure that the vehicle is completely stopped, the ignition is in the OFF position, remove the
to a competent mechanic. and the PARK position is properly indicated, key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.
before exiting the vehicle.
 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION  It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing chil-
NEUTRAL (N) if the engine speed is higher dren to be in a vehicle unattended is
You must press and hold the brake pedal while than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
shifting out of PARK. pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could others could be seriously or fatally injured.
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You Children should be warned not to touch the
WARNING!
could lose control of the vehicle and hit parking brake, brake pedal or the transmis-
 Never use the PARK (P) position as a substi- someone or something. Only shift into gear sion gear selector.
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the when the engine is idling normally and your
 Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle to foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(or in a location accessible to children), and do
guard against vehicle movement and possible (Continued) not leave the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
injury or damage.
A child could operate power windows, other
(Continued) controls, or move the vehicle.
CAUTION! BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT NOTE:

In the event of a mismatch between the gear
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
I NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM selector position and the actual transmission gear
following precautions are not observed: This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI system that (for example, driver selects PARK while driving),
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK the position indicator will blink continuously until
 Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE (R) only
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the the selector is returned to the proper position, or
after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
transmission out of PARK, the engine must be the requested shift can be completed.
 Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, running and the brake pedal must be pressed. The The electronically controlled transmission adapts
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE (D) when the engine is brake pedal must also be pressed to shift from its shift schedule based on driver inputs, along
above idle speed. NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the vehicle with environmental and road conditions. The
 Before shifting into any gear, make sure your
is stopped or moving at low speeds. transmission electronics are self-calibrating;
therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. 8-SPEED A UTOMATIC T RANSMISSION be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition,
The transmission is controlled using a rotary and precision shifts will develop within a few
I GNITION PARK INTERLOCK electronic gear selector located on the center hundred miles (kilometers).
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park console. The transmission gear range (PRND) is Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when
Interlock which requires the transmission to be in displayed both above the gear selector and in the the accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is
PARK (P) before the ignition can be turned to the instrument cluster. To select a gear range, simply stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on the brake
OFF position. This helps the driver avoid rotate the gear selector. You must press the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing pedal to shift the transmission out of PARK (or
The transmission gear selector has only PARK,
the transmission in PARK. This system also locks NEUTRAL, when the vehicle is stopped or moving at
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition is low speeds). To shift past multiple gear ranges at
downshifts can be made using the steering wheel
in the OFF position. once (such as PARK to DRIVE), simply rotate the
mounted paddle shifters. Pulling the -/+ switches
gear selector to the appropriate detent. Select the
NOTE: (on the steering wheel) while in the DRIVE position
DRIVE range for normal driving.
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when the will select the highest available transmission gear,
ignition is in the ON/RUN position (even though the and will display that gear limit in the instrument
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission is cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Some models will display
in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in the ON/RUN both the selected gear limit, and the actual current
position) before exiting the vehicle. gear, while in AutoStick mode.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake The following indicators should be used to ensure
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an that you have properly engaged the transmission
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the into the PARK position:
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb  When shifting into PARK, rotate the shifter all
on an uphill grade. the way counterclockwise until the indicator
When exiting the vehicle, always: displays PARK.
 Apply the parking brake.  Look at the transmission gear position display
 Shift the transmission into PARK. and verify that it indicates the PARK position (P),
and is not blinking.
 Turn the ignition OFF.
 With the brake pedal released, verify that the
Transmission Gear Selector  Remove the key fob from the vehicle. 4
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
Gear Ranges NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the REVERSE (R)
Do not press the accelerator pedal when shifting
from PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) into another gear transfer case is in a drive position. This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
range. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come
CAUTION! to a complete stop.
NOTE:
 Before moving the transmission gear selector
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to NEUTRAL (N)
out of PARK, you must start the engine, and
allow the selected gear to engage before acceler-
also press the brake pedal. Otherwise, Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
ating. This is especially important when the engine
damage to the gear selector could result. prolonged periods with the engine running. Apply
is cold.
the parking brake and shift the transmission into
 DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK (P) PARK (P) if you must exit the vehicle.
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as
This range supplements the parking brake by this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING!
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use PARK Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
brake when exiting the vehicle in this range. practices that limit your response to changing
traffic or road conditions. You might lose control
of the vehicle and have a collision.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation NOTE:

CAUTION! may be modified depending on engine and In cases where the instrument cluster message
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any transmission temperature as well as vehicle indicates the transmission may not re-engage after
other reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL speed. This feature improves warm-up time of the engine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a
can cause severe transmission damage. engine and transmission to achieve maximum desired location (preferably, at an authorized
efficiency. Engagement of the torque converter dealer).
For Recreational Towing see Ú page 196. clutch is inhibited until the transmission fluid is 1. Stop the vehicle.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle see Ú page 329. warm. Normal operation will resume once the
transmission temperature has risen to a suitable 2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if
level. possible. If not, shift the transmission to
DRIVE (D) NEUTRAL (N).
This range should be used for most city and
Transmission Limp Home Mode 3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
highway driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts Transmission function is monitored electronically engine turns off.
and downshifts, and the best fuel economy. The for abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
transmission automatically upshifts through all that could result in transmission damage,
forward gears. Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. In this 5. Restart the engine.
mode, the transmission may operate only in 6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such
certain gears, or may not shift at all. Vehicle problem is no longer detected, the
as when operating the vehicle under heavy loading
performance may be severely degraded and the transmission will return to normal operation.
conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong
engine may stall. In some situations, the
head winds, or while towing a heavy trailer), use
transmission may not re-engage if the engine is NOTE:
the AutoStick shift control to select a lower gear
turned off and restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Even if the transmission can be reset, we
Ú page 133. Under these conditions, using a lower
Light (MIL) may be illuminated. A message in the recommend that you visit an authorized dealer at
gear will improve performance and extend
instrument cluster will inform the driver of the your earliest possible convenience. An authorized
transmission life by reducing excessive shifting
more serious conditions, and indicate what actions dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the
and heat build-up.
may be necessary. condition of your transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
transmission can be reset to regain all forward dealer service is required.
gears by performing the following steps:
AutoStick — If Equipped In AutoStick mode, you can use the paddle shifters,  If a requested downshift would cause the
to manually shift the transmission. Tapping the (-) engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
paddle shifters, will downshift the transmission to  The system will ignore attempts to upshift at too
feature providing manual shift control, giving you
the next lower gear. Tapping the (+) paddle low of a vehicle speed.
more control of the vehicle. AutoStick allows you to
shifters, will upshift the transmission to the next
maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable  Holding the (-) paddle pressed, will downshift
highest gear.
upshifts and downshifts, and improve overall the transmission to the lowest gear possible at
vehicle performance. This feature can also provide NOTE: the current speed.
you with more control during passing, city driving, The paddle shifters (if equipped) may be disabled
 Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer (or re-enabled, as desired) using the Uconnect
Programmable Settings. when AutoStick is enabled.
towing, and many other situations.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up or  The system may revert to automatic shift mode 4
down when (+/-) is manually selected by the driver, if a fault or overheat condition is detected. The
unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition vehicle will force an upshift, but it will stay in
would result. It will remain in the selected gear AutoStick mode.
until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except To disengage AutoStick mode, push and hold the
as follows. (+) paddle shifters until "D" is once again indicated
 The transmission will automatically downshift in the instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of
as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine lugging) AutoStick mode at any time without taking your
and will display the current gear. foot off the accelerator pedal.
 The transmission will automatically downshift to WARNING!
AutoStick Paddle Shifters FIRST gear when coming to a stop. After a stop,
the driver should manually upshift (+) the trans- Do not downshift for additional engine braking
Operation mission as the vehicle is accelerated. on a slippery surface. The drive wheels could
lose their grip and the vehicle could skid,
To activate AutoStick mode, tap one of the paddle  You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or
causing a collision or personal injury.
shifters on the steering wheel. Tapping the (-) SECOND gear. Tapping (+) at a stop will allow
paddle shifters to enter AutoStick mode will starting in SECOND gear. Starting out in
downshift the transmission to the next lower gear, SECOND gear can be helpful in snowy or icy
while tapping (+) to enter AutoStick mode will conditions.
retain the current gear. The current transmission
gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
SPORT MODE — IF EQUIPPED FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION NOTE:

The Quadra-Trac I system is not appropriate for
The driveline is equipped with a Front Axle conditions where 4WD LOW range is recom-
Disconnect (FAD) for the one-speed and two-speed mended Ú page 200.
drivelines. The FAD operation is fully automated
and controlled by the Drivetrain Control Module QUADRA-T RAC II O PERATING
(DTCM). It does not require any customer input to INSTRUCTIONS/PRECAUTIONS —
engage. The FAD is set to connect, disconnect and
provide 4WD function based on certain set
I F E QUIPPED
conditions detected by the DTCM, including but not The Quadra-Trac II system comes equipped with a
limited to the following: customer-selectable electronically operated
 Ambient temperature on-demand transfer case with active torque
management in all driveable ranges. This transfer
SPORT Mode  Wipers
case provides the following operating range
 Selec-Terrain Mode selection positions:
Your vehicle is equipped with a Sport Mode
feature. When activated, the engine and  Wheel-slip detection  4WD HI
transmission, steering and suspension (if The FAD is actuated only in 4WD HI range and  N (NEUTRAL)
equipped with air suspension) are all set to their stays connected for 4WD LOW.
 4WD LOW
SPORT settings. Sport Mode will provide improved
throttle response and modified transmission shift QUADRA-T RAC I OPERATING When additional tractive effort and torque are
points as well as firmer suspension and steering I NSTRUCTIONS/PRECAUTIONS — required, the 4WD LOW position can be used. The
for an enhanced driving experience. This mode 4WD LOW position is intended for loose, slippery
may be activated and deactivated by pushing the
I F E QUIPPED road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD LOW
SPORT ON button on the instrument panel switch The Quadra-Trac I is a single-speed (HI range only) position on dry, hard-surfaced roads may cause
bank or by selecting SPORT mode using the transfer case, which enables on-demand increased tire wear and damage to driveline
Selec-Terrain switch (if equipped). When Sport four-wheel drive with active torque management. components.
Mode has been activated an indicator light will No driver interaction is required. The Brake When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the
illuminate in the instrument cluster. Traction Control (BTC) system, which combines engine speed is approximately three times that of
standard ABS and Traction Control, provides the normal 4WD HI position at a given road speed.
resistance to any wheel that is slipping to allow Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not
additional torque transfer to wheels with traction. exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles 4WD HI SHIFTING P ROCEDURES

depends on tires of equal size, type, and
This is the default operating range for daily use.
circumference on each wheel. Any difference will 4WD HI To 4WD LOW
adversely affect performance and function of the N (NEUTRAL) With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph (0 to
transfer case. This range disengages the driveline from the 5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
Because four-wheel drive provides improved powertrain. It is used for towing your vehicle position and the engine running, shift the
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe turning behind another vehicle Ú page 196. transmission into NEUTRAL (N), push and hold the
and stopping speeds. Do not go faster than road 4WD LOW button until the 4WD LOW indicator light
conditions permit. WARNING! begins to flash in the instrument cluster. When the
You or others could be injured or killed if you shift is complete, the 4WD LOW indicator light will
WARNING! leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer remain on solid. 4
You or others could be injured or killed if you case in the N (NEUTRAL) position without first
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case in the N (NEUTRAL) position without first case N (NEUTRAL) position disengages both the
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain
case N (NEUTRAL) position disengages both the and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the
front and rear drive shafts from the powertrain transmission is in PARK. The parking brake
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the should always be applied when the driver is not
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake in the vehicle.
should always be applied when the driver is not
in the vehicle. 4WD LOW
This range is for low speed four-wheel drive. It 4WD LOW Button
SHIFT POSITIONS provides an additional gear reduction which allows
for increased torque to be delivered to both the
NOTE:
For additional information on the appropriate use If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a “To
front and rear wheels while providing maximum
of each four-wheel drive system mode position, Complete 4WD Shift Put Transmission In Neutral”
pulling power for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
see the information below: or a “To Complete 4WD Shift Speed Must Be Below
Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
3 MPH” or a “To Complete 4WD Shift Allow Engine
To Return To Idle” message will flash from the
instrument cluster display Ú page 99.
4WD LOW To 4WD HI  Shifting into or out of 4WD LOW is possible with ELECTRONIC S WAY B AR DISCONNECT —
the vehicle completely stopped; however, diffi-
With the vehicle at speeds of 0 to 3 mph
culty may occur due to the mating clutch teeth I F E QUIPPED
(0 to 5 km/h), the ignition switch in the ON position
not being properly aligned. Several attempts Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic
or the engine running, shift the transmission into
may be required for clutch teeth alignment and disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This system
NEUTRAL (N), push and hold the 4WD LOW button
shift completion to occur. allows greater front suspension travel in off-road
until the 4WD LOW indicator light begins to flash in
The preferred method is with the vehicle rolling situations.
the instrument cluster. When the shift is complete,
0 to 3 mph (0 to 5 km/h). If the vehicle is
the 4WD LOW indicator light will remain off. This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR switch
moving faster than 3 mph (5 km/h), the transfer
NOTE: located on the instrument panel (to the right of the
case will not allow the shift.
gear selector).
 If shift conditions/interlocks are not met —
“4WD Shift Cancelled” or “4WD Shift Aborted/ QUADRA-T RAC II S YSTEM —
Retry Shift” message will be displayed on the I F E QUIPPED
instrument cluster. To reattempt shift, put the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and push and hold The Quadra-Trac II System features two torque
the 4WD LOW button. transfer couplings. The couplings include an
Electronic Limited-Slip Differential (ELSD) rear axle
 If shift conditions/interlocks are not met, a “To and the Quadra-Trac II transfer case. The ELSD
Complete 4WD Shift Put Transmission In axle is fully automatic and requires no driver input
Neutral” or a “To Complete 4WD Shift Speed to operate. Under normal driving conditions, the
Must Be Below 3 MPH” or a “To Complete 4WD unit functions as a standard axle, balancing torque
Shift Allow Engine To Return To Idle” message evenly between left and right wheels. With a
will flash from the instrument cluster display traction difference between left and right wheels, SWAY BAR Switch
Ú page 99. the coupling will sense a speed difference. As one
wheel begins to spin faster than the other, torque Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the system.
will automatically transfer from the wheel that has Push the switch again to deactivate the system.
less traction, to the wheel that has traction. While The Sway Bar Indicator Light (located in the
the transfer case and axle coupling differ in design, instrument cluster) will illuminate when the bar is
their operation is similar. Follow the Quadra-Trac II disconnected. The Sway Bar Indicator Light will
transfer case shifting information, preceding this flash during activation transition, or when
section, for shifting this system. activation conditions are not met.
The stabilizer/sway bar should remain in on-road

mode during normal driving conditions.
NOTE:
The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
to left and right suspension height differences. SELEC-T ERRAIN M ODE S ELECTION
WARNING! This condition is due to driving surface differences
or vehicle loading. In order for the stabilizer/sway Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the
Ensure the stabilizer/sway bar is reconnected
bar to disconnect/reconnect, the right and left vehicle control systems, along with driver input, to
before driving on hard surfaced roads or at
halves of the bar must be aligned. This alignment provide the best performance for all terrains. Tap
speeds above 18 mph (29 km/h); a
may require that the vehicle be driven onto level the toggle up or down to cycle through the
disconnected stabilizer/sway bar may contribute
ground or rocked from side to side. positions.
to the loss of vehicle control, which could result
in serious injury. Under certain circumstances, To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY BAR
the front stabilizer/sway bar enhances vehicle switch again. 4
stability and assists with vehicle control. The
system monitors vehicle speed and will attempt WARNING!
to reconnect the stabilizer/sway bar at speeds If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to
over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a on-road mode, the Sway Bar Indicator Light will
flashing or solid Sway Bar Indicator Light. Once flash in the instrument cluster and vehicle
vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph stability may be reduced. Do not attempt to drive
(22 km/h), the system will once again attempt to the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h). Driving
return to off-road mode. faster than 18 mph (29 km/h) with a
disconnected stabilizer/sway bar may contribute Selec-Terrain
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to 4WD to the loss of vehicle control, which could result
LOW and push the SWAY BAR switch to obtain the in serious injury. 1 — Selec-Terrain Positions
off-road position Ú page 134. The Sway Bar 2 — Selec-Terrain Toggle
Indicator Light will flash until the stabilizer/sway
bar has been fully disconnected.
Selec-Terrain consists of the following positions:  AUTO – Fully automatic full-time four-wheel I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER D ISPLAY
drive operation can be used on and off-road.
 ROCK – Off-road calibration is only available in
Balances traction with seamless steering feel to MESSAGES
4WD LOW. The vehicle is raised (if equipped
with air suspension) for improved ground clear- provide improved handling and acceleration When the appropriate conditions exist, a message
ance. Traction-based tuning with improved over two-wheel drive vehicles. If the suspension will appear in the instrument cluster Ú page 99.
steerability for use on high traction off-road is already in OR1 or OR2, the vehicle will not
surfaces. Use for low speed obstacles such as lower to NRH with Auto selection as to maintain
capability.
QUADRA-LIFT — IF EQUIPPED
large rocks, deep ruts, etc. If equipped with air
suspension, the vehicle level will change to NOTE: DESCRIPTION
Off-Road 2 (OR2). If the Selec-Terrain switch is If equipped with air suspension, the level will only The Quadra-Lift Air Suspension system provides
in ROCK mode, and the transfer case is raise to Normal Ride Height (NRH) in the AUTO full time load leveling capability along with the
switched from 4WD LOW to 4WD HI, the mode. If the vehicle is in OR1 or OR2 the height will benefit of vehicle height adjustment by a toggle
Selec-Terrain system will return to AUTO. not lower automatically until defined speed switch. The vehicle will automatically raise and
 SAND/MUD – Off-road calibration for use on low thresholds are exceeded. lower the ride height to adapt to the appropriate
traction surfaces such as mud or sand. Driveline  SPORT – This mode is only available in 4WD HI. driving conditions. At higher speeds, the vehicle
is maximized for traction. Some binding may be When activated, the engine and transmission, will lower to an aerodynamic ride height and when
felt on less forgiving surfaces. The electronic steering and suspension (if equipped with air operating in off-road modes, the vehicle will raise
brake controls are set to limit traction control suspension) are all set to their SPORT settings. the ride height accordingly. The buttons near the
management of throttle and wheel spin. If SPORT mode will provide improved throttle terrain switch in the center console area can be
equipped with air suspension, the level will response and modified transmission shift used to set preferred ride height to match the
change to Off-Road 1 (OR1). points as well as firmer suspension and appropriate conditions.
 SNOW – Tuning set for additional stability in
steering, the vehicle will also be dropped to Aero
inclement weather. Use on and off-road on Height for an enhanced driving experience.
loose traction surfaces such as snow. When in When SPORT mode has been activated, an indi-
SNOW mode (depending on certain operating cator light will illuminate in the instrument
conditions), the transmission may use SECOND cluster.
gear (rather than FIRST gear) during launches,
to minimize wheel slippage. If equipped with air
suspension, the default ride height for SNOW is
Normal Ride Height (NRH).
 Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Non-TrailHawk Raises the  Normal Ride Height (NRH) 0.0 inches (0 mm) –
vehicle approximately 2.4 inches [60 mm]) This is the standard position of the suspension
(TrailHawk Raises the vehicle approximately and is meant for normal driving.
3.0 inches 75 mm]) – This position is intended  Aero Height (Lowers the vehicle
for off-roading use only where maximum ground approximately -0.8 inches [-21 mm] Front
clearance is required. To enter OR2, push the and -1.0 inches [-25 mm] Rear) – This position
UP button twice from the NRH position or once provides improved aerodynamics by lowering
from the OR1 position while vehicle speed is the vehicle. The vehicle will automatically enter
below 20 mph (32 km/h). While in OR2, if the Aero when the vehicle speed remains between
vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the 62 mph (100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h)
Quadra-Lift Switch vehicle height will be automatically lowered to for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle 4
OR1 Ú page 200. speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle
1 — Off-Road 2 Height Indicator Lamp  Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle will return to NRH from Aero if the vehicle speed
(Customer Selectable) approximately 1.6 inches [40 mm]) – This is the remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and
2 — Off-Road 1 Height Indicator Lamp primary position for all off-road driving until OR2 35 mph (56 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds
(Customer Selectable) is needed. Push the UP button once from the or if the vehicle speed falls below 30 mph
3 — Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp NRH position while the vehicle speed is below (48 km/h). The vehicle will enter Aero, regard-
(Customer Selectable) 38 mph (61 km/h). When in the OR1 position, if less of vehicle speed if the vehicle is in SPORT
4 — Aero Height Indicator Lamp the vehicle speed remains between 40 mph mode.
(Customer Selectable) (64 km/h) and 50 mph (80 km/h) for greater  Entry/Exit Height (Lowers the vehicle
than 20 seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds approximately -1.8 inches [-46 mm] Front
5 — Entry/Exit Height Indicator Lamp
50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle will be automat- and -2.0 inches [-50 mm] Rear) – This position
(Customer Selectable)
ically lowered to NRH Ú page 200. lowers the vehicle for easier passenger entry
6 — Toggle Switch
and exit as well as lowering the rear of the
vehicle for easier loading and unloading of
cargo. To enter Entry/Exit, push the DOWN
button twice from NRH while the vehicle speed
is below 6 mph (10 km/h). To exit Entry/Exit,
push the UP button twice while in Entry/Exit or
drive the vehicle over 6 mph (10 km/h).
NOTE: The Quadra-Lift Air Suspension system uses a  Default ride height can be changed by manually
Automatic lowering of the vehicle into Entry/Exit lifting and lowering pattern which keeps the adjusting the ride height switch to Normal Ride
can be enabled through the Uconnect Touch- headlights from incorrectly shining into oncoming Height or Aero Height and staying in the
screen Radio by selecting the “Auto Entry/Exit” traffic. When raising the vehicle, the rear of the selected height for 2.5 seconds. It will be stored
setting. If this feature is enabled, the vehicle will vehicle will move up first and then the front. When as the default ride height and the height will be
only lower if the gear selector is in PARK, the lowering the vehicle, the front will move down first maintained until a new default ride height is
terrain switch is in AUTO, the transfer case is in and then the rear. selected.
AUTO and the vehicle level is either in Normal or After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that If equipped with a touchscreen radio, all enabling/
Aero Height. The vehicle will not automatically the air suspension system operates briefly; this is disabling of air suspension features must be done
lower to Entry/Exit height if the air suspension level normal. The system is correcting the position of the through the radio Ú page 204.
is in OR2 or OR1. If the vehicle is equipped with vehicle to ensure a proper appearance.
Intrusion Theft Module (ITM), the lowering will be WARNING!
To assist with changing a spare tire, the
suppressed when the ignition is switched OFF and
Quadra-Lift Air Suspension system has a feature The air suspension system uses a high pressure
the door is open to prevent setting the alarm off.
which allows the automatic leveling to be disabled volume of air to operate the system. To avoid
The Selec-Terrain system will automatically change Ú page 204. personal injury or damage to the system, see an
the vehicle to the proper height based on the authorized dealer for service.
position of the Selec-Terrain switch. The height can NOTE:
be changed from the default Selec-Terrain setting Default Ride Height:
by normal use of the air suspension buttons  Select Aero Height or Normal Ride Height as the AIR SUSPENSION MODES
Ú page 137. default for all vehicle speeds and operation.
This is the selected height that the suspension The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to
The system requires that the engine be running for protect the system in unique situations:
all changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the will level for speed changes (e.g. raising from
doors must be closed. If a door is opened at any Entry/Exit Height at speed, lowering from Off Tire/Jack Mode
time while the vehicle is lowering the change will Road Height at speed, etc.). To assist with changing a spare tire, the air
not be completed until the open door(s) is/are suspension system has a feature which allows the
closed. automatic leveling to be disabled Ú page 204.
NOTE:
This mode is intended to be enabled with the
ignition on.
Auto Entry/Exit Mode Wheel Alignment Mode Toggle up once will move the suspension one
To assist in entering and exiting the vehicle, the air Before performing a wheel alignment this mode position higher from the current position,
suspension system has a feature which must be enabled Ú page 204. assuming all conditions are met (i.e. ignition on,
automatically lowers the vehicle to Entry/Exit ride speed below threshold, etc). Toggle up can be
NOTE: pushed multiple times. Each toggle up will raise
height Ú page 204. This mode is intended to be enabled with the the requested level by one position up to a
NOTE: ignition on. maximum position of OR2 or the highest position
This mode is intended to be enabled with the If equipped with a touchscreen radio, all enabling/ allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle
ignition on. disabling of air suspension features must be done speed, etc).
Transport Mode through the radio Ú page 204. Toggle down once will move the suspension one
To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension I NSTRUMENT C LUSTER D ISPLAY position lower from the current level, assuming all 4
system has a feature which will put the vehicle into conditions are met (i.e. ignition on, doors closed,
Entry/Exit height and disable the automatic load MESSAGES speed below threshold, etc). Toggle down can be
leveling system Ú page 204. When the appropriate conditions exist, a message pushed multiple times. Each toggle down will lower
NOTE: will appear in the instrument cluster Ú page 99. the requested level by one position down to a
This mode is intended to be enabled with the minimum of Entry/Exit Height or the lowest
ignition on.
OPERATION position allowed based on current conditions (i.e.
The indicator lamps 1 through 5 will illuminate to vehicle speed, etc.)
Suspension Display Messages Mode
The “Suspension Display Messages” setting allows show the current position of the vehicle. Flashing
you to only display suspension warnings indicator lamps will show a position which the
Ú page 204. system is working to achieve. When raising, if
multiple indicator lamps are flashing while raising,
NOTE: the highest flashing indicator lamp is the position
This mode is intended to be enabled with the the system is working to achieve. When lowering, if
ignition on. multiple indicators are flashing while lowering, the
lowest solid indicator lamp is the position the
system is working to achieve.
Automatic height changes will occur based on

vehicle speed and the current vehicle height. The
FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L ONLY — Alternate electric power steering efforts (Normal,
Comfort and Sport) can be selected through the
indicator lamps and instrument cluster display IF EQUIPPED Uconnect System Ú page 204. If SPORT mode is
messages will operate the same for automatic selected, steering efforts are optimized for sporty
changes and user requested changes. This feature offers improved fuel economy by driving.
shutting off four of the engine's eight cylinders
 Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 1 through 5 during light load and cruise conditions. The system If the Electric Power Steering warning
will be illuminated. is automatic with no driver inputs or additional icon is displayed and the “SERVICE
 Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 2 through 5 driving skills required. POWER STEERING” or the “POWER
will be illuminated. STEERING ASSIST OFF – SERVICE
NOTE: SYSTEM” message is displayed within the
 Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamps 3 This system may take some time to return to full instrument cluster display, this indicates the
through 5 will be illuminated. functionality after a battery disconnect. vehicle needs to be taken to the dealer for service
 Aero Height– Indicator lamps 4 and 5 will be illu- Ú page 110.
minated. POWER STEERING NOTE:
 Entry/Exit Height– Indicator lamp 5 will be illu- The electric power steering system provides  Even if the power steering assistance is no
minated. enhanced vehicle response and increased ease of longer operational, it is still possible to steer the
 Transport Mode – Indicator lamp 5 will be illumi- maneuverability in tight spaces. The system will vehicle. Under these conditions there will be a
nated. Driving above 3 mph (5 km/h) or dese- vary its assistance to provide light effort while substantial increase in steering effort, espe-
lecting setting in the radio will disable Transport parking and a good feel while driving. If the electric cially at low speeds and during parking maneu-
Mode. power steering system experiences a fault that vers.
prevents it from providing assistance, you will still
 Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 3 through 5 have the ability to steer the vehicle manually.  If the condition persists, see an authorized
will be illuminated. Driving above 5 mph dealer for service.
(8 km/h) or deselecting setting in the radio will WARNING!
disable Tire/Jack Mode.
Continued operation with reduced assist could
 Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 3
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Service
through 5 will be illuminated. Driving above
should be obtained as soon as possible.
5 mph (8 km/h) or deselecting setting in the
radio will disable Wheel Alignment Mode.
If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following  The vehicle is on a steep grade.
STEERING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is Must Occur:  Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
displayed on the instrument cluster screen, they  The system must be in STOP/START READY acceptable cabin temperature has not been
indicate that extreme steering maneuvers may state. A STOP/START READY message will be achieved.
have occurred which caused an over temperature displayed in the instrument cluster display
condition in the electric power steering system.  HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower
within the Stop/Start section Ú page 99. speed.
Once driving conditions are safe, pull over and let
the vehicle idle for a few moments until the icon  The vehicle must be completely stopped.  HVAC is set to MAX A/C.
and message turn off.  The gear selector must be in a forward gear and  Engine has not reached normal operating
the brake pedal pressed. temperature.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED The engine will shut down, the tachometer will  The transmission is not in a forward gear. 4
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce move to the zero position and the Stop/Start
telltale will illuminate indicating you are in  Hood is open.
fuel consumption. The system will stop the engine
Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained  Part-Time 4WD, 4WD Lock, 4WD LOW, or an
automatically during a vehicle stop if the required
conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or upon return to an engine running condition. off-road Selec-Terrain mode is selected (if
equipped).
pressing the accelerator pedal will automatically POSSIBLE R EASONS T HE E NGINE D OES
re-start the engine.  Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient pres-
N OT AUTOSTOP sure.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy-duty
starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded Prior to engine shut down, the system will check  Accelerator pedal input.
engine parts, to handle the additional engine many safety and comfort conditions to see if they  Engine temperature is too high.
starts. are fulfilled. Detailed information about the
operation of the Stop/Start system may be viewed  5 mph (8 km/h) threshold has not been
AUTOSTOP MODE in the instrument cluster display Stop/Start achieved from previous Autostop.
Screen. In the following situations, the engine will  Steering angle is beyond threshold.
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. At that time, the not stop: It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
system will go into STOP/START READY and if all  Driver’s seat belt is not buckled. several times without the Stop/Start system going
other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/  Driver’s door is not closed.
into a STOP/START READY state under more
START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE Autostop mode. extreme conditions of the items listed above.
 Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
 Battery charge is low.
TO START T HE E NGINE WHILE IN TO MANUALLY TURN OFF T HE S TOP/ SYSTEM M ALFUNCTION

AUTOSTOP MODE S TART S YSTEM If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start system,
While in a forward gear, the engine will start when the system will not shut down the engine. A
the brake pedal is released or the throttle pedal is “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message and a
pressed. The transmission will automatically yellow Stop/Start telltale will appear in the
re-engage upon engine restart. instrument cluster display Ú page 99.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM” message
Automatically While In Autostop Mode: appears in the instrument cluster display, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
 The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS
 To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
Your vehicle is equipped with the Adaptive Cruise
 HVAC is set to full defrost mode. Control (ACC) system which will adjust the vehicle
Stop/Start OFF Switch
 HVAC system temperature or fan speed is speed up to the preset speed to maintain a
manually adjusted. Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the distance with the vehicle ahead.
switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.
 Battery voltage drops too low.
The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in the NOTE:
 Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed. instrument cluster display and the Autostop mode In vehicles NOT equipped with the Active Driving
will be disabled Ú page 99. Assist (ADA) system:
 A Stop/Start system error occurs.
 Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used when
 Part-Time 4WD, 4WD Lock, 4WD LOW, or an NOTE:
ACC is not enabled, and functions as normal
off-road Selec-Terrain mode is selected (if The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to the
cruise control.
equipped). ON mode every time the ignition is turned OFF and
back ON.  Fixed Speed Cruise Control will not detect vehi-
 Steering angle is beyond threshold. cles directly ahead of you. Always be aware of
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE S TOP/ the feature selected.
S TART S YSTEM  Only one Cruise Control feature can operate at a
time. For example, if Fixed Speed Cruise Control
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
is enabled, Adaptive Cruise Control will be
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
unavailable, and vice versa.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE C ONTROL (ACC) WARNING! WARNING!

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the driving  Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-  Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop
convenience provided by Cruise Control while nience system. It is not a substitute for active and hold the vehicle in the stop position
traveling on highways and major roadways. driver involvement. It is always the driver’s for approximately 10 minutes when
However, it is not a safety system and not designed responsibility to be attentive of road, traffic, following a vehicle ahead. If the vehicle
to prevent collisions. and weather conditions, vehicle speed, ahead does not start moving within
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control engaged distance to the vehicle ahead and, most 10 minutes, the parking brake will be acti-
in light to moderate traffic conditions without the importantly, brake operation to ensure safe vated, and the ACC system will be
constant need to reset your Cruise Control. ACC operation of the vehicle under all road condi- cancelled.
utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing tions. Your complete attention is always
 You should switch off the ACC system: 4
camera designed to detect a vehicle directly ahead required while driving to maintain safe control
of you. of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn-  When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
NOTE: ings can result in a collision and death or snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
serious personal injury. driving situations (i.e., in highway
 If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead, ACC
construction zones).
will apply limited braking or acceleration (not to  The ACC system:
exceed the original set speed) automatically to  When entering a turn lane or highway
 Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming
maintain a preset following distance, while off-ramp; when driving on roads that are
vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a
matching the speed of the vehicle ahead. winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
stationary vehicle in a traffic jam or a
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
 Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica- disabled vehicle).
tions to the vehicle will affect the performance  When towing a trailer up or down steep
 Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward Colli- slopes.
conditions into account, and may be
sion Warning system.
limited upon adverse sight distance condi-  When circumstances do not allow safe
 In vehicles NOT equipped with the Active Driving tions. driving at a constant speed.
Assist system, Fixed Speed Cruise Control (ACC
not enabled) will not detect vehicles directly  Does not always fully recognize complex
ahead of you. Always be aware of the feature driving conditions, which can result in
selected Ú page 410. wrong or missing distance warnings.
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation Driving Assist Menu Adaptive Cruise Control Off
The buttons on the right side of the steering wheel The instrument cluster display will show the When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
operate the ACC system. current system settings for Adaptive Cruise Control “Adaptive Cruise Control Off”.
(ACC), Active Lane Management (ALM), and the The instrument cluster display will return to the last
Active Driving Assist (ADA) systems. The display selected after five seconds of no ACC
information it displays depends on ACC, ALM, and display activity.
ADA system statuses.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Pushing the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) buttons
will display one of the following messages in the The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
instrument cluster display: 20 mph (32 km/h).
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster display will read “ACC
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed Ready.”
setting has not been selected, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.” When the system is off, the instrument cluster
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Adaptive Cruise Control Set Off.”
1 — Distance Increase Button
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is pushed, NOTE:
the display will read “ACC: XX mph (km/h)”. You cannot engage ACC under the following
3 — CANC/Cancel
4 — Distance Decrease Button When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the conditions:
instrument cluster display.  When in 4WD Low
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off The ACC screen may display once again if any of  When the brakes are applied
(If Equipped) the following ACC activity occurs:
 When the parking brake is applied
7 — RES/Resume  System Cancel
 When the transmission is in PARK, REVERSE or
8 — SET (-)/Decel  Driver Override NEUTRAL
 System Off  When the brakes are overheated
 ACC Proximity Warning  When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
 ACC Unavailable Warning  When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at low
speeds
 When there is a stationary vehicle in front of NOTE: NOTE:

your vehicle in close proximity Fixed Speed Cruise Control (if equipped) is used  Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal can
 When Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Full Off without ACC enabled. To change between Adaptive cause the vehicle to continue to accelerate
mode is active Cruise Control (ACC) and Fixed Speed Cruise beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
Control features, first turn off ACC by pushing the message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in the
To Activate/Deactivate ACC on/off button. Then, turn on Fixed Speed instrument cluster display.
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control Cruise Control by pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise
 If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the Control on/off button.
speed while ACC is enabled, the system will not
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
WARNING! be controlling the distance between your vehicle
To turn the system off, push and release the and the vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button again. In Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode, the system only be determined by the position of the accel- 4
At this time, the system will turn off and the will not react to vehicles ahead. In addition, the erator pedal.
instrument cluster displays “Adaptive Cruise proximity warning does not activate and no
Control (ACC) Off.” alarm will sound even if you are too close to the To Cancel
vehicle ahead since neither the presence of the The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
WARNING! vehicle ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance Speed Cruise Control systems:
is detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance  The brake pedal is applied
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
system on when not in use is dangerous. You  The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
Always be aware which mode is selected.
could accidentally set the system or cause it to
 The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
go faster than you want. You could lose control
and have a collision. Always leave the system off If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below  The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
when you are not using it. 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to position
20 mph (32 km/h).  The Electronic Stability Control/Traction Control
NOTE: System (ESC/TCS) activates
To Set A Desired Speed
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below  The vehicle parking brake is applied
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired, push
20 mph (32 km/h).  The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button and
release. The instrument cluster display will show If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
 The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
the set speed. above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be
the current speed of the vehicle.  The braking temperature exceeds normal range
(overheated)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC NOTE: U.S. Speed (mph)
system:  While in ACC mode, when the vehicle comes to  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
 Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds a complete stop longer than two seconds, the result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
 Driver door is opened at low speeds
driver will either have to push the RES (resume) subsequent tap of the button results in an
button or press the accelerator pedal to reen- adjustment of 1 mph.
To Turn Off gage the ACC system.  If the button is continually pushed, the set
The system will turn off and erase the set speed in  ACC cannot be resumed if there is a stationary speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
memory if: vehicle in front of your vehicle in close proximity. ments until the button is released. The new set
 The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button speed is reflected in the instrument cluster
is pushed WARNING! display.
 Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button is The Resume function should only be used if Metric Speed (km/h)
pushed traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming a  Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once will
 The ignition is placed in the OFF position set speed that is too high or too low for result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment. Each
prevailing traffic and road conditions could subsequent tap of the button results in an
 4WD Low is engaged cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate too adjustment of 1 km/h.
To Resume sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these
 If the button is continually pushed, the set
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES warnings can result in a collision and death or
serious personal injury. speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h incre-
(resume) button and remove your foot from the ments until the button is released. The new set
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster display speed is reflected in the instrument cluster
will show the last set speed. To Vary The Speed Setting display.
Resume can be used at any speed above 20 mph To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed NOTE:
(32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed Cruise Control is When you override and push the SET (+) button or
After setting a speed, you can increase the set
being used. SET (-) button, the new set speed will be the current
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or decrease
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph speed by pushing the SET (-) button. speed of the vehicle.
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
When ACC Is Active Setting The Following Distance In ACC To increase the distance setting, push the
 When you use the SET (-) button to decelerate, if Distance Increase button and release. Each time
The specified following distance for ACC can be set
the engine’s braking power does not slow the the button is pushed, the distance setting
by varying the distance setting between four bars
vehicle sufficiently to reach the set speed, the increases by one bar (longer).
(longest), three bars (long), two bars (medium) and
brake system will automatically slow the one bar (short). Using this distance setting and the To decrease the distance setting, push the
vehicle. vehicle speed, ACC calculates and sets the Distance Decrease button and release. Each time
 The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a full distance to the vehicle ahead. This distance the button is pushed, the distance setting
stop when following the vehicle in front. If your setting appears in the instrument cluster display. decreases by one bar (shorter).
vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a standstill, If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
after two seconds the driver will either have to maintain the set speed. If a slower moving vehicle
push the RES (resume) button, or apply the is detected in the same lane, the instrument 4
accelerator pedal to reengage the ACC to the cluster display will show the ACC Set With Target
existing set speed. Detected Indicator Light, and the system will adjust
 The ACC system maintains set speed when the vehicle speed automatically to maintain the
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight distance setting, regardless of the set speed.
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
addition, downshifting may occur while climbing until:
uphill or descending downhill. This is normal  The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed above
operation and necessary to maintain set speed. the set speed.
When driving uphill and downhill, the ACC Distance Settings
system will cancel if the braking temperature  The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
exceeds normal range (overheated). view of the sensor.
2 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
 The distance setting is changed.
3 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
 The system disengages Ú page 147.
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE: ACC Operation At Stop

The brake lights will illuminate whenever the ACC
WARNING!
If the ACC system brings your vehicle to a standstill
system applies the brakes. while following a vehicle ahead, your vehicle will When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC resume motion, without any driver interaction, if must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
predicts that its maximum braking level is not the vehicle ahead starts moving within two vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will flash in the collision and death or serious personal injury.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within
instrument cluster display and a chime will sound
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill,
while ACC continues to apply its maximum braking Display Warnings And Maintenance
the driver will either have to push the RES (resume)
capacity.
button, or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage
NOTE: the ACC to the existing set speed. “WIPE FRONT RADAR SENSOR IN FRONT OF
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster VEHICLE” WARNING
NOTE:
display is a warning for the driver to take action The “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”
and does not necessarily mean that the Forward  If your vehicle is at a standstill for longer than
two seconds, the system will hold brake pres- warning will display and a chime will sound when
Collision Warning system is applying the brakes conditions temporarily limit system performance.
autonomously. sure for up to 10 minutes. If no driver action is
taken after the 10 minutes, the Electric Park This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
Overtake Aid Brake will be applied and the ACC system will such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system may
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) cancel. also become temporarily blinded due to
engaged and following a vehicle, the system will  While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC (or the vehicle is traveling below 3 mph (5 km/ cases, the instrument cluster display will display
set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This h), and the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the the above message and the system will deactivate.
additional acceleration is triggered when the driver driver door is opened, the Electric Park Brake This message can sometimes be displayed while
utilizes the left turn signal and will only be active will be applied and the ACC system will cancel. driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice and snow,
when passing on the left hand side. or tunnels with reflective tiles). The ACC system will
recover after the vehicle has left these areas.
Under rare conditions, when the radar is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE: NOTE: If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver

If the “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar Sensor”  If the “ACC Unavailable Wipe Front Radar should examine the windshield and the camera
warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise Control is still Sensor” message occurs frequently (e.g. more located on the back side of the inside rearview
available. than once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of an
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver mud, or other obstruction, have the radar obstruction.
should examine the sensor. It may require cleaning sensor realigned at an authorized dealer. When the condition that created limited
or removal of an obstruction. The sensor is located  Installing a snowplow, front-end protector, an functionality is no longer present, the system will
in the center of the vehicle behind the lower grille. aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is not return to full functionality.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is recommended. Doing so may block the sensor NOTE:
important to note the following maintenance and inhibit ACC operation. If the “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front Wind-
items: shield” message occurs frequently (e.g. more than 4
“CLEAN FRONT WINDSHIELD” WARNING once on every trip) without any snow, rain, mud, or
 Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe the
sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious not to The “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front other obstruction, have the windshield and forward
damage the sensor lens. Windshield” warning will display, and a chime will facing camera inspected at an authorized dealer.
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
 Do not remove any screws from the sensor. SERVICE ACC WARNING
performance. This most often occurs at times of
Doing so could cause an ACC system malfunc-
poor visibility, such as in snow or heavy rain and If the system turns off, and the instrument cluster
tion or failure and require a sensor realignment.
fog. The ACC system may also become temporarily display reads “ACC Unavailable Service Required”
 If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is blinded due to obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or or “Cruise Unavailable Service Required”, there
damaged due to a collision, see your authorized ice on windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In may be an internal system fault or a temporary
dealer for service. these cases, the instrument cluster display will malfunction that limits ACC functionality. Although
 Do not attach or install any accessories near the read “ACC Limited Functionality Clean Front the vehicle is still drivable under normal
sensor, including transparent material or after- Windshield” and the system will have degraded conditions, ACC will be temporarily unavailable. If
market grilles. Doing so could cause an ACC performance. this occurs, try activating ACC again later, following
system failure or malfunction. This message can sometimes be displayed while an ignition cycle. If the problem persists, see an
When the condition that deactivated the system is driving in adverse weather conditions. The ACC authorized dealer.
no longer present, the system will return to the system will recover after the vehicle has left these
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will resume areas. Under rare conditions, when the camera is
function by simply reactivating it. not tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
Precautions While Driving With ACC

In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may brake
late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to stay alert
and may need to intervene. The following are
examples of these types of situations:
TOWING A TRAILER
Towing a trailer is not recommended when using
ACC.
Offset Driving Condition Example ACC Hill Example
OFFSET DRIVING
TURNS AND BENDS LANE CHANGING
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane that
is offset from your direct line of travel, or a vehicle When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is completely
merging in from a side lane. There may not be system may decrease the vehicle speed and in the lane in which you are traveling. In the
sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead. The offset acceleration for stability reasons, with no vehicle in following lane changing example, ACC has not yet
vehicle may move in and out of the line of travel, front detected. Once the vehicle is out of the curve detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may not
which can cause your vehicle to brake or the system will resume your original set speed. detect the vehicle until it is too late for the ACC
accelerate unexpectedly. This is a part of normal ACC system functionality. system to take action. ACC may not detect a
NOTE: vehicle until it is completely in the lane. There may
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited. not be sufficient distance to the lane-changing
vehicle. Always be attentive and ready to apply the
USING ACC ON HILLS brakes if necessary.
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a vehicle
in your lane. Depending on the speed, vehicle load,
traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hills,
ACC performance may be limited.
STATIONARY OBJECTS AND VEHICLES TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST SYSTEM —

ACC does not react to stationary objects or
vehicles. For example, ACC will not react in IF EQUIPPED
situations where the vehicle you are following exits The Traffic Sign Assist (TSA) system uses a camera
your lane and the vehicle ahead is stopped in your mounted on the windshield, as well as map data
lane. It will consider this stopped vehicle a when the vehicle is equipped with Navigation, to
stationary object as it did not previously detect detect recognizable road signs such as:
movement from it. Always be attentive and ready
 Speed limits
to apply the brakes if necessary.
 School zones
Lane Changing Example  No passing zones 4
NARROW VEHICLES NOTE:
 The TSA system will automatically display the
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
detected road sign using the unit of measure-
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
ment (mph or km/h) selected within the instru-
detected until they have moved fully into the lane.
ment cluster display.
There may not be sufficient distance to the vehicle
ahead.  If no speed limit signs are detected, the system
will revert to the speed limit signs that are
stored in the Navigation system.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example  The system always checks the traffic signs indi-
cating the current speed limit. The system is
able to recognize and display up to two different
road signs in the instrument cluster display.
These road signs can be found on the Driver
Assist page.
Narrow Vehicle Example

ACTIVATION/DEACTIVATION TSA Off

When the TSA system is turned off, the system will
The TSA System can be enabled/disabled within
not show any traffic signs (unless selected in the
the Uconnect system through the Safety/Driver
HOME screen, which will show detected speed
Assistance menu. System ON is signaled by road
limit signs), and no alerts will be issued to the
signs shown on the instrument cluster display.
driver.
NOTE:
Even if the system is OFF, the speed limit sign will I NDICATIONS ON THE D ISPLAY
be displayed when the driver selects it on the Detected traffic signs are shown in the instrument
HOME screen. cluster display, and can display any combination of
Traffic Signs Recognized
TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST MODES signs at one time (e.g. speed limit, speed limit and
supplemental info, and “Do Not Pass” signs) 1 — Current Speed Limit With Supplemental
TSA has three selectable modes of operation that depending on what information is available.
are available through the Uconnect system Information (School Zone)
When a newly detected speed limit is higher than 2 — Next Speed Limit Detected
Ú page 204.
the current speed limit, the display will update
Visual 3 — No Passing Zone Detected
along with an “up” arrow.
When Visual is selected, the system will alert the When a newly detected speed limit is lower than
driver when the current speed of the vehicle the current speed limit, the display will update Supplemental Information
exceeds the detected speed limit by showing a along with a “down” arrow. Supplemental information may be displayed along
graphic in the instrument cluster display. with a newly detected speed limit indicating
NOTE:
Visual + Chime special circumstances the driver should be aware
Up or down arrows will be displayed for up to five
of. Available supplemental information includes:
When Visual + Chime is selected, the system will seconds.
alert the driver when the current speed of the  School
vehicle exceeds the detected speed limit by  Construction
showing a graphic in the instrument cluster  Rain
display, and by sounding an audible alert. The
audible alert will last for 10 seconds, and the  Snow
visual alert will remain on as long as the vehicle is  Fog
exceeding the speed limit.
NOTE: Just like ACC, ADA will maintain a set speed as long
Supplemental information will not be displayed CAUTION! as the set distance between your vehicle and the
when the vehicle is ONLY equipped with GPS.  Clean foreign matters such as bird droppings, vehicle in front is maintained. ADA will also keep
Speed Limit Exceeded insects, snow or ice on the windshield. Use your vehicle centered between the lane lines, and
specific detergents and clean cloths to avoid monitor for other vehicles in adjacent lanes by
When the vehicle’s speed exceeds the displayed utilizing the Blind Spot Monitoring sensors.
speed limit by 3 mph (5 km/h), the speed limit sign scratching the windshield.
on the instrument cluster display will show a red Two types of Active Driving Assist systems are
available:
outline to alert the driver. ACTIVE DRIVING ASSIST SYSTEM —  Base ADA system
CAUTION! IF EQUIPPED  Hands-Free ADA system
4
 Traffic Sign Assist is designed to assist the
driver and not to substitute the driver. It is the
OPERATION Base Active Driving Assist System — If Equipped
The Base ADA system uses sensors within the
driver’s responsibility to continue to monitor The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system is combined
steering wheel to measure driver attentiveness,
the vehicle speed. with the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system, and
and requires that the driver have their hands on
centers the vehicle in the driving lane while
 Functionality may be limited or the system the steering wheel at all times.
traveling at speeds up to 90 mph (145 km/h).
may not work if the sensor is obstructed. The system will generally aim to keep the vehicle
For ACC system operating instructions and system
 The system may have limited operation or not centered in the lane, but when the driver turns the
limitations, see Ú page 145.
work at all in weather conditions such as steering wheel (e.g. to move further away from a
heavy rain, hail, and thick fog. Strong light NOTE: large vehicle in the next lane) the system will
contrasts can influence the recognition capa-  The driver should always obey traffic laws and reduce its control and enter "co-steering" mode.
bility of the sensor. speed limits. Never drive above applicable While in co-steering mode, the system will provide
speed limit restrictions. reduced assistance and allow the driver to control
 The area surrounding the sensor must not be
 The driver can override ADA at any time by
the path of the vehicle. Once the driver stops
covered with stickers or any other object.
braking, accelerating, or steering the vehicle. providing input to the steering wheel, the system
 Do not tamper or perform any operations in will require a few seconds to fully resume lane
the area of the windshield glass directly centering assistance, especially during curves.
surrounding the sensor.
(Continued)
Hands-Free Active Driving Assist System — cluster display will show the message “Active
If Equipped Driving Assist Unavailable Update Subscrip-
The Hands-Free ADA system uses sensors within tion”. Refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual
the steering wheel and a driver monitoring camera Supplement for further information.
located on top of the steering column to monitor  If previously disabled, activating the Hands-Free
driver attentiveness. The Hands-Free ADA allows Active Driving Assist system will also activate
the driver to remove their hands from the steering the Forward Collision Warning and Pedestrian
wheel, but requires that the driver continue to pay Emergency Braking systems Ú page 261.
attention to the road.  If the vehicle is equipped with the Jeep®
NOTE: Connect (Uconnect Connected Services)
The camera may record images of the driver during Assisted Lane Change (Green) package, additional data may be collected
certain crash, or near crash situations. To retrieve through the Jeep® Connect (Uconnect
the images recorded by the camera, special WARNING! Connected Services) system. This includes
equipment is required and access to the vehicle or information about the vehicle’s operation, a
The driver is always responsible for determining
the camera is needed. collision involving the vehicle, the use of the
if a lane change is safe. Failure to follow this
Hands-Free ADA will also change lanes when a turn vehicle and its features, and in certain situa-
warning can result in a collision and death or
signal is activated if the lane in the direction tions, the location and approximate GPS speed
serious personal injury.
indicated is valid and clear, noted by a dashed line of the vehicle. Refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
in the direction of the available lane change. The Manual Supplement for Terms and Conditions
system uses sensors, including Blind Spot NOTE: and Privacy Statements.
Monitoring (BSM) sensors, to determine if a lane  The Hands-Free Active Driving Assist system is  Vehicle data may be read from the Hands-Free
change is possible. If the assisted lane change is in only available on approved roadways. Please ADA system with special equipment and access
progress, a green indication will appear. consult the Jeep® website for further details on to the vehicle or the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
supported roadways.
 The Hands-Free Active Driving Assist system
requires an active subscription through Jeep®
Connect (Uconnect Connected Services)
package. If the ADA on/off button is pushed
without an active subscription, the instrument
To enable the Active Driving Assist system,

WARNING! WARNING! proceed as follows:
The Active Driving Assist (ADA) system is a  When driving in complex driving situations 1. Push the Active Driving Assist on/off button
convenience system. It is not a substitute for (e.g. urban environments, construction zones, located on the right side of the steering
active driver involvement. It is always the driver’s etc.), adverse weather (e.g. rain, snow, fog, wheel. The steering wheel image will display
responsibility to be attentive of road traffic, sleet, dust), or adverse road conditions white in the instrument cluster display until
weather conditions, vehicle speed, distance to (e.g. heavy traffic, worn or missing lane mark- the system is engaged. If ACC was previously
the vehicle ahead, position in the lane compared ings, etc.). disabled, pushing this button will activate
to other vehicles, and brake operation to ensure BOTH ACC and Active Driving Assist systems.
 When entering a highway off-ramp.
safe operation of the vehicle under all road
2. If ACC was active and engaged before pushing
conditions. Your complete attention is always  When driving on roads that are icy, snow
the ADA on/off button, ACC will remain 4
required while driving to maintain safe control of covered, or slippery.
engaged and ADA will become enabled and
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can
 When circumstances do not allow safe driving. then engaged (once all other conditions are
result in a collision and death or serious
met).
personal injury.
Some states and local laws may require hands
TURNING ACTIVE DRIVING A SSIST O N 3. If ACC was not active before pushing the ADA
on/off button, push the SET (+) button or the
to be kept on the steering wheel at all times. For OR OFF SET (-) button and release when the desired
vehicles equipped with the Hands-Free ADA driving speed is shown in the instrument
system, ONLY remove your hands from the cluster display.
steering wheel if the Hands-Free system is
engaged, it is safe to do so, and it is permitted by 4. If desired, adjust the ACC distance setting by
state and local laws. pushing the Distance Increase or Distance
Decrease buttons.
You should turn off the Active Driving Assist
systems:
(Continued)
Active Driving Assist On/Off Button

When all system conditions are met as described System Engagement Conditions
in “System Engagement Conditions” in the next The following conditions must be met before the
section, the system will engage and the steering system will engage:
wheel image in the display will change to green.
 Active Driving Assist system is enabled
 ACC is engaged
 Driver seat belt is buckled
 System detects visible lane markings
 Vehicle is traveling below 90 mph (145 km/h)
 Vehicle is centered in lane Do Not Grip Inside Of Steering Wheel
 Turn signal is not activated
System Deactivation
 Vehicle is not in a tight curve
The system will be deactivated in any of the
 Trailer is not connected following situations:
Active Driving Assist Engaged (Steering Wheel Green)  Driver has hands on steering wheel and is  If the system has detected driver inattentive-
NOTE: paying attention to the road ness, and has gone through all escalation warn-
 Vehicle is driving on an approved roadway ings after hands are no longer detected on the
 Along with the color change of the steering
steering wheel:
wheel image, the “glow” effect of the instrument  If equipped with the Hands-Free system, a
cluster display will also change to green when subscription is active and the vehicle is  Base ADA: Hands no longer detected on the
ADA is engaged. receiving a clear cellular signal steering wheel
 If equipped with Hands-Free ADA, the light strips NOTE:  Hands-Free ADA: Driver no longer attentive
in the driver’s and front passenger’s door For the system to detect the driver’s hands on the  If lane markings are no longer detected or poor
panels will also change to green indicating ADA steering wheel, the wheel must be gripped on the road conditions are experienced
is engaged. outside. Gripping the inside areas of the steering  If the brake pedal is pressed or ACC system is
wheel will not satisfy the hands-on condition to deactivated
engage the system.
 If a turn signal is used when equipped with Base
ADA (unless a target is in the blind spot zone on
the same side the turn signal is being applied)
 If the driver performs an evasive maneuver, Hands-Free System Deactivation (If Equipped)  For Hands-Free ADA only, light strips in the
applying high torque to the steering wheel for a In addition to the deactivation conditions listed driver and front passenger’s door panels
short duration above, the Hands-Free ADA system will also For Base ADA, if driver attention is not returned,
 If the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled deactivate in the following situations: the system will deactivate.
 If the vehicle speed exceeds 90 mph  The system initiates a Stop-In-Lane maneuver to For Hands-Free ADA, if driver attention is not
(145 km/h) stop the vehicle due to driver inattentiveness. returned, the system will perform a Stop-In-Lane
 If the Active Driving Assist on/off button is Refer to “Indications On The Display” in the next maneuver. Once the vehicle is at a standstill, the
pushed again (ADA will turn off) section for further information. vehicle will attempt to place an emergency call
 The vehicle is not receiving a clear cellular through the Assist and SOS system. If a
 If the driver steers out of the lane and crosses a Stop-In-Lane maneuver is completed, the system
signal for an extended period of time.
lane marking will be unavailable until the ignition is cycled OFF, 4
 If the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system  The subscription for the Hands-Free system is then back to ON.
becomes active and is providing warnings/ expired.
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Off
braking I NDICATIONS ON THE D ISPLAY  ADA is not turned on/enabled by the driver.
NOTE:
The Active Driving Assist system status can always Active Driving Assist Indicators Are White
 ADA will not enable if the system detects a be viewed in the instrument cluster display, and
trailer is connected to the vehicle.  ADA is turned on/enabled by the driver, but the
status changes are shown by changes in color of
system is not actively steering the vehicle.
 Pushing the Active Driving Assist on/off button the system’s indicator lights.
will turn the system off. All other deactivation Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Green
As the system detects driver inattentiveness as
conditions will place the system back into the previously described Ú page 155, the system  System is actively steering the vehicle and the
“enabled” state with the steering wheel indi- status indicator lights will change from green, to system detects driver is attentive.
cator displayed in white until all engagement yellow, to red. The following indicators will change
conditions are met again. in color as warnings to the driver escalate:
 When the system is deactivated, the system  Active Driving Assist Indicator (steering wheel
status indicator lights will turn off, Active Lane icon in the instrument cluster display or Head
Management will return to its previous state, Up Display [if equipped])
and ACC will disable.
 Glow effect of the instrument cluster display
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Yellow SYSTEM S TATUS WARNING!

 Driver inattentiveness has been detected,
Base Active Driving Assist System  Do not use a hand held device when either
warning the driver to place hands on the
steering wheel, or look back toward the road (if Along with changes in the system’s indicator lights Base, or Hands-Free Active Driving Assist
equipped with the Hands-Free system). (green, yellow, and red), the system can also issue system is engaged.
a steering wheel vibration to accompany these
Active Driving Assist Indicators Are Red  Always pay attention to the road when the
warnings. The vibration warning (if enabled) will
 Driver inattentiveness is still being detected, Hands-Free Active Driving Assist system is
occur if the vehicle crosses a lane marker, for
warning the driver to place hands on the engaged.
example, when driving on a tight curve. This
steering wheel, or if equipped with the feature can be turned on or off within the Uconnect  Do not place any objects on the steering wheel
Hands-Free system, take control of the vehicle. system Ú page 204. (e.g. steering wheel covers) which could inter-
NOTE: fere with the hand detection sensors.
SYSTEM O PERATION/LIMITATIONS
For both Base ADA and Hands-Free ADA, the driver
MUST replace hands on the steering wheel and The Base Active Driving Assist and Hands-Free
take control of the vehicle when the system is WARNING!
Active Driving Assist systems DO NOT:
deactivated. Active Driving Assist is an SAE Level 2 Driver  Warn or prevent collisions with other vehicles
Assist feature, requiring driver attention at all
times. To prevent serious injury or death:  Steer your vehicle around stopped vehicles,
slower vehicles, construction equipment,
 Always remain alert and be ready to take pedestrians, or animals
control of the vehicle in the event that the
 Respond to traffic lights or stop signs
Active Driving Assist system disables.
 Merge onto highways or exit off ramps
 Always keep your hands on the steering wheel
when the Base Active Driving Assist system is  Change lanes (exception: Hands-Free, only
activated. when initiated by the driver)
 React to cross traffic
 Always keep your eyes on the road when the
Hands-Free Active Driving Assist system is
Active Driving Assist Cancelled Message activated.
 Maintain a safe distance from other vehicles
and pay attention to traffic conditions.
(Continued)
NOTE:
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a core component
PARKSENSE FRONT/REAR PARK ASSIST  The automatic braking function may only be
applied if the vehicle deceleration is not enough
of ADA. For ACC system limitations Ú page 145. SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED to avoid colliding with a detected obstacle.
The Active Driving Assist system may have limited The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual  The automatic braking function may not be
or reduced functionality when one of the following and audible indications of the distance between applied fast enough for obstacles that move
conditions occur: the rear, and if equipped, the front fascia/bumper toward the rear of the vehicle from the left and/
 The vehicle’s radar sensors and/or forward and a detected obstacle when backing up or or right sides.
facing camera is damaged, covered, moving forward (e.g. during a parking maneuver).  The automatic braking function can be
misaligned, or obstructed (e.g. by mud, ice, The vehicle brakes may be automatically applied enabled/disabled from the Customer Program-
snow, etc.) and released when performing a reverse parking mable Features section of the Uconnect system.
 If the suspension alignment is not correct, if the maneuver if the system detects a possible collision 4
 ParkSense will retain its last known configura-
vehicle is modified (e.g. lifting or lowering the with an obstacle. tion state for the automatic braking function
suspension, installing different sized wheels or NOTE: through ignition cycles.
tires)  The driver can disable the automatic braking The automatic braking function is intended to
 Driving near highway toll booths function by turning ParkSense off via the Park- assist the driver in avoiding possible collisions with
NOTE: Sense switch. The driver can also override auto- detected obstacles when backing up in REVERSE
matic braking by changing the gear or by gear.
If damage to the windshield occurs, have the wind-
pressing the gas pedal over 90% of its capacity
shield replaced by an authorized dealer as soon as NOTE:
during the braking event.
possible.  The system is designed to assist the driver and
 Automatic brakes are not available if the vehicle not to substitute the driver.
is in 4WD Low.
 The driver must stay in full control of the
 Automatic brakes will not be available if there is vehicle's acceleration and braking and is
a faulted condition detected with the ParkSense responsible for the vehicle's movements.
Park Assist system or the Braking System
Module.
For limitations of this system and PARKSENSE SENSORS PARKSENSE DISPLAY

recommendations, see Ú page 168.
The four ParkSense sensors located in the rear The warning display will turn on indicating the
ParkSense will retain the last system state
fascia/bumper, and the six ParkSense sensors system status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
located in the front fascia/bumper, monitor the when the vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
area in front and behind the vehicle that is within been detected.
position.
the sensors’ field of view. The front sensors detect The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
ParkSense can be active only when the gear obstacles from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) showing a single arc in the left and/or right front or
selector is in REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is up to 47 inches (120 cm) from the front fascia/ rear regions based on the object’s distance and
enabled at one of these gear selector positions, bumper. The rear sensors can detect obstacles location relative to the vehicle.
the system will remain active until the vehicle from approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
speed is increased to approximately 7 mph 79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper. If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear
(11 km/h) or above. The system will become active These distances depend on the location, type and region, the display will show a single arc in the left
again if the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds orientation of the obstacle in the horizontal and/or right rear region and the system will
less than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h). A display direction. produce a tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the
warning will appear in the instrument cluster object, the display will show the single arc moving
NOTE: closer to the vehicle and the tone will change from
display if the vehicle is in REVERSE and the speed
If the vehicle is equipped with ParkSense Active a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to fast, to
exceeds 7 mph (11 km/h).
Park Assist, there will be six ParkSense sensors continuous.
located in the rear fascia/bumper.
Front/Rear/Side ParkSense Arcs

1 — No Tone/Solid Arc 7 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc
2 — No Tone/Flashing Arc 8 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 9 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
4 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 10 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
5 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 11 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arcs
6 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 12 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arcs
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the instrument cluster display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the
warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS FOR REAR

Greater than Less than
Rear Distance 79-59 inches 59-47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches
79 inches 12 inches
(inches/cm) (200-150 cm) (150-120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm)
(200 cm) (30 cm)
Audible Alert Single 1/2
None Slow Slow Fast Fast Continuous
Chime Second Tone
Arcs-Left None None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 10th Solid 9th Solid 8th Solid 7th Flashing 6th Flashing 5th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None None 6th Flashing 5th Flashing

None
Radio Volume
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Reduced
WARNING ALERTS FOR FRONT

Front Distance Greater than 47 inches 47-39 inches 39-25 inches 25-12 inches Less than 12 inches
(inches/cm) (120 cm) (120-100 cm) (100-65 cm) (65-30 cm) (30 cm)
Audible Alert Chime None None None Fast Continuous
Arcs-Left None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Center None 1st Solid 2nd Flashing 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Arcs-Right None None None 3rd Flashing 4th Flashing
Radio Volume Reduced No No No Yes Yes
NOTE: ENABLING A ND D ISABLING P ARKSENSE SERVICE THE PARKSENSE PARK ASSIST

ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if
on, when the system is sounding an audio tone. ParkSense can be enabled and disabled SYSTEM
with the ParkSense switch located on the During vehicle start-up, when the ParkSense
Front Park Assist Audible Alerts
switch back above the Uconnect display. System has detected a faulted condition, the
ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to enable instrument cluster will actuate a single chime,
audible alert (chime) after approximately three
the system, the instrument cluster will display the once per ignition cycle, and it will display a pop-up.
seconds when an obstacle has been detected, and
system state. The pop-up will include up to two faults. Possible
the vehicle is stationary.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to disable fault messages are "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
Adjustable Chime Volume Settings WIPE REAR SENSORS", "PARKSENSE
the system, the instrument cluster will display the
Front and rear chime volume settings can be “PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately two UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS", or 4
selected from the Uconnect system Ú page 204. seconds. When the gear selector is moved to "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED.”
The chime volume settings include low, medium, REVERSE and the system is disabled, the The pop-up message will display for five seconds.
and high. instrument cluster display will display the When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and
“PARKSENSE OFF” message for as long as the the system has detected a faulted condition, the
ParkSense will retain its last known configuration
vehicle is in REVERSE. instrument cluster display will display a
state through ignition cycles.
NOTE: "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY When ParkSense is disabled and the gear selector SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
is moved to the DRIVE position, no warning FRONT SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within SERVICE REQUIRED" pop-up message for five
the instrument cluster display Ú page 99. It message will be displayed.
seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will
provides visual warnings to indicate the distance The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
be displayed with "UNAVAILABLE" at either the
between the rear fascia/bumper and/or front ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
front or rear sensor location depending on where
fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. ParkSense switch LED will be off when the system
the fault is detected. The system will continue to
is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and
provide arc alerts for the side that is functioning
the system requires service, the ParkSense switch
properly. These arc alerts will interrupt the
LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
be on.
SENSORS", "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE
FRONT SENSORS", or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" messages if an object is
detected within the five second pop-up duration.
The vehicle graphic will remain displayed for as  When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument  ParkSense should be disabled when the liftgate
long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. cluster will display “PARKSENSE OFF.” Further- is in the open position. An opened liftgate could
If "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR more, once you turn ParkSense off, it remains provide a false indication that an obstacle is
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the behind the vehicle.
FRONT SENSORS" appears in the instrument ignition.
cluster display make sure the outer surface and  When you move the gear selector to the
WARNING!
the underside of the rear fascia/bumper and/or REVERSE position and ParkSense is turned off,  Drivers must be careful when backing up even
front fascia/bumper is clean and clear of snow, the instrument cluster will display “PARKSENSE when using ParkSense. Always check carefully
ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then cycle OFF” for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE. behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be
the ignition. If the message continues to appear  ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other
see an authorized dealer. the radio when it is sounding a tone. vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before
If the "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE backing up. You are responsible for safety and
 Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
REQUIRED" message appears in the instrument must continue to pay attention to your
care not to scratch or damage them. The
cluster display, see an authorized dealer. surroundings. Failure to do so can result in
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can
result in the system not working properly. The  Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
soap and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it assembly be disconnected from the vehicle
cloths. Do not scratch or poke the sensors. could provide a false indication that an obstacle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
PARKSENSE SYSTEM U SAGE to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
 Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense
PRECAUTIONS system off if objects such as bicycle carriers, will be much closer to the obstacle than the
trailer hitches, etc., are placed within 12 inches rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the
NOTE: continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
(30 cm) of the rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do
 Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
so can result in the system misinterpreting a
of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the depending on its size and shape, giving a false
close object as a sensor problem, causing the
ParkSense system operating properly. indication that an obstacle is behind the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
 Jackhammers, large trucks, and other REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the vehicle.
vibrations could affect the performance of instrument cluster.
ParkSense.
The system warns the driver with an acoustic NOTE:

CAUTION! signal and, when enabled, with visual indications Parksense will reduce the volume of the radio if on
 ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is on the instrument cluster display. when the system is sounding an audible tone. An
unable to recognize every obstacle, including When the vehicle is in DRIVE, the Side Distance audible tone will only sound if a collision is
small obstacles. Parking curbs might be Warning volume/chime will match the Front possible.
temporarily detected or not detected at all. ParkSense volume and chime type. Activation/Deactivation
Obstacles located above or below the sensors
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the Side Distance The system can operate only after driving a short
will not be detected when they are in close
Warning volume/chime will match the Rear distance and if the vehicle speed is between 0 and
proximity.
ParkSense volume and chime type. 7 mph (0 and 11 km/h). The system can be
 The vehicle must be driven slowly when using activated/deactivated via the Settings menu of the
ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time WARNING ALERTS Uconnect system. If the ParkSense System is 4
when an obstacle is detected. It is recom- Less than deactivated via the ParkSense hard switch, then
mended that the driver looks over his/her Distance 12 – 24 inches the Side Distance Warning system will
12 inches
shoulder when using ParkSense. (inches/cm) (30–60 cm) automatically be deactivated.
(30 cm)
Arcs-Left Flashing Flashing Message on the display for Side Distance Warning
SIDE DISTANCE WARNING S YSTEM Arcs-Right Flashing Flashing
feature:
“Wipe Sensors” — This message is displayed in the
The Side Distance Warning system detects the Fast audible case of a failure of the Side Distance Warning
presence of side obstacles near the vehicle using chime as the
Audible Alert system sensors. Free the bumpers of any
the parking sensors located in the front and rear Continuous objects get
Chime obstacles, ensure that the front and rear fascia/
fascia/bumpers. close to the bumper are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris
Side Distance Warning Display vehicle to keep the ParkSense system operating properly.
The Side Distance Warning screen will only be Radio Volume
Yes Yes
displayed if this feature is enabled within Uconnect Reduced
Settings Ú page 204.
“System Not Available” — This message is  Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking
displayed if the Side Distance Warning system is care not to scratch or damage them. The WARNING!
not available. The failed operation of the system sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,  Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-
might be due to the insufficient voltage from the slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so can mended that the ball mount and hitch ball
battery or other failures on the electrical system. result in the system not working properly. The assembly be disconnected from the vehicle
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle when the vehicle is not used for towing.
to have the electrical system checked. behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it Failure to do so can result in injury or damage
could provide a false indication that an obstacle to vehicles or obstacles because the hitch ball
ParkSense Usage Precautions
is behind or in front of the fascia/bumper. will be much closer to the obstacle than the
Some conditions may influence the performance rear fascia when the vehicle sounds the
 The presence of a tow hook without a trailer may
of the Side Distance Warning system: continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
interfere with the correct operation of the
NOTE: parking sensors. Before using the ParkSense detect the ball mount and hitch ball assembly,
 Ensure that the front and rear fascia/bumper system, it is recommended to remove the depending on its size and shape, giving a false
are free of snow, ice, mud, dirt and debris to removable tow hook ball assembly and any indication that an obstacle is behind the
keep the ParkSense system operating properly. attachments from the vehicle when it is not vehicle.
 Construction equipment, large trucks, and other used for towing operations.
vibrations could affect the performance of
WARNING! CAUTION!
ParkSense.
 When you turn ParkSense off, the message to  Drivers must be careful when backing up even  ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
appear in the instrument cluster display will when using ParkSense. Always check carefully unable to recognize every obstacle, including
read “PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore, once you behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be small obstacles. Parking curbs might be
turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other temporarily detected or not detected at all.
it on again, even if you cycle the ignition key. vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before Obstacles located above or below the sensors
backing up. You are responsible for safety and will not be detected when they are in close
 ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of proximity.
must continue to pay attention to your
the radio when it is sounding a tone.
surroundings. Failure to do so can result in  The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
serious injury or death. ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time
(Continued) when an obstacle is detected. It is recom-
mended that the driver looks over his/her
shoulder when using ParkSense.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST driver will be required to manually complete the
parking maneuver.
To enable or disable the ParkSense Active Park
Assist system, push the ParkSense Active Park
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED  The system may not work in all conditions (e.g. Assist switch once (LED turns on). Pushing the
environmental conditions such as heavy rain, switch a second time will disable the system
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is (LED turns off).
intended to assist the driver during parallel and snow, etc., or if searching for a parking space
perpendicular parking maneuvers by identifying a that has surfaces that will absorb the ultrasonic The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will turn
proper parking space, providing audible/visual sensor waves). off automatically for any of the following
instructions, and controlling the steering wheel.  New vehicles from the dealership must have at conditions:
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is least 30 miles (48 km) accumulated before the  Parking maneuver is completed
defined as “semi-automatic” since the driver ParkSense Active Park Assist system is fully cali-  Vehicle speed is greater than 18 mph
maintains control of the accelerator, gear selector brated and performs accurately. This is due to 4
(30 km/h) when searching for a parking space
and brakes. Depending on the driver's parking the system’s dynamic vehicle calibration to
maneuver selection, the ParkSense Active Park improve the performance of the feature. The  Vehicle speed is greater than 5 mph (7 km/h)
Assist system is capable of maneuvering a vehicle system will also continuously perform the during active steering guidance into the parking
into a parallel or a perpendicular parking space on dynamic vehicle calibration to account for differ- space
either side (i.e., driver side or passenger side). ences such as over or under inflated tires and  Steering wheel is touched during active steering
NOTE: new tires. guidance into the parking space
 ParkSense Front and Rear Park Assist switch is
 The driver is always responsible for controlling ENABLING A ND D ISABLING T HE
the vehicle, responsible for any surrounding pushed
objects, and must intervene as required.
PARKSENSE ACTIVE PARK ASSIST  Driver's door is opened
 The system is designed to assist the driver and
SYSTEM  Rear liftgate is opened
not to substitute the driver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist system  Electronic Stability Control/Anti-Lock Braking
 During a semi-automatic maneuver, if the driver can be enabled and disabled with the System intervention
touches the steering wheel after being ParkSense Active Park Assist switch,
instructed to remove their hands from the located on the switch panel above the
steering wheel, the system will cancel, and the Uconnect display.
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system allows a NOTE:

maximum number of shifts between DRIVE and If the vehicle is driven above approximately
REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be completed 15 mph (25 km/h), the instrument cluster display
within the maximum amount of shifts, the system will instruct the driver to slow down. If the vehicle
will cancel and the instrument cluster display will is driven above approximately 18 mph (30 km/h),
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver the system will cancel. The driver must then reac-
manually. tivate the system by pushing the ParkSense Active
The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will only Park Assist switch.
operate and search for a parking space when the When pushed, the LED on the ParkSense Active
following conditions are present: Park Assist switch will blink momentarily, and then
 Gear selector is in DRIVE
the LED will turn off if any of the above conditions Choose Parking Maneuver Below
are not present.
 Ignition is in the RUN position NOTE:
If the vehicle is in any other gear than DRIVE, and
 ParkSense Active Park Assist switch is activated an objected is detected, the system will default to  When searching for a parking space, use the
 Driver's door is closed Parallel Park Exit. A prompt will appear in the radio turn signal indicator to select which side of the
screen, and the driver will need to select “Yes” or vehicle you want to perform the parking
 Rear liftgate is closed maneuver. The ParkSense Active Park Assist
“No” for a Parallel Park Exit maneuver. Any other
 Vehicle speed is less than 15 mph (25 km/h) conditions will result in a default to a Parallel system will automatically search for a parking
 Vehicle speed is less than 25 km/h Parking maneuver. space on the passenger's side of the vehicle if
the turn signal is not activated.
 The outer surface and the underside of the front PARALLEL/PERPENDICULAR PARKING
and rear fascias/bumpers are clean and clear  The driver needs to make sure that the selected
of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction S PACE ASSISTANCE OPERATION parking space for the maneuver remains free
and clear of any obstructions (e.g. pedestrians,
When the ParkSense Active Park Assist system is bicycles, etc.).
enabled, you can select between Parallel,
Perpendicular, and Parallel Park Exit maneuvers in
the Uconnect system.
 The driver is responsible to ensure that the

selected parking space is suitable for the
maneuver and free/clear of anything that may
be overhanging or protruding into the parking
space (e.g., ladders, tailgates, etc. from
surrounding objects/vehicles).
 When searching for a parking space, the driver
should drive as parallel or perpendicular
(depending on the type of maneuver) to other
vehicles as possible.
 The feature will only indicate the last detected Parking Space Found — Keep Moving Forward Shift To Reverse — Perpendicular Parking Space 4
parking space (example: if passing multiple Once the vehicle is in position, you will be The system may then instruct the driver to wait for
available parking spaces, the system will only instructed to stop the vehicle’s movement and steering to complete before then instructing to
indicate the last detected parking space for the remove your hands from the steering wheel. When check the vehicle’s surroundings, and move
maneuver). the vehicle comes to a standstill (your hands still backward.
 While the vehicle is in DRIVE, there will be a full removed from the steering wheel), you will be Several more gear shifts (DRIVE and REVERSE)
screen image in the Uconnect display. If the instructed to place the gear selector into the while keeping hands off of the steering wheel will
driver shifts to REVERSE while searching for a REVERSE position. be instructed to the driver while checking the
parking space, a camera image will appear in vehicle’s surroundings before completing the
the Uconnect display with a “Shift To Drive” parking maneuver.
message.
When the vehicle is in the parking position, the
When an available parking space has been found, maneuver is complete and the driver will be
and the vehicle is not in position, you will be instructed to check the vehicle's parking position,
instructed to move forward to position the vehicle then shift the vehicle into PARK. The message
for a perpendicular or parallel parking sequence “Active ParkSense Complete - Check Parking
(depending on the type of maneuver being Position” will be displayed momentarily.
performed).
Once active steering begins, a camera image will
display in the Uconnect display with prompts that
Shift To Reverse — Parallel Parking Space
will display for the duration of the maneuver.
NOTE:  If the system is canceled during the maneuver

for any reason, the driver must take control of CAUTION!
 It is the driver's responsibility to use the brake
and stop the vehicle. The driver should check the vehicle.  The ParkSense Active Park Assist system is
their surroundings and be prepared to stop the only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize
vehicle either when instructed to, or when driver WARNING! every obstacle, including small obstacles.
intervention is required.  Drivers must be careful when performing Parking curbs might be temporarily detected
parallel or perpendicular parking maneuvers or not detected at all. Obstacles located above
 It is the driver’s responsibility to use the brake
even when using the ParkSense Active Park or below the sensors will not be detected
and accelerator during the semi-automatic
Assist system. Always check carefully behind when they are in close proximity.
parking maneuver.
and in front of your vehicle, look behind and in  The vehicle must be driven slowly when using
 When the system instructs the driver to remove
front of you, and be sure to check for pedes- the ParkSense Active Park Assist system in
their hands from the steering wheel, the driver
trians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, order to be able to stop in time when an
should check their surroundings and begin to
and blind spots before backing up and moving obstacle is detected. It is recommended that
back up slowly.
forward. You are responsible for safety and the driver looks over his/her shoulder when
 The ParkSense Active Park Assist system will must continue to pay attention to your using the ParkSense Active Park Assist
allow a maximum of eight shifts between DRIVE surroundings. Failure to do so can result in system.
and REVERSE. If the maneuver cannot be serious injury or death.
completed within eight shifts, the system will
cancel and the instrument cluster display will  Before using the ParkSense Active Park Assist EXITING THE PARKING S PACE
instruct the driver to complete the maneuver system, it is strongly recommended that the
manually. ball mount and hitch ball assembly be discon- NOTE:
nected from the vehicle when the vehicle is The function does not work for exiting a perpen-
 The system will cancel the maneuver if the not used for towing. Failure to do so can result dicular parking space, but only exiting parallel
vehicle speed exceeds 5 mph (7 km/h) during in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles parking spaces.
active steering guidance into the parking space. because the hitch ball will be much closer to Activation
The system will provide a warning to the driver the obstacle than the rear fascia when the
at 3 mph (5 km/h) that tells them to slow down. To activate this function, push the Active
vehicle sounds the continuous tone. Also, the
The driver is then responsible for completing the ParkSense switch once. After selection, the system
sensors could detect the ball mount and hitch
maneuver if the system is canceled. activates and warns the driver on the instrument
ball assembly, depending on its size and
cluster display about the operations that have to
shape, giving a false indication that an
be carried out to perform the maneuver correctly.
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
Selection Of The Maneuver Side The system is operational at speeds above 37 mph
Use the direction indicators to choose the direction (60 km/h) and below 112 mph (180 km/h).
that you want to perform the maneuver. Use the When both lane markings are detected, and the
right arrow indicator to perform the maneuver to vehicle approaches the lane marker (no turn signal
the right side and use the left arrow indicator to applied), the Active Lane Management system
perform the maneuver to the left. provides a visual warning in the instrument cluster,
During the maneuver, the system instructs the as well as a steering assist torque (if configured in
driver to shift to REVERSE, and operate the turn Uconnect Settings), to prompt the driver to remain
signal in the direction you want to exit. Let go of the within the lane boundaries. If the driver continues
steering wheel and use the brake or accelerator to drift out of the lane, the system provides a
pedals as instructed, while the system handles the Shift To Drive Then Move Forward flashing visual warning through the instrument 4
steering automatically for exiting the parking cluster display as well as a haptic steering wheel
End Of Maneuver vibration (if configured in Uconnect Settings) when
space. If the driver continues to carry out a
voluntary or involuntary action on the steering The semi-automatic maneuver ends when the the vehicle crosses the lane boundary.
wheel during the exit maneuver (touching or display shows the message of a completed The warning will be in the form of a vibration in the
holding the steering wheel to prevent its maneuver. At the end of the maneuver, the system steering wheel, and/or automatic steering
movement), the maneuver will be interrupted. gives back the vehicle control to the driver. assistance to direct the vehicle back toward the
center of the lane.
ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM — When both lane markings are detected, and the
IF EQUIPPED driver uses the turn signal to indicate a lane
change while the system detects another vehicle in
ACTIVE LANE M ANAGEMENT OPERATION the Blind Spot Monitoring zone on that side of the
vehicle, the Active Lane Management system
The Active Lane Management (ALM) system uses a provides a warning in the form of steering assist
forward facing camera to detect lane markings or and/or steering vibration (depending on radio
road edges and to measure vehicle position within settings) to guide the vehicle back to the center of
the lane boundaries. It also uses the Blind Spot the lane.
Monitoring sensors to detect vehicles in adjacent
Shift To Reverse Then Move Backward lanes while the driver is preparing to change lanes.
Depending on the type of warning selected, the NOTE: ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT WARNING
system will either guide the vehicle back to the When operating conditions have been met, the
center of the lane, provide a vibration in the Active Lane Management system will monitor if the
MESSAGE
steering wheel, or both. driver’s hands are on the steering wheel and The Active Lane Management system will indicate
NOTE: provides an audible and visual warning to the the current lane drift condition through the
For an event where the Active Lane Management driver if removed. The system will cancel if the instrument cluster display.
system is reacting to a target vehicle in the driver does not return their hands to the wheel.
When the system is on, the lane lines are gray
adjacent lane, the Blind Spot Monitoring indicator TURNING ACTIVE LANE MANAGEMENT when both of the lane boundaries have not been
LED on the mirror will flash, and the steering wheel detected.
torque will be greater than for a normal lane ON O R O FF
departure (no vehicle in adjacent lane). The Active Lane Management button is
The driver may manually override the steering located on the switch panel above the
assist warning by applying force into the steering Uconnect display.
wheel at any time. To turn the system on, push the Active Lane
When only a single lane marking is detected and Management button (LED turns off). A message is
the driver drifts across the lane marking (no turn shown in the instrument cluster display.
signal applied), the Active Lane Management To turn the system off, push the button again
system provides a visual warning in the instrument (LED turns on).
cluster, as well as a steering assist torque (if
configured in Uconnect Settings), to prompt the NOTE:
driver to remain within the lane boundaries. If the The Active Lane Management system will retain System On (Gray Lines)
driver continues to drift out of the lane, the system the last system state on or off from the last ignition
provides a flashing visual warning through the cycle when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
instrument cluster display as well as a haptic position.
steering wheel vibration (if configured in Uconnect
Settings) when the vehicle crosses the lane
boundary.
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected NOTE:  When the system senses a lane drift situation,
 When the system is on and only the left lane The Active Lane Management system operates the left lane line turns solid yellow. At this time,
marking has been detected, and the system is with similar behavior for a right lane departure steering assist warning is applied to the steering
ready to provide visual warnings in the instru- when only the right lane marking has been wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
ment cluster display and a vibration and/or detected. boundary.
steering assist warning in the steering wheel if a Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected For example: If approaching the left side of the
lane departure occurs, the left lane line will be  When the system is on, the lane lines turn from lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
green. gray to green to indicate that both of the lane
 When the system senses the lane line has been markings have been detected. When both lane
approached (but not crossed), the left lane line markings have been detected, the system is
will change to solid yellow and the system will ready to provide visual warnings in the instru- 4
provide a haptic steering wheel vibration and/or ment cluster display and a vibration and/or
steering assist torque (if programmed in Ucon- steering assist warning in the steering wheel if a
nect Settings). lane departure occurs.
 When the system senses the lane line is being
crossed, the left lane line will change to flashing
yellow.
Lane Drift (Solid Yellow Line)
Lanes Sensed (Green Lines)
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Line)

 When the system senses the lane line is being

crossed, the left lane line changes from solid
CHANGING A CTIVE L ANE M ANAGEMENT PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
yellow to flashing yellow (on/off). At this time, S TATUS Your vehicle is equipped with the ParkView Rear
vibration is applied to the steering wheel. Configurable settings for the Active Lane Back Up Camera that allows you to see an
For example: If approaching the left side of the Management system are available within the on-screen image of the rear surroundings of your
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right. Uconnect system Ú page 204. vehicle whenever the gear selector is put into
REVERSE. The image will be displayed on the
Selectable Warning Types: Uconnect display screen along with a caution note
 Vibration Only to “Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of
 Steering Assist Only the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the
 Vibration And Steering Assist
rear of the vehicle above the rear license plate.
Other configurable settings for this system are for
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
the intensity of the vibration (high/med/low),
camera delay turned off, the rear camera mode is
steering assist warning (hi/med/low), and the
exited and the previous screen appears.
warning zone sensitivity (early/medium/late).
Manual Activation Of The Back Up Camera
NOTE:
1. Press the Controls button located on the
Lane Crossed (Flashing Yellow Line)  The system will not apply vibration and/or
bottom of the Uconnect display.
steering assist to the steering wheel whenever a
NOTE: safety system engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Trac- 2. Press the Back Up Camera button to turn the
 The Active Lane Management system operates tion Control System, Electronic Stability Control, Rear View Camera system on.
with similar behavior for a right lane departure. Forward Collision Warning, etc.).
NOTE:
 If the turn signal is activated, and the vehicle  The Blind Spot Monitoring system will be forced
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has program-
begins to depart the lane at the same time the on when the ALM system is enabled. mable modes of operation that may be selected
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system detects  The ALM system will be suppressed when the through the Uconnect system Ú page 204.
another vehicle in the BSM zones, the system Active Driving Assist system (if equipped) is
will provide a haptic steering wheel vibration engaged.
and/or steering assist torque (if programmed in
Uconnect Settings).
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with Rear Camera Washer (If Equipped)
camera delay turned off, the rear camera mode is WARNING!
When the rear window washer is activated by
exited and the previous screen appears. When the Drivers must be careful when backing up even pushing the windshield wiper/washer lever
vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with camera when using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. forward, the rear backup camera and digital
delay turned on, the camera image will continue to Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and rearview mirror (if equipped) cameras are also
be displayed for up to 10 seconds unless the be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other washed. For more information, see Ú page 66.
following conditions occur: the vehicle speed vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted backing up. You are responsible for the safety of ZOOM VIEW
into PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the your surroundings and must continue to pay
When the Rear View Camera image is
OFF position, or the touchscreen button X to attention while backing up. Failure to do so can
being displayed, and the vehicle speed is
disable the display of the Rear View Camera is result in serious injury or death. 4
below 8 mph (13 km/h) while in any gear
pressed.
selector position, Zoom View is available.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon in the
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and CAUTION! upper left of the display screen, the image will
its projected backup path based on the steering  To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should zoom in to four times the standard view. Pressing
wheel position. A dashed center line overlay only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView the icon a second time will return the view to the
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with camera is unable to view every obstacle or standard Back Up Camera display.
parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver. Different object in your drive path. When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
colored zones indicate the distance to the rear of
 To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay
the vehicle.
driven slowly when using ParkView to be able view will display the standard Back Up Camera
The following table shows the approximate view. If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE
to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is
distances for each zone: gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will
recommended that the driver look frequently
Distance To The Rear Of over his/her shoulder when using ParkView. automatically resume.
Zone
The Vehicle Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm) NOTE: the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m) If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds
up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available
6.5 ft or greater water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
Green
(2 m or greater) lens. REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph
(13 km/h).
NOTE: The Back Up Camera view can also be activated by

 If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE, pressing the icon on the TrailCam view.
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the camera delay turned off and TrailCam view is
icon will appear grey. active, the TrailCam mode is exited and the
 While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be previous screen appears again.
visible. When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
VIEWING A T SPEED camera delay turned on and the TrailCam view is
active, the TrailCam image will be displayed for up
When the vehicle is in PARK, NEUTRAL or to 10 seconds unless the vehicle speed exceeds
Front View Camera
DRIVE, the Rear View Camera can be 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
activated with the Back Up Camera NOTE: PARK, the ignition is placed in the OFF position, or
button in the Controls menu. This feature The system will stay active while in 4WD Low. the touchscreen button X to disable display of the
allows the customer to monitor the area directly The TrailCam system has programmable settings TrailCam view is pressed.
behind the vehicle (or trailer, if equipped) for up to that may be selected through the Uconnect system NOTE:
10 seconds while driving. If the vehicle speed Ú page 204.
remains below 8 mph (13 km/h), the Rear View  If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
Camera image will be displayed continuously until Manual Activation Of The TrailCam (13 km/h) while in 2WD or 4WD High, the
deactivated via the X button on the touchscreen. TrailCam view can be activated via the following TrailCam image will be displayed continuously
methods: until deactivated via the touchscreen button X,
TRAILCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED  Press the FWD Camera button on the controls
the transmission is shifted into PARK, or the
ignition is placed in the OFF position.
The TrailCam system allows you to you see an screen.
 The touchscreen button X to disable the display
on-screen image of the front view of your vehicle.  Press the Forward Facing Camera button on the of the camera image is made available ONLY
The image will be displayed on the Uconnect apps menu. when the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
display along with a caution note “Check Entire  Press the TrailCam button on the Off-Road
Surroundings” across the top of the screen.  The TrailCam view will stay active regardless of
Pages. the vehicle speed and time while in 4WD Low.
The TrailCam view can also be activated by
pressing the icon on the Back Up Camera view.
Cleaning The TrailCam FAMCAM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED To change the seat shown in the zoomed in view,
press a different seat location on the left side of
Press and hold the Clean Camera soft button
located on the TrailCam view to wash the TrailCam. The FamCam system consists of an interior the display. The zoomed in view will then show the
Washer fluid will stop when the button is released. monitoring camera mounted on the headliner that new seat location. By default, the second row
The camera can be washed up to 20 seconds at a allows the driver to view cargo/passengers in the driver’s side seat will be displayed in the zoomed in
time while holding the button. rear interior of the vehicle through the Uconnect view.
screen. The display will appear in color in well-lit conditions
NOTE:
To activate the feature, press the and will appear black and white in low light
 Pressing the Clean Camera soft button will also FamCam button in the Controls tab of the conditions.
wash the Night Vision camera (if equipped). Vehicle menu. The FamCam feature can If the driver shifts into REVERSE or presses the X
 If the front window washer feature is activated, also be accessed from the App Drawer, or on the screen, the view will close. Otherwise, the 4
all of the front cameras on the vehicle will be the status bar at the top of the Uconnect display. FamCam view will remain on the display.
washed as well. The front camera washers will The display will show the entire view inside the
not operate when the low washer fluid warning NOTE:
vehicle on the left side of the screen, and will show
is displayed. When FamCam is turned off, the selected seat in
a zoomed in view of the selected seat on the right
the zoomed in view on the right side of the display
 Due to washer pump packaging, the front side of the screen.
will be retained. The next time the feature is acti-
camera washers will run out of fluid before the
vated, the same seat will be shown in the zoomed
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light is activated.
in view.
When the front camera washers stop func-
tioning, add fluid to the washer fluid reservoir to
resume function.
When enabled, active dynamic Tire Lines are
projected on the ground plane of the TrailCam view
based on the steering wheel position.
FamCam Display Example (7 Passenger Vehicle Shown)

NIGHT VISION CAMERA SYSTEM — A yellow or red border and box highlight will appear
around objects of interest. More than one object of
Level 1 Warnings:
 Yellow telltale in the instrument cluster display
IF EQUIPPED interest may be highlighted.
 Yellow highlights around the detected pedes-
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Night Vision trian/animal
Camera system which uses an infrared camera to  Occurs when the vehicle is moving at speeds
view the area ahead of the vehicle, beyond the greater than 8 mph (13 km/h) and the target is
headlights, to detect people and large animals in or approaching the vehicle path
when it is dark outside.
Level 2 Warnings:
The system detects pedestrians or large animals
by measuring the temperature difference between  Red telltale in the instrument cluster display
the object and the surrounding area.  Red highlights around the detected pedestrian/
The thermal objects detected by the camera can animal
be displayed in the instrument cluster display.  Occurs when the vehicle is moving at speeds
Scroll to the Night Vision page in the instrument Highlight Around Objects Of Interest greater than 8 mph (13 km/h) and a collision
cluster display menu Ú page 104 to display the with the detected pedestrian/animal is possible
The highlighting of the object(s) of interest will
Night Vision screen.  The pedestrian/animal is directly in the vehicle
update in real time based upon the current Night
Warm objects (e.g. animals) will appear lighter on Vision assessment. path, close to the headlight area
the display while cold objects (e.g. traffic signs) will  A video pop-up will display when there is a target
The two categories of Night Vision warnings are
appear darker. detected and the instrument cluster display is
Pedestrian Warnings and Animal Warnings.
NOTE: not showing the Night Vision page
Pedestrian Warning Telltale
 Night Vision only shows objects of interest that  A chime will sound for a Level 2 Warning detec-
are warmer or colder than the surroundings. tion event
 Adjust the instrument cluster dimmer control Animal Warning Telltale Only one telltale can be displayed at a time based
brightness to make the image appear brighter upon priority.
A Pedestrian or Animal Warning is
or dimmer.
considered either Level 1 or Level 2.
To exit out of the Night Vision screen, select a Level 1 warnings are yellow, and Level 2 warnings
different menu in the instrument cluster display. are red. The colors are not configurable.
The priority order of the warnings from highest to Camera Washers

lowest is: WARNING!
 When the front window washer is activated, the
1. Pedestrian Warning Level 2 Night Vision camera will also be washed  Warnings are only provided if a pedestrian or
Ú page 65. large animal is detected by the system.
2. Animal Warning Level 2
3. Pedestrian Warning Level 1  Due to washer pump packaging, the front  It is always the driver’s responsibility to be
camera washers will run out of fluid before the attentive of road, traffic, and weather condi-
4. Animal Warning Level 1 Low Washer Fluid Warning Light is activated. tions, vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
When the front camera washers stop func- ahead, and most importantly, brake opera-
Level 2 Warnings may display in the Head Up
tioning, add fluid to the washer fluid reservoir to tion, to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
Display (if equipped).
resume function. under all road conditions. Your complete
NOTE: attention is always required while driving to 4
If the vehicle is stopped, or slowing down, all Level WARNING! maintain safe control of your vehicle.
2 warnings become Level 1 warnings.
 Do not jerk the steering wheel in response to
You can enable or disable the warnings within the
a warning. DETECTION R ANGE
 Never attempt to swerve around animals if The system can detect people 4 ft (1.25 m) tall or
If the warnings are off, the telltales, chimes, and
doing so would endanger you or other drivers greater in the upright position. The system can also
warning messages will all be off. Pedestrians and
on the road. detect animals that are four-legged and 3 ft (1 m)
animals can still be detected by the system, but
there will be no warnings.  Do not stare at the image while driving. You tall or greater in the upright position.
The Night Vision alert status telltale will could crash and you or others could be The detection distance for the system is between
be gray when the warnings are injured. 26 ft (8 m) and 328 ft (100 m) from the front of the
suppressed. The telltale will also turn vehicle.
 The Night Vision system only provides alerts to
gray to indicate that the alerts are objects of interest and cannot serve as a The system may not be able to detect pedestrians
suppressed due to environmental factors (e.g. substitute for the driver’s personal judgment. or animals in the following situations:
daylight hours, external temperature is greater The warnings are meant to direct your atten-  Pedestrian/animal is outside of the detection
than 86°F (30°C)) or if the gear selector is in tion to the detected objects, but the Night range
REVERSE. When the Night Vision alerts are active, Vision system does not automatically brake
the telltale will be green Ú page 110.  Pedestrian/animal is fully or partially covered
the vehicle and may not provide a warning
with enough time to help avoid a crash.  Pedestrian/animal does not reach the minimum
detection height
(Continued)
NOTE: SERVICE THE NIGHT V ISION S YSTEM NIGHT V ISION S YSTEM LIMITATIONS
Other objects on the road that meet the height/
shape/temperature (e.g. sun exposure) of pedes- When service conditions are present, the following The Night Vision display is deactivated under the
trians/animals may be detected and classified as fault messages may appear in the instrument following conditions:
targets. cluster display when the vehicle is placed in the ON  Vehicle is shifted into REVERSE
position.
 The ignition is not in the ON/RUN position
WARNING! If "Night Vision Unavailable Sensor Blocked"
appears in the instrument cluster display, make  The headlights are off and the vehicle speed is
 Night Vision can only detect pedestrians and greater than 8 mph (13 km/h)
animals located within the range of the sure the camera is clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or
infrared camera. other debris. The camera is located in the upper The Night Vision display warnings are suppressed
fascia/bumper, inside the driver side grille slot. under the following conditions:
 Night Vision may not detect pedestrians or Clean the camera using a soft wet cloth or by  Daylight hours
animals and highlight them if: pressing the Clean Camera soft button in the
 Temperatures above 86°F (30°C)
 They are not in an upright position, for Uconnect system. If the message continues to
example if they are sitting or lying down, or appear after cycling the ignition, see an authorized The system may not be fully functional in the
if the pedestrian is riding a bicycle dealer. following situations:
If “Night Vision Temporarily Unavailable” or “Night  On steep hills
 The figure in the display appears incom-
plete, for example because the pedes- Vision Unavailable Service Required" appears in  On tight curves of the road
trian or animal is partially behind a vehicle the instrument cluster display after cycling the
 If the camera/sensor is damaged or blocked by
ignition, see an authorized dealer.
 The pedestrian/animal is not directly dirt, snow, ice, or other debris
The camera must be properly aligned to work
ahead in the coverage area  In poor visibility conditions such as heavy fog,
correctly. If the camera needs adjustment, see an
rain, snow, or other weather conditions
 The pedestrian/animal is part of a group authorized dealer. Do not attempt to adjust the
camera yourself.  If the vehicle has been modified with after-
 The pedestrian is wearing certain types of market parts and/or accessories
clothing NOTE:
Alignment and performance of the Night Vision NOTE:
 The pedestrian/animal is moving too If any of these conditions are present, the system
may be affected by aftermarket modifications.
quickly through the field of view Mopar® parts should be used to get the optimal does not need service.
 The sensor is blocked by dirt, rain, snow, performance of this system.
or ice
SURROUND VIEW CAMERA SYSTEM — When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned on, the camera image will
Modes Of Operation
Manual activation of the Surround View Camera is
IF EQUIPPED continue to be displayed for up to 10 seconds selected by pressing the Surround View Camera
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph soft key located in the Controls menu within the
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Surround (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or the
View Camera system that allows you to see an Uconnect system.
ignition is placed in the OFF position. There is a
on-screen image of the surroundings and Top View touchscreen button X to disable the display of the Top View
of your vehicle whenever the gear selector is put camera image. The Top View will show in the Uconnect system with
into REVERSE or a different view is selected Rear View or Front View in a split screen display.
through the touchscreen soft buttons. The Top When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE with
camera delay turned off, the Surround View There are integrated ParkSense arcs in the image
View of the vehicle will show which doors are open. at the front, rear, and if equipped, the sides of the
The image will be displayed on the Uconnect Camera mode is exited and the last known screen 4
appears again. vehicle. The arcs will change color from yellow to
display along with a caution note “Check Entire red corresponding to the distance zones to the
Surroundings” across the top of the screen. After When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on oncoming object.
five seconds, this note will disappear. The the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle,
Surround View Camera system is comprised of four including the side view mirrors and its projected
sequential cameras located in the front grille, rear backup path based on the steering wheel position.
liftgate and side mirrors. Different colored zones indicate the distance to
NOTE: the rear of the vehicle.
The Surround View Camera system has program- The following table shows the approximate
mable settings that may be selected through the distances for each zone:
Press this button on the touchscreen to Distance To The Rear Of
Zone
enter the Surround View Camera menu in The Vehicle
the Uconnect system. Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
When the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE, the Rear Surround View Camera View
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2 m)
View or Top View is the default view of the system.
6.5 ft or greater
Green
(2 m or greater)
NOTE: Front Cross Path View Front And Rear Camera Washers
 Front tires will be in image when the tires are Pressing the Front Cross Path soft key When the front windshield washer is activated by
turned. will give the driver a wider angle view of pulling the windshield wiper/washer lever
 Due to wide angle cameras in the mirrors, the the front camera system. The Top View rearward, the front camera is also washed.
image may appear distorted. will be disabled when this is selected. When the rear window washer is activated by
 Top View will show which doors are open. Back Up Camera View pushing the windshield wiper/washer lever
Pressing the Back Up Camera soft key forward, the rear backup camera and digital
 Open front doors and/or liftgate will cancel
will provide a full screen rear view with rearview mirror (if equipped) cameras are also
outside image in Top View, but the standard washed. For more information, see Ú page 66.
view remains unchanged. Zoom View.
NOTE:
Rear View Plus Top View
NOTE:  If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
This is the default view of the system in builds up on the camera lenses, clean the
If the Rear View Camera view was selected through
REVERSE and is always paired with the lenses, rinse with water, and dry with a soft
the Surround View Camera menu, exiting out of the
Top View of the vehicle with optional cloth. Do not cover the lenses.
Rear View screen will return to the Surround View
active guidelines for the projected path
Camera menu. If the Back Up Camera was  If a malfunction with the system has occurred,
when enabled.
manually activated through the Controls menu of see an authorized dealer.
Rear Cross Path View the Uconnect system, exiting out of the display
 Due to washer pump packaging, the front
Pressing the Rear Cross Path soft key will screen will return to the Controls menu.
camera washers will run out of fluid before the
give the driver a wider angle view of the Deactivation Low Washer Fluid Warning Light is activated.
rear camera system. The Top View will be The system can be deactivated under the following When the front camera washers stop func-
disabled when this is selected. conditions: tioning, add fluid to the washer fluid reservoir to
Front View Plus Top View  The speed of the vehicle is greater than 8 mph resume function.
The Front View will show you what is (13 km/h).
immediately in front of the vehicle and is  The vehicle is shifted into PARK.
always paired with the Top View of the
vehicle.  The vehicle is in any gear other than REVERSE
and the X button is pressed.
 The camera delay system is turned off manually
through Uconnect Settings Ú page 204.
WARNING! ZOOM VIEW NOTE:

 If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or REVERSE,
Drivers must be careful when backing up even When the Rear View Camera image is being
and speed is greater than or equal to 8 mph
when using the Surround View Camera. Always displayed, and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph
(13 km/h), Zoom View is unavailable and the
check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure (13 km/h) while in any gear selector position,
icon will appear grey.
to check for pedestrians, animals, other Zoom View is available.
 While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before By pressing the “magnifying glass” icon
visible.
backing up. You are responsible for the safety of in the upper left of the display screen, the
your surroundings and must continue to pay image will zoom in to two times the
attention while backing up. Failure to do so can standard view. REFUELING THE VEHICLE
result in serious injury or death. Pressing the icon a second time will 1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing near the 4
return the view to the standard Back Up rear outer edge of the fuel door near the
Camera display. center to unlatch. Then use your hand to
CAUTION! rotate fuel door to full open.
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is in
 To avoid vehicle damage, Surround View REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera delay
should only be used as a parking aid. The view will display the standard Back Up Camera
Surround View camera is unable to view every view. If the vehicle is then returned to REVERSE
obstacle or object in your drive path. gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View selection will
 To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be
automatically resume.
driven slowly when using Surround View to be Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
able to stop in time when an obstacle is seen. the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
It is recommended that the driver look the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
frequently over his/her shoulder when using If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available
Surround View. until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph Fuel Filler Door
(13 km/h).
NOTE: 4. Wait five seconds before removing the fuel

nozzle to allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
VEHICLE LOADING
 In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent
the fuel door from opening. If this occurs, 5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel GROSS V EHICLE WEIGHT RATING
lightly push around the perimeter of the fuel door. Engage the fuel door latch by pushing on
door to break the ice build-up.
(GVWR)
the rear outer edge near the center.
 There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
inside the pipe seal the system. vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
WARNING!
options and cargo. The label also specifies
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe –  Never have any smoking materials lit in or maximum capacities of front and rear axle systems
the nozzle opens and holds the flapper doors near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or (GAWR). Total load must be limited so GVWR and
while refueling. the tank is being filled. front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.
 Never add fuel when the engine is running. PAYLOAD
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc- The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable
tion Indicator Light to turn on. load weight a truck can carry, including the weight
of the driver, all passengers, options and cargo.
 A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. GROSS AXLE WEIGHT RATING (GAWR)
You could be burned. Always place fuel
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the
containers on the ground while filling.
front and rear axles. The load must be distributed
in the cargo area so that the GAWR of each axle is
Fuel Filler not exceeded.
CAUTION!
Each axle GAWR is determined by the components
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel – when the fuel nozzle To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top in the system with the lowest load carrying capacity
“clicks” or shuts off the fuel tank is full. off” the fuel tank after filling. (axle, springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or
suspension components sometimes specified by
purchasers for increased durability does not
necessarily increase the vehicle's GVWR.
TIRE SIZE The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a

commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has not
TRAILER TOWING
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label been exceeded. The weight on the front and rear of In this section you will find safety tips and
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle. the vehicle should then be determined separately information on limits to the type of towing you can
Replacement tires must be equal to the load to be sure that the load is properly distributed over reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
capacity of this tire size. the front and rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may trailer, carefully review this information to tow your
show that the GAWR of either the front or rear axles load as efficiently and safely as possible.
RIM S IZE has been exceeded but the total load is within the To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from coverage, follow the requirements and
size listed. front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the recommendations in this manual concerning
specified weight limitations are met. Store the vehicles used for trailer towing. 4
I NFLATION P RESSURE heavier items down low and be sure that the
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose items COMMON T OWING D EFINITIONS
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full GAWR. securely before driving.
The following trailer towing related definitions will
Improper weight distributions can have an adverse assist you in understanding the following
CURB W EIGHT effect on the way your vehicle steers and handles information:
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total and the way the brakes operate.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
weight of the vehicle with all fluids, including
vehicle fuel, at full capacity conditions, and with no CAUTION! The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
occupants or cargo loaded into the vehicle. The vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the and tongue weight. The total load must be limited
front and rear curb weight values are determined GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If
by weighing your vehicle on a commercial scale so that you do not exceed the GVWR Ú page 186.
you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or it can
before any occupants or cargo are added. change the way your vehicle handles. This could
LOADING cause you to lose control. Overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
The actual total weight and the weight of the front
and rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be
determined by weighing it when it is loaded and
ready for operation.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) Weight-Carrying Hitch

WARNING!
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
of all cargo, consumables and equipment It is important that you do not exceed the weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch
(permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous ball or some other connecting point of the vehicle.
trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation" driving condition can result if either rating is These kinds of hitches are used to tow small and
condition. exceeded. You could lose control of the vehicle medium sized trailers.
and have a collision.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to put Weight-Distributing Hitch
your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The
A weight-distributing system works by applying
entire weight of the trailer must be supported by Tongue Weight (TW)
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
the scale. The TW is the downward force exerted on the hitch typically used for heavier loads to distribute trailer
ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front axle and
WARNING! the load on your vehicle. the trailer axle(s). When used in accordance with
If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lb (2,267 kg) Trailer Frontal Area the manufacturer's directions, it provides for a
or more, it is recommended to use a more level ride, offering more consistent steering
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied
weight-distributing hitch to ensure stable and brake control thereby enhancing towing
by the maximum width of the front of a trailer.
handling of your vehicle. If you use a standard safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
weight-carrying hitch, you could lose control of Trailer Sway Control (TSC) control also dampens sway caused by traffic and
your vehicle and cause a collision. The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link that crosswinds and contributes positively to tow
can be installed between the hitch receiver and the vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer Sway Control
trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable (TSC) and a weight-distributing (load equalizing)
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue
friction associated with the telescoping motion to
The GCWR is the total allowable weight of your dampen any unwanted trailer swaying motions Weights (TW) and may be required depending on
vehicle and trailer when weighed in combination. while traveling. vehicle and trailer configuration/loading to comply
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) with Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The electronic TSC (if equipped) recognizes a requirements.
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front swaying trailer and automatically applies individual
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do not attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
exceed either front or rear GAWR Ú page 186.
3. For vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift air 7. Install and adjust the tension in the weight
WARNING! suspension, use the touchscreen radio distributing bars per the manufacturer’s
 An improperly adjusted weight-distributing settings to enable Tire/Jack mode. Tire/Jack recommendations so that the height of the
hitch system may reduce handling, stability, mode will be canceled and the procedure must front fender is approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1
braking performance, and could result in a be restarted if the vehicle is driven at speeds (about 1/2 the difference between H2 and H1
collision. above 5mph (8 km/h). above Normal Ride Height [H1]).
 Weight-distributing systems may not be 4. Measure the height from the top of the front 8. Use the touchscreen radio settings and switch
compatible with surge brake couplers. Consult wheel opening on the fender to ground; this is off Tire/Jack mode. Make sure the truck
with your hitch and trailer manufacturer or a height H1. returns to Normal Ride Height. Perform a
reputable Recreational Vehicle dealer for visual inspection of the trailer and
additional information. weight-distributing hitch to confirm the 4
manufacturers’ recommendations have been
met.
RECOMMENDED DISTRIBUTION HITCH
9. The vehicle can now be driven.
ADJUSTMENT
1. Verify that the vehicle is at the normal ride
Measurement
height. Example Height (mm)
Example
NOTE:
H1 925
The vehicle must remain in the engine run position
with all doors closed while attaching a trailer for H2 946
Measuring Height (H)
proper leveling of the air suspension system. H2-H1 21
2. Position the vehicle to be ready to connect to 5. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the
(H2-H1)/2 10.5
the trailer (do not connect the trailer). weight distribution bars connected.
6. Measure the height from the top of the front (H2-H1)/2 + H1 935.5
wheel opening on the fender to the ground;
this is height H2.
TRAILER HITCH CLASSIFICATION

The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you in selecting
the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions

Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lb (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lb (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 6,000 lb (2,722kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lb (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (M AXIMUM T RAILER W EIGHT RATINGS)

Engine Model GCWR Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW (See Note)
12,125 lb 40 sq ft 6,000 lb
2.0L (2nd Row) AWD 600 lb (272 kg)
(5,568 kg) (3.72 sq m) (2,722 kg)
AWD Light Duty 8,600 lb 30 sq ft 3,500 lb
3.6L (2nd Row) 350 lb (159 kg)
Cooling (3,901 kg) (2.79 sq m) (1,588 kg)
11,300 lb 40 sq ft 6,200 lb
3.6L (2nd Row) AWD 620 lb (281 kg)
(5,126 kg) (3.72 sq m) (2,812 kg)
RWD Light Duty 8,500 lb 30 sq ft 3,500 lb
3.6L (2nd Row) 350 lb (159 kg)
Cooling (3,856 kg) (2.79 sq m) (1,588 kg)
Engine Model GCWR Frontal Area Maximum GTW Maximum Trailer TW (See Note)
11,200 lb 40 sq ft 6,200 lb
3.6L (2nd Row) RWD 620 lb (281 kg)
(5,080 kg) (3.72 sq m) (2,812 kg)
12,700 lb 40 sq ft 7,200 lb
5.7L (2nd Row) AWD 720 lb (327 kg)
(5,761 kg) (3.72 sq m) (3,266 kg)
RWD Light Duty 9,000 lb 30 sq ft 3,500 lb
3.6L (3rd Row) 350 lb (159 kg)
Cooling (4,082 kg) (2.79 sq m) (1,588 kg)
11,700 lb 40 sq ft 6,200 lb
3.6L (3rd Row) RWD 620 lb (281 kg)
(5,307 kg) (3.72 sq m) (2,812 kg) 4
AWD Light Duty 9,000 lb 30 sq ft 3,500 lb
3.6L (3rd Row) 350 lb (159 kg)
Cooling (4,082 kg) (2.79 sq m) (1,588 kg)
11,700 lb 40 sq ft 6,200 lb
3.6L (3rd Row) AWD 620 lb (281 kg)
(5,307 kg) (3.72 sq m) (2,812 kg)
13,100 lb 40 sq ft 7,200 lb
5.7L (3rd Row) AWD 720 lb (327 kg)
(5,942 kg) (3.72 sq m) (3,266 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
 The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and should never exceed the weight referenced on the
Tire and Loading Information placard Ú page 378. The addition of passengers and cargo may require reducing trailer tongue weight and Gross Trailer Weight
(GTW). Redistributing cargo (to the trailer) may be necessary to avoid exceeding Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) of 3,800 lb (1,769 kg).
 Vehicles not factory-equipped with the trailer tow package are limited to 3,500 lb (1,588 kg) GTW and 350 lb (158 kg) TW.
TRAILER HITCH RECEIVER COVER To reinstall the cover after towing repeat the
CAUTION!
procedure in reverse order.
REMOVAL — I F EQUIPPED Always load a trailer with 60% of the weight in
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with a trailer hitch Be sure to engage all tabs of the hitch receiver the front of the trailer. This places 10% of the
receiver cover, this must be removed to access the cover in the fascia/bumper prior to installation. GTW on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads
trailer hitch receiver. This cover is located at the balanced over the wheels or heavier in the rear
bottom center of the rear fascia/bumper. TRAILER AND TONGUE W EIGHT can cause the trailer to sway severely side to
1. Turn the two locking retainers located at the side which will cause loss of control of the
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
bottom of the hitch receiver cover a quarter vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier
stamped on your fascia/bumper or trailer hitch.
turn counterclockwise and pull bottom of the in front is the cause of many trailer collisions.
hitch receiver cover outward (towards you).
2. Pull the bottom of the cover outward (towards Consider the following items when computing the
you) then downwards to disengage the tabs weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
located at the top of the hitch receiver cover to  The tongue weight of the trailer.
remove.  The weight of any other type of cargo or equip-
ment put in or on your vehicle.
 The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the trailer
Weight Distribution adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options
must be considered as part of the total load on
your vehicle. Refer to the “Tire And Loading Infor-
mation” placard for the maximum combined
weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
Hitch Receiver Cover
1 — Hitch Receiver Cover
2 — Locking Retainers
TOWING REQUIREMENTS WARNING! WARNING!

To promote proper break-in of the new vehicle  Make certain that the load is secured in the  Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on
drivetrain components, the following guidelines trailer and will not shift during travel. When a grade. When parking, apply the parking
are recommended. trailering cargo that is not fully secured, brake on the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be transmission in PARK (P). For four-wheel drive
CAUTION! difficult for the driver to control. You could lose vehicles, make sure the transfer case is not in
 Do not tow a trailer at all during the first control of your vehicle and have a collision. NEUTRAL (N). Always, block or "chock" the
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is driven. trailer wheels.
 When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
The engine, axle or other parts could be
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading  GCWR must not be exceeded.
damaged.
can cause a loss of control, poor performance 4
 Total weight must be distributed between the
 Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmis-
tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph sion, steering, suspension, chassis structure
following four ratings are not exceeded:
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full or tires.
throttle. This helps the engine and other parts  GVWR
 Safety chains must always be used between
of the vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.  GTW
your vehicle and trailer. Always connect the
chains to the hook retainers of the vehicle
 GAWR
Perform the maintenance listed in the Scheduled hitch. Cross the chains under the trailer
Servicing Ú page 334. When towing a trailer, tongue and allow enough slack for turning  Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch
never exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings. corners. utilized.
(Continued)
Towing Requirements — Tires Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes

CAUTION!
 Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a  Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system
compact spare tire. or vacuum system of your vehicle with that of If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lb (453 kg)
the trailer. This could cause inadequate braking loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
 Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h) when should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do
towing while using a full size spare tire. and possible personal injury.
this could lead to accelerated brake lining wear,
 Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to  An electronically actuated trailer brake higher brake pedal effort, and longer stopping
the safe and satisfactory operation of your controller is required when towing a trailer with distances.
vehicle. electronically actuated brakes. When towing a
trailer equipped with a hydraulic surge actuated
 Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation brake system, an electronic brake controller is Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
pressures before trailer usage. not required. Wiring
 Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire  Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers Whenever pulling a trailer, regardless of the trailer
damage before towing a trailer. over 1,000 lb (453 kg) and required for trailers size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
 Replacing tires with a higher load carrying in excess of 2,000 lb (907 kg). required for motoring safety.
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
and GAWR limits. WARNING!
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved
 For further information Ú page 378.  Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle's trailer harness and connector.
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your NOTE:
brake system and cause it to fail. You might Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s wiring
not have brakes when you need them and harness.
could have an accident.
The electrical connections are all complete to the
 Towing any trailer will increase your stopping vehicle but you must mate the harness to a trailer
distance. When towing, you should allow for connector. Refer to the following illustrations.
additional space between your vehicle and the
vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could
result in an accident.
NOTE: Automatic Transmission

 Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other transmission controls include a drive strategy to
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical connect) avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
into water. frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you
 Be sure to reconnect once clear from water can use the AutoStick shift control to manually
area. select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, will improve
Seven-Pin Connector
performance and extend transmission life by 4
1 — Backup Lamps reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up. This
2 — Running Lamps action will also provide better engine braking.
3 — Left Stop/Turn Cruise Control — If Equipped
4 — Ground  Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
5 — Battery  When using the Cruise Control, if you experience
6 — Right Stop/Turn speed drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h),
Four-Pin Connector 7 — Electric Brakes disengage until you can get back to cruising
speed.
1 — Ground
 Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with light
2 — Park TOWING TIPS loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
3 — Left Stop/Turn
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and
4 — Right Stop/Turn backing up the trailer in an area located away from
heavy traffic.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)

TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND A NOTHER V EHICLE
Four-Wheel Drive Models Four-Wheel Drive Models
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground Two-Wheel Drive Models
Without 4WD LOW Range With 4WD LOW Range
See Instructions
 Transmission in PARK
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED  Transfer case in N
(NEUTRAL)
 Tow in forward direction
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK OK OK
NOTE:
 When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
 Vehicles equipped with Quadra-Lift must be placed in Transport Mode before tying them down (from the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck Ú page 138. If the
vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for example, engine will not run), tie-downs should be fastened over the tires using specific straps (not to the
body). Failure to follow these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — T WO-W HEEL CAUTION! RECREATIONAL TOWING —

DRIVE MODELS Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will
QUADRA–TRAC II WITH 4WD LOW
DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the cause severe transmission damage. Damage RANGE
drivetrain will result. from improper towing is not covered under the
The transfer case must be shifted into N
Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(NEUTRAL) and the transmission must be in PARK
allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the (P) for recreational towing. The N (NEUTRAL)
ground. This may be accomplished using a tow RECREATIONAL TOWING — selection button is adjacent to the air suspension
dolly or vehicle trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow switch. Shifts into and out of transfer case N
this procedure: Q UADRA-T RAC I (S INGLE-S PEED (NEUTRAL) can take place with the selector switch
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, T RANSFER C ASE WITHOUT 4WD LOW in any mode position. 4
following the dolly manufacturer's RANGE) F OUR-W HEEL DRIVE MODELS
instructions. CAUTION!
Recreational towing is not allowed. These models
NOTE:  DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing
do not have a N (NEUTRAL) position in the transfer
If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air with only one set of wheels on the ground
case.
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to Normal (front or rear) will cause severe transmission
Ride Height. NOTE: and/or transfer case damage. Tow with all
This vehicle may be towed on a flatbed or vehicle four wheels either ON the ground, or OFF the
2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.
trailer provided all four wheels are OFF the ground. ground (using a vehicle trailer).
3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Shift the
transmission into PARK. CAUTION!  Tow only in a forward direction. Towing this
vehicle backwards can cause severe damage
4. Turn the ignition OFF. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above to the transfer case.
5. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, requirements can cause severe transmission
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from  The transmission must be in PARK for recre-
following the dolly manufacturer’s
instructions. improper towing is not covered under the New ational towing.
Vehicle Limited Warranty. (Continued)
6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for
towing, to secure the front wheels in the
straight position.
 The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position

CAUTION! CAUTION! for a shift to take place and for the position
 Before recreational towing, perform the proce- It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
dure outlined under “Shifting into N that the transfer case is fully in N (NEUTRAL) is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift will
(NEUTRAL)” to be certain that the transfer before recreational towing to prevent damage to not take place and no position indicator
case is fully in N (NEUTRAL). Otherwise, internal parts. lights will be on or flashing.
internal damage will result.  A flashing N (NEUTRAL) position indicator
 Towing this vehicle in violation of the above Use the following procedure to prepare your light indicates that shift requirements have
requirements can cause severe transmission vehicle for recreational towing: not been met.
and/or transfer case damage. Damage from 1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on level  If the vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift
improper towing is not covered under the New ground, with the engine running. air suspension, the engine should be
Vehicle Limited Warranty. started and left running for a minimum of
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
60 seconds (with all the doors closed) at
 Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow 3. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL. least once every 24 hours. This process
bar on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will
4. If vehicle is equipped with Quadra-Lift air allows the air suspension to adjust the
be damaged.
suspension, ensure the vehicle is set to vehicle’s ride height to compensate for
Normal Ride Height. temperature effects.
Shifting Into Transfer Case N (NEUTRAL) 5. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
NOTE:
and hold the recessed transfer case N
WARNING!  Steps 1 through 4 are requirements that
(NEUTRAL) button (located by the selector
must be met before pushing the N
You or others could be injured or killed if you switch) for more than four seconds. The light
(NEUTRAL) button, and must continue to be
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer behind the N symbol will blink, indicating shift
met until the shift has been completed. If
case in the N (NEUTRAL) position without first in progress. The light will stop blinking (stay on
any of these requirements are not met
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer solid) when the shift to N (NEUTRAL) is
before pushing the N (NEUTRAL) button or
case N (NEUTRAL) position disengages both the complete. A “FOUR WHEEL DRIVE SYSTEM IN
are no longer met during the shift, then the
front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain NEUTRAL” message will appear in the
N (NEUTRAL) indicator light will flash contin-
and will allow the vehicle to roll, even if the instrument cluster.
uously until all requirements are met or until
transmission is in PARK. The parking brake the N (NEUTRAL) button is released.
should always be applied when the driver is not
in the vehicle.
14. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a  A flashing N (NEUTRAL) position indicator
suitable tow bar. light indicates that shift requirements have
15. Release the parking brake. not been met.
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case N (NEUTRAL) 5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
Use the following procedure to prepare your 6. Using a ballpoint pen or similar object, push
vehicle for normal use: and hold the recessed transfer case N
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving (NEUTRAL) button (located by the selector
it connected to the tow vehicle. switch) for one second.
N (NEUTRAL) Button 2. Firmly apply the parking brake. 4
3. Start the engine.
6. After the shift is completed and the N
(NEUTRAL) light stays on, release the N NOTE:
(NEUTRAL) button.  Steps 1 through 5 are requirements that
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE. must be met before pushing the N
(NEUTRAL) button, and must continue to be
8. Release the brake pedal for five seconds and
met until the shift has been completed. If
ensure that there is no vehicle movement.
any of these requirements are not met
9. Press and hold the brake pedal. Shift the before pushing the N (NEUTRAL) button or
transmission back into NEUTRAL. are no longer met during the shift, the N
10. Firmly apply the parking brake. (NEUTRAL) indicator light will flash continu- N (NEUTRAL) Button
11. With the transmission and transfer case in N ously until all requirements are met or until
7. When the N (NEUTRAL) indicator light turns off,
(NEUTRAL), push and hold the ENGINE START/ the N (NEUTRAL) button is released.
release the N (NEUTRAL) button. After the N
STOP button until the engine turns off.  The ignition must be in the ON/RUN position (NEUTRAL) button has been released, the
12. Place the transmission gear selector in PARK. for a shift to take place and for the position transfer case will always shift to 4WD HI.
Release the brake pedal. indicator lights to be operable. If the ignition
8. Shift the transmission into PARK. Turn the
is not in the ON/RUN position, the shift will
13. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button twice engine off.
not take place and no position indicator
(without pressing the brake pedal), to turn the lights will be on or flashing. 9. Release the brake pedal.
ignition to the off position.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle. OFF-R OAD D RIVING TIPS WARNING!
11. Start the engine.
Quadra-Lift — If Equipped Do not drive in 4WD LOW range on dry
When off-roading, it is recommended that the pavement; driveline damage may result. 4WD
13. Release the parking brake. lowest useable vehicle height that will clear the LOW range locks front and rear drivelines
14. Shift the transmission into REVERSE or DRIVE, current obstacle or terrain be selected. The vehicle together and does not allow for differential
release the brake pedal, and check that the height should then be raised as required by the action between the front to rear driveshafts.
vehicle operates normally. changes in terrain. Driving in 4WD LOW on pavement will cause
driveline binding; use only on wet or slippery
The Selec-Terrain switch will automatically change
DRIVING TIPS the vehicle to the optimized height based on the
surfaces.
Selec-Terrain switch position. The vehicle height
ON-ROAD D RIVING T IPS can be changed from the default height for each Driving Through Water
Selec-Terrain mode by normal use of the air
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
suspension switches Ú page 134.
narrower track to make them capable of water, there are a number of precautions that
performing in a wide variety of off-road When To Use 4WD LOW Range — must be considered before entering the water.
applications. Specific design characteristics give If Equipped NOTE:
them a higher center of gravity than conventional Your vehicle is capable of water fording in up to
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for
passenger cars. 24 inches (61 cm) with air suspension or
additional traction. This range should be limited to
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or 21 inches (53 cm) without air suspension, of water
better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate sand where additional low speed pulling power is while crossing small rivers or streams. To maintain
problems. They are not designed for cornering at needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph optimal performance of your vehicle's heating and
the same speeds as conventional passenger cars (40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4WD LOW ventilation system it is recommended to switch the
any more than low-slung sports cars are designed range. system into recirculation mode during water
to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. fording. Be sure to avoid lowering the vehicle in
Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with water, ensure that the easy exit entry setting is
other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this turned off in Uconnect settings.
vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or
vehicle rollover.
Standing Water Hill Climbing

CAUTION!
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than NOTE:
When driving through water, do not exceed 24 inches (61 cm) with air suspension or Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth 21 inches (53 cm) without air suspension, and conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
before entering as a precaution, and check all reduce speed appropriately to minimize wave
fluids afterward. Driving through water may Before climbing a steep hill, shift the transmission
effects. Maximum speed is 5 mph (8 km/h).
cause damage that may not be covered by the to a lower gear and shift the transfer case to 4WD
Maintenance LOW. Use FIRST gear and 4WD LOW for very steep
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
After driving through deep water, inspect your hills.
vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine oil, If you stall or begin to lose forward motion while
Driving through water more than a few inches/ transmission oil, axle, transfer case) to ensure the
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to 4
fluids have not been contaminated. Contaminated a stop and immediately apply the brakes. Restart
ensure safety and prevent damage to your vehicle. fluid (milky, foamy in appearance) should be the engine, and shift into REVERSE (R). Back slowly
If you must drive through water, try to determine flushed/changed as soon as possible to prevent down the hill, allowing the compression braking of
the depth and the bottom condition (and location component damage. the engine to help regulate your speed. If the
of any obstacles) prior to entering. Proceed with
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand brakes are required to control vehicle speed, apply
caution and maintain a steady controlled speed
them lightly and avoid locking or skidding the tires.
less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in deep water to In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for
minimize wave effects. additional control at slower speeds, shift the WARNING!
Flowing Water transmission to a low gear and shift the transfer
case to 4WD LOW if necessary Ú page 134. Only If the engine stalls, you lose forward motion, or
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in storm cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or grade,
shift into a lower gear to maintain forward motion.
run-off), avoid crossing until the water level never attempt to turn around. To do so may
Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels and
recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. If you result in tipping and rolling the vehicle. Always
traction will be lost.
must cross flowing water avoid depths in excess of back carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE
9 inches (23 cm). The flowing water can erode the Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads,
gear. Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using
streambed, causing your vehicle to sink into because engine braking may cause skidding and
only the brake.
deeper water. Determine exit point(s) that are loss of control.
downstream of your entry point to allow for drifting.
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill. After Driving Off-Road  After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
Always drive straight up or down. similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan,
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the crest brake rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After going
of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain yokes inspected and cleaned as soon as
off-road, it is always a good idea to check for
forward motion by turning the front wheels slowly. possible.
damage. That way you can get any problems taken
This may provide a fresh “bite” into the surface and care of right away and have your vehicle ready
will usually provide traction to complete the climb. WARNING!
when you need it.
Traction Downhill  Completely inspect the underbody of your Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering, cause excessive wear or unpredictable braking.
When descending mountains or hills, use Hill You might not have full braking power when you
Descent Control or Selec-Speed Control to avoid suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
need it to prevent a collision. If you have been
repeated heavy braking.  Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and operating your vehicle in dirty conditions, get
If not equipped with Hill Descent Control or clean as required. your brakes checked and cleaned as necessary.
Selec-Speed Control use the following procedure:  Check threaded fasteners for looseness, partic-
Shift the transmission into a low gear, and the ularly on the chassis, drivetrain components,
 If you experience unusual vibration after driving
transfer case into 4WD LOW range. Let the vehicle steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if
in mud, slush or similar conditions, check the
go slowly down the hill with all four wheels turning required, and torque to the values specified in
wheels for impacted material. Impacted mate-
against engine compression drag. This will permit the Service Manual.
rial can cause a wheel imbalance and freeing
you to control the vehicle speed and direction.  Check for accumulations of plants or brush. the wheels of it will correct the situation.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated These things could be a fire hazard. They might
braking can cause brake fade with loss of braking hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle
control. Avoid repeated heavy braking by pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
downshifting the transmission whenever possible.
203
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security
features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and
NOTE:
 To help further improve user experience,
For detailed information about your Uconnect unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless features, stability, etc., and minimize the poten-
5/5 NAV With 8.4-inch Display or Uconnect communications. Vehicle software technology tial risk of a security breach, vehicle owners
5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display system, refer to continues to evolve over time and FCA US LLC, should:
your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement. working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes
 Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
NOTE: appropriate steps as needed.
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
Uconnect screen images are for illustration The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to (Canadian Residents) to learn about avail-
purposes only and may not reflect exact software your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the able Uconnect software updates.
for your vehicle. most recent version of vehicle software (such as
 Only connect and use trusted media
5
Uconnect software) is installed.
CYBERSECURITY devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
WARNING!
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may
be equipped with both wired and wireless  ONLY insert trusted devices/components into
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to your vehicle. Media of unknown origin could
send and receive information. This information possibly contain malicious software, and if
allows systems and features in your vehicle to installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
function properly. possibility for vehicle systems to be breached.
 As always, if you experience unusual vehicle
behavior, take your vehicle to your nearest
authorized dealer immediately.
204 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SETTINGS CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE F EATURES Press the Vehicle button, then press the Settings
tab on the top of the touchscreen. In this menu, the
The Uconnect system uses a combination of Uconnect system allows you to access all of the
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the available programmable features.
faceplate located on the center of the instrument
NOTE:
panel. These buttons allow you to access and
change the customer programmable features.  Only one touchscreen area may be selected at a
Many features can vary by vehicle. time.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below and/or  Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
beside the Uconnect system in the center of the settings may vary.
instrument panel. In addition, there is a SCROLL/ When making a selection, press the button on the
ENTER control knob located on the right side. Turn touchscreen to enter the desired menu. Once in
the control knob to scroll through menus and the desired menu, press and release the preferred
change settings. Push the center of the control setting option until a check mark appears next to
knob one or more times to select or change a Uconnect 5/5 NAV With 10.1-inch Display the setting, showing that setting has been
setting. selected. Once the setting is complete, press the
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen Vehicle button to exit to the screen. Pressing the
Your Uconnect system may also have SCREEN OFF
and MUTE buttons on the faceplate. 2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate Up or Down Arrow button on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down through
Push the SCREEN OFF button on the faceplate to the available settings.
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a Menu
or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Push and hold the Power button on the radio’s
faceplate for a minimum of 15 seconds to reset
the radio.
MULTIMEDIA 205
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of the
touchscreen. The available settings are:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.
Setting Name Description

This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available
Language
languages are English, Français, Español, and Italiano.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system
Display Mode
set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust 5
the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the
brightness of the display.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
Display Brightness With Headlights ON access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+” setting will
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are
“Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Current Consumption” (MPG
Units
[US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and
“Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting
Theme Mode
options are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”.
206 MULTIMEDIA

Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
This setting will allow you to turn the bottom main category bar labels on or
Show Main Category Bar Labels
off.
Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed In Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
Instrument Cluster Display.
This setting will enable the Ready To Drive pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster
Ready To Drive Pop-ups
Display.
Massage Pop-Up Displayed With Button Press This setting will activate or deactivate the massage feature pop-ups.
Entertainment Screens
When the Entertainment Screens button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s Entertainment.
NOTE:

This setting will enable or disable Passenger Screen permissions. Options
Passenger Screen Permissions within this setting are Navigation, Device Manager, and Uconnect Theater all
with On or Off options
This setting will enable or disable your Rear Seat Screen permissions. Option
Rear Seat Screen Permissions
within this setting is Navigation with On or Off options.
MULTIMEDIA 207
My Profile
When the My Profile button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s profiles.
NOTE:

This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The available
Language
languages are English, Français, Español, and Italiano.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the system
set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically adjust
Display Mode
the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to adjust the 5
brightness of the display.
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are on. To
Display Brightness Headlights On access this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are off. To
Display Brightness Headlights Off access this setting, Display Mode must be set to “Manual”. The “+” setting will
This setting will allow you to adjust the brightness of your theme. Setting
Theme Mode
options are “Light”, “Dark” and “Auto”.
This setting will allow you to change the units. The available options are
“Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Current Consumption” (MPG
Units
[US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and
“Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Show Main Category Bar Labels This setting will allow the main category bar labels to be shown on or off.
208 MULTIMEDIA

Navigation Turn-by-Turn Displayed In Cluster This setting will display Navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Display.
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
Instrument Cluster Display.
Massage Pop-Up Displayed With Button Press This setting will activate or deactivate the massage feature pop-ups.
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS
must be “Off” for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the
Time Format
time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour
format.
This setting will allow you to change the voice options for the radio to “Male”
Voice Options
or “Female”.
This setting will allow you to set the system “Wake Up” word. The available
Wake Up Word
options are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Jeep®”.
This setting will allow Voice Barge-in, which is a feature that will allow you to
Voice Barge-in interrupt the help message or system prompts by speaking, to be turned on or
off.
Show Command List This setting will allow the Command List to be shown on or off.
This setting will redirect to the list of Navigation settings. Refer to your
Navigation Settings
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement for further information.
This setting will redirect to a new menu that will allow you to change the
Ambient Color Personalization
ambient lighting color in the cabin.
MULTIMEDIA 209

This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort system and heated seats or
heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is
started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel
Start” setting will only activate the comfort systems when using Remote Start.
The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems whenever the vehicle
is started.
This setting will keep certain electrical features running after the engine is
Radio Off Delay turned off. When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The
available settings are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and “10 min”.
This setting will allow you to determine if the radio shuts off when any of the
Radio Off With Door
doors are opened. 5
This setting will open the submenu, containing the audio settings
Audio Settings
Ú page 224.
This setting will allow you to favorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and “Off”
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-ups
options.
This setting will allow you to unfavorite app drawer pop-ups with “On” and
App Drawer Unfavoritings Pop-ups
“Off” options.
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for new text messages.
New Text Message Pop-ups
Setting options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for missed calls. Setting
Missed Calls Message
options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to have pop-up notifications for Navigation. Setting
Navigation Pop-ups
210 MULTIMEDIA

Reset App Drawer to Default Order This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
Restore Settings to Default
default.
More Profile Options This setting will give access to more profile options.
Safety & Driving Assistance

When the Safety & Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These
options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access a
subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
NOTE:

This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system signal
when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is detected. The
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
“Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the object is closer to the
vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system signal when an object is at
a far distance from the vehicle.
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning system on or off. The “Off”
setting will deactivate the FCW system. The “Warning Only” setting will provide
Forward Collision Warning only an audible chime when a collision is detected. The “Warning + Active
Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and apply some brake pressure
when a collision is detected.
MULTIMEDIA 211

This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system on or off. This
Pedestrian Emergency Braking
setting is located in Automatic Emergency Braking.
This setting will turn the Active Driving Assist Steering Wheel Vibration on or
Active Driving Assist Steering Wheel Vibration
off.
Traffic Sign Assist This setting will turn Traffic Sign Assist on or off.
This setting will allow you to set the warning type related to the traffic sign.
Traffic Sign Assist Warning
The available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
This setting will allow you to set if the system will warn you that the speed limit
New Speed Zone Indication has changed in an area. The available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual
+ Chime”.
5
This setting will alert the driver when a lane departure is detected. The
Active Lane Management available options are “Vibration Only”, “Steering Assist Only”, and “Vibration +
Steering Assist”.
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback during a
Active Lane Management Strength
lane departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
This setting will turn the Night Vision Video Warning and green/gray cluster
Night Vision Video Warning
indicator light on or off.
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
ParkSense
detected and provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The available
Front ParkSense Volume
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The available
Rear ParkSense Volume
settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
212 MULTIMEDIA

Rear ParkSense Braking Assist This setting will turn the Rear ParkSense Braking Assist on or off.
Side Distance Warning This setting will turn the Side Distance Warning on or off.
This setting will monitor the driver’s driving habits and warn you of any
Drowsy Driver Detection changes, indicating that the driver may be drowsy. The available options are
“On” and “Off”.
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is detected
in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot Alert. The
Blind Spot Alert “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the outside mirrors.
The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate the lights on the outside mirrors and
an audible chime.
This setting will change the Electric Power Steering Default. The available
options are “Comfort” for a lower effort steering experience, “Normal” for the
Electric Power Steering Default
standard effort steering experience, and “Sport” for a higher effort steering
experience.
Hill Start Assist This setting will turn the Hill Start Assist system on or off.
Tire Fill Assist This setting will turn Tire Fill Assist on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 213
Clock & Date

When the Clock & Date button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
NOTE:

This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The system
Sync Time With GPS
will control the time via the GPS location.
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With GPS
must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will set the
Time Format
time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to a 24-hour 5
format.
This setting will allow you to set the hours and minutes. Sync Time With GPS
Set Time must be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the
hours or minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the hours or minutes.
This setting will allow you to set the day, month and year. Using “+” or “-”, you
Set Date
can scroll through the available days, months, and years.
This setting will allow you to show the time and date while the screen is off.
Show Time and Date During Screen Off
Available options are “On” and “Off”.
214 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external audio
device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
NOTE:

Device Manager This setting will open the Device Manager main screen.
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb All settings menu. The available
Do Not Disturb All
This setting will enable or disable two active phones with the vehicle. The
Enable Two Active Phones
setting options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Cluster
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
Display.
MULTIMEDIA 215
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
NOTE:

This setting will allow you to change the system’s voice to either “Male” or
Voice Options
“Female”.
This setting will allow you to set the system’s “Wake Up” word. The available
Wake Up Word
options are “Off”, “Hey, Uconnect”, and “Hey, Jeep®”.
This setting allows you to respond to a Voice Response before the statement 5
Voice Barge-In
is completed by the system. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The “Always”
setting will always show the Command List. The “With Help” setting will show
Show Command List
the Command List and provide a brief description of what the command does.
The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
216 MULTIMEDIA
Navigation
When the Navigation button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s built-in Navigation system. These settings can
change which icons display on the map, how “time to arrival is calculated”, and route types.
For more information on Navigation and settings, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
NOTE:

This setting will add a timed delay to the Surround View Camera when shifting
Surround View Camera Delay
out of REVERSE.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Surround View Camera Guidelines on or off.
This setting will add a timed delay to the ParkView Backup Camera when
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
shifting out of REVERSE.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines on or off.
Forward Facing Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the Forward Facing Camera Guidelines on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 217
Mirrors & Wipers

When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
NOTE:
Setting Name
Description
This setting will tilt the outside side-view mirrors when the ignition is in the
ON/RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the REVERSE
Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse position. The mirrors will move back to their previous position when the
transmission is shifted out of REVERSE. The available settings are “On” and 5
“Off”.
This setting will automatically fold and unfold the side-view mirrors when the
Auto Folding Side Mirrors vehicle is turned off, the doors are locked, or the key fob button is pushed.
The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Headlights With Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
218 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
 When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the country
of the vehicle purchased.
 Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature settings may vary.

This setting will redirect to a new menu that will allow you to change the
Ambient Color Personalization
ambient lighting color in the cabin.
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
Headlight Off Delay to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”,
“30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the headlights
to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. “Greeting Lights” must be selected
Headlight Illumination On Approach and “Headlight Illumination on Approach” must be selected above 0 seconds
for the feature to be enabled. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60
sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlights with Wipers This setting will turn the headlights on when the wipers are activated.
This setting will allow you to turn on or off some exterior and interior lighting
illumination when approaching the vehicle.
Proximity Wake-Up NOTE:
Headlight Illumination On Approach must be set to a value other than zero for
Proximity Wake-Up to be active.
MULTIMEDIA 219

When the “Greeting Lights” feature is selected, it enables “Headlight
Illumination On Approach”. When “Headlight Illumination On Approach” is
selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights
Greeting Lights remain on after the doors are unlocked with the key fob. “Greeting Lights”
must be selected and “Headlight Illumination On Approach” must be selected
above zero seconds for the feature to be enabled. The available settings are
“On” and “Off”.
Auto Dim High Beams This setting will allow you to turn the Auto Dim High Beams on or off.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
When this setting is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large or
Cornering Lights the turn signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light) will turn 5
on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
Flash Lights With Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Brakes
When the Brakes button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display a setting related to the vehicle’s brake system.
NOTE:

Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
This setting will allow you to set the brakes for service. When the setting is
Brake Service
selected, a pop-up will display with “Yes” and “No” options.
220 MULTIMEDIA
Doors & Locks

When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
NOTE:
 The Auto Door Locks feature default condition is enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 12 mph
(20 km/h). The Auto Door Locks feature can be enabled or disabled by an authorized dealer per written request of the customer. Please see an authorized
dealer for service.

This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from the
Auto Unlock On Exit
inside.
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
Flash Lights With Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the key
fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed.
Sound Horn With Lock The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed
once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed twice.
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from the
Sound Horn With Remote Start
key fob.
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key fob
are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only unlock
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All Doors” setting
will unlock all doors with only one push of the Unlock button.
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless Enter ‘n
Passive Entry
Go™) on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 221

This setting will recall preset radio stations and driver seat position that have
Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob
been linked to the key fob.
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising or
Power Liftgate Alert
lowering. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open or close the
Hands-Free Power Liftgate
power liftgate. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will lock the doors after 30 seconds of the doors remaining
Auto Relock
unlocked. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Seats & Comfort 5

When Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote start has
been activated or the vehicle has been started.
NOTE:

This setting will automatically move the driver seat rearward when the engine
Easy Exit Seats
is shut off. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats or
heated steering wheel when the vehicle is remote started or ignition is
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Heated Steering Wheel With Vehicle started. The “Off” setting will not activate the comfort systems. The “Remote
Start Start” setting (if equipped) will only activate the comfort systems when using
Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate the comfort systems
whenever the vehicle is started.
222 MULTIMEDIA
Key Off Options

When the Key Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These settings will only activate
when the ignition is set to OFF.
NOTE:

This setting will sound the horn when the Lower button is pressed on the key
Sound Horn With Lower
fob.
This setting will flash the lights when the Lower button is pressed on the key
Flash Lights With Lower
fob.
Easy Exit Seat This setting adjusts the seats to make exiting the vehicle easier.
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain on
Headlight Off Delay after the vehicle has been turned off. The available settings are “0 sec”, “30
sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Auto Entry/Exit Suspension This setting will turn the Auto Entry/Exit Suspension system on or off.
This setting will keep the radio on for the selected amount of time after
Radio Off Delay vehicle shut off. The available options are “0 sec”, “45 sec”, “5 min”, and
“10 min”.
This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the Radio Off
Radio Off With Door
Delay time is reached. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to control window function while the vehicle is off.
Windows With Key Fob
The available options are “On” and “Off”.
MULTIMEDIA 223
Suspension
When the Suspension button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display settings related to the vehicle’s air suspension.
NOTE:

Auto Entry/Exit Suspension This setting will turn the Auto Entry/Exit Suspension system on or off.
This setting will display suspension messages in the Instrument Cluster
Display Suspension Messages Display. The “All” setting will display all available messages. The “Warnings
Only” setting will only display warning messages.
This setting will disable the air suspension system to assist it changing a 5
Tire Jack Mode
spare tire.
This setting will allow you to set the auxiliary suspension mode. The available
options are “Off”, “Transport Mode”, and “Wheel Alignment Mode”. In
Auxiliary Mode Transport Mode, the vehicle will not auto level when being transported by
another vehicle. In Wheel Alignment Mode, the vehicle will not auto level when
a wheel alignment is being performed.
224 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change the audio
location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
NOTE:

This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/back
Balance/Fade and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set audio
location.
Equalizer This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the audio.
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher setting,
Speed Adjusted Volume the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The available settings
are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through the
AUX Volume Offset
AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected device.
This setting will automatically turn the radio on when the vehicle is started.
Auto-On Radio The available settings are “Off”, “On”, and “Recall Last”. With Recall Last, the
system resumes the previous task before vehicle shut off.
This setting will keep the radio on when a door is opened or until the Radio Off
Radio off With Door
Delay time is reached. The available settings are “On” and “Off”.
This setting will allow you to set the audio volume levels for each option
Volume Adjustment
(Media, Phone, Navigation, etc.). You can set the volume between 0 and 38.
MULTIMEDIA 225
Notifications
When the Notifications button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Notifications for the system.
NOTE:

Notification Sounds Turn this setting on or off to hear notification sounds throughout your system.
App Drawer Favoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Favorited pop-up on or off.
App Drawer Unfavoriting Pop-Ups This setting turns the App Unfavorited pop-up on or off.
New Text Message Pop-Ups

This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for new text messages of any 5
connected phone on or off.
This setting turns receiving/storing a pop-up for missed calls of any connected
Missed Calls Message
phone on or off.
Navigation Pop-Ups This setting turns receiving/storing predictive Navigation Pop-Ups on or off.
226 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can be
used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
NOTE:
 A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.

This setting will redirect you to the SiriusXM® settings menu within the
SiriusXM® Account, Profile, And Settings
SiriusXM® menu.
This setting will skip over content labeled as explicit. The available settings
Block Explicit
are “On” and “Off”.
Accessibility — If Equipped
After pressing the Accessibility button on the touchscreen, the following setting will be available:
NOTE:

Video Button Readback This setting will turn the Video Button Readback feature on or off.
MULTIMEDIA 227
Software Updates
When the Software Updates button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the setting related to updating the Uconnect software.
NOTE:

This setting will allow software updates to happen over Wi-Fi. Selectable
Software Downloads over Wi-Fi
options for the setting are “On” and “Off”.
System Information
5
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:

When this feature is selected, a Version Information screen will appear,
Version Information
displaying information about the version of your radio.
When this feature is selected, a License Information screen will appear,
License Information
displaying the licensing information of your radio.
228 MULTIMEDIA
Reset
When the Reset button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect system back to its default settings.
These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
NOTE:

Restart Radio This setting will reboot the radio.
This setting will return the apps drawer to the default order. The available
Reset Apps Drawer To Default Order options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can also be pressed to cancel
the screen.
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
Restore Settings to Default
default.
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all personal
Clear Personal Data
data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
This setting will allow you to reset the vehicle’s Wi-Fi password for smartphone
Reset Wi-Fi Password For Projection projection. The available options are “Yes” and “Cancel”. The X button can
also be pressed to cancel the screen.
Reset Performance Values This setting will reset the performance values from your vehicle.
Factory Reset This setting will restore the radio to its factory default settings.
MULTIMEDIA 229
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode.
To begin using the Passenger Screen, push the
Power button in the center stack, or press the
The Remote Sound System controls are located on Power button under the Controls tab within the
the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach RADIO OPERATION Uconnect system. The Passenger Screen can be
behind the wheel to access the switches. Pushing the top of the switch will seek up for the turned off by accessing the Control screen and
next listenable station, and pushing the bottom of pressing the Power Off button.
the switch will seek down for the next listenable You must link Bluetooth® headphones to the
station. Passenger Screen to begin listening to the
The button located in the center of the left-hand system’s audio Ú page 233.
control will tune to the next preset station that you NOTE:
have programmed in the radio preset button. The Passenger Screen will need to be turned On
each time the vehicle is started, and the system
MEDIA M ODE will display the Home Screen upon boot up. 5
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/ PASSENGER S CREEN P ERMISSIONS
Steering Wheel Audio Controls Bluetooth®). Pushing the bottom of the switch Through the Uconnect system, features within the
once goes to the beginning of the current track, or Passenger Screen can be activated and
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with to the beginning of the previous track if it is within deactivated through Passenger Screen
a push button in the center and controls the eight seconds after the current track begins to Permissions. To access Permissions, press the
volume and mode of the sound system. Pushing play. Vehicle button in the Menu Bar and select the
the top of the rocker switch increases the volume, Settings tab. Then, press the Passenger Screen
and pushing the bottom of the rocker switch
decreases the volume.
PASSENGER SCREEN — IF EQUIPPED settings menu. Press the On button for the
Passenger Screen Permission setting to activate
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Passenger
Pushing the center button makes the radio switch permissions.
Screen located above the glove compartment on
between the various modes available (AM/FM/
the passenger side of the vehicle. From the
SXM or Media, etc.)
Passenger Screen, you will be able to access
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a similar features seen within the Uconnect radio,
push button in the center. The function of the such as media functions, Rear Seat Entertainment
left-hand control is different depending on which with Amazon FireTV Built-in, Navigation, and device
mode you are in. management.
230 MULTIMEDIA
HOME SCREEN When the Passenger Screen is started up and no

other media was running during the last ignition
cycle, the Home Screen will display. Here, you can
select from the features of the Passenger Screen.
On the left side of the screen, you can access
“Notifications and System Controls”.
The Notifications button (the bell) will take you to
the Notifications screen, identical to what is seen
in the main radio.
You can cycle between the features by swiping left
Passenger Screen Permissions Settings Menu or right on the touchscreen. When accessing a
By default, the Passenger Screen Permissions feature, press the Home button on the left side to
setting is set to Off, and the driver will need to give access the feature view and select a different
permission for the different features. feature.
Passenger Screen Home Screen
When Permissions is turned On, you can The available features are:
individually select the permissions for the 1 — Home Screen Button  Audio
followings: 2 — Notifications Button
 Video & Images
 Navigation 3 — Controls Button
 HDMI
4 — Feature Cards
 Device Manager  Rear Seat Entertainment — If Equipped
 Rear Seat Entertainment — If Equipped  Navigation
Passenger Screen Permissions can also be  Devices
activated through the Controls screen, under the
Vehicle button in the Menu Bar. If “Deny Passenger  Cameras
Screen Permissions” is turned On, the setting will
switch itself to Off.
MULTIMEDIA 231
Controls Screen The Power Off button will fully shut down the AUDIO AND VIDEO
From the Controls Screen, you can adjust the Passenger Screen. No audio or video will play from
daytime/nighttime brightness of the screen, it.
change headphone volume, and power off the
Passenger Screen.
To change the brightness, adjust the slider up or
down, or press the Up or Down Arrow button
located next to the slider. “Up” will increase
brightness; “Down” will decrease brightness.
Daytime and nighttime brightness levels will vary,
and the adjustment maximum/minimum will differ
depending on the time of day.
To change the headphone volume, adjust the 5
slider up or down, or press the Up or Down Arrow
Audio Feature
button located next to the slider. “Up” will increase
the volume; “Down” will decrease the volume. Passenger Screen Controls Screen 1 — All Sources Tab
NOTE: 2 — Now Playing Tab
1 — Screen Off
Headphone volume can also be manually adjusted 3 — Browse Tab
2 — Power Off
from the headphones. Changing the headphone
volume manually will not reflect in the headphone 3 — Manage Headphones
4 — Mute Headphones Audio allows you to listen to your favorite radio
volume slider on the Passenger Screen. station, a connected USB device, or connected
If the Screen Off button is pressed, the Passenger 5 — Display Brightness
media device. You can directly change the source
Screen will continue to operate, but the screen will 6 — Headphone Volume on the Home Screen by pressing the Source button
go dark. Tap the screen again to return to the in the feature. You can also expand it by pressing
display. While the screen is off, audio will continue the Full Screen View button.
to play from the Passenger Screen.
232 MULTIMEDIA
To change the media source, press the Source On the Preset menu, you will be able to listen to
button and then press on the desired source. The saved radio presets. Press the desired preset to
available sources are: begin listening.
 Live Radio (FM, AM, SXM) The Browse tab will let you browse through
 Bluetooth® different radio stations or audio saved onto a USB
or audio device. Press “Browse” and select from
 USB 1 the different folders. You can scroll up and down to
 USB 2 view the options within those folders. Press on the
 AUX desired radio station or audio track to begin
playing it.
 AV 1 — If Equipped
When the USB source is selected, you can chose a
 AV 2 — If Equipped
video file to play if saved to a USB device. Press
 Rear Screen 1 Listen In — If Equipped “Browse” and locate the folder with the video file. Playing A Video
 Rear Screen 2 Listen In — If Equipped Press the video file name, and it will begin to play 1 — Source Bar
on the Passenger Screen. 2 — Now Playing Tab
NOTE:
 Audio devices connected via Bluetooth® must
NOTE: 3 — Browse Button
be done through the Device Manager in the Not all video files will be supported from a USB. 4 — Preset Bar
radio. For more information on pairing a device, Certain video files may require digital rights to view
5 — Related Button
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supple- or play. These may be unavailable for playback on
the Passenger Screen. 6 — Seek Down Button
ment. 7 — Tune Button
 If the driver is listening to “Live Radio”, the 8 — Seek Up Button
option will not be available in the Passenger 9 — Replay Button
Screen. Select “Now Playing On Radio” to listen
to the currently playing station. If the driver
selects a radio station while the Passenger
Screen is playing live radio content, the feed will
end on the Passenger Screen and control will be
given to the Uconnect system.
MULTIMEDIA 233
REAR SEAT E NTERTAINMENT DEVICE MANAGER Device Manager provides an easy place to view all
the devices connected to the Uconnect system and
WITH AMAZON F IRETV B UILT-IN — lets you pair the Driver’s smartphone to the
I F EQUIPPED Uconnect system. You will also pair Bluetooth®
headphones to the Passenger Screen from this
Rear Seat Entertainment will let you control and
screen.
listen in to the content being played on the rear
entertainment screens. You can view the contents For more information on pairing your smartphone,
of the rear screens, lock the rear screens, change refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
the source of the rear screens, or turn the rear Supplement.
screens on or off Ú page 235. To pair a set of Bluetooth® Headphones:
HDMI P ROJECTING 1. If viewing Device Manager in full screen,
press the Add Device button. If viewing Device
HDMI lets you connect a device to the provided Manager on the Home Screen, press “Pair 5
HDMI port, using an HDMI cable, and project the Bluetooth® headphones”.
device directly to the Passenger Screen. To begin, Device Manager
2. From the pop-up, press “Search For
plug a device into the HDMI port. Then, press the 1 — Device Settings Button Headphones”. The system will begin searching
HDMI button on the touchscreen. 2 — Phone Connectivity Button for the Bluetooth® signal of your headphones.
HDMI will continue to show the menu bar and 3 — Media Connectivity Button 3. Select the name of you headphones from the
Headphone Paring button. 4 — Android Auto™/Apple CarPlay® Button list of possible devices. The system will
NOTE: 5 — Add Device Button connect to the headphones.
 The HDMI Card will not automatically launch 6 — Manage Headphone Button
when a new device is connected. The HDMI NOTE:
7 — Do Not Disturb Button
Card will show a device connected, and the Card The Passenger Screen will connect to previously
8 — Two Active Phones Button paired Bluetooth® headphones after Passenger
will need to be pressed.
Screen activation.
 If the user disconnects a device from the HDMI
port while the HDMI Card is in full screen, the
system will close HDMI and reload the Home
Screen.
234 MULTIMEDIA
Removing Bluetooth® Headphones CAMERA McIntosh

1. From the Controls screen, press the Manage McIntosh is a 3rd party app that can enhance your
Camera will display the equipped vehicle camera
Headphones button. Uconnect system’s media player. For the app to be
feed. When selected, press the desired Camera
2. Press the Settings button (gear icon) next to effective, there must be audio playback in the
button. The feed from that camera will display in
the set of headphones you wish to remove. Uconnect media player. McIntosh can control the
the center of the touchscreen. Press the X button
playback of audio as well as display the output
3. Press “Delete Device”; the Bluetooth® or Back Arrow button to return to the Home Screen.
level decibel meters.
headphones will be removed from the system. NOTE:
To launch the app, begin playing audio and follow
The Passenger Screen will lose access to a camera
NAVIGATION these steps:
if the driver chooses to view it on the Uconnect
system or if a condition would activate the camera 1. Press the Apps button.
Navigation allows you to assist the driver in
on the Uconnect system (the rearview camera 2. Press the McIntosh app.
searching for destinations using Uconnect’s
being activated when the vehicle is shifted into
built-in Navigation system. For information on the
REVERSE).
full functionality of Navigation, refer to your
Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.
When a new route is selected from the Passenger
3RD PARTY APPS
Screen, a confirmation will be sent to the driver. If equipped, your vehicle may contain some 3rd
The driver will be able to confirm or deny the route. party apps, which will further enhance your
Uconnect system.
NOTE:
Using Navigation on the Passenger Screen will not
affect the Navigation screen in the Uconnect
system. The Driver can continue to use Navigation
while the Passenger Screen can “suggest” new McIntosh
routes or stops.
MULTIMEDIA 235
The McIntosh app will allow you to perform the following when listening to music:
Skip Backward Press to skip backward. Press and hold to fast rewind.
Play/Pause Press to play/pause the track.
Skip Forward Press to skip forward. Press and hold to fast forward.
Press to repeat track. Press again to repeat playlist. Press again to turn off
Repeat
(works only with a USB device).
Press to change channel down. Press and hold to seek channel down. While
Change Channel Down using AM/FM, pressing the channel down will change the frequency by 0.2.
Pressing and holding in AM/FM will seek channels.
Press to change channel up. Press and hold to seek channel up. While using
Change Channel Up AM/FM, pressing the channel up will change the frequency by 0.2. Pressing
5
and holding in AM/FM will seek channels.
NOTE: REAR SEAT ENTERTAINMENT WITH  Listen to audio over wireless headphones (not
included, customer will have to provide their
 The seek feature will not work while using Blue-
tooth®. AMAZON FIRETV BUILT-IN — IF EQUIPPED own)
 You cannot change the audio source within the  Plug and play a variety of devices into the Video
app. To do so, press the Media button, and then
OVERVIEW USB port
press the Sources button. Rear Seat Entertainment is designed to give your Please review this Owner's Manual to become
To exit the app, press any of the buttons on the family years of enjoyment. familiar with its features and operation.
Bottom Menu Bar. There are multiple ways to interact with your Rear
For more information on the McIntosh app and its Seat Entertainment system:
functionality, please visit https://  Stream your favorite shows with Amazon FireTV
www.mcintoshlabs.com.  Plug and play a variety of standard video games
or devices into the HDMI port
236 MULTIMEDIA
GETTING S TARTED For information on the front media hub USB/AUX ACCESSING REAR SEAT
ports Ú page 77.
E NTERTAINMENT WITH AMAZON F IRETV
ACCESSING REAR SEAT BUILT- IN FROM THE REAR S CREENS
E NTERTAINMENT WITH A MAZON FIRETV You can also access your Rear Seat Entertainment
BUILT- IN FROM THE RADIO system by choosing one of the following options:
You can access your Rear Seat Entertainment Option 1
system by following the steps below:  Pushing the power button on the Rear Seat
Option 1 Entertainment remote.
1. Press the Media button. Option 2
2. Press the Rear Seat button icon.  Swiping on either of the Rear Seat Entertain-
Rear Screen Entertainment for Uconnect 5/5 NAV ment touchscreens.
1 — Rear Seat Entertainment (Rear Touchscreen) Option 2 NOTE:
2 — Headphone Jack 1. Press the Apps button on the bottom of the While accessing on the rear screens, the system
3 — USB C Charging Port touchscreen. will launch with the integrated Amazon FireTV.
2. Press the Rear Seat Entertainment with
4 — HDMI Port
Amazon FireTV Built-in button on the
ACCESSING REAR SEAT
5 — Uconnect System (Front Touchscreen)
touchscreen. You may need to navigate to E NTERTAINMENT WITH AMAZON F IRETV
different pages in the Apps drawer to find the BUILT- IN FROM THE PASSENGER
There are four different ways to operate the Rear Seat Entertainment with Amazon FireTV
features of Rear Seat Entertainment: Built-in button.
S CREEN — IF EQUIPPED
 Rear Seat Entertainment remote control You can also access Rear Seat Entertainment
 Front radio screen content from the Passenger Screen.
 Passenger screen Follow the steps below:
 Individual Rear Seat Entertainment touch- 1. Access the Home screen for the Passenger
screens Screen.
2. Cycle between the features on the Home
screen and select Rear Seat Entertainment.
MULTIMEDIA 237
FIRST TIME S TARTING UP (U SING THE Some options for a network connection are: App Content
REAR SCREENS)  Wi-Fi Hotspot using a capable smartphone (if During the process, streaming services and TV
activated, it will show as a possible network for services can be selected to focus on what you plan
Boot Up Screen the system on the screen). to watch the most. These streaming services and
When turning on the system for the first time from  Outside connection like a home Wi-Fi network. TV services will show in the Apps and Channels
the rear screens, a boot up screen will appear on categories on the Rear Seat Entertainment Home
 In-vehicle Wi-Fi. screen.
the system displaying the Amazon FireTV logo.
NOTE: Parental Controls
During this boot up sequence, language options
When a network is connected to the system for the
will be available for the system. Another feature that will appear during this first
first time, an over-the-air software update will take
Remote Pairing place using the Wi-Fi connection. After this time set up is parental controls.
After the boot up sequence is complete, the first-time update, updates will only accrue when When the parental controls page appears, it will
system will then give the option to pair the Rear one is available. It is recommended that you give the options to “Enable Parental Controls” and
Seat Entertainment remote (included with the connect your RSE/Amazon Fire OS to a Wi-Fi “No Parental Controls”. If “Enable Parental 5
system). Hotspot with unlimited data and a good signal Controls” is selected, follow the on-screen steps to
(such as a home Wi-Fi network) in order to check set up parental controls for the system.
Follow the on-screen instructions for how to pair
for future Fire OS updates.
the remote with the system. REAR SCREEN FLY- OUT MENU
Account Sign-in
NOTE: Accessing the rear screen fly-out menu will give
If remote pairing fails, on-screen instructions will The next step will be the option to sign in to your
Amazon account. more options for Rear Seat Entertainment.
appear for trying to pair the remote again.
There are two options to sign into the system: To access the rear screen fly-out menu, swipe up or
Connecting to a Network
down on the screen. The menu can also be
During the start-up process, the system will need to  I already have an Amazon account: Sign in with accessed by pushing the Gear/Settings button on
be connected to a network. Multiple network an already existing Amazon account the Rear Seat Entertainment remote.
sources can be options for the system and one will  I am new to Amazon: Create a new Amazon
need to be selected for the system to function. Account
If “I am new to Amazon” is selected, follow the
on-screen steps to set up an Amazon account with
the system.
238 MULTIMEDIA
Some options in the fly-out menu are listed below: 4. While in the Settings, select “Preferences”. MEDIA S OURCES INPUT (U SING THE
 Power — This will power the screen off. 5. Select “Parental Controls”, from here you can RADIO AND R EAR SCREENS)
 On-Screen Remote — This will bring up the turn Parental Controls on or off and set up a
PIN for the controls using the remote. Front Radio Screen
on-screen remote to use with the system.
Users can select inputs for each rear screen from
 Back — This will let you go back a page.
PAIRING T HE R EMOTE (USING THE R EAR the front radio touchscreen by selecting the Rear
 Home — This will take you to the Home screen.
SCREENS) Seat Tab and choosing the desired content by
 Gear/Settings — This will let you access certain selecting “Launch Source” on the Screen 1 or
settings in the system. For more setting options, If a Rear Seat Entertainment remote needs to be Screen 2 tab.
select “Settings” within the on-screen Gear/ paired and was not paired during the start-up
Inputs available within Launch Source under
Settings menu. sequence, follow this procedure:
“Inputs” are “FireTV”, “HDMI”, and “USB”.
 Car — This will bring up the car menu. From here 1. Install batteries into the remote.
Rear Screens
you can adjust rear climate controls and the Are 2. Push the Gear/Settings button on the remote
To select inputs on the rear screen, scroll down on
We There Yet? app. or swipe up or down on the screen.
the Rear Seat Entertainment Home screen and
PARENTAL C ONTROLS (USING THE R EAR 3. Select the “Gear/Settings” icon on the screen. select your desired input under “Input”.
S CREENS) 4. Select “Settings” on the screen Inputs can also be selected from the Brand tab in
5. In the Settings, select “Controllers & the top menu. While in this tab, scroll down to
If parental controls were not set during the first Bluetooth® Devices”. “Inputs” for selection.
time start up of the system, they can be set by
following these steps: 6. From this menu, select “Add New Remote”. NOTE:
7. Follow the on-screen steps for remote pairing. The Brand tab naming in the top menu will depend
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the remote on the naming of the vehicle’s brand.
or swipe up or down on the screen.
2. Select the “Gear/Settings” icon on the screen.
3. Select “Settings” on the screen
MULTIMEDIA 239
REAR SEAT E NTERTAINMENT R EMOTE 1. Power Button — Turns the screen for the 11. Alexa — Push to activate Alexa.
selected channel on or off.
CONTROL 12. Menu — Push to access the FireTV menu.
2. 5-way Navigation Control — This control has
13. Seek Forward Button — Push and hold to
options by pressing the Circle button Up,
fast forward through the current audio track or
Down, Left, or Right to navigate on-screen for
video chapter. Push once to skip to the next
selections and pushing the center button to
track.
confirm selections.
3. Back — Push to exit out of menus or return to 14. Play/Pause Button ? — Begin/resume or
the previous screen. pause disc play.
4. Home — Push to return to the Amazon FireTV 15. Channel +/- — Push the up or down arrow
Built-in Home screen. button on the Channel button to browse
channels available in FireTV.
5. Seek Backward/Rewind Button — Push
16. Recent — Push to access recently viewed 5
and hold to fast rewind through the current
content on FireTV.
audio track or video chapter. Push once to
revert back to the previous track. 17. Gear/Settings — Push to bring up setting
options for FireTV.
6. Volume — Push the - button to decrease the
volume and + button to increase the volume. 18. Partner 2 — Push to navigate to Partner 2
Home screen.
7. Channel Guide — Push to access the channel
guide for the system. 19. Car Button — Push to activate the Car menu
8. Mute — Mutes headphone audio.
9. Amazon Prime — Push to navigate to Amazon
Prime Home screen.
Remote Control 10. Partner 1 — Push to navigate to Partner 1

Home screen.
240 MULTIMEDIA
Replacing The Remote Control Batteries Access Using Browse Media Turning on either of the rear screens will launch
Selecting Browse Media on the front radio screen Rear Seat Entertainment. By default, the rear
Each remote control requires two AAA batteries for
will give access to different media within Rear Seat screens will always launch in Amazon FireTV.
operation.
To replace the batteries:
Entertainment. Amazon FireTV Built-In
These options will be in the top menu of Browse The main source to access online streaming for
1. Locate the battery compartment on the back
Media and are listed below: Rear Seat Entertainment is Amazon FireTV Built-in.
of the remote, then slide the battery cover
downward.  FireTV — Selecting FireTV will give options to NOTE:
2. Remove the old batteries and follow battery view streaming options for categories like “For 4G Wi-Fi Hot Spot needs to be activated on the
recycling procedures for your area. Kids” and to select other streaming app options vehicle for streaming to be accessible. This can be
like “Prime Video”, etc. This option will be select- set up when Rear Seat Entertainment is turned on
3. Install new batteries, making sure to orient able on the left slider menu in “Browse Media”. for the first time from the rear screens. A mobile
them according to the polarity diagram shown While in “Browse Media” under FireTV, it will device can also be used as the Wi-Fi Hot Spot for
inside the battery compartment. display recent activity under “Recent”. This will the vehicle. A 4G source needs to be either an
4. Slide the battery compartment cover back on. display recent videos viewed from FireTV to in-vehicle Wi-Fi plan or through a 4G device.
recent downloads as well. To access Amazon FireTV Built-in on the front
REAR SEAT E NTERTAINMENT WITH  USB Video — Under “USB Videos”, videos will screen, select “Launch Source” on the front radio
AMAZON F IRETV B UILT- IN STREAMING appear that are options with a USB device rear seat screen. Then “FireTV Home” under the
connected to Rear Seat Entertainment. Inputs selection.
(U SING THE RADIO AND R EAR
 USB Music — Under “USB Music”, music will The top menu bar for Amazon FireTV will have the
SCREENS) appear that are options with a USB device options for “Home”, “Library”, “Brand”, “Live”, and
Access Using Launch Source connected to Rear Seat Entertainment. “Apps”.
To access streaming options with Rear Seat Access Using Rear Seat Entertainment Remote Below the top menu bar will be streaming options
Entertainment on the front screen, press the and Rear Screens linked to your Amazon Prime account like “Prime
Media tab located on the bottom menu bar. Then Rear passengers will be able to access Rear Seat Video”.
select the Rear Seat option located on the top Entertainment Streaming by pressing the “Amazon Depending on the streaming option selected in
menu bar. Then select “Launch Source”, and then Prime”, “Partner 1”, or “Partner 2” button on the FireTV, they will have a similar home page.
select under inputs “FireTV Home”. Rear Seat Entertainment remote. Selecting one of
those buttons on the remote will take you to the
home page for that respective streaming service.
MULTIMEDIA 241
The front radio screen offers some options: REAR SCREEN ENTERTAINMENT WITH  Arrival Time
 Power — This will turn Amazon FireTV Built-in on AMAZON F IRETV B UILT- IN APPS/  Time Remaining Until Destination Is Reached
or off.  Distance Remaining
GAMES (U SING THE REAR S CREENS)
 Screen 1 and Screen 2 Toggle — This toggles To access “Are We There Yet?” from the rear
between the Rear Screens (for use with front Apps and games can be accessed using Rear Seat screens, follow the steps below:
radio screen only). Entertainment.
1. Swipe up or down on one of the rear screens
 Collapse — While viewing on the front radio NOTE: and select the Car icon or push the “Car”
screen, this will collapse the screen to dash- No preloaded games are included with Rear Seat button on the Rear Seat Entertainment
board view. Entertainment. remote.
 Source Drawer — This will open the “Source To access Apps on the rear screen, turn on the
2. Select “Are We There Yet?” near the bottom of
Drawer” and the source logo will be displayed system and select “Apps” in the top menu. Within
the menu on the first page of options.
on the icon. the Apps menu you can purchase apps and games.
From here you can also select all the apps and 5
 Browse Media — This will open the “Browse
games that have been purchased.
REAR SEAT E NTERTAINMENT WITH
Media” pop-up.
AMAZON F IRETV B UILT- IN 3RD PARTY
 Back — This will let you go back the previous ARE W E T HERE Y ET?
page.
APPS — IF EQUIPPED
When a navigation route has been set from the
 FireTV Home — This will take you back to the Uconnect system, the second-row passengers can If available, Rear Seat Entertainment can work
Amazon FireTV home page. use “Are We There Yet?” for an animated screen with 3rd party apps downloaded from the Google
showing distance and time remaining on Play Store or the App Store.
 Menu — This will open the Amazon FireTV menu.
navigation routes, as well as the estimated time of VOXX EVOLVE
 Remote icon — This will display the on-screen
arrival with pop-up notifications. VOXX EVOLVE is a 3rd party app that can offer
remote.
Some screen information includes: more casting options for mobile devices with Rear
NOTE: Seat Entertainment.
Front screen viewing and watching can only be  Decrease Timing Between Notifications Button
done when the vehicle is in PARK.  Notifications ON/OFF Button
The rear screens will always launch with Amazon  Increase Timing Between Notifications Button
FireTV.
242 MULTIMEDIA
USING T HE VIDEO USB PORT HEADPHONES OPERATION

Plug in a USB drive or mass storage device and Rear Seat Entertainment does not come equipped
play your favorite music or movies. with headphones. Customers will need to provide
NOTE: their own wireless headphones that can be paired
To view USB media on the rear screens, insert a with the system using Bluetooth®. Customers can
USB drive into the port. The USB drive port is also use their own wired headphones and plug
located under the radio controls in the instrument them into a Headphone Jack located under one of
panel. the rear screens.
On the rear screen you can browse the content of Wireless Headphones Pairing
the USB device by going to the USB source in the Headphone Jack/HDMI/USB To pair wireless headphones with Rear Seat
inputs. Use the search feature to find your media Entertainment using the rear screens, follow these
1 — Headphone Jack (Headphone Output Only)
faster. steps:
2 — USB Port (Charge Only)
PLAY VIDEO G AMES 3 — HDMI Port
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the remote
Connect the video game console to the either
HDMI ports located behind the first row seat. NOTE:
Certain high-end video games may exceed the 3. Select “Settings” on the screen
power limit of the vehicle's Power Inverter 4. While in the Settings, select “Controllers &
Ú page 81. Bluetooth® Devices”.
5. Select “Other Bluetooth® Devices” and follow
the on-screen steps for pairing.
Multiple headphones can be paired with the

system at once.
MULTIMEDIA 243
REAR CLIMATE C ONTROLS

The Rear Climate Controls can also be controlled using Rear Seat Entertainment Ú page 67.
Rear Climate Controls can be accessed by using the Car menu. Swipe up or down on either rear screen and select the Car icon or press the “Car” button on the
Rear Seat Entertainment remote. Then select the Rear Climate Controls option.
Options within Rear Climate Controls are listed below:
Icon Description
Climate Control ON Button
ON
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls on.
Climate Control OFF Button
OFF
Press and release this button to turn the Rear Climate Controls off.
5
SYNC Button
SYNC
Pressing this button will sync both sides of the Rear Climate Controls.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the rear interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this function will cause the
system to switch between Manual mode and Automatic mode.
Rear Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons

Provides the rear passengers with independent temperature control. Press the button on the touchscreen to increase or decrease the
temperature. The temperature will get warmer as you move up toward the red arrow and colder as you move down toward the blue arrow.
244 MULTIMEDIA
Icon Description
Headliner
Mode Headliner Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the headliner. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of air. Moving the air vanes of
the outlets to one side will shut off the airflow.
Bi-Level Bi-Level Mode

Mode Air comes from both the headliner outlets and the floor outlets.
NOTE:
In many temperature positions, the Bi-Level mode is designed to provide cooler air out of the headliner outlets and warmer air from the floor
outlets.
Floor
Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets.
Blower Control
1,2,3, etc. Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the Climate system. There are seven blower speeds available. Adjusting
the blower will cause Automatic mode to switch to Manual operation.
MULTIMEDIA 245
LEGAL NOTICE Off-Road Pages has the following selectable pages:  Status of Hill Descent
 Vehicle Dynamics  Hill Descent Control or Selec-Speed Control
To access Legal and Compliance information
 Accessory Gauges Selected Speed in MPH (km/h).
about Rear Seat Entertainment from the rear
screens, follow these steps:  Pitch & Roll  Current Terrain Mode
1. Push the Gear/Settings button on the remote  Selec-Terrain — If Equipped
 Suspension — If Equipped
 Forward Facing Camera — If Equipped
3. Select “Settings” on the screen
NOTE:
4. While in the Settings menu, select “Device & With a Connected Services subscription, you can
Software”. record your Off-Road data and send it directly to
5. From this menu, select “Legal Notices”. From the mobile app. Press the Record button to begin.
this menu you an also select “Terms of Use”
5
and “Privacy”.
OFF-R OAD P AGES S TATUS BAR
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along the
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in each of
the five selectable page options. It provides Status Bar
Your vehicle may be equipped with Off-Road continually updating information for the following
Pages, which provides the vehicle status items: 1 — Transfer Case Status
information while operating on off-road conditions. 2 — Current Latitude/Longitude
It supplies information relating to the vehicle ride  Current Transfer Case Status
3 — Current Altitude
height, the status of the transfer case, the pitch  Current Selec-Terrain mode
and roll of the vehicle, and the active Selec-Terrain 4 — Hill Descent Control
 Current Latitude/Longitude
mode. 5 — Current Terrain Mode
 Current Altitude of the vehicle
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Off Road
button on the touchscreen from the Vehicle menu,
and then press “Launch Off-Road”.
246 MULTIMEDIA
VEHICLE DYNAMICS ACCESSORY G AUGES PITCH & ROLL

The Vehicle Dynamics page displays information The Accessory Gauges page displays the current The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s current
concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain. status of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil pitch (angle up and down) and roll (angle side to
The following information is displayed: Temperature, Oil Pressure, Transmission side) in degrees. The Pitch & Roll gauges provide a
Temperature, and Battery Voltage. visualization of the current vehicle angle.
 Steering angle in degrees
 Status of Transfer Case
 Status of the Rear Axle Locker — If Equipped
Accessory Gauges Menu Pitch & Roll Menu

1 — Coolant Temperature 1 — Current Pitch
2 — Oil Temperature 2 — Current Roll
Vehicle Dynamics Menu
3 — Oil Pressure
1 — Vehicle Dynamics 4 — Transmission Temperature
2 — Steering Angle 5 — Battery Voltage
3 — Rear Axle Status
MULTIMEDIA 247
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF E QUIPPED SUSPENSION — IF E QUIPPED

The Selec-Terrain page displays the current The Suspension page displays information
Selec-Terrain mode through a high resolution concerning the vehicle’s suspension.
image. Adjusting the Selec-Terrain mode will alter The following information is displayed:
the image on the screen. The vehicle must be in
the ON/RUN position to display Selec-Terrain  Wheel Articulation
information.  Current Ride Height Status
The selectable modes are as follows:  Off-Road 2
 Rock — Vehicle Must Be In 4WD Low  Off-Road 1
 Sand/Mud  Normal
 Snow  Aero Suspension Menu
 Auto — Default  Entry/Exit
5
1 — Wheel Articulation
 Sport NOTE: 2 — Current Ride Height
NOTE: The wheel articulation will be represented by a
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar will also display the yellow color in the Wheel Articulation. If Ride Height
current Selec-Terrain mode. is adjusted, the Ride Height indicator on the screen
will switch to the appropriate height and the Wheel
Articulation will show the movement and change in
height.
248 MULTIMEDIA
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES REGULATORY AND SAFETY The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being I NFORMATION level of energy emitted is far less than the
on in your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy US/CANADA electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
performance from your radio. This condition may devices such as mobile phones. However, the use
be lessened or eliminated by repositioning the Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
of wireless radios may be restricted in some
mobile phone within the vehicle. This condition is The radiated output power of the internal wireless situations or environments, such as aboard
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance radio is far below the FCC and IC radio frequency airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you are
does not satisfactorily improve from repositioning exposure limits. Nevertheless, the wireless radio encouraged to ask for authorization before turning
the mobile phone, it is recommended that the will be used in such a manner that the radio is 8 in on the wireless radio Ú page 410.
volume be turned down or off during mobile phone (20 cm) or further from the human body.
operation when not using the Uconnect system. The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
249
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES The ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modification WARNING!
ANTI-L OCK BRAKE S YSTEM (ABS) may result in degraded ABS performance.  The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and WARNING! following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
brake performance under most braking conditions. planing.
 The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
The system automatically prevents wheel lock and
equipment that may be susceptible to interfer-  The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
enhances vehicle control during braking.
ence caused by improperly installed or high must never be exploited in a reckless or
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that output radio transmitting equipment. This dangerous manner that could jeopardize the
the ABS is working properly each time the vehicle interference can cause possible loss of user’s safety or the safety of others.
is started and driven. During this self-check, you anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
may hear a slight clicking sound as well as some such equipment should be performed by qual-
related motor noises. ified professionals. Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning 6
The ABS is activated during braking when the Light
 Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
system detects one or more wheels are beginning their effectiveness and may lead to a collision. The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when the
to lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel, Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and may
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic stops Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you stay on for as long as four seconds.
may increase the likelihood of ABS activation(s). need to slow down or stop. If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes on
You also may experience the following normal while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion
 The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
characteristics when the ABS activates: of the brake system is not functioning and that
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
 ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may service is required. However, the conventional
increase braking or steering efficiency beyond
continue to hear for a short time after the stop) brake system will continue to operate normally if
that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
the ABS Warning Light is on.
 Brake pedal pulsations brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
 A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the (Continued)
stop
250 SAFETY
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system System Intervention If the driver accepts the suggestion provided by the
should be serviced as soon as possible to restore system by pushing the “OK” button on the left side
Using feedback obtained from the driver’s steering
the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS of the steering wheel, the message will disappear
patterns, any buttons/switches that are pressed,
Warning Light does not come on when the ignition from the display.
and from the front camera, the system implements
is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light If the driver does not acknowledge the warning, it
two operating logics:
repaired as soon as possible. will be displayed for 60 seconds and then
 The first operating logic takes the driving style
DROWSY D RIVER D ETECTION (DDD) — disappear.
into account, observing the road and detecting
I F EQUIPPED to what extent the driver can continue driving NOTE:
with few lane crossing events. In the event of a DDD system failure, a dedicated
DDD detects when the driver is feeling fatigued message will appear in the instrument cluster
 The second operating logic measures the time
and warns the driver to pull over and take a break. display.
spent behind the wheel with the vehicle speed
To Activate/Deactivate above 40 mph (60 km/h) and below 110 mph
DDD can be activated and deactivated through the (180 km/h).
Uconnect system by selecting the following in NOTE:
order: If the conditions described above are not detected
1. “Safety & Driving Assistance” continuously during the entire driving period, the
“Drowsy Driver” message may be displayed later
2. “Drowsy Driver Detection”
than two or three hours. If the driving style indi-
cates that the driver is unable to follow the road
WARNING! trajectory and respect the horizontal lane
markings, the red symbol will appear on the
The DDD system is an aid for driving and does
instrument cluster display to suggest that the
not relieve the driver of the responsibility of DDD Warning Message
driver should stop for a break. An audible signal
driving the vehicle. If you experience fatigue
will also sound.
while driving, pull over safely for a break without
waiting for the DDD to intervene. Only return to
the road when you are in the right physical and
mental condition to prevent endangering
yourself and other drivers.
SAFETY 251
REAR SEAT R EMINDER ALERT (RSRA) Your vehicle may also be equipped with Dynamic
WARNING!
Steering Torque (DST), Rain Brake Support (RBS),
RSRA will consider the presence of an object in the Ready Alert Braking (RAB), and Trailer Sway The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent
rear seat when a rear entry/exit door is opened at Control (TSC). the natural laws of physics from acting on the
the beginning of each key cycle. To activate, the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded
rear door must be open for more than one second Brake Assist System (BAS)
by prevailing road conditions. BAS cannot
and the vehicle must be placed in the ON/RUN The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s prevent collisions, including those resulting from
position within 10 minutes. When the potential braking capability during emergency braking excessive speed in turns, driving on very slippery
presence of an object is determined and/or maneuvers. The system detects an emergency surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of a
otherwise inferred, a message will appear in the braking situation by sensing the rate and amount BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
instrument cluster display reminding driver to of brake application and then applies optimum a reckless or dangerous manner, which could
check the rear seat(s) immediately after key off pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of
accompanied by an alert upon exiting the vehicle. braking distances. The BAS complements the others.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC) very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To
SYSTEM receive the benefit of the system, you must apply Brake System Warning Light
continuous braking pressure during the stopping The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
6
If applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for sequence (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not
additional information. when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode
reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced EBC longer desired. Once the brake pedal is released,
system. This system includes the Anti-Lock Brake If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
the BAS is deactivated.
System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), system is not functioning properly and that
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Electronic immediate service is required. If the Brake System
Stability Control (ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Warning Light does not come on when the ignition
Traction Control System (TCS). These systems work is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have the light
together to enhance both vehicle stability and repaired as soon as possible.
control in various driving conditions.
252 SAFETY
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the
WARNING! vehicle path intended by the driver and compares
EBD manages the distribution of the braking
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road it to the actual path of the vehicle. When the actual
torque between the front and rear axles by limiting
conditions and driving conditions, influence the path does not match the intended path, ESC
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to
chance that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to
prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle
cannot prevent all wheel lift or rollovers, assist in counteracting the oversteer or understeer
instability, and to prevent the rear axle from
especially those that involve leaving the roadway condition.
entering ABS before the front axle.
or striking objects or other vehicles. The The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) capabilities of an ERM-equipped vehicle must located in the instrument cluster will start to flash
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous as soon as the ESC system becomes active. The
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and manner which could jeopardize the user's safety ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines or the safety of others. flashes when the Traction Control System (TCS) is
that the rate of change of the steering wheel angle active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially Light begins to flash during acceleration, ease up
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate on the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
brake and may also reduce engine power to lessen ESC enhances directional control and stability of possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and driving
the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM can only the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC to the prevailing road conditions.
reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring during corrects for oversteering or understeering of the
severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it cannot vehicle by applying the brake of the appropriate
prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the above
road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking conditions. Engine power may also be reduced to
objects or other vehicles. help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
NOTE:  Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
ERM is disabled any time the ESC is in “Full Off” than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
mode (if equipped). See Ú page 252 for a  Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
complete explanation of the available ESC modes. than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
SAFETY 253
Partial Off
WARNING! WARNING!
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot  Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
prevent the natural laws of physics from maintain your vehicle, may change the thresholds for activation, which allows for more
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and wheel spin than normally allowed.
traction afforded by prevailing road condi- may negatively affect the performance of the
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push
tions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including ESC system. Changes to the steering system,
the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF Indicator
those resulting from excessive speed in turns, suspension, braking system, tire type and size
Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC on again,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydro- or wheel size may adversely affect ESC perfor-
momentarily push the ESC OFF button and the ESC
planing. ESC also cannot prevent accidents mance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn
OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
resulting from loss of vehicle control due to tires may also degrade ESC performance. Any
inappropriate driver input for the conditions. vehicle modification or poor vehicle mainte- NOTE:
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can nance that reduces the effectiveness of the For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, the
prevent accidents. The capabilities of an ESC ESC system can increase the risk of loss of push and release of the button will toggle the ESC
equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal modes. Multiple attempts may be required to
reckless or dangerous manner which could injury and death. return to "ESC On" mode.
6
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others. WARNING!
ESC Operating Modes
(Continued)  When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS function-
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ality of ESC (except for the limited slip feature
ESC system may have multiple operating modes. described in the TCS section) has been
ESC On disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode,
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system the engine power reduction feature of TCS is
will be in this mode. This mode should be used for disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability
most driving conditions. Alternate ESC modes offered by the ESC system is reduced.
should only be used for specific reasons as noted  Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
in the following paragraphs. the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
254 SAFETY
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates the HDC Has Three States:
And ESC OFF Indicator Light customer has elected to have the 1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a activate).
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator reduced mode.
Light in the instrument cluster will come 2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/ NOTE: activation conditions are not met, or driver is
RUN mode. It should go out with the  The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light actively overriding with brake or throttle
engine running. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come on application).
Indicator Light comes on continuously with the momentarily each time the ignition is placed in 3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
engine running, a malfunction has been detected the ON/RUN mode. controlling vehicle speed).
in the ESC system. If this light remains on after  Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been mode, the ESC system will be on even if it was Enabling HDC
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater turned off previously. HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the
than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer
 The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking following conditions must also be met to enable
as soon as possible to have the problem
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the HDC:
diagnosed and corrected.
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive  The driveline is in 4WD Low.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light following the maneuver that caused the ESC
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and  The vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
activation.
the ESC system becomes active. The ESC  The parking brake is released.
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also flashes Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
 The driver door is closed.
when TCS is active. If the ESC Activation/ HDC is intended for low speed off-road
Malfunction Indicator Light begins to flash during driving while in 4WD Low. HDC maintains Activating HDC
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and apply vehicle speed while descending hills Once HDC is enabled it will activate automatically
as little throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your during various driving situations. HDC if driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions. controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the set speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and
brakes. can be adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The
following summarizes the HDC set speeds:
SAFETY 255
HDC Target Set Speeds Deactivating HDC Feedback To The Driver

 P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
not activate. of the following conditions occur: HDC switch has an LED icon, which offers feedback
 R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)  The driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle to the driver about the state HDC is in.
 N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) or brake application.  The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate
 The vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) and remain on solid when HDC is enabled or
 D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) activated. This is the normal operating condition
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h) for HDC.
 The vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h) magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill  The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h) grade. several seconds, then extinguish when the
driver pushes the HDC switch but enable condi-
 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)  The vehicle is shifted to PARK. tions are not met.
 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h) Disabling HDC  The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for
 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h) HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the several seconds, then extinguish when HDC
 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h) following conditions occur: disables due to excess speed. 6
 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)  The driver pushes the HDC switch. 
NOTE:  The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.  The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC  The parking brake is applied. HDC deactivates due to overheated brakes. The
target speed selection, but will not affect the gear flashing will stop and HDC will activate again
 The driver door opens.
chosen by the transmission. When actively once the brakes have cooled sufficiently.
controlling HDC the transmission will shift appro-  The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
priately for the driver-selected set speed and corre- (32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds. WARNING!
sponding driving conditions.  The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
Driver Override (64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately). controlling vehicle speed when descending hills.
The driver may override HDC activation with  HDC detects excessive brake temperature. The driver must remain attentive to the driving
throttle or brake application at any time. conditions and is responsible for maintaining a
safe vehicle speed.
256 SAFETY
Hill Start Assist (HSA) Towing With HSA

WARNING!
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver There may be situations where the Hill Start back while towing a trailer.
releases the brake while stopped on an incline, Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for a may occur, such as on minor hills or with a WARNING!
short period. If the driver does not apply the loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA is
not a substitute for active driving involvement. It  If you use a trailer brake controller with your
throttle before this time expires, the system will
is always the driver’s responsibility to be trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
attentive to distance to other vehicles, people, deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there
down the hill as normal.
and objects, and most importantly brake may not be enough brake pressure to hold
The following conditions must be met in order for operation to ensure safe operation of the vehicle both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill when
HSA to activate: under all road conditions. Your complete the brake pedal is released. In order to avoid
 The feature must be enabled. attention is always required while driving to rolling down an incline while resuming accel-
maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to eration, manually activate the trailer brake or
 The vehicle must be stopped.
follow these warnings can result in a collision or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to
 The parking brake must be off. releasing the brake pedal.
 The driver door must be closed.  HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
 The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade. Disabling And Enabling HSA parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle.
 The gear selection must match vehicle uphill Also, be certain to place the transmission in
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To PARK.
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward change the current setting, proceed as follows:
gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE (R)  Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
gear).  If disabling HSA using your instrument cluster
collision or serious personal injury.
display, see Ú page 99 for further information.
 HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward
gears. The system will not activate if the trans-  If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, see
mission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). For vehi- Ú page 204 for further information.
cles equipped with a manual transmission, if
the clutch is pressed, HSA will remain active.
SAFETY 257
Rain Brake Support (RBS) spinning wheel. This will allow more engine power
to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
may remain enabled even if TCS and Electronic BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM)
conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount
Stability Control (ESC) are in reduced modes.
of brake pressure to remove any water buildup on
BSM system uses two radar sensors, located
the front brake rotors. It functions when the Trailer Sway Control (TSC) inside the rear fascia/bumper, to detect highway
windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When RBS TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks,
is active, there is no notification to the driver and excessively swaying trailer and will take the motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot zones
no driver interaction is required. appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway. from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB) TSC will become active automatically once an
excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full
braking during emergency braking situations. It NOTE:
anticipates when an emergency braking situation TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying. Always
may occur by monitoring how fast the throttle is use caution when towing a trailer and follow the
released by the driver. The Electronic Brake trailer tongue weight recommendations
Controller (EBC) will prepare the brake system for Ú page 187. 6
a panic stop. When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Traction Control System (TCS) Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin of brakes being applied to individual wheels to
each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is Rear Detection Zones
detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to the disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce engine power to When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning Light
Off” mode. will momentarily illuminate in both outside
provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A
feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD) rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
WARNING! system is operational. The BSM system sensors
functions similarly to a limited slip differential and
controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If one If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear.
wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
other, the system will apply the brake of the adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.
258 SAFETY
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one  The BSM system may experience dropouts The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in the
lane in width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft (blinking on and off) of the side mirror warning detection zones by illuminating the BSM warning
(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the side of the indicator lamps when a motorcycle or any small light located in the outside mirrors. In addition,
vehicle, near the B-pillar, and extends object remains at the side of the vehicle for when the turn signal is activated during the alert on
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear fascia/ extended periods of time (more than a couple of the side of the vehicle corresponding to the alert,
bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system monitors seconds). an audible (chime) alert can be heard. During this
the detection zones on both sides of the vehicle The area on the rear fascia/bumper where the audible (chime) alert, the radio volume will be
when the vehicle speed reaches approximately radar sensors are located must remain free of reduced Ú page 261.
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the
of vehicles in these areas. BSM will alert earlier on BSM system can function properly. Do not block
faster-approaching vehicles — up to 15 mph the area of the rear fascia/bumper where the
(24 km/h) difference. radar sensors are located with foreign objects
NOTE: (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
 The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles (greater
then 15 mph) that are outside the detection
zones.
 The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer. There- BSM Warning Light
fore, visually verify the adjacent lane is clear for
both your vehicle and trailer before making a The BSM system monitors the detection zone from
lane change. If the trailer or other object (i.e., three different entry points (Side, Rear, Front)
bicycle, sports equipment) extends beyond the while driving to see if an alert is necessary. The
side of your vehicle, this may result in random BSM system will issue an alert during these types
Sensor Location (Left Side Shown) of zone entries.
false detections on the trailer, and false chimes
when the turn signal is used Ú page 204.
SAFETY 259
Entering From The Side

Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes from
either side of the vehicle.
Rear Monitoring Overtaking/Approaching

Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
Side Monitoring speed of less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the
vehicle remains in the blind spot for approximately 6
Entering From The Rear 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be illuminated.
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle on If the difference in speed between the two vehicles
either side and enter the rear detection zone with is greater than 15 mph (24 km/h), the warning
a relative speed of less than 30 mph (48 km/h). light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Passing
260 SAFETY
The BSM system is designed not to issue an alert

on stationary objects such as guardrails, posts, WARNING!
walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occasionally The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an aid
the system may alert on such objects. This is to help detect objects in the blind spot zones.
normal operation and your vehicle does not require The BSM system is not designed to detect
service. pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Even if your
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that vehicle is equipped with the BSM system, always
are traveling in the opposite direction of the vehicle check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your
in adjacent lanes Ú page 410. shoulder, and use your turn signal before
changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death. RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
Rear Cross Path (RCP) sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing out toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
of parking spaces where their vision of oncoming speed of approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), to objects
vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and moving a maximum of approximately 20 mph
cautiously out of the parking space until the rear (32 km/h), such as in parking lot situations.
end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will NOTE:
then have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can be
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver. obscured by vehicles parked on either side. If the
Opposing Traffic
sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
SAFETY 261
When RCP is on (Blind Spot Lights Only or Blind Cross Path (RCP) mode, the system will respond Blind Spot Alert Off
Spot Lights/Chimes) and the vehicle is in with both visual and audible alerts when a When the BSM system is turned off, there will be
REVERSE, the driver is alerted using both the detected object is present. Whenever an audible no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM or
visual and audible alarms, including reducing the alert is requested, the radio is muted. RCP systems.
radio volume. Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime NOTE:
WARNING! When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime The BSM system will store the current operating
mode, the BSM system will provide a visual alert in mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time the
Rear Cross Path (RCP) Detection is not a back up the appropriate side view mirror based on a vehicle is started, the previously stored mode will
aid system. It is intended to be used to help a detected object. If the turn signal is then activated, be recalled and used.
driver detect a vehicle in a parking lot situation. and it corresponds to an alert present on that side
Drivers must be careful when backing up, even of the vehicle, an audible chime will also be FORWARD C OLLISION WARNING (FCW)
when using RCP. Always check carefully behind sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected WITH MITIGATION
your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to object are present on the same side at the same
check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, time, both the visual and audible alerts will be The FCW with Mitigation system provides the driver
obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. issued. In addition to the audible alert the radio (if with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or on) will also be muted. instrument cluster display), and may apply a 6
death. limited braking to warn the driver when it detects a
NOTE: potential frontal collision. The warnings and limited
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the braking are intended to provide the driver with
Blind Spot Modes BSM system, the radio is also muted. enough time to react, avoid or mitigate the
Three selectable modes of operation are available When the system is in RCP, the system shall potential collision.
in the Uconnect system Ú page 204. respond with both visual and audible alerts when a NOTE:
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only detected object is present. Whenever an audible
FCW monitors the information from the forward
alert is requested, the radio is also muted. Turn/
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the BSM looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
hazard signal status is ignored; the RCP state
system will provide a visual alert in the appropriate Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
always requests the chime.
side view mirror based on a detected object. forward collision. When the system determines
However, when the system is operating in Rear that a forward collision is probable, the driver will
be provided with audible and visual warnings and
may provide a brake jerk warning.
262 SAFETY
If the driver does not take action based upon these When the system determines a collision with the
progressive warnings, then the system will provide vehicle in front of you is no longer probable, the WARNING!
a limited level of active braking to help slow the warning message will be deactivated Ú page 410. Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not intended
vehicle and mitigate the potential forward collision. NOTE: to avoid a collision on its own, nor can FCW
If the driver reacts to the warnings by braking and detect every type of potential collision. The driver
 The minimum speed for FCW activation is
the system determines that the driver intends to has the responsibility to avoid a collision by
avoid the collision by braking but has not applied 3 mph (5 km/h).
controlling the vehicle via braking and steering.
sufficient brake force, the system will compensate  The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects Failure to follow this warning could lead to
and provide additional brake force as required. other than vehicles, such as guardrails or sign serious injury or death.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event posts based on the course prediction. This is
begins at a speed below 39 mph (62 km/h), the expected and is a part of normal FCW activation
and functionality. FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
system may provide maximum braking to mitigate
the potential forward collision. If the Forward  It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To prevent The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status are
Collision Warning with Mitigation event stops the such misuse of the system, after four Active programmable through the Uconnect system
vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle Braking events within an ignition cycle, the Ú page 204.
at a standstill for two seconds and then release the Active Braking portion of FCW will be deacti- NOTE:
brakes. vated until the next ignition cycle.  The default sensitivity of FCW is the “Medium”
 The FCW system is intended for on-road use setting and the system status is “Warning &
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW Braking”. This allows the system to warn the
system should be deactivated to prevent unnec- driver of a possible collision with the vehicle in
essary warnings to the surroundings. If the front using audible/visual warnings and it
vehicle enters 4WD Low, the FCW system will be applies autonomous braking.
automatically deactivated.  Changing the FCW status to the “Far” setting
allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front using
an audible/visual warning when the latter is at a
farther distance than the “Medium” setting. This
provides the most reaction time to avoid a
FCW Message
possible collision.
SAFETY 263
 Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting FCW Limited Warning
allows the system to warn the driver of a
If the instrument cluster displays “Automatic
possible collision with the vehicle in front when
Emergency Braking (AEB) Limited Service
the distance between the vehicle in the front is
Required” or “Limited Functionality Clean Front
much closer. This setting provides less reaction
Windshield” momentarily, there may be a
time than the “Far” and “Medium” settings,
condition that limits FCW functionality. Although
which allows for a more dynamic driving experi-
the vehicle is still drivable under normal
ence.
conditions, the active braking may not be fully
NOTE: available. Once the condition that limited the
 Changing the FCW status to “Only Warning” system performance is no longer present, the
prevents the system from providing limited system will return to its full performance state. If PEB Message
active braking, or additional brake support if the the problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
If a PEB event begins at a speed below 39 mph
driver is not braking adequately in the event of Service FCW Warning (62 km/h), the system may provide maximum
a potential frontal collision, but maintains the braking to mitigate the potential collision with a
audible and visual warnings. If the system turns off, the instrument cluster
displays “AEB Unavailable Service Required.” pedestrian/cyclist. If the PEB event stops the
 Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the vehicle completely, the system will hold the vehicle
6
AEB Unavailable Service Required indicates there
system from providing autonomous braking, or at a standstill for two seconds and then release the
is an internal system fault. Although the vehicle is
additional brake support if the driver is not brakes. When the system determines a collision
still drivable under normal conditions, have the
braking adequately in the event of a potential with the pedestrian/cyclist in front of you is no
system checked by an authorized dealer.
frontal collision. longer probable, the warning message will be
 The system will retain the last setting selected Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) — deactivated.
by the driver after ignition shut down. If Equipped The minimum speed for PEB activation is 3 mph
 FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such as PEB is a subsystem of the Forward Collision (5 km/h).
overhead objects, ground reflections, objects Warning (FCW) system which provides the driver
not in the path of the vehicle, stationary objects with audible warnings and visual warnings, in the
that are far away, oncoming traffic, or leading instrument cluster display. It may apply limited
vehicles with the same or higher rate of speed. automatic braking when it detects a potential
frontal collision with a pedestrian.
 FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the unavail-
able screens.
264 SAFETY
WARNING!
NOTE: TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
The PEB system will retain the last setting selected
Pedestrian Emergency Braking (PEB) is not by the driver after ignition shut down. The system
(TPMS)
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor can will not reset to the default setting when the The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
PEB detect every type of potential collision with vehicle is restarted. based on the vehicle recommended cold tire
a pedestrian. The driver has the responsibility to Intersection Collision Assist (ICA) — pressure Ú page 410.
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
If Equipped The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
braking and steering. Failure to follow this about 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This
warning could lead to serious injury or death. ICA uses three front radar sensors located in the
means that when the outside temperature
front fascia/bumper, to detect oncoming vehicles
decreases, the tire pressure will decrease. Tire
from the front or side when driving through an
Turning PEB On Or Off pressure should always be set based on cold
intersection. When the system determines that a
NOTE: inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire
collision is probable when turning across
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for
The default status of PEB is “On.” This allows the oncoming traffic, the system will attempt to
at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile
system to warn you of a possible frontal collision mitigate a possible collision by decelerating the
(1.6 km) after a three-hour period. The tire
with the pedestrian. vehicle. When the system determines that a
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is driven
The PEB button is located in the Uconnect display collision with a crossing vehicle is probable, the
— this is normal and there should be no
in the Control settings Ú page 204. system may apply additional braking to
adjustment for this increased pressure.
supplement the driver braking input to attempt to
To turn the PEB system off, push the Pedestrian For information on how to properly inflate the
mitigate a possible collision. The system will also
Emergency Braking button. vehicle’s tires, see Ú page 378.
provide audible warnings and visual warnings
To turn the PEB system back on, push the Warning (shown in the instrument cluster). If the driver The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
Active Braking button. determines acceleration is needed to avoid a if the tire pressure falls below the low pressure
Changing the PEB status to “Off” deactivates the collision, when the accelerator is pressed ICA will warning threshold for any reason, including low
system, so no warning or active braking will be cancel. temperature effects, or natural pressure loss
available in case of a possible frontal collision with through the tire.
the pedestrian/cyclist.
SAFETY 265
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to
tire pressure as long as the condition exists, and rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the CAUTION!
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or above TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this situation,  After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
recommended cold tire pressure. Once the low tire the TPMS Warning Light will turn off only after the always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
pressure warning has been illuminated, the tire tires have been inflated to the vehicle’s prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
pressure must be increased to the recommended recommended cold tire pressure value. valve stem, which could damage the Tire Pres-
cold tire pressure in order for the TPMS Warning sure Monitoring System sensor.
Light to be turned off. CAUTION!
NOTE:  The TPMS has been optimized for the original NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures  The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire
to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa) and warnings have been established for the care and maintenance, or to provide warning of
above the recommended cold placard pressure in tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesir- a tire failure or condition.
order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off. able system operation or sensor damage may
result when using replacement equipment  The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure
The system will automatically update and the
that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. gauge while adjusting your tire pressure, unless
TPMS Warning Light will extinguish once the
equipped with Tire Fill Alert.
updated tire pressures have been received. The The TPMS sensor is not designed for use on 6
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a  Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this poor overall system performance or sensor causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
information. damage. Customers are encouraged to use failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel effi-
OEM wheels to ensure proper TPMS feature ciency and tire tread life, and may affect the
For example, your vehicle has a recommended
operation. vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
cold (parked for more than three hours) tire
pressure of 36 psi (248 kPa). If the ambient  Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the  The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
temperature is 68°F (20°C) and the measured tire Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility
pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a temperature drop sensor to become inoperable. After using an to maintain correct tire pressure using an accu-
to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire pressure to aftermarket tire sealant it is recommended rate tire gauge, even if underinflation has not
approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure that you take your vehicle to an authorized reached the level to trigger illumination of the
is sufficiently low enough to turn on the TPMS dealership to have your sensor function TPMS Warning Light.
Warning Light. checked.  Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire
(Continued) pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the actual
tire pressure in the tire.
266 SAFETY
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) uses  Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
wireless technology with wheel rim-mounted messages, which display in the instrument active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as
electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. cluster, and a graphic displaying tire pressures possible, and inflate the low tire(s) that is in a
Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the  TPMS Warning Light different color on the graphic display to the
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the vehicle’s recommended cold tire pressure
receiver module. Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low displayed in the “Inflate to XX” message.
Pressure Warnings NOTE:
The TPMS Warning Light will illuminate in When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may need
the instrument cluster, and an audible to be increased up to an additional 4 psi (28 kPa)
chime will be activated, when one or above the recommended cold placard pressure in
more of the four active road tire order to turn the TPMS Warning Light off.
pressures are low. In addition, the instrument The system will automatically update, the graphic
cluster will display an "Inflate to XX" message and display of the pressure value(s) will return to its
a graphic display of the pressure value(s) with the original color and the TPMS Warning Light will
low tire(s) in a different color Ú page 99. extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have
NOTE: been received. The system will automatically
Your system can be set to display pressure units in update the graphic display of the pressure value(s)
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display and will return to its original color. The TPMS
PSI, BAR, or kPa.
NOTE: Warning Light will extinguish once the updated tire
It is particularly important for you to regularly check pressure(s) have been received in the case when
the tire pressure in all of your tires and to maintain the ignition is ON. In the case when the ignition is
the proper pressure. OFF, the ignition on the vehicle has to be turned ON
and may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
consists of the following components:
information for the pressure value(s) to be
 Receiver module updated.
 Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System sensors
Low Tire Pressure Monitoring System Display

SAFETY 267
Service TPMS Warning NOTE: In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
A TPMS sensor is not offered on any size spare tire. Warning Light will turn off and the graphic in the
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
In either option of having a full size spare equipped instrument cluster display will display a new
will flash on and off for 75 seconds, and remain on
or not, the tire pressure is not monitored or pressure value instead of dashes (--), as long as no
solid when a system fault is detected. The system
displayed on the cluster for the corresponding tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
fault will also sound a chime. The instrument
spare tire location. If you install the spare tire in limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle
cluster display will display a “SERVICE TPM
place of a road tire that has a pressure below the may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds.
low-pressure warning limit, upon the next ignition 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
This message is then followed by a graphic display,
switch cycle, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System this information.
with “--“ in place of the pressure value(s),
indicating which Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will remain on, a chime will sound, TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
sensor(s) is not being received. and the instrument cluster display will still display
a pressure value in the different color graphic The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) can
If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will display and an “Inflate to XX” message will be be deactivated by replacing all four wheel and tire
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If the displayed. After driving the vehicle for up to assemblies (road tires) with wheel and tire
system fault no longer exists, the Tire Pressure 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire assemblies that do not have TPMS sensors, such
Monitoring System Warning Light will no longer Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will as when installing winter wheel and tire
flash, the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will assemblies on your vehicle. 6
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
not be present, and a pressure value will be solid. In addition, the instrument cluster display To deactivate the TPMS, first, replace all four wheel
displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not
occur by any of the following: five seconds and then display dashes (--) in place equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring System
 Jamming due to electronic devices or driving of the pressure value. For each subsequent sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes
next to facilities emitting the same Radio ignition switch cycle, a chime will sound, the Tire above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime,
Frequencies as the TPMS sensors. Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
 Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or wheel flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on 75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument
housings. solid, and the instrument cluster display will cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM”
display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for five message and then display dashes (--) in place of
 Using tire chains on the vehicle. seconds and then display dashes (--) in place of the the pressure values.
 Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS pressure value. Once you repair or replace the
sensors. original road tire, and reinstall it on the vehicle in
place of the spare tire, the TPMS will update
automatically.
268 SAFETY
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS NOTE: When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire
will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM  The Tire Fill Alert system will only support pressure display screen will be displayed in the
SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster but inflating or deflating one tire at a time. The user instrument cluster.
dashes (--) will remain in place of the pressure is required to wait until the hazard lights STOP Operation:
values. flashing or 26-30 seconds after the desired  The horn will chirp once to let the user know
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and pressure is achieved in one wheel before when to stop filling the tire, when it reaches
tire assemblies (road tires) with tires equipped with switching to another. recommended pressure.
TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to  The Tire Fill Alert feature cannot be entered if an
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS  The horn will chirp three times if the tire is over-
existing TPMS fault is set to “active” or if the filled and will continue to chirp every five
will chime, the TPMS Warning Light will flash on system is in deactivation mode (if equipped).
and off for 75 seconds and then turn off. The seconds if the user continues to inflate the tire.
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE TPM The system will be activated when the system  The horn will chirp once again when enough air
SYSTEM” message and then display pressure detects an increase in tire pressure while filling the is let out to reach proper inflation level.
values in place of the dashes. On the next ignition tire. The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode with
the transmission in PARK for vehicles equipped  The horn will also chirp three times if the tire is
cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message will no then underinflated and will continue to chirp
longer be displayed as long as no system fault with an automatic transmission. For vehicles
equipped with a manual transmission, the parking every five seconds if the user continues to
exists. deflate the tire.
brake must be applied.
Tire Fill Alert Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) —
NOTE:
This feature notifies the user when the placard tire It is not required to have the engine running to If Equipped
pressure is attained while inflating or deflating the enter Tire Fill Alert mode. The Selectable Tire Fill Alert (STFA) system is an
tire.
The hazard lamps will come on to confirm the optional feature that is included as part of the
The customer may choose to disable or enable the vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode. If the hazard lamps normal Tire Fill Alert system. The system is
Tire Fill Alert feature in the apps menu of the do not come on while inflating the tire, the Tire designed to allow you to select a pressure to inflate
Uconnect system. Pressure Monitoring System sensor may be in an or deflate the vehicle's front and rear axle tires to,
inoperative position, preventing the TPMS sensor and to provide feedback while inflating or deflating
signal from being received. In this case, the vehicle the vehicle's tires.
may need to be moved slightly forward or
backward.
SAFETY 269
In the Selectable Tire Fill Alert application, which is brake engaged in vehicles with a manual OCCUPANT R ESTRAINT S YSTEMS
located in the apps menu of the Uconnect system, transmission. The hazard lamps will come on to
you will be able to select a pressure setting for both confirm the vehicle is in Tire Fill Alert mode. FEATURES
the front and rear axle tire pressures by scrolling When Tire Fill Alert mode is entered, the tire  Seat Belt Systems
through a pressure range from ≥15 psi to XX in pressure screen will be displayed in the instrument  Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags
1 psi increments for each axle setting. cluster. If the hazard lamps do not come on while
 Child Restraints
XX = the vehicle's cold placard pressure values for inflating or deflating the tire, the Tire Pressure
the front and rear axles as shown on the vehicle Monitoring System sensor may be in an Some of the safety features described in this
placard pressure label. inoperative position, preventing the TPMS sensor section may be standard equipment on some
signal from being received. In this case, the vehicle models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
You may also store pressure values chosen for
may need to be moved slightly forward or you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
each axle in the Uconnect system application as
backward.
preset pressure values. Up to two sets of preset I MPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
pressure values can be stored in the Uconnect Horn chirps will indicate STFA status as tires are
system for the front and rear axle. Once you select inflated/deflated. The horn will chirp under the Please pay close attention to the information in
the tire pressures for the front and rear axles that following STFA states: this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
you want to inflate or deflate to, you can begin 1. The horn will chirp once when the selected
system properly, to keep you and your passengers 6
inflating or deflating one tire at a time. as safe as possible.
pressure is reached to let you know when to
NOTE: stop inflating or deflating the tire. Here are some simple steps you can take to
The STFA system will only support inflating or minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
2. The horn will chirp three times if the tire is
deflating one tire at a time. The user is required overinflated or over-deflated. 1. Children 12 years old and under should
to wait until the hazard lights STOP flashing or always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
3. The horn will chirp once again when enough air vehicle with a rear seat.
26-30 seconds after the desired pressure is
is added or removed to reach proper selected
achieved in one wheel before switching to another. 2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
pressure level.
The system will be activated when the TPMS vehicle seat belt properly must be secured in
receiver module detects a change in tire pressure. the appropriate child restraint or
The ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode, with the OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS belt-positioning booster seat in a rear seating
transmission in PARK in vehicles with an automatic Some of the most important safety features in your position Ú page 290.
transmission, and in NEUTRAL with the parking vehicle are the restraint systems:
270 SAFETY
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the WARNING!
(BeltAlert)
front passenger seat, move the seat as far  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
back as possible and use the proper child Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
restraint Ú page 290. front air bag can cause death or serious injury BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt to a child 12 years or younger, including a the driver and outboard front seat
behind them or under their arm. child in a rear-facing child restraint. passenger (if equipped with outboard
front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle
5. You should read the instructions provided with  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the their seat belts. The BeltAlert feature is active
your child restraint to make sure that you are front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing whenever the ignition switch is in the START or
using it properly. child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle ON/RUN position.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap and does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. Initial Indication
shoulder belts properly.
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition switch
7. The driver and front passenger seats should is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime
be moved back as far as practical to allow the SEAT BELT S YSTEMS will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or
front air bags room to inflate. outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver,
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your even on short trips. Someone on the road may be outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
vehicle has side air bags, and deployment a poor driver and could cause a collision that unbuckled when the ignition switch is first in the
occurs, the side air bags will inflate forcefully includes you. This can happen far away from home START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder
into the space between occupants and the or on your own street. Light will turn on and remain on until both outboard
door and occupants could be injured. front seat belts are buckled. The outboard front
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an
they can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a
modified to accommodate a disabled person, outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
collision. Some of the worst injuries happen when
see Ú page 407 for customer service contact people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts
information. reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of
injury caused by striking the inside of the vehicle.
Everyone in a motor vehicle should be belted at all
times.
SAFETY 271
BeltAlert Warning Sequence The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when active when the outboard front passenger seat is very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows
the vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered when an the shoulder part of the seat belt to move freely
speed range and the driver or outboard front seat animal or other items are placed on the outboard with you under normal conditions. However, in a
passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat collision the seat belt will lock and reduce your risk
front passenger seat BeltAlert) (the outboard front (if equipped). It is recommended that pets be of striking the inside of the vehicle or being thrown
passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet out of the vehicle.
outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied). The harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking the belts, and cargo is properly stowed. WARNING!
Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an  Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
sequence has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder recommend deactivating BeltAlert. with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
Light will remain on until the seat belts are NOTE: some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence may If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver or Always wear your seat belt even though you
repeat based on vehicle speed until the driver and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with have air bags.
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat belts outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is  In a collision, you and your passengers can
6
are buckled. The driver should instruct all unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn
occupants to buckle their seat belts. suffer much greater injuries if you are not prop-
on and remain on until the driver and outboard erly buckled up. You can strike the interior of
Change Of Status front seat passenger seat belts are buckled. your vehicle or other passengers, or you can be
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger Lap/Shoulder Belts thrown out of the vehicle. Always be sure you
(if equipped with outboard front passenger seat and others in your vehicle are buckled up prop-
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the erly.
with lap/shoulder belts.
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning sequence
 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
will begin until the seat belts are buckled again.
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
(Continued)
272 SAFETY

 Do not allow people to ride in any area of your  A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk  A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat of injury in a collision. The seat belt forces dangerous. Your body could strike the inside
belts. won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
but across your abdomen. Always wear the lap increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
part of your seat belt as low as possible and worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including
keep it snug. ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones.
the driver, should always wear their seat belts
Wear the seat belt over your shoulder so that
whether or not an air bag is also provided at  A twisted seat belt may not protect you prop-
your strongest bones will take the force in a
their seating position to minimize the risk of erly. In a collision, it could even cut into you.
collision.
severe injury or death in the event of a crash. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your body,
without twists. If you can’t straighten a seat  A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
 Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make
belt in your vehicle, take it to an authorized protect you from injury during a collision. You
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
dealer immediately and have it fixed. are more likely to hit your head in a collision if
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap
slide out of the seat belt. Follow these instruc-  A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
and shoulder belt are meant to be used
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
together.
your passengers safe, too. portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always  A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
 Two people should never be belted into a single
buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest collision and leave you with no protection.
seat belt. People belted together can crash into
you. Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
one another in a collision, hurting one another
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
badly. Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt  A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
for more than one person, no matter what their properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the seat
size. far forward, increasing the possibility of injury.
belt system. If your vehicle is involved in a
Wear your seat belt snugly.
collision, or if you have questions regarding
(Continued) seat belt or retractor conditions, take your
vehicle to an authorized FCA dealer or autho-
rized FCA Certified Collision Care Program
facility for inspection.
SAFETY 273
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions 5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder
and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back
is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
and adjust the seat.
The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of shoulder belt.
the front seat, and next to your arm in the rear
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear seat).
on the buckle. The seat belt will automatically
Grab the latch plate and pull out the seat belt.
retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
necessary to allow the seat belt to go around
the seat belt to retract fully.
your lap.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies
low across your hips, below your abdomen. To Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on lap/shoulder belt.
the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is 1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap the anchor point. 6
belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
under the seat belt in a collision. the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter the
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert slot at the top of the latch plate.
the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
“click.” clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is
no longer twisted.
Positioning The Lap Belt

274 SAFETY
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage NOTE: Seat Belt Extender

In the driver and outboard front passenger seats, The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even
the top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature when the webbing is fully extended and the
upward or downward to position the seat belt away allows the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
from your neck. Push or squeeze the anchorage in the upward position without pushing or equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized
button to release the anchorage, and move it up or squeezing the release button. To verify the dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.
down to the position that serves you best. shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
into position. Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different
occupant, it must be removed.
WARNING!
 Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make WARNING!
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
 ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically
might suffer internal injuries, or you could
required in order to properly fit the original
even slide out of the seat belt. Follow these
seat belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt
instructions to wear your seat belt safely and
Extender if, when worn, the distance between
to keep your passengers safe, too.
the front edge of the Seat Belt Extender
 Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder buckle and the center of the occupant’s body
Adjustable Upper Anchorage and chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is LESS than 6 inches.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will is comfortable and not resting on your neck.
 Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower The retractor will withdraw any slack in the
can increase the risk of serious injury or death
position, and if you are taller than average, you will shoulder belt.
in a collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender
prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher  Misadjustment of the seat belt could reduce when the lap belt is not long enough and only
position. After you release the anchorage button, the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. use in the recommended seating positions.
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender
locked in position.  Always make all seat belt height adjustments
when not needed.
when the vehicle is stationary.
SAFETY 275
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners
work for all size occupants, including those in child
restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still
must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the
pretensioners are single use items. A deployed
pretensioner or a deployed air bag must be 5 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
replaced immediately.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Energy Management Feature
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of
an accident is reduced for the mother and the
with an Energy Management feature that may help 6
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt. collision. The seat belt system has a retractor
Position the lap belt snug and low below the assembly that is designed to release webbing in a
abdomen and across the strong bones of the hips. controlled manner.
Place the shoulder belt across the chest and away
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
from the neck. Never place the shoulder belt
behind the back or under the arm. (ALR)
Seat Belt Pretensioner The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger) Automatic
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure a child Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
with pretensioning devices that are designed to restraint system Ú page 300.
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a
collision. These devices may improve the The figure below illustrates the locking feature for
performance of the seat belt by removing slack each seating position.
276 SAFETY
restraint is installed in a seating position that has How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
a seat belt with this feature. Children 12 years old Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and
and under should always be properly restrained in allow it to retract completely to disengage the
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle
sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in WARNING!
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger  The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the
front air bag can cause death or serious injury switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
to a child 12 years or younger, including a feature or any other seat belt function is not
60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger) Automatic Locking child in a rear-facing child restraint. working properly when checked according to
Retractor (ALR) Locations the procedures in the Service Manual.
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing  Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
If the passenger seating position is equipped with child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
an ALR and is being used for normal usage, only does not have a rear seat, do not transport a
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.  Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to restrain occupants who are wearing the seat
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s belt or children who are using booster seats.
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode The locked mode is only used to install
is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the 1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder rear-facing or forward-facing child restraints
seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to retract belt. that have a harness for restraining the child.
completely in this case and then carefully pull out
only the amount of webbing necessary to 2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull downward
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s until the entire seat belt is extracted.
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt
until you hear a "click”. retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is indicates the seat belt is now in the Automatic
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still Locking Mode.
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a child
SAFETY 277
Third Row Stow Clip — If Equipped Air Bag System Components

WARNING!
Six And Seven Passenger Only  Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Do not place the seat belt webbing behind the
Your vehicle may be equipped with a stow clip on third row stow clip when using the seat belt to  Air Bag Warning Light
the lower trim behind the third row. This clip is used restrain an occupant. The seat belt will not be  Steering Wheel and Column
to hold the seat belt out of the path of the third row positioned properly on the occupant and they
seat back when it is being folded and opened. Only  Instrument Panel
could be more seriously injured in an accident
place the seat belt webbing in this clip while folding as a result.  Knee Impact Bolsters
and opening the seat. Do not leave the webbing
 Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
behind the clip when using the belt to restrain an
occupant. SUPPLEMENTAL R ESTRAINT S YSTEMS  Seat Belt Buckle Switch
(SRS)  Supplemental Side Air Bags

 Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some  Front and Side Impact Sensors
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If  Seat Belt Pretensioners
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer. 6
 Seat Track Position Sensors
The air bag system must be ready to protect you in
 Occupant Classification System
a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and Air Bag Warning Light
interconnecting wiring associated with the The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your monitors the readiness of the electronic
Third Row Stow Clip vehicle may be equipped with the following Air Bag parts of the air bag system whenever the
System Components: ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN
position. If the ignition switch is in the OFF position
or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not on
and the air bags will not inflate.
278 SAFETY
The ORC contains a backup power supply system  The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
that may deploy the air bag system even if the during the four to eight seconds when the igni-
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
battery loses power or it becomes disconnected tion switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
detected, which could affect the
prior to deployment.  The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS),
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the four to eight-second interval. the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will
instrument panel for approximately four to eight  The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit- illuminate on the instrument panel. The
seconds for a self-check when the ignition switch is tently or remains on while driving. Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay on until
first in the ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the fault is cleared. In addition, a single chime will
the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC NOTE: sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine Warning Light has come on and a fault has been
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either related gauges are not working, the Occupant detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
momentarily or continuously. A single chime will Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In comes on intermittently or remains on while driving
sound to alert you if the light comes on again after this condition the air bags may not be ready to have an authorized dealer service the vehicle
initial startup. inflate for your protection. Have an authorized immediately Ú page 110.
dealer service the air bag system immediately.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning WARNING!
Light if a malfunction is detected that could affect
the air bag system. The diagnostics also record the Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
nature of the malfunction. While the air bag system instrument panel could mean you won’t have the
is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the air bag system to protect you in a collision. If the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer light does not come on as a bulb check when the
service the air bag system immediately. ignition is first turned on, stays on after you start
the vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
SAFETY 279
Front Air Bags The first stage inflator is triggered immediately

WARNING! during an impact that requires air bag deployment.
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
 Being too close to the steering wheel or instru- A low energy output is used in less severe
belts for both the driver and front passenger. The
ment panel during front air bag deployment collisions. A higher energy output is used for more
front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
could cause serious injury, including death. Air severe collisions.
restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfort- This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or
passenger front air bag is mounted in the ably extending your arms to reach the steering front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. wheel or instrument panel. detects whether the driver or front passenger seat
The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are  Never place a rear-facing child restraint in belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may
embossed on the air bag covers. front of an air bag. A deploying passenger adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air
front air bag can cause death or serious injury Bags.
to a child 12 years or younger, including a This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
child in a rear-facing child restraint. front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced Front
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the
Air Bags based upon seat position.
front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing
This vehicle is equipped with a right front
6
child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle
does not have a rear seat, do not transport a passenger Occupant Classification System (“OCS”)
rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. that is designed to provide Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s
seated weight input, as determined by the OCS.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations Features WARNING!
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage  No objects should be placed over or near the
2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental driver and front passenger air bags. This system air bag on the instrument panel or steering
Driver Knee Air Bag provides output appropriate to the severity and wheel because any such objects could cause
3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemen- type of collision as determined by the Occupant harm if the vehicle is in a collision severe
Restraint Controller (ORC), which may receive enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
tal Passenger Knee Air Bag
information from the front impact sensors (if
(Continued)
equipped) or other system components.
280 SAFETY
On the other hand, depending on the type and It is designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front
WARNING! location of impact, front air bags may deploy in Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s
 Do not put anything on or around the air bag crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but seated weight, as determined by the OCS.
covers or attempt to open them manually. You that produce a severe initial deceleration. The Occupant Classification System (OCS) consists
may damage the air bags and you could be Because air bag sensors measure vehicle of the following:
injured because the air bags may no longer be deceleration over time, vehicle speed and damage  Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
functional. The protective covers for the air by themselves are not good indicators of whether
bag cushions are designed to open only when or not an air bag should have deployed.  Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
the air bags are inflating. Sensor located in the front passenger seat
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all
 Relying on the air bags alone could lead to collisions, and also are needed to help keep you in  Air Bag Warning Light
more severe injuries in a collision. The air position, away from an inflating air bag. Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And Sensor
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you When the Occupant Restraints Controller (ORC) The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it located underneath the front passenger seat. The
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts even signals the inflator units. A large quantity of Sensor is located beneath the passenger seat
though you have air bags. non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will be
bags. sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input from
Front Air Bag Operation The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper the Sensor to determine the front passenger’s
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional passenger side of the instrument panel separate most probable classification. The OCM
protection by supplementing the seat belts. Front and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to communicates this information to the ORC. The
air bags are not expected to reduce the risk of their full size. The front air bags fully inflate in less ORC may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front time than it takes to blink your eyes. The front air Advanced Front Air Bag deployment based on
air bags will not deploy in all frontal collisions, bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain occupant classification. In order for the OCS to
including some that may produce substantial the driver and front passenger. operate as designed, it is important for the front
vehicle damage — for example, some pole passenger to be seated properly and properly
Occupant Classification System (OCS) — wearing the seat belt.
collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset
collisions.
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is part
of a Federally regulated safety system for this
vehicle.
SAFETY 281
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
if the OCS estimates that:
 The front passenger seat is unoccupied or has very light objects on it; or
 The front passenger seat is occupied by a small passenger, including a child; or
 The front passenger seat is occupied by a rear-facing child restraint; or
 The front passenger is not properly seated or his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a period of time.
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deployment
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Reduced-power deployment OR full-power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deployment
6
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat and never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
WARNING!
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
 Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not have a
rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
 Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
282 SAFETY
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s
probable classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on the front passenger seat
seated weight on the front passenger seat and The front passenger’s seated weight must be
where that weight is located. The OCS properly positioned on the front passenger seat.
communicates the classification status to the ORC. Failure to do so may result in serious injury or
The ORC uses the classification to determine death. The OCS determines the most probable
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag classification of the occupant that it detects. The
inflation rate should be adjusted. OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is increased seated weight, which may result in an
important for the front passenger to be seated adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
properly and properly wearing the seat belt. Seated Properly Front Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that
Properly seated passengers are: the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing the
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small Adults) front passenger’s seated weight on the front
 Sitting upright
When a lighter weight passenger, including a small passenger seat may result in a reduced-power
 Facing forward adult, occupies the front passenger seat, the OCS deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
 Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Bag. Increasing the front passenger’s seated
comfortably on or near the floor Advanced Front Air Bag. This does not mean that weight on the front passenger seat may result in a
 Sitting with their back against the seatback and the OCS is working improperly. full-power deployment of the Passenger Advanced
the seatback in an upright position Front Air Bag.
SAFETY 283
Examples of improper front passenger seating

include:
 The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
rest or instrument panel).
 The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or
turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
 The front passenger’s seatback is not in the full
upright position.
 The front passenger carries or holds an object Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly
while seated (e.g., backpack, box, etc.).
 Objects are lodged under the front passenger
seat.
 Objects are lodged between the front passenger
seat and center console. 6
 Accessories that may change the seated weight
on the front passenger seat are attached to the
front passenger seat.
 Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most Not Seated Properly Not Seated Properly
probable classification. If an occupant in the front
passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant
may provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different from the occupant’s properly seated
weight input, for example:
284 SAFETY
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument  Do not use prior or future model year seat
WARNING! covers or cushions not designated by FCA US
panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to
 If a child restraint system, child, small teen- classify the front passenger seat status. A LLC for the specific model being repaired.
ager or adult in the front passenger seat is malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation of Always use the correct seat cover and cushion
seated improperly, the occupant may provide the air bag system. specified for the vehicle.
an output signal to the OCS that is different  Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with an
from the occupant’s properly seated weight If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come on,
aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
input. This may result in serious injury or death or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it comes
on as you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized  Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
in a collision.
dealer for service immediately.  At no time should any Supplemental Restraint
 Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, System (SRS) component or SRS related
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS
with the seatback in an upright position, your component or fastener be modified or replaced
components that may affect the Passenger
back against the seatback, sitting upright, with any part except those which are approved
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the
facing forward, in the center of the seat, with by FCA US LLC.
OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a
your feet comfortably on or near the floor.
front seat passenger, the OCS components must
 Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back- function as designed. Do not make any WARNING!
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front modifications to the front passenger seat  Unapproved modifications or service proce-
passenger seat. Holding an object may components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If the dures to the passenger seat assembly, its
provide an output signal to the OCS that is seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service for any related components, seat cover or cushion
different than the occupant’s properly seated reason, take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. may inadvertently change the air bag deploy-
weight input, which may result in serious injury Only FCA US LLC approved seat accessories may ment in case of a frontal collision. This could
or death in a collision. be used. result in death or serious injury to the front
 Placing an object on the floor under the front The following requirements must be strictly passenger if the vehicle is involved in a colli-
passenger seat may prevent the OCS from followed: sion. A modified vehicle may not comply with
working properly, which may result in serious  Do not modify the front passenger seat required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
injury or death in a collision. Do not place any assembly or components in any way. dards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian Motor
objects on the floor under the front passenger Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
seat.  If it is necessary to modify the air bag system
for persons with disabilities, contact an autho-
rized dealer.
SAFETY 285
Knee Impact Bolsters Supplemental Side Air Bags When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the
outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover. The
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs)
inflating SAB deploys through the seat seam into
of the driver and front passenger, and position the This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental the space between the occupant and the door. The
front occupants for improved interaction with the Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs). SAB moves at a very high speed and with such a
front air bags.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs) high force that it could injure occupants if they are
WARNING! are located in the outboard side of the front seats. not seated properly, or if items are positioned in
The SABs are marked with “SRS AIRBAG” or the area where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
 Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on the even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.
impact bolsters in any way. outboard side of the seats.
 Do not mount any accessories to the knee The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant
WARNING!
impact bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, injury during certain side impacts, in addition to Do not use accessory seat covers or place
citizen band radios, etc. the injury reduction potential provided by the seat objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the
belts and body structure. performance could be adversely affected and/or
objects could be pushed into you, causing
Supplemental Driver And Front Passenger
serious injury. 6
Knee Air Bags
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
(SABICs)
panel below the steering column and a
Supplemental Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted in This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side
the instrument panel below the glove Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
compartment. The Supplemental Knee Air Bags Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
provide enhanced protection during a frontal (SABICs) are located above the side windows. The
impact by working together with the seat belts, trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG”
pretensioners, and front air bags. Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label or “AIRBAG.”
286 SAFETY
deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-side

WARNING! impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
 Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether
other cargo up high enough to block the or not Side Air Bags should have deployed.
deployment of the SABICs. The trim covering The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
above the side windows where the SABIC and collisions, including some collisions at certain
its deployment path are located should angles, or some side collisions that do not impact
remain free from any obstructions. the area of the passenger compartment. The Side
 In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do Air Bags may deploy during angled or offset frontal
not install any accessory items in your vehicle collisions where the front air bags deploy.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) which could alter the roof. Do not add an after- Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
Label Location market sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time
roof racks that require permanent attach- than it takes to blink your eyes.
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and other
ments (bolts or screws) for installation on the
injuries to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury
vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the WARNING!
vehicle for any reason.
reduction potential provided by the seat belts and  Occupants, including children, who are up
body structure. against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side Side Impacts seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in including children, should never lean on or
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers the certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint sleep against the door, side windows, or area
window. The SABICs inflate with enough force to Controller (ORC) determines whether the where the side air bags inflate, even if they are
injure occupants if they are not belted and seated deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular in an infant or child restraint.
properly, or if items are positioned in the area impact event is appropriate, based on the severity (Continued)
where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an even and type of collision. The side impact sensors aid
greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag. the ORC in determining the appropriate response
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or to impact events. The system is calibrated to
complete ejection of vehicle occupants through deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact side of the
side windows in certain side impact events. vehicle during impacts that require Side Air Bag
occupant protection. In side impacts, the Side Air
Bags deploy independently; a left side impact
SAFETY 287
NOTE: Air Bag System Components

WARNING! Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
NOTE:
 Seat belts (and child restraints where appro- trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors
priate) are necessary for your protection in all Rollover Events the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring
collisions. They also help keep you in position, Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are associated with electrical Air Bag System Compo-
away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the designed to activate in certain rollover events. The nents listed below:
best protection from the Side Air Bags, occu- Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
pants must wear their seat belts properly and  Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
whether deployment in a particular rollover event
sit upright with their backs against the seats. is appropriate, based on the severity and type of  Air Bag Warning Light
Children must be properly restrained in a child collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good  Steering Wheel and Column
restraint or booster seat that is appropriate for indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags and seat
the size of the child.  Instrument Panel
belt pretensioners should have deployed.
 Knee Impact Bolsters
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners will
not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover  Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
WARNING!
sensing system determines if a rollover event may  Seat Belt Buckle Switch
 Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean be in progress and whether deployment is 6
against the door or window. Sit upright in the  Supplemental Side Air Bags
appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
center of the seat. rollover or near rollover event, and deployment is  Supplemental Knee Air Bags
 Being too close to the Side Air Bags during appropriate, the rollover sensing system will deploy  Front and Side Impact Sensors
deployment could cause you to be severely the side air bags and seat belt pretensioners on  Seat Belt Pretensioners
injured or killed. both sides of the vehicle.
 Seat Track Position Sensors
 Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or
 Occupant Classification System
to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side complete ejection of vehicle occupants through
Air Bags work with your seat belt to restrain side windows in certain rollover or side impact
you properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags events.
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
288 SAFETY
If A Deployment Occurs  As the air bags deflate, you may see some NOTE:
smoke-like particles. The particles are a normal  Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
The front air bags are designed to deflate
by-product of the process that generates the trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
immediately after deployment.
non-toxic gas used for air bag inflation. These ment.
NOTE: airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes,
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all colli-  After any collision, the vehicle should be taken
nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
sions. This does not mean something is wrong with rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat to an authorized dealer immediately.
the air bag system. irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation Enhanced Accident Response System
If you do have a collision which deploys the air continues, see your doctor. If these particles In the event of an impact, if the communication
bags, any or all of the following may occur: settle on your clothing, follow the garment network remains intact, and the power remains
 The air bag material may sometimes cause manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning. intact, depending on the nature of the event, the
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu- Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will determine
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The deployed. If you are involved in another collision, whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or the air bags will not be in place to protect you. System perform the following functions:
those you might get sliding along a carpet or  Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by WARNING!
contact with chemicals. They are not permanent  Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners equipped)
and normally heal quickly. However, if you
cannot protect you in another collision. Have the
haven’t healed significantly within a few days, or  Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat
if you have any blistering, see your doctor imme- power
belt retractor assemblies replaced by an
diately.  Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as
authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the
Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced long as the battery has power or for 15 minutes
as well. from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident
Response System
 Unlock the power door locks
SAFETY 289
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform any NOTE: After an accident, if the vehicle will not start after
of these other functions in response to the After an accident, remember to cycle the ignition to performing the reset procedure, the vehicle must
Enhanced Accident Response System: the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key be towed to an authorized dealer to be inspected
 Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the HVAC from the ignition switch to avoid draining the and to have the Enhanced Accident Response
Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door battery. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in System reset.
the engine compartment and on the ground near Maintaining Your Air Bag System
 Cut off battery power to the:
the engine compartment and fuel tank before
 Engine resetting the system and starting the engine. If WARNING!
 Electric Motor (if equipped) there are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an  Modifications to any part of the air bag system
 Electric power steering could cause it to fail when you need it. You
accident, reset the system by following the
 Brake booster procedure described below. If you have any doubt, could be injured if the air bag system is not
 Electric park brake contact an authorized dealer. there to protect you. Do not modify the compo-
nents or wiring, including adding any kind of
 Automatic transmission gear selector Enhanced Accident Response System badges or stickers to the steering wheel hub
 Horn Reset Procedure trim cover or the upper passenger side of the
If Applicable, refer to the “Hybrid Supplement” for instrument panel. Do not modify the front 6
 Front wiper
additional information. fascia/bumper, vehicle body structure, or add
 Headlamp washer pump (if equipped) aftermarket side steps or running boards.
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response
System functions after an event, the ignition switch  It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
must be changed from ignition START or ON/RUN air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone
to ignition OFF. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel who works on your vehicle that it has an air
leaks in the engine compartment and on the bag system.
ground near the engine compartment and fuel (Continued)
tank before resetting the system and starting the
engine.
290 SAFETY
WARNING!
 How various systems in your vehicle were oper- CHILD R ESTRAINTS
ating;
 Do not attempt to modify any part of your air Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at
 Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
bag system. The air bag may inflate acciden- all times, including babies and children. Every
belts were buckled/fastened;
tally or may not function properly if modifica- state in the United States, and every Canadian
 How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the province, requires that small children ride in
tions are made. Take your vehicle to an
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and, proper restraint systems. This is the law, and you
authorized dealer for any air bag system
service. If your seat, including your trim cover  How fast the vehicle was traveling. can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
and cushion, needs to be serviced in any way These data can help provide a better Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
(including removal or loosening/tightening of understanding of the circumstances in which buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an crashes and injuries occur. crash statistics, children are safer when properly
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer restrained in the rear seats rather than in the front.
NOTE:
approved seat accessories may be used. If it is
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a WARNING!
necessary to modify the air bag system for
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
persons with disabilities, contact an autho- In a collision, an unrestrained child can become
recorded by the EDR under normal driving condi-
rized dealer. a projectile inside the vehicle. The force required
tions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender,
age, and crash location) are recorded. However, to hold even an infant on your lap could become
Event Data Recorder (EDR) other parties, such as law enforcement, could so great that you could not hold the child, no
This vehicle is equipped with an event data combine the EDR data with the type of personally matter how strong you are. The child and others
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to identifying data routinely acquired during a crash could be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
record, in certain crash or near crash-like investigation. in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for
situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting To read data recorded by an EDR, special the child’s size.
a road obstacle, data that will assist in equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
The EDR is designed to record data related to manufacturer, other parties, such as law
vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short enforcement, that have the special equipment,
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The can read the information if they have access to the
EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data vehicle or the EDR.
as:
SAFETY 291
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the child almost large enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the instructions and warnings in the child restraint
Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety Standards. You should also make sure that you can
install it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
 For additional information, refer to http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or call: 1–888–327–4236
 Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Children who are two years old or younger and who Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Infants and Toddlers have not reached the height or weight limits of their Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
6
child restraint vehicle
Children who are at least two years old or who have Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Small Children outgrown the height or weight limit of their Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
rear-facing child restraint vehicle
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
Larger Children child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
Children Too Large for Child Restraints outgrown the height or weight limit of their booster
vehicle
seat
292 SAFETY
Infant And Child Restraints

WARNING! WARNING!
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years  Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the  Improper installation can lead to failure of an
old or until they reach either the height or weight front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing infant or child restraint. It could come loose in
limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle a collision. The child could be badly injured or
child restraints can be used rear-facing: infant does not have a rear seat, do not transport a killed. Follow the child restraint manufac-
carriers and convertible child seats. rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. turer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth Older Children And Child Restraints  After a child restraint is installed in the
until they reach the weight or height limit of the Children who are two years old or who have vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat forward
infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be used outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat or rearward because it can loosen the child
either rear-facing or forward-facing in the vehicle. can ride forward-facing in the vehicle. restraint attachments. Remove the child
Convertible child seats often have a higher weight Forward-facing child seats and convertible child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat
limit in the rear-facing direction than infant carriers seats used in the forward-facing direction are for position. When the vehicle seat has been
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who children who are over two years old or who have adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
have outgrown their infant carrier but are still less outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of  When your child restraint is not in use, secure
than at least two years old. Children should remain their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children it in the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH
rear-facing until they reach the highest weight or should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do
height allowed by their convertible child seat. harness for as long as possible, up to the highest not leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden
weight or height allowed by the child seat. stop or accident, it could strike the occupants
WARNING! or seatbacks and cause serious personal
All children whose weight or height is above the
 Never place a rear-facing child restraint in forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a injury.
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s
front air bag can cause death or serious injury seat belts fit properly. If the child cannot sit with
to a child 12 years or younger, including a knees bent over the vehicle’s seat cushion while
child in a rear-facing child restraint. the child’s back is against the seatback, they
(Continued) should use a belt-positioning booster seat. The
child and belt-positioning booster seat are held in
the vehicle by the seat belt.
SAFETY 293
Children Too Large For Booster Seats 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s If the answer to any of these questions was “no,”
shoulder between the neck and arm? then the child still needs to use a booster seat in
Children who are large enough to wear the
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/shoulder
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are long
touching the child’s thighs and not the belt, check seat belt fit periodically and make sure
enough to bend over the front of the seat when
stomach? the seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s squirming
their back is against the seatback, should use the
or slouching can move the belt out of position. If
seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step test 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move
to decide whether the child can use the vehicle’s trip? the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use
seat belt alone:
a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the correctly.
back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over WARNING!
the front of the vehicle seat while the child is Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
still sitting all the way back? under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child properly,
which may result in serious injury or death. A 6
child must always wear both the lap and
shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
294 SAFETY
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Combined Weight of Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
Restraint Type the Child + Child LATCH – Lower Anchors LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top Tether
Restraint Seat Belt Only
Only + Top Tether Anchor Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs
X X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs
X X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs
X
Restraint (29.5 kg)
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint Some seating positions may have a top tether
(LATCH) Restraint System anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The seating positions, the seat belt must be used with
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points for the top tether anchorage to install the child
installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There are restraint. Please see the following table for more
two lower anchorages located at the back of the information.
seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating
LATCH Label position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the
vehicle’s seat belts.
SAFETY 295
LATCH Positions For Installing Child

Restraints In This Vehicle
Captain’s Chairs Second Row LATCH Positions 60/40 Second Row LATCH Positions
(6 Passenger) (7 Passenger)
Lower Anchorage Symbol Lower Anchorage Symbol
Second Row LATCH Positions
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
(5 Passenger)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol Top Tether Anchorage Symbol 6
Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
296 SAFETY
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of combined weight of the child and the child restraint
the child restraint) for using the LATCH anchorage 65 lbs (29.5 kg) is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
system to attach the child restraint? anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH
anchorage system to attach a rear-facing or
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be forward-facing child restraint.
used together to attach a rear-facing or No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
forward-facing child restraint? anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center position Five Passenger — Use the seat belt and tether
using the inner LATCH lower anchorages from the Five Passenger — No anchor to install a child seat in the center seating
outboard seating positions? position.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more
child restraints. If the center position does not have
Can two child restraints be attached using a dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the seat
No
common lower LATCH anchorage? belt to install a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in
an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the front
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of passenger seat if the child restraint manufacturer
Yes
the front passenger seat? also allows contact. See your child restraint
owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
SAFETY 297
Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars Five, Six, And Seven Passenger Vehicles:
that are found at the rear of the seat Second Row Upper Tether Anchorage
cushion where it meets the seatback. Locations
The anchorages are under a flap with the There are tether strap anchorages behind each
anchorage symbols on it. Pull the top of the flap rear seating position located on the back of the
away from the seatback to access the lower seat.
anchorages.
Six Passenger Second Row Lower Anchorages
Six Passenger Top Tether Strap Anchorage

Five Passenger Second Row Lower Anchorages (Captain's Chair)
Seven Passenger Second Row Lower Anchorages

298 SAFETY
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be

equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each
side. Each will have a hook or connector to attach
to the lower anchorage and a way to tighten the
connection to the anchorage. Forward-facing child
restraints and some rear-facing child restraints will
also be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to the
top tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Five And Seven Passenger Top Tether Strap Anchorage Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether Center Seat LATCH
(2nd Row Bench) Anchorage (3rd Row Bench) Five Passenger Second Row Seating:
Six And Seven Passenger Vehicles: Third Row
Upper Tether Anchorage Locations WARNING!
There are tether strap anchorages behind each  Do not install a child restraint in the center
rear seating position located on the back of the position using the LATCH system. This position
seat. To access them, pull the carpeted floor panel is not approved for installing child seats using
away from the seat back, this will expose the top the LATCH attachments. You must use the
tether strap anchorages. seat belt and tether anchor to install a child
seat in the center seating position.
 Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. For
Tether Anchorages (3rd Row Bench) typical installation instructions, see
Ú page 299.
SAFETY 299
Six Passenger Second Row Seating: To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
Restraint child restraint to the lower anchorages in the
WARNING! selected seating position.
If the selected seating position has a Switchable
This vehicle does not have a center seating Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow 4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect
position. Do not use the center lower LATCH the seat belt, following the instructions below. See it to the top tether anchorage. See
anchorages to install a child seat in the center of Ú page 300 to check what type of seat belt each Ú page 303 for directions to attach a tether
the back seat. seating position has. anchor.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child
Seven Passenger Second Row Seating: on the tether strap of the child seat so that restraint rearward and downward into the
you can more easily attach the hooks or seat. Remove slack in the straps according to
If a child restraint installed in the center position
connectors to the vehicle anchorages. the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
blocks the seat belt webbing or buckle for the
outboard position, do not use that outboard 2. Place the child seat between the lower 6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
position. If a child seat in the center position blocks anchorages for that seating position. If the by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do not second row seat can be reclined, you may the belt path. It should not move more than
install a child seat in that outboard position. 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint 6
(if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear seat
WARNING! can be moved forward and rearward in the
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
more than one child restraint. For typical rear-most position to make room for the child
installation instructions, see Ú page 299. seat. You may also move the front seat forward
to allow more room for the child seat.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint

manufacturer when installing your child restraint.
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as
described here.
300 SAFETY
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR

WARNING! WARNING!
(ALR) Seat Belt:
 Improper installation of a child restraint to the  Improper installation or failure to properly
When using the LATCH attaching system to install
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the secure a child restraint can lead to failure of
a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not
restraint. The child could be badly injured or the restraint. The child could be badly injured
being used by other occupants or being used to
killed. Follow the child restraint manufac- or killed.
secure child restraints. An unused belt could injure
turer’s directions exactly when installing an
a child if they play with it and accidentally lock the  Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
infant or child restraint.
seat belt retractor. Before installing a child directions exactly when installing an infant or
restraint using the LATCH system, buckle the seat  Child restraint anchorages are designed to child restraint.
belt behind the child restraint and out of the child’s withstand only those loads imposed by
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no The seat belts in the passenger seating positions
child restraint installation, instead of buckling it circumstances are they to be used for adult are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap
through the child restraint belt path and then items or equipment to the vehicle. portion of the seat belt tight around the child
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
Installing Child Restraints Using The clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a
toys and that they should not play with them. locked mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
Vehicle Seat Belt
retractor and then letting the webbing retract back
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
of a lap/shoulder belt. into the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
on Ú page 275 for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
SAFETY 301
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing

Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Captain’s Chairs Second Row (6 Passenger) Automatic 60/40 Second Row (7 Passenger) Automatic Locking
Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations Retractor (ALR) Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
5 Passenger Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
6
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of Always use the tether anchor when using the seat
the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
the seat belt to attach a forward facing child the recommended weight limit of the child
restraint? restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and the
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of
Yes child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint
the front passenger seat?
manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position
No
belt against the belt path of the child restraint? with an ALR retractor.
302 SAFETY
Installing A Child Restraint With A 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor retractor to pass it through the belt path of the tighten the lap portion around the child
child restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in restraint while you push the child restraint
(ALR): the belt path. rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
Child restraint systems are designed to be secured
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you 8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and
in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion
hear a “click.” the seating position has a top tether
of a lap/shoulder belt.
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
tight against the child seat. anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
WARNING!
Ú page 303 for directions to attach a tether
 Improper installation or failure to properly 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder anchor.
secure a child restraint can lead to failure of part of the belt until you have pulled all the
seat belt webbing out of the retractor. Then, 9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
the restraint. The child could be badly injured by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
or killed. allow the webbing to retract back into the
retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear the belt path. It should not move more than
 Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
directions exactly when installing an infant or now in the Automatic Locking mode.
child restraint. Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
is locked, you should not be able to pull out any
1. Place the child seat in the center of the webbing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat
seating position. If the second row seat can step 5.
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/or
raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may
wish to move it to its rear-most position to
make room for the child seat. You may also
move the front seat forward to allow more
room for the child seat.
SAFETY 303
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Five Passenger

Tether Anchorage 1. Look behind the seating position where you
plan to install the child restraint to find the
WARNING! tether anchorage. If the seat can be moved,
you may need to move the seat forward to
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car
provide better access to the tether
seat to any location in front of the car seat,
anchorage. If there is no top tether anchorage
including the seat frame or a tether anchorage.
for that seating position, move the child
Only attach the tether strap of a rear-facing car
restraint to another position in the vehicle if
seat to the tether anchorage that is approved for
one is available.
that seating position, located behind the top of
the vehicle seat. See Ú page 294 for the 2. Route the tether strap to provide the most Second Row Bench Seat Top Tether Strap Mounting
location of approved tether anchorages in your direct path for the strap between the anchor (5 And 7 Passenger Seating)
vehicle. and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and 6
between the two posts. If not possible, lower WARNING!
the head restraint and pass the tether strap  An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
around the outboard side of the head restraint. lead to increased head motion and possible
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child injury to the child. Use only the anchorage
restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown position directly behind the child seat to
in the diagram. secure a child restraint top tether strap.
 If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip
into the opening between the seatbacks as
you remove slack in the strap.
304 SAFETY
Six And Seven Passenger 4. For the center seating position, route the
1. Look behind the seating position where you tether strap over the seatback and headrest
plan to install the child restraint to find the then attach the hook to the tether anchor
tether anchorage. You may need to move the located on the back of the seat.
seat forward to provide better access to the 5. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
tether anchorage. If there is no top tether restraint to the top tether anchorage as shown
anchorage for that seating position, move the in the diagram.
child restraint to another position in the
vehicle if one is available.
2. To access the top tether strap anchorages
behind the rear seat, pull the carpeted floor Third Row Top Tether Strap Anchorage
panel away from the seat back, this will expose (Located On Seatback)
the top tether strap anchorages. 3. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is equipped
with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the
head restraint, and where possible, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and
Second Row Bench Seat Top Tether Strap Mounting
between the two posts. If not possible, lower
(5 And 7 Passenger Seating)
the head restraint and pass the tether strap
around the outboard side of the head restraint.
Pulling Down The Carpet Floor Panel To Access Top Tether

Strap Anchorage (3rd Row Bench)
SAFETY 305
WARNING! SAFETY TIPS

 The top tether anchorages are not visible until TRANSPORTING P ASSENGERS
the gap panel is folded down. Do not use the
visible cargo tie down hooks, located on the NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
floor behind the seats, to attach a child AREA.
restraint tether anchor.
WARNING!
 An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and possible  Do not leave children or animals inside parked
injury to the child. Use only the anchorage vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat buildup
Captain’s Chair Top Tether Strap Mounting (6 Passenger) position directly behind the child seat to may cause serious injury or death.
secure a child restraint top tether strap.  It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
 If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
seat, make sure the tether strap does not slip sion, people riding in these areas are more
into the opening between the seatbacks as likely to be seriously injured or killed.
6
you remove slack in the strap.  Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and
seat belts.
 Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
Third Row Seating Top Tether Strap Mounting

6. Remove slack in the tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
306 SAFETY
TRANSPORTING P ETS SAFETY CHECKS Y OU S HOULD M AKE Defroster

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm I NSIDE THE VEHICLE Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown about place the blower control on high speed. You should
Seat Belts be able to feel the air directed against the
and possibly injured, or injure a passenger during
panic braking or in a collision. Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking windshield. See an authorized dealer for service if
for cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts your defroster is inoperable.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
must be replaced immediately. Do not Floor Mat Safety Information
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
disassemble or modify the system.
secured by seat belts. Always use floor mats designed to fit your vehicle.
If your vehicle is involved in a collision, or if you Only use a floor mat that does not interfere with the
CONNECTED VEHICLES have questions regarding the seat belt or retractor operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch
conditions, take your vehicle to an authorized FCA pedals. Only use a floor mat that is securely
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications
dealer or authorized FCA Certified Collision Care attached using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot
cannot be assured. Third parties may unlawfully
Program facility for inspection. slip out of position and interfere with the
intercept information and private communications
without your consent. For further information, refer Air Bag Warning Light accelerator, brake or clutch pedals or impair safe
to “Data Collection & Privacy” in your Uconnect operation of your vehicle in other ways.
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for
Owner’s Manual Supplement or “Onboard four to eight seconds as a bulb check
Diagnostic System (OBD II) Cybersecurity” when the ignition switch is first placed in
Ú page 120. the ON/RUN position. If the light is either
not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while
WARNING! driving, have the system inspected at an
It is not possible to know or to predict all of the authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the
possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single
breached. It may be possible that vehicle chime when a fault with the Air Bag System has
systems, including safety related systems, could been detected. It will stay on until the fault is
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could removed. If the light comes on intermittently or
occur that may result in an accident involving remains on while driving, have an authorized
serious injury or death. dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 269.
SAFETY 307

An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or  ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the  If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat driver’s side floor area. To check for interfer- re-installed, always properly attach carpet to
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere ence, with the vehicle properly parked with the the floor and check the floor mat fasteners are
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and engine off, fully depress the accelerator, the secure to the vehicle carpet. Fully depress
cause a loss of vehicle control. To prevent brake, and the clutch pedal (if present) to each pedal to check for interference with the
SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH: check for interference. If your floor mat inter- accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then
feres with the operation of any pedal, or is not re-install the floor mats.
 ALWAYS securely attach your floor
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from
mat using the floor mat fasteners.  It is recommended to only use mild soap and
the vehicle and place the floor mat in your
DO NOT install your floor mat upside water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning,
trunk.
down or turn your floor mat over. always check your floor mat has been properly
Lightly pull to confirm mat is secured using the  ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on installed and is secured to your vehicle using
floor mat fasteners on a regular basis. the passenger’s side floor area. the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
 ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING  ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or slide
6
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE into the driver’s side floor area when the PERIODIC S AFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
before installing any other floor mat. vehicle is moving. Objects can become
NEVER install or stack an additional trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
MAKE OUTSIDE T HE V EHICLE
floor mat on top of an existing floor mat. pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle Tires
control.
 ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that cannot  NEVER place any objects under the floor mat wear patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or
be properly attached and secured to your (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could other objects lodged in the tread or sidewall.
vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be replaced, change the position of the floor mat and may Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect
only use a FCA approved floor mat for the cause interference with the accelerator, sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. Check the
specific make, model, and year of your brake, or clutch pedals. lug nut/bolt torque for tightness. Check the tires
vehicle. (Continued) (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
(Continued)
308 SAFETY
Lights
WARNING!
CARBON M ONOXIDE W ARNINGS
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the  If you are required to drive with the trunk/lift- WARNING!
controls. Check turn signal and high beam gate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT deadly. Follow the precautions below to prevent
Door Latches use the recirculation mode. carbon monoxide poisoning:
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.  Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
 If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with
Fluid Leaks the engine running, adjust your heating or carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
cooling controls to force outside air into the gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in a
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. closed area, such as a garage, and never sit in
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
a parked vehicle with the engine running for
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
an extended period. If the vehicle is stopped in
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should The best protection against carbon monoxide entry an open area with the engine running for more
be located and corrected immediately. into the vehicle body is a properly maintained than a short period, adjust the ventilation
engine exhaust system.
EXHAUST GAS system to force fresh, outside air into the
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the vehicle.
exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can be
WARNING!  Guard against carbon monoxide with proper
detected inside the vehicle, or when the underside
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain or rear of the vehicle is damaged, have an maintenance. Have the exhaust system
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and authorized dealer inspect the complete exhaust inspected every time the vehicle is raised.
odorless. Breathing it can make you system and adjacent body areas for broken, Have any abnormal conditions repaired
unconscious and can eventually poison you. To damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips: Open seams or loose connections could permit windows fully open.
exhaust fumes to seep into the passenger
 Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
compartment. In addition, inspect the exhaust
confined areas any longer than needed to
system each time the vehicle is raised for
move your vehicle in or out of the area.
lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
(Continued)
309
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
If equipped, the overhead console contains an
ASSIST and SOS button.
The Hazard Warning Flashers button is located on continue to operate even though the ignition is
the switch bank just above the radio screen. placed in the OFF position. WARNING!
NOTE: ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
With extended use, the Hazard Warning Flashers the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
may discharge the battery. the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM— IF EQUIPPED features and applications in this vehicle. Only
use the features and applications when it is safe
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Hazard Warning Flashers Button  Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-
7
rized by the subscriber Ú page 410.
Push the button to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the button is activated, all  The ASSIST and SOS buttons will only function
directional turn signals will flash on and off to warn if you are connected to an operable LTE
oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch (voice/data) or 4G (data) network, which comes
a second time to turn off the Hazard Warning as a built-in function. Other Jeep® Connect
ASSIST And SOS Buttons
Flashers. services will only be operable if you are
1 — ASSIST Button connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or
This is an emergency warning system and it should
2 — SOS Button 4G (data) network.
not be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it
only when your vehicle is disabled or signaling a
safety hazard warning for other motorists.
310 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ASSIST Call 2. The LED light located within the ASSIST and NOTE:
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically SOS buttons on the overhead console will turn  Once a connection is made between the
connect you to any one of the following support green once a connection to a SOS operator has vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
centers: been made. ator, the SOS operator may be able to open
 Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or 3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a a voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and you SOS operator is made, the SOS Call system mine if additional assistance is needed.
will be connected to a representative for assis- may transmit the following important vehicle Once the SOS operator opens a voice
tance. Roadside Assistance will know what information to a SOS operator: connection with the vehicle’s SOS Call
vehicle you’re driving and its location. Additional  Indication that the occupant placed a SOS
system, the operator should be able to
fees may apply for roadside assistance. Call speak with you or other vehicle occupants
and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.
 Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all  The vehicle brand The vehicle’s SOS Call system will attempt
other vehicle issues.  The last known GPS coordinates of the to remain connected with the SOS operator
 Jeep® Connect Customer Care – Total support vehicle until the SOS operator terminates the
for Radio, Phone and NAV issues. 4. You should be able to speak with the SOS connection.
SOS Call operator through the vehicle audio system to 5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead determine if additional assistance is needed. appropriate emergency responders and
console. provide them with important vehicle
WARNING! information and GPS coordinates.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error, ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS Call the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To cancel the steering wheel. You have full responsibility
the SOS Call connection, push the SOS call button and assume all risks related to the use of the
on the overhead console or press the cancellation features and applications in this vehicle. Only
button on the Device Screen. Termination of the use the features and applications when it is safe
SOS Call will turn off the green LED light on the to do so. Failure to do so may result in an
overhead console. accident involving serious injury or death.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 311
SOS Call System Limitations

WARNING! WARNING!
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
 If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger  The SOS Call system is embedded into the system capabilities.
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add after-
SOS or other emergency line operators in Mexico
conditions or location), do not wait for voice market electrical equipment to the vehicle’s
may not answer or respond to SOS system calls.
contact from an Emergency Services Agent. All electrical system. This may prevent your
occupants should exit the vehicle immediately vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction, any
and move to a safe location. emergency call. To avoid interference that can of the following may occur at the time the
cause the SOS Call system to fail, never add malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
 Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s each ignition cycle:
aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
operable network and GPS antennas. You
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your  The overhead console lights located within the
could prevent operable network and GPS
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the ASSIST and SOS buttons will continuously illumi-
signal reception, which can prevent your
antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE nate red.
vehicle from placing an emergency call. An
LOSES BATTERY POWER FOR ANY REASON
operable network and GPS signal reception is  The Device Screen will display the following
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
required for the SOS Call system to function message “Vehicle device requires service.
DENT), THE JEEP® CONNECT FEATURES,
properly. Please contact an authorized dealer.”
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL
(Continued) NOT OPERATE.  An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle
device requires service. Please contact an 7
 Modifications to any part of the SOS Call authorized dealer.”
system could cause the air bag system to fail
when you need it. You could be injured if the
air bag system is not there to help protect you.
 The vehicle battery loses power or becomes NOTE:

WARNING! disconnected during a vehicle crash  Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
 Ignoring the overhead console light could  LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If Global Positioning Satellite signals are unavail- antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/data) or
the overhead console light is illuminated, have able or obstructed 4G (data) and GPS signal reception, which can
an authorized dealer service the SOS Call prevent your vehicle from placing an emergency
 Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
system immediately. call. An operable LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data)
facility
 The Occupant Restraint Control module turns
network connection and a GPS signal is
 Operator error by the SOS operator required for the SOS Call system to function
on the air bag Warning Light on the instrument
panel if a malfunction in any part of the  LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network properly.
system is detected. If the Air Bag Warning congestion NOTE:
Light is illuminated, have an authorized dealer  Weather Changes or modifications not expressly approved
service the Occupant Restraint Control system  Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or by the party responsible for compliance could void
immediately. tunnels the user's authority to operate the equipment.
WARNING! CAUTION!
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning,
or stop the SOS Call system operation. These the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on never spray any cleaning solution directly onto
include, but are not limited to, the following the steering wheel. You have full responsibility the mirror. Apply the solution onto a clean cloth
factors: and assume all risks related to the use of the and wipe the mirror clean.
 The ignition is in the OFF position features and applications in this vehicle. Only
 The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact use the features and applications when it is safe Automatic SOS — If Equipped
to do so. Failure to do so may result in an Automatic SOS is a hands-free safety service that
 The SOS Call system software and/or hardware
accident involving serious injury or death. can immediately connect you with help in the event
are damaged during a crash
that your vehicle’s airbags deploy. Please refer to
your provided radio supplement for complete
information.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING NOTE:

If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspension
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
WARNING! system, there is a feature which allows the auto-
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (P).
matic leveling to be disabled before changing a
 Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of tire. This feature can be activated through the 5. Turn OFF the ignition.
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far Uconnect system Ú page 140. 6. Block both front and rear of the wheel
enough off the road to avoid the danger of
NOTE: diagonally opposite of the jacking position. For
being hit when operating the jack or changing
Before changing a tire or using the jack please example, if changing the driver’s front tire,
the wheel.
disable the hands free lift gate, This feature can be block the passenger’s rear wheel.
 Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. disabled through the Uconnect system
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on Ú page 220.
you. You could be crushed. Never put any part
of your body under a vehicle that is on a jack. PREPARATIONS FOR J ACKING
If you need to get under a raised vehicle, take 1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface as far
it to a service center where it can be raised on from the edge of the roadway as possible.
a lift. Avoid icy or slippery areas.
 Never start or run the engine while the vehicle
is on a jack. WARNING!
7
 The jack is designed to be used as a tool for Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
changing tires only. The jack should not be the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far Wheel Blocked Example
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes. enough off the road to avoid being hit when
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level operating the jack or changing the wheel. NOTE:
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas. Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when
the vehicle is being raised or lifted.
J ACK L OCATION
The scissor-type jack and tire changing tools are
located in the rear cargo area, under the load floor.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s trim level, the jacking
tool locations vary from second and third row
seating.
1. Locate and lift up on the load floor handle.
Jack Storage Location (Second Row Seating) Jack Storage Location

(Third Row Seating With Air Suspension)
3. Remove the jack storage cover. To remove,
firmly press the two side tabs inward while
lifting up or out.
Load Floor Handle

2. Access the jack and tool storage.
Jack Storage Location
(Third Row Seating Without Air Suspension)
Jack Storage Cover Tabs

4. Release the Velcro straps and pull outward or Second Row Seating
up on the jack and tools to remove.
For vehicle’s equipped with second row seating,
the spare tire is located in the rear cargo area
under the load floor.
Jack And Tools

1 — Jack Tool Bag
Jack Removal (Third Row Seating Without Air Suspension) 2 — Lug Nut Wrench
3 — Tow Hook (If Equipped)
4 — Jack Handle Extension (If Equipped) Spare Tire Location (Second Row Seating)
5 — Fuel Funnel
6 — Scissor Jack
Third Row Seating
For vehicle’s equipped with third row seating, the
7
spare tire is stowed under the rear of the vehicle by
SPARE T IRE S TOWAGE means of a cable winch mechanism. To remove or
NOTE: stow the spare, use the jack handle/lug wrench
connected to the square socket extension to rotate
Depending on the vehicle’s trim level, spare tire
the “spare tire drive” nut. The nut is located under
locations vary from second and third row seating.
a plastic cover at the center-rear of the cargo floor
Jack Removal (Third Row Seating With Air Suspension) area, just inside the liftgate opening.
5. Jack And Tools Description
SPARE T IRE R EMOVAL 2. Remove the spare tire fastener by rotating it

counterclockwise.
Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up
the vehicle.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s trim level, the
procedure for spare tire removal varies for second
and third row seating.
Second Row Seating
1. Lift up on the rear load floor to access the
Spare Tire Location (Third Row Seating)
spare tire. Remove the fastener securing the
spare tire, and remove the spare tire from the
CAUTION! vehicle. Removing The Spare Tire Fastener
The winch mechanism is designed for use with
the jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air 3. After removing the fastener, pull the spare tire
wrench or power tool may damage the winch. up away from the fastener pin and out of the
vehicle.
Spare Tire Fastener

Third Row Seating

1. Lift up on the rear load floor to access the
spare tire winch plug. Locate and remove plug
from the storage compartment floor to
expose the winch access hole.
Winch Drive Nut Location Spare Tire Retainer

5. Slide the retainer up the steel extension tube
and winch cable. Rotate the retainer and push
it through the hole in the wheel.
Winch Nut Plug

2. Fit the jack handle extension over the winch 7
drive nut. Use the lug wrench handle and
extension to completely lower the spare tire.
Keep turning the handle counterclockwise
until the winch stops. Wrench Rotation
3. Slide the tire out from under the vehicle and
rotate it vertically behind the rear fascia/
bumper. Releasing The Retainer
4. Pull the metal retainer toward you to release it.
J ACKING INSTRUCTIONS WARNING!

1. Assemble the jack and jacking tools
Ú page 314.
WARNING!  If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your  To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
vehicle: securely stowed, spares must be stowed with
the valve stem facing the ground.
 Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before
raising the vehicle.
 Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
 Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK. Jack And Tools Assembled
 Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel 2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug nuts,
to be raised. using the lug wrench by turning them counter-
clockwise, one turn, while the wheel is still on
 Never start or run the engine with the vehicle
the ground.
on a jack.
Jack Warning Label
 Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is
on a jack.
CAUTION!
 Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised vehicle, Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
take it to a service center where it can be locations other than those indicated in the
raised on a lift. Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
 Only use the jack in the positions indicated

and for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
(Continued)
Loosen Lug Nuts
NOTE: 4. For a rear tire, place the jack in the slot on the
Proper placement for the front and rear jacking rear tie-down bracket, just forward of the rear
locations is critical. See the following images for tire (as indicated by the triangular lift point
proper jacking locations. symbol on the sill molding). Do not raise the
vehicle until you are sure the jack is fully
engaged.
CAUTION!
Do NOT raise the vehicle by the body side sill
molding. Be sure the jack is placed in the proper
Front Lifting Point engagement location on the inside of the panel.
Damage of the vehicle may occur if the
NOTE: procedure is not properly followed.
The jack must be placed straight on with handle
facing outwards.
Jacking Locations
3. For the front axle, place the jack on the body
flange just behind the front tire as indicated by 7
the triangular lift point symbol on the sill
molding. Do not raise the vehicle until you are
sure the jack is fully engaged.
Rear Lifting Point

Front Jacking Location
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw

CAUTION! counterclockwise, and remove the jack and
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve wheel blocks.
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be 9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
damaged if the inflatable spare tire is mounted the wrench while at the end of the handle for
incorrectly. increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a
star pattern until each nut has been tightened
twice. For correct lug nut torque Ú page 400.
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an
Rear Jacking Location authorized dealer or at a service station.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise. Raise the vehicle only until the tire
just clears the surface and enough clearance
is obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum
tire lift provides maximum stability.
WARNING! Mounting Spare Tire

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the WARNING!
jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
only enough to remove the tire. jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the Tighten Lug Nuts
vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow this
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel. warning may result in serious injury.
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the vehicle
and install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped
end toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
10. Lower the jack to the fully closed position. Second Row Seating Third Row Seating
11. Return the Jack and tools back into the jack 1. Securely store the road wheel in the cargo 1. Position the wheel behind the rear fascia/
storage bin. Reinstall the jack storage cover by area. bumper facing outward. Push the end of the
firmly pushing down until the two side clips winch’s cable, spring and steel sleeve
lock into position. through the back of the road wheel. Making
12. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut sure the valve stem is facing the ground when
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that all the wheel is stowed.
lug nuts are properly seated against the wheel.
13. Have the aluminum road wheel and tire
repaired as soon as possible and properly
secure the spare tire, jack and tool kit.
NOTE:
Do not drive with the spare tire installed for more
than 50 miles (80 km) at a max speed of 50 mph Road Wheel Installed In Spare Tire Location
(80 km/h). 2. Turn the fastener clockwise until secured.
NOTE:
Double check to ensure the tire is snug against the Installing Winch
7
underbody of the vehicle. Damage to the winch
cable may result if the vehicle is driven with the tire 2. Slide the road wheel on the ground until it is
loose. directly under the winch and between the rear
fascia/bumper and exhaust system heat
WARNING! shields. Raise the tire by turning the lug
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision wrench on the winch extension clockwise until
or hard stop could endanger the occupants of it clicks/ratchets three times to make sure the
the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the cable is tight.
spare tire in the places provided. Have the
deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced Reinstalling Tire Fastener
immediately.
JUMP STARTING NOTE:

When using a portable battery booster pack, follow
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can be the manufacturer's operating instructions and
jump started using a set of jumper cables and a precautions.
battery in another vehicle, or by using a portable
battery booster pack. Jump starting can be PREPARATIONS FOR J UMP START
dangerous if done improperly, so please follow the The battery in your vehicle is located under the
procedures in this section carefully. driver's front seat. There are remote terminals
located under the hood to assist in jump starting.
WARNING!
Winch Wrench Rotation Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
CAUTION! personal injury.
The winch mechanism is designed for use with

the jack wrench extension tool only. Use of air CAUTION!
wrench or power tool may damage the winch.
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system voltage
greater than 12 Volts or damage to the battery,
starter motor, alternator or electrical system may
Jump Starting Posts
occur.
Remote Positive (+) Post
Remote Negative (-) Post
Road Wheel Installed In Spare Location

NOTE:
WARNING!
J UMP S TARTING P ROCEDURE
The remote battery posts are viewed by standing
on the right side of the vehicle looking over the Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this WARNING!
fender. The positive battery post may be covered could establish a ground connection and
with a protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain personal injury could result. Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
access to the positive battery post. Do not jump off could result in personal injury or property
fuses. Only jump directly off positive post which damage due to battery explosion.
has a positive (+) symbol on or around the post. WARNING!
See the following steps to prepare for jump  Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
starting: CAUTION!
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can be Failure to follow these procedures could result in
transmission into PARK (P) and turn the injured by moving fan blades. damage to the charging system of the booster
ignition OFF. vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
 Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical watch bands and bracelets that could make
accessories. an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be NOTE:
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the seriously injured. Make sure at all times that unused ends of jumper
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper cables are not contacting each other or either
 Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn
cables’ reach, apply the parking brake and your skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas
vehicle while making connections. 7
make sure the ignition is OFF. which is flammable and explosive. Keep open
flames or sparks away from the battery.
NOTE:
Be sure that the disconnected cable ends do not
touch each other, or either vehicle, until properly
connected for jump starting.
Connecting The Jumper Cables 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the 4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper booster battery, let the engine idle a few jumper cable from the remote positive (+) post
cable to the remote positive (+) post of the minutes, and then start the engine in the of the discharged vehicle.
discharged vehicle. vehicle with the discharged battery. 5. Reinstall the protective cover over the remote
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
CAUTION!
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above 2, If frequent jump starting is required to start your
booster battery.
000 RPM since it provides no charging benefit, vehicle have the battery and charging system
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper tested at an authorized dealer.
wastes fuel, and can damage booster vehicle
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
engine.
battery. CAUTION!
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
6. Once the engine is started, follow the discon-
jumper cable to the remote negative (-) post outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
necting procedure below.
(exposed metallic/unpainted post of the even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices, etc.).
discharge vehicle) located directly in front of Disconnecting The Jumper Cables Eventually, if plugged in long enough without
the underhood fuse box. engine operation, the vehicle’s battery will
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable from the remote negative (-) post of the discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
WARNING! and/or prevent the engine from starting.
discharged vehicle.
Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative
(-) post of the discharged battery. The resulting 2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
electrical spark could cause the battery to jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
explode and could result in personal injury. booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster
battery.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY Emergency Gas Can Refueling

CAUTION!
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors. A
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel funnel is provided to allow emergency refueling To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
Ú page 314 for a Cap-Less Fuel System. If with a gas can. off” the fuel tank after filling.
refueling is necessary, while using an approved
gas can, please insert the refueling funnel into the See the following steps for refueling:
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off prior
filler neck opening. 1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
to putting back in the spare tire storage area.
area.
6. Close the fuel door making sure the latch is
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening as
engaged by pushing on the rear outer edge
the fuel nozzle.
near the center.
WARNING!
 Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open or
the tank is being filled.
 Never add fuel when the engine is running.
Refueling Funnel This is in violation of most state and federal 7
fire regulations and may cause the Malfunc-
NOTE:
tion Indicator Light to turn on.
In certain cold conditions, ice may prevent the fuel
door from opening. If this occurs, lightly push Inserting Funnel  A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
around the perimeter of the fuel door to break the 3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold flapper portable container that is inside of a vehicle.
ice build up. Re-release the fuel door by pushing on doors open. You could be burned. Always place fuel
the rear outer edge near the center to unlatch. Do containers on the ground while filling.
not pry on the door. 4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS WARNING! MANUAL PARK RELEASE

If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be You or others can be badly burned by hot engine WARNING!
serviced by an authorized dealer. coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator.
In any of the following situations, you can reduce If you see or hear steam coming from under the You should be seated in the driver’s seat with
the potential for overheating by taking the hood, do not open the hood until the radiator your foot firmly placed on the brake pedal to
appropriate action. has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling maintain control of the vehicle before activating
system pressure cap when the radiator or the Manual Park Release. If possible, you should
 On the highways — slow down. apply the parking brake. Activating the Manual
coolant bottle is hot.
 In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans- Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll away if
mission in NEUTRAL (N), but do not increase the it is not secured or properly connected to a tow
engine idle speed while preventing vehicle CAUTION! vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on
motion with the brakes. an unsecured vehicle could lead to serious
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage injury or death for those in or around the vehicle.
NOTE: your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
There are steps that you can take to slow down an HOT (H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the
impending overheat condition: vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until To move the vehicle in cases where the
 If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The the pointer drops back into the normal range. If transmission will not shift out of PARK (P) (such as
A/C system adds heat to the engine cooling the pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear a depleted battery), a Manual Park Release is
system and turning the A/C off can help remove continuous chimes, turn the engine off available.
this heat. immediately and call for service.
 You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the heater
core to act as a supplement to the radiator and
aids in removing heat from the engine cooling
system.
To activate the Manual Park Release, see the 5. Pull the lock plug out as far as it will go, then
following steps: release it. The transmission should now be in
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while NEUTRAL (N), allowing the vehicle to be
seated in the driver’s seat. moved.
2. Apply the parking brake, if possible. NOTE:
When the lever is locked in the released position,
3. Using a flathead screwdriver or similar tool,
the lock plug and tether will remain outside of the
remove the Manual Park Release access
trim panel and the access cover cannot be rein-
cover, which is to the lower left of the steering
stalled.
column.
6. Release the parking brake only when the
Manual Park Release Location vehicle is securely connected to a tow vehicle.
4. Unlock the orange lock plug by turning it a
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
quarter turn counterclockwise.
1. Apply firm pressure to the brake pedal while
seated in the driver’s seat.
2. Pull the lock plug out again, then release it.
3. Allow the tether to retract with the lever back
to its original position. 7
4. Verify that the transmission is in PARK (P).
Manual Park Release Access Cover 5. Confirm that the tether has retracted fully,
then firmly push the orange lock plug back to
NOTE: the locking position within the housing.
Insert the flathead screwdriver or similar tool in the Re-install the access cover. If the access
lower notch of the access cover and gently rotate Locked — Unlocked Position cover cannot be re-installed, repeat
clockwise to remove. steps 1 through 4.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE NOTE:

Push the ESC OFF button to place the Electronic CAUTION!
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or Stability Control (ESC) system in “Partial OFF”  Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking mode, before rocking the vehicle Ú page 252. lead to transmission overheating and failure.
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC OFF Allow the engine to idle with the transmission
clear the area around the front wheels. Push and button again to restore “ESC On” mode. in NEUTRAL for at least one minute after every
hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then, five rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize
shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and WARNING! overheating and reduce the risk of transmis-
REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the accelerator. sion failure during prolonged efforts to free a
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
NOTE: generated by excessive wheel speeds may stuck vehicle.
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can cause damage, or even failure, of the axle and  When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph tires. A tire could explode and injure someone. between DRIVE and REVERSE, do not spin the
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission Do not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or
remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 drivetrain damage may result.
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to seconds continuously without stopping when
engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R). you are stuck and do not let anyone near a  Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. fast may lead to transmission overheating and
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not
without spinning the wheels or racing the engine. spin the wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h)
while in gear (no transmission shifting
occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
If the transmission and drivetrain are operable, disabled 4x4 vehicles may also be towed as described on Ú page 196.
All-Wheel Drive Models

Rear-Wheel Drive All-Wheel Drive Models With Two-Speed
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground With Single-Speed
Models Transfer Case
Transfer Case
Detailed Instructions Ú page 196.
 Transmission in PARK
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
 Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)
 Tow in forward direction
Front NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Rear OK NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD OK BEST METHOD
7
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other equipment designed for this purpose, following
equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main structural members of the vehicle,
not to fascia/bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN mode, not the ACC mode.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK (P) in order to move the vehicle Ú page 326.
 The towing distance must not exceed 30 miles If flatbed equipment is not available, and the
CAUTION! (48 km). transfer case is operable, vehicles with a
 Do not use sling type equipment when towing. two-speed transfer case may be towed (in the
Vehicle damage may occur. CAUTION! forward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground),
IF the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the
 When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck,  Towing faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or
transmission is in PARK Ú page 196.
do not attach to front or rear suspension farther than 30 miles (48 km) with rear
components. If vehicle is equipped with wheels on the ground can cause severe trans- Vehicles equipped with a single-speed transfer
Quadra-lift air suspension, secure vehicle only mission damage. Damage from improper case have no NEUTRAL (N) position, and therefore
with tire/wheel straps (no suspension compo- towing is not covered under the New Vehicle must be towed will all four wheels OFF the ground.
nents or body) to prevent air suspension from Limited Warranty.
adjusting during towing against securement CAUTION!
straps and causing damage. Damage to your If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle  Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
vehicle may result from improper towing. must be towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or the remaining wheels are on the ground).
farther than 30 miles (48 km), tow with the rear Internal damage to the transmission or
wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to transfer case will occur if a front or rear wheel
REAR WHEEL DRIVE MODELS lift is used when towing.
tow the vehicle on a flatbed, or with the front
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle with wheels raised and the rear wheels on a towing  Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed. dolly, or (when using a suitable steering wheel requirements can cause severe transmission
If flatbed equipment is not available, and the stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight and/or transfer case damage. Damage from
transmission is operable, the vehicle may be towed position) with the rear wheels raised and the front improper towing is not covered under the New
(with rear wheels off the ground) under the wheels ON the ground. Vehicle Limited Warranty.
following conditions:
ALL WHEEL D RIVE MODELS
 The transmission must be in NEUTRAL (N). For
instructions on shifting the transmission to FCA US LLC recommends towing with all wheels
NEUTRAL (N) when the engine is off OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow
Ú page 326. the vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of the
vehicle raised and the opposite end on a towing
 The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph dolly.
(48 km/h).
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — NOTE: TOW EYE USAGE — I F EQUIPPED

For off road recovery, it is recommended to use
I F EQUIPPED both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of Your vehicle may come equipped with a front tow
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there damage to the vehicle. eye that can be used to move a disabled vehicle.
will be two mounted on the front of the vehicle and When using a the tow eye, follow the precautions
one in the rear. The rear tow hook will be located below.
on the driver's side of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to rescue
a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use tow
hooks for tow truck hookup or highway towing.
You could damage your vehicle.
Rear Tow Hook
WARNING! Tow Eye

7
 Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.
Chains may break, causing serious injury or
death.
 Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged,
causing serious injury.
Front Tow Hooks
Tow Eye Usage Precautions Tow Eye Installation

The front tow eye receptacle is located behind a
CAUTION!
door on the passenger’s side of the fascia/
 The tow eye must only be used for roadside bumper.
emergencies. Use with an appropriate device To install the tow eye, open the door using the
in accordance with highway code (a rigid bar vehicle key or a small screwdriver. Thread the tow
or rope) to maneuver the vehicle in prepara- eye into the receptacle, making sure it is fully
tion for transport via a tow truck. tightened.
 The tow eye must not be used to move the The tow eye must be securely seated to the
vehicle off the road or where there are obsta- attaching bracket through the lower front fascia/
Tow Eye Warning Label
cles. bumper. If the tow eye is not securely seated to the
 Do not use the tow eyes for tow truck hookup attaching bracket, the vehicle should not be
WARNING!
or highway towing. moved.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
 Do not use the tow eye to free a stuck vehicle eyes.
Ú page 328.
 Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains may
 Damage to your vehicle may occur if these break, causing serious injury or death.
guidelines are not followed Ú page 329.
 Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow
straps may break or become disengaged,
causing serious injury or death.
 Failure to follow proper tow eye usage may
cause components to break resulting in
Front Tow Eye Access Door
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM

(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact Ú page 288.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)

Front Tow Eye Installed Rear Tow Eye Access Door This vehicle is equipped with an event data
The rear tow eye receptacle is located behind a recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
door on the driver’s side of the rear fascia/bumper. record data that will assist in understanding how a
vehicle’s systems performed under certain crash
To install the tow eye, open the door using the or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag
vehicle key or a small screwdriver. Thread the tow deployment or hitting a road obstacle Ú page 290.
eye into the receptacle, making sure it is fully
tightened.
The tow eye must be securely seated to the
7
attaching bracket through the lower front fascia/
bumper. If the tow eye is not securely seated to the
attaching bracket, the vehicle should not be
moved. Rear Tow Eye Installed
334
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the scheduled
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
 Check engine oil level.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil oil change.
change indicator system. The oil change indicator  Check windshield washer fluid level.
NOTE:
system will remind you that it is time to take your  Check the tire inflation pressures and look for
Under no circumstances should oil change
vehicle in for scheduled maintenance. unusual wear or damage.
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil 12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,  Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
change indicator message will illuminate. This whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine brake master cylinder and fill as needed.
means that service is required for your vehicle. run or idle time is generally only a concern for fleet  Check function of all interior and exterior lights.
Operating conditions such as frequent short-trips, customers.
trailer tow, extremely hot or cold ambient
temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will influence
when the “Oil Change Required” message is
displayed. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 335
MAINTENANCE P LAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:

 Change oil and filter.
 Rotate the tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
 Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required.
 Inspect the CV/Universal joints.
 Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and parking brake.
 Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses.
 Inspect exhaust system.
 Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions. Replace engine air cleaner filter, as necessary.
8
336 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
Mileage or time passed (whichever
comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
X X X X X X X
and replace if necessary.
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid,
change if using your vehicle for police,
X X X X X
taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing.
Inspect the brake linings, parking brake
X X X X X X X
function.
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X X X
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. To be replaced every 12,000 mi (19,000 km).
Replace spark plugs — 2.0L.1 X X
Replace spark plugs — 3.6L & 5.7L.2 X

Flush and replace the engine coolant at
10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) X X
whichever comes first.
Replace accessory drive belt. X 8
Inspect accessory drive belt tensioner
X
and pulley, replace if necessary.
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
comes first)
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
Or Kilometers:
Change transfer case fluid - Normal

X
Usage.
Change transfer case fluid — Severe
Usage (police, taxi, fleet, off-road, or X X
frequent trailer towing.)
Replace PCV valve. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
2. The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
 You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have
any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
 Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could
cause an accident.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.0L E NGINE
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access

2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 7 — Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap
4 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
3.6L E NGINE
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 5 — Engine Oil Filter Access

2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 — Engine Oil Fill
3 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access
4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 8 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
5.7L E NGINE
8
1 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Access
2 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 6 — Engine Oil Dipstick
3 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 7 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
4 — Engine Oil Fill
CHECKING OIL L EVEL Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is at The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and
the low end of the dipstick range will raise the oil the rear window washer is shared. The fluid
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil level to the high end of the range marking. reservoir is located in the engine compartment, be
must be maintained at the correct level. Check the sure to check the fluid level at regular intervals. Fill
oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch the reservoir with windshield washer solvent only
stop. The best time to check the engine oil level is (not radiator antifreeze). When refilling the washer
about five minutes after a fully warmed up engine markings on the dipstick.
fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it
is shut off. NOTE: to a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper blades,
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground Use care when filling under hood fluids such as this will help blade performance. To prevent
will improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. engine oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc., to freeze-up of your windshield washer system in cold
minimize spillage onto the top of the engine. Any weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
There are four possible dipstick types: excess fluid that is spilled onto the top of the exceeds the temperature range of your climate.
 Crosshatched zone. engine should be removed using compressed air This rating information can be found on most
 Crosshatched zone marked SAFE. or an absorbent cloth. washer fluid containers.
 Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the low ADDING W ASHER FLUID NOTE:
end of the range and MAX at the high end of the Use care when filling under hood fluids such as
range. The instrument cluster display will indicate when engine oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc., to
the washer fluid level is low. When the sensor minimize spillage onto the top of the engine. Any
 Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at the detects a low fluid level, the windshield will light on
MIN and the MAX ends of the range. excess fluid that is spilled onto the top of the
the vehicle graphic outline and the “WASHER engine should be removed using compressed air
NOTE: FLUID LOW” message will be displayed. or an absorbent cloth.
Always maintain the oil level within the crosshatch
markings on the dipstick. WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling or
working around the washer solution.
MAINTENANCE-F REE BATTERY CAUTION! VEHICLE MAINTENANCE

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free  It is essential when replacing the cables on An authorized dealer has the qualified service
battery. Water will never have to be added, and the battery that the positive cable is attached personnel, special tools, and equipment to
periodic maintenance is not required. to the positive post and the negative cable is perform all service operations in an expert
attached to the negative post. Battery posts manner. Service Manuals are available which
WARNING! are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and include detailed service information for your
 Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and are identified on the battery case. Cable vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow clamps should be tight on the terminal posts attempting any procedure yourself.
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or and free of corrosion. NOTE:
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when  If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is Intentional tampering with emissions control
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery systems may void your warranty and could result in
on skin, flush the area immediately with large cables before connecting the charger to the civil penalties being assessed against you.
amounts of water. Refer to Jump Starting battery. Do not use a “fast charger” to provide
Procedure Ú page 323. WARNING!
starting voltage.
 Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep You can be badly injured working on or around a
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not motor vehicle. Only do service work for which
use a booster battery or any other booster
PRESSURE WASHING you have the knowledge and the proper
source with an output greater than 12 Volts. Cleaning the engine compartment with a high equipment. If you have any doubt about your
Do not allow cable clamps to touch each pressure washer is not recommended. ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle
other. to a competent mechanic. 8
 Battery posts, terminals, and related accesso-
CAUTION!
ries contain lead and lead compounds. Wash Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
hands after handling. parts and connections however, the pressures
generated by these machines is such that
complete protection against water ingress
cannot be guaranteed.
ENGINE OIL The API Starburst trademark certifies Materials Added To Engine Oil
0W-20, 0W-30 and 5W-30 engine oils.
The manufacturer strongly recommends against
Engine Oil Selection
the addition of any additives (other than leak
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil is an
Ú page 405. The API Donut trademark certifies 0W-40
and 5W-40 engine oil. engineered product and its performance may be
NOTE: impaired by supplemental additives.
Hemi engines at times can tick right after startup Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
and then quiet down after approximately 30
Filters
seconds. This is normal and will not harm the CAUTION!
engine. This characteristic can be caused by short Care should be taken in disposing of used engine
drive cycles. For example, if the vehicle is started Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil
then shut off after driving a short distance. Upon the chemicals can damage your engine. Such filters, indiscriminately discarded, can present a
restarting, you may experience a ticking sound. damage is not covered by the New Vehicle problem to the environment. Contact an
Other causes could be if the vehicle is unused for Limited Warranty. authorized dealer, service station or governmental
an extended period of time, incorrect oil, extended agency for advice on how and where used oil and
oil changes or extended idling. If the engine oil filters can be safely discarded in your area.
Synthetic Engine Oils
continues to tick or if the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) comes on, see the nearest authorized
Your engine was designed for synthetic engine oils, ENGINE OIL FILTER
only use synthetic API approved engine oils.
dealer. The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the filter at every engine oil change.
American Petroleum Institute (API)
correct API trademark and the correct SAE viscosity
Approved Engine Oil Engine Oil Filter Selection
grade numbers should not be used.
These symbols mean that the oil has been certified A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be used
by the API. The manufacturer only recommends API for replacement. The quality of replacement filters
trademark oils. varies considerably. Only high quality Mopar®
filters should be used.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER F ILTER 2. Lift the engine air cleaner filter cover at the 1. Install the engine air cleaner filter into the
outside edge, tipping it while pushing inboard housing assembly with the engine air cleaner
For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 335. to detach the cover from the lower shell at the filter inspection surface facing downward.
hinge to access the engine air cleaner filter. 2. Install the engine air cleaner filter cover onto
WARNING!
the housing assembly locating tabs.
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, 3. Tighten the fasteners on the engine air cleaner
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in the filter assembly.
case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless
such removal is necessary for repair or CAUTION!
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the Do not over tighten the engine air cleaner filter
engine compartment before starting the vehicle cover lid screws or damage to the cover may
with the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, result.
etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover AIR CONDITIONER M AINTENANCE
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection 1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter Cover For best possible performance, your air conditioner
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner 2 — Fasteners should be checked and serviced by an authorized
filters varies considerably. Only high quality dealer at the start of each warm season. This
Mopar® filters should be used. service should include cleaning of the condenser
3. Remove the engine air cleaner filter from the
fins and a performance test. Drive belt tension 8
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and housing assembly.
should also be checked at this time.
Replacement
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
NOTE:
1. With a suitable tool, fully loosen fasteners on Inspect and clean the housing assembly if signif-
the engine air cleaner filter cover. icant dirt or debris is present before replacing the
engine air cleaner filter.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling — The cabin air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
WARNING! behind the glove compartment. Perform the
R–1234yf
 Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri- following procedure to replace the filter:
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
cants approved by the manufacturer for your 1. Open the glove compartment and remove all
Hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
air conditioning system. Some unapproved contents.
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
refrigerants are flammable and can explode,
ozone-friendly substance with a low 2. There is a glove compartment travel stop on
injuring you. Other unapproved refrigerants or
global-warming potential. The manufacturer the right side of the glove compartment door,
lubricants can cause the system to fail,
recommends that air conditioning service be partially close the glove compartment door
requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty
performed by an authorized dealer using recovery and pull the travel stop toward you to release
Information Book, for further warranty
and recycling equipment. the glove compartment travel stop.
information.
NOTE:
 The air conditioning system contains refrig-
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system PAG
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of compressor oil, and refrigerants.
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring lines Cabin Air Filter Replacement
to be disconnected should be done by an For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 335.
experienced technician.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
CAUTION! vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in the
Do not use chemical flushes in your air ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air filter removed
conditioning system as the chemicals can and the blower operating, the blower can Glove Compartment
damage your air conditioning components. Such contact hands and may propel dirt and debris 1 — Glove Compartment Travel Stop
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle into your eyes, resulting in personal injury.
2 — Glove Compartment Door
Limited Warranty.
3. Pull the right hand side of the glove 5. Squeeze the retaining tabs together that
compartment door toward the rear of the secures the cabin air filter cover to the HVAC CAUTION!
vehicle to disengage the glove compartment housing. Unhinge the filter cover on the right The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow to
door from its hinges. side to fully remove the cover. indicate airflow direction through the filter.
NOTE: Failure to properly install the filter will result in
When disengaging the glove compartment door the need to replace it more often.
from its hinges, there will be some resistance.
4. With the glove compartment door loose, 8. Reinstall the glove compartment door on the
remove the glove compartment tension tether door hinge and reattach the tension tether by
and tether clip by sliding the clip toward the inserting the tether clip in the glove
face of the glove compartment door and lifting compartment and sliding the clip away from
the clip out of glove compartment door. the face of the glove compartment door.
9. Push the door to the near closed position to
reengage the glove compartment travel stops.
Cabin Air Filter Cover NOTE:
Ensure the glove compartment door hinges and
1 — Retaining Tabs
glove compartment travel stops are fully engaged.
6. Remove the cabin air filter by pulling it straight

out of the housing.
8
7. Install the cabin air filter with the arrow on the
filter pointing toward the floor. When installing
Right Side Of Glove Compartment the filter cover, make sure the retaining tabs
fully engage into the HVAC housing.
1 — Glove Compartment Tension Tether
2 — Glove Compartment Door
ACCESSORY D RIVE BELT INSPECTION Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
WARNING! vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
 Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive BODY LUBRICATION

belt with vehicle running. Locks and all body pivot points, including such
 When working near the radiator cooling fan, items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and
temperature controlled and can start at any hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with
time regardless of ignition mode. You could be a lithium-based grease, such as Mopar® Spray
injured by the moving fan blades. Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt) White Lube to ensure quiet, easy operation and to
protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
 You can be badly injured working on or around Conditions that would require replacement: application of any lubricant, the parts concerned
a motor vehicle. Only do service work for which  Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit;
you have the knowledge and the proper equip- from belt body) after lubricating excess oil and grease should be
ment. If you have any doubt about your ability removed. Particular attention should also be given
to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a  Rib or belt wear
to hood latching components to ensure proper
competent mechanic.  Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two function. When performing other underhood
ribs) services, the hood latch, release mechanism and
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small  Belt slips safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
cracks that run across ribbed surface of belt from  “Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
rib to rib, are considered normal. These are not a correct position on pulley) twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and Spring.
reason to replace belt. However, cracks running Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
 Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem
along a rib (not across) are not normal. Any belt such as Mopar® Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
before new belt is installed)
with cracks running along a rib must be replaced. into the lock cylinder.
Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive wear,  Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble
frayed cords or severe glazing. is heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
WINDSHIELD WIPER B LADES The wiper blades and wiper arms should be 1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off
inspected periodically, not just when wiper of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the full
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the performance problems are experienced. This up position.
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth inspection should include the following points:
and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
 Wear or uneven edges
accumulations of salt or road film.
 Foreign material
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper  Hardening or cracking
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the  Deformation or fatigue
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry windshield.
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice the affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do
from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of not attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is
contact with petroleum products such as engine damaged.
oil, gasoline, etc.
Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending CAUTION! 1 — Wiper
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor 2 — Release Tab
performance of blades may be present with chat- Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in 3 — Wiper Arm
tering, marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of
these conditions are present, clean the wiper place or the glass may be damaged.
blades or replace as necessary. 8
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper 3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the Installing The Front Wipers
arm, flip up the release tab on the wiper blade wiper blade from the wiper arm by holding the 1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
and while holding the wiper arm with one wiper arm with one hand and separating the wiper arm is in the full up position.
hand, slide the wiper blade down towards the wiper blade from the wiper arm with the other
base of the wiper arm. hand (move the wiper blade toward the right 2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the
side of the vehicle to separate the wiper blade tip of the wiper arm with the wiper release tab
from the wiper arm). open and the blade side of the wiper facing up
and away from the windshield.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through
the opening in the wiper blade under the
release tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the
wiper arm and rotate the wiper blade until it is
flush against the wiper arm. Fold down the
latch release tab and snap it into its locked
position. Latch engagement will be
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position accompanied by an audible click.
1 — Wiper Blade 5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm 1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Release Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.

Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation NOTE: Installing The Rear Wiper

1. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass. a. Resistance will be accompanied by an 1. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
audible snap. 2. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
b. The wiper arm does not stay in the service opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab the
up position. bottom end of the wiper arm with one hand,
and press the wiper blade flush with the wiper
3. Still grabbing the bottom end of the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
blade, move the wiper blade upward and away
3. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
from the wiper arm to disengage.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry
into the vehicle body is a properly maintained
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position engine exhaust system.
1 — Wiper Blade If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust
2 — Wiper Arm system; or if the exhaust fumes can be detected
inside the vehicle; or when the underside or rear of
the vehicle is damaged; have an authorized
2. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm, technician inspect the complete exhaust system
grab the bottom end of the wiper blade and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged,
nearest to wiper arm with your left hand. With Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams 8
your right hand, hold the wiper arm as you pull or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
1 — Wiper Blade
the wiper blade away from the wiper arm past to seep into the passenger compartment. In
its stop (far enough to unsnap the wiper blade 2 — Wiper Arm
addition, have the exhaust system inspected each
pivot from the receptacle on the end of the time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
wiper arm). 4. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto the change. Replace as required.
glass.
In unusual situations involving grossly

WARNING! CAUTION! malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching odor
 Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain  Damage to the catalytic converter can result if may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
Carbon Monoxide (CO), which is colorless and your vehicle is not kept in proper operating overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon- condition. In the event of engine malfunction, the engine and allow it to cool. Service, including a
scious and can eventually poison you. To particularly involving engine misfire or other tune-up to manufacturer's specifications, should
avoid breathing CO Ú page 305. apparent loss of performance, have your be obtained immediately.
vehicle serviced promptly. Continued opera- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
 A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
tion of your vehicle with a severe malfunction damage:
park over materials that can burn. Such mate-
could cause the converter to overheat,
rials might be grass or leaves coming into  Do not interrupt the ignition when the transmis-
resulting in possible damage to the converter
contact with your exhaust system. Do not park sion is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
and vehicle.
or operate your vehicle in areas where your  Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
exhaust system can contact anything that can towing the vehicle.
burn. Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However, it  Do not idle the engine with any ignition compo-
is important to keep the engine properly tuned to nents disconnected or removed, such as when
CAUTION! ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent diagnostic testing, or for prolonged periods
possible catalyst damage. during very rough idle or malfunctioning oper-
 The catalytic converter requires the use of ating conditions.
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will NOTE:
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as an Intentional tampering with emissions control
emissions control device and may seriously systems can result in civil penalties being
reduce engine performance and cause assessed against you.
serious damage to the engine.
(Continued)
COOLING SYSTEM authorized dealer. Check the front of the A/C Selection Of Coolant
condenser for any accumulation of bugs, leaves,
Refer to Engine Fluids And Lubricants
WARNING! etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
Ú page 405.
garden hose vertically down the face of the
 You or others can be badly burned by hot condenser. NOTE:
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle  Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
radiator. If you see or hear steam coming from rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT)
under the hood, do not open the hood until the connection at the coolant recovery bottle and engine coolant, may result in engine damage
radiator has had time to cool. Never open a radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO and may decrease corrosion protection. OAT
cooling system pressure cap when the radi- NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP engine coolant is different and should not be
ator or coolant bottle is hot. WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT. mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
 Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry away
(HOAT) engine coolant or any “globally compat-
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill ible” coolant. If a non-OAT engine coolant is
from the radiator cooling fan when the hood is
raised. The fan starts automatically and may NOTE: introduced into the cooling system in an emer-
start at any time, whether the engine is Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant gency, the cooling system will need to be
running or not. properly. Failure to fill these systems properly drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT
could lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
 When working near the radiator cooling fan, coolant is needed to be added to the system rized dealer as soon as possible.
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the igni- please contact an authorized dealer.  Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
tion to the OFF position. The fan is tempera-
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or coolant products. Do not use additional rust
ture controlled and can start at any time the
ignition is in the ON position.
contains visible sediment, have an authorized inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not 8
dealer clean and flush with Organic Additive be compatible with the radiator engine coolant
Technology (OAT) coolant (conforming to and may plug the radiator.
Engine Coolant Checks MS.90032).
Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection For the proper maintenance intervals Ú page 335.
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine coolant is
dirty, the system should be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) coolant (conforming to MS.90032) by an
 This vehicle has not been designed for use with  Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine  Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
propylene glycol-based engine coolant. Use of coolant that meets the requirements of the mended and can result in cooling system
propylene glycol-based engine coolant is not manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032 damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in
recommended. and distilled water. Use higher concentrations an emergency, have an authorized dealer drain,
 Some vehicles require special tools to add (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below flush, and refill with OAT coolant (conforming to
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems −34°F (−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact MS.90032) as soon as possible.
an authorized dealer for assistance.
properly could lead to severe internal engine Cooling System Pressure Cap
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to  Use only high purity water such as distilled or
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
the system please contact an authorized dealer. deionized water when mixing the water/engine engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that
coolant solution. The use of lower quality water
Adding Coolant engine coolant will return to the radiator from the
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection
Your vehicle has been built with an improved coolant expansion bottle/recovery tank (if
in the engine cooling system.
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to equipped).
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance NOTE: The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can  It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the is any accumulation of foreign material on the
be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles proper level of protection against freezing sealing surfaces.
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent according to the temperatures occurring in the
reducing this extended maintenance period, it is area where the vehicle is operated. WARNING!
important that you use the same engine coolant  Use care when filling under hood fluids such as  Do not open a hot engine cooling system.
(OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) throughout engine oil, washer fluid, antifreeze, etc., to mini- Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the life of your vehicle. mize spillage onto the top of the engine. Any the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
Please review these recommendations for using excess fluid that is spilled onto the top of the remove the cap to cool an overheated engine.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant engine should be removed using compressed Heat causes pressure to build up in the
that meets the requirements of the manufacturer air or an absorbent cloth. cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury,
Material Standard MS.90032. When adding  Some vehicles require special tools to add do not remove the pressure cap while the
engine coolant: coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems system is hot or under pressure.
 We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/ properly could lead to severe internal engine
 Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km) damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of the the system, please contact a local authorized
engine damage may result.
manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032. dealer.
Disposal Of Used Coolant Engine Coolant Level — 2.0L The radiator normally remains completely full, so
there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. WARNING! pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant
freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
Check with your local authorities to determine the  Do not open a hot engine cooling system.
service attendant of this. As long as the engine
disposal rules for your community. To prevent Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant
ingestion by animals or children, do not store the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
bottle need only be checked once a month.
ethylene glycol-based coolant in open containers remove the cap to cool an overheated engine.
or allow it to remain in puddles on the ground, Heat causes pressure to build up in the When additional engine coolant is needed to
clean up any ground spills immediately. If ingested cooling system. To prevent scalding or injury, maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that
by a child or pet, seek emergency assistance do not remove the pressure cap while the meets the requirements of the manufacturer
immediately. system is hot or under pressure. Material Standard MS.90032 should be added to
the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Coolant Level  Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or Cooling System Notes
for determining that the coolant level is adequate. engine damage may result. NOTE:
With the engine off and cold, the level of the engine When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/kilo-
coolant (antifreeze) in the bottle should be With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the meters of operation, you may observe vapor
between the ranges indicated on the bottle. engine coolant should be within the OK range coming from the front of the engine compartment.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so between the ADD and FULL range on the dipstick. This is normally a result of moisture from rain,
there is no need to remove the radiator/coolant snow, or high humidity accumulating on the
1. Remove the cap with level dipstick from the
pressure cap unless checking for engine coolant radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat 8
engine coolant bottle.
freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your opens, allowing hot engine coolant (antifreeze) to
service attendant of this. As long as the engine 2. Clean off the coolant from the dipstick. enter the radiator.
operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant 3. Rest the cap on the opening of the coolant
bottle need only be checked once a month. bottle without tightening the cap.
When additional engine coolant is needed to 4. Remove the cap with dipstick and check the
maintain the proper level, only OAT coolant that coolant level on the dipstick.
meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS.90032 should be added to
the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
If an examination of your engine compartment BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING!

shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the
vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will soon In order to ensure brake system performance, all  Use only manufacturer's recommended brake
dissipate. brake system components should be inspected fluid Ú page 406. Using the wrong type of
periodically. For the proper maintenance intervals brake fluid can severely damage your brake
 Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Ú page 335. system and/or impair its performance. The
 Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine WARNING! also identified on the original factory installed
coolant needs to be added, the contents of the
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
coolant expansion bottle must also be protected
against freezing. possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting  To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
or riding on the brake pedal can result in moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that
 If frequent engine coolant additions are abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive
required, the cooling system should be pressure has been in a tightly closed container. Keep
lining wear, and possible brake damage. You the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at
tested for leaks. would not have your full braking capacity in an all times. Brake fluid in a open container
 Maintain engine coolant concentration at a emergency. absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper corro- unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
sion protection of your engine which contains braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This
aluminum components. The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
could result in a collision.
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or
 Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle (Continued)
immediately if the Brake System Warning Light is
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level within the
 Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your designated marks on the side of the reservoir of
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning, keep the brake master cylinder. Be sure to clean the top
the front of the condenser clean. of the master cylinder area before removing cap.
 Do not change the thermostat for Summer or With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected to fall
Winter operation. If replacement is ever neces- as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be
sary, install ONLY the correct type thermostat. checked when pads are replaced. If the brake fluid
Other designs may result in unsatisfactory is abnormally low, check the system for leaks.
engine cooling performance, poor gas mileage,
and increased emissions.
Fluid And Filter Changes

WARNING! CAUTION!
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
 Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result Do not use chemical flushes in your installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, transmission as the chemicals can damage your lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
causing the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake transmission components. Such damage is not
fluid can also damage painted and vinyl covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Routine fluid and filter changes are not required.
surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its However, change the fluid and filter if the fluid
contact with these surfaces. becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the
Fluid Level Check transmission is disassembled for any reason.
 Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contam- The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
inate the brake fluid. Brake seal components
Selection Of Lubricant
require adjustment under normal operating
could be damaged, causing partial or It is important to use the proper transmission fluid
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
complete brake failure. This could result in a to ensure optimum transmission performance and
required; therefore the transmission has no
collision. life. Use only the manufacturer's specified
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid Ú page 406. It is important to
transmission fluid level using special service tools.
maintain the transmission fluid at the correct level
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
using the recommended fluid.
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
Special Additives immediately to have the transmission fluid level NOTE:
The manufacturer strongly recommends against checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper No chemical flushes should be used in any trans-
using any special additives in the transmission. fluid level can cause severe transmission damage. mission; only the approved lubricant should be
Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an used.
CAUTION! 8
engineered product and its performance may be
CAUTION!
impaired by supplemental additives. Therefore, do If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
not add any fluid additives to the transmission. authorized dealer immediately. Severe Using a transmission fluid other than the
Avoid using transmission sealers as they may transmission damage may occur. An authorized manufacturer’s recommended fluid may cause
adversely affect seals. dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid deterioration in transmission shift quality and/or
level accurately. torque converter shudder.
FRONT/REAR A XLE F LUID Rear Axle Fluid Level Check Adding Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are The rear axle oil level needs to be no lower than Add fluid at the filler hole, until it runs out of the
not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other 1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole. hole, when the vehicle is in a level position.
reasons the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly The rear axle fill and drain plugs should be Drain
should be inspected. If gear oil leakage is tightened to 22 to 29 ft-lb (30 to 40 N·m).
First remove fill plug, then remove drain plug.
suspected inspect the fluid level. Recommended tightening torque for drain and fill
CAUTION!
Front Axle Fluid Level Check plugs is 15 to 25 ft-lb (20 to 34 N·m).
The front axle oil level needs to be no lower than Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage
1/8 inch (3 mm) below the bottom of the fill hole. them and cause them to leak. CAUTION!
The front axle fill and drain plugs should be When installing plugs, do not overtighten. You
tightened to 22 to 29 ft-lb (30 to 40 N·m). Selection Of Lubricant could damage them and cause them to leak.
Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
CAUTION! Ú page 406. Selection Of Lubricant
Do not overtighten the plugs as it could damage TRANSFER C ASE Use only the manufacturer's recommended fluid
them and cause them to leak. Ú page 406.
Fluid Level Check
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are
not required. When the vehicle is serviced for other
reasons the exterior surfaces of the transfer case
assembly should be inspected. If oil leakage is
suspected inspect the fluid level.
FUSES The fuses protect electrical systems against

CAUTION!
excessive current.
General Information When a device does not work, you must check the If it is necessary to wash the engine
fuse element inside the blade fuse for a break/ compartment, take care not to directly hit the
WARNING! fuse box, and the windshield wiper motors with
melt.
 When replacing a blown fuse, always use an water.
Also, please be aware that using power outlets for
appropriate replacement fuse with the same extended periods of time with the engine off may
amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace result in vehicle battery discharge. Underhood Fuses
a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indi- The Power Distribution Center (PDC) is located on
cated may result in a dangerous electrical the passenger side of the engine compartment,
system overload. If a properly rated fuse behind the headlamp. This center contains
continues to blow, it indicates a problem in the cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit
circuit that must be corrected. Never replace a breakers. A description of each fuse and
blown fuse with metal wires or any other mate- component may be stamped on the inside cover,
rial. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit otherwise the cavity number of each fuse is
breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to
proper fuses may result in serious personal the following chart.
injury, fire and/or property damage.
CAUTION!
 Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the Blade Fuses
ignition is off and that all the other services When installing the power distribution center 8
1 — Fuse Element cover, it is important to ensure the cover is
are switched off and/or disengaged.
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to
 If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an element do so may allow water to get into the power
authorized dealer. distribution center and possibly result in an
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse
 If a general protection fuse for safety systems
electrical system failure.
element (blown fuse)
(air bag system, braking system), power unit
systems (engine system, transmission
system) or steering system blows, contact an
authorized dealer.
Power Distribution Center

NOTE:
Fuses for safety systems must be serviced by an authorized dealer.
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

* If Equipped
F01 – – Crank Batt
F02 – – Spare
F03 500 Amp Gray – Starter
F04 250 Amp Gray – Alternator
F05 – – Spare
F06 – – Aux Battery Input
F07 100 Amp Gray – Rad Fan
F08 80 Amp Gray – Electrical Power Steering Module (EPS) #1
F09 80 Amp Gray – Electrical Power Steering Module (EPS) #2
F10 80 Amp Gray – Feed to IPDC
F11 150 Amp Gray – PCR *
F12 – – Not Populated
F13 40 Amp Green – Starter
8
F14 – 10 Amp Red GNMM / VPMS*
F15 – 10 Amp Red ECM*
F16 – 15 Amp Blue Cluster
F17A – 10 Amp Red EPS
F17B – – Not Populated
F18 30 Amp Pink – Headlamp Washer
F19 30 Amp Pink – BSM Valves #2*

* If Equipped
F23A – 10 Amp Red ECM / EPS / PIM / SLM / GPF
F23B – 10 Amp Red AIR SUSPENSION / ELSD RR
F26 50 Amp Red – BSM Motor #2*
F27 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster (EBL)
F36 50 Amp Red – BCM Feed #1
F37 30 Amp Pink – DTCM

* If Equipped
F40 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor #1
F41 – 20 Amp Yellow CADM MAP*
F43 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module (ECM)
F45 – 15 Amp Blue Front Axle Disconnect
F48 – 10 Amp Red CVPAM
F51 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump
8
F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Headlamp LT
F55 – 15 Amp Blue BPCM *

* If Equipped
F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Camera Washer Front
F64 – 15 Amp Blue Smart Bar Control Module (ASBS)
ACT Grille Shutter / ACT Rear Axle Coolant Valve / Active Air
F65 – 15 Amp Blue
Dam
F66 – 20 Amp Yellow Horns
F67 – 10 Amp Red DTCM / ASBS / Switchable Engine Mount / BSM #2
F68 – 20 Amp Yellow Headlamp RT
F70 – 20 Amp Yellow IGN Coil / IGN Capacitors / Fuel Inj
F76 – 5 Amp Tan IDCM *
F77 – 20 Amp Yellow TCM SBW

* If Equipped
F78 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM
F79 – 10 Amp Red Fuel Door / ELCM / Fuel Injectors *
F80 20 Amp Blue – ECM
F81 40 Amp Green – BCM Feed
F83 40 Amp Green – LTR Coolant Pump* / Trans Oil Pump *
F85 – 10 Amp Red PCR
F86 50 Amp Red – BSM Feed #1 - Valves
F88 50 Amp Red – BSM Feed Motor #1
8
F92 20 Amp Blue – Front De-Icer

* If Equipped
F94 – 10 Amp Red A/C Compressor Clutch
F95 – 10 Amp Red Batt Cool Heater *
F96 – 5 Amp Tan Elect Cool Heater *
F100A – – Not Populated
F100B – – Not Populated
F103 30 Amp Pink – Frt Wiper
F104A – 15 Amp Blue PECP Low Temp Passive Pump *
F104B – 15 Amp Blue AHP High Temp Aux Pump *
F105A – 15 Amp Blue BCP Low Temp Active Pump *
F105B – 15 Amp Blue LTR Coolant Pump
Interior Power Distribution Center NOTE:

The Interior Power Distribution Center is located Fuses for safety systems must be serviced by an
underneath the steering column on the driver’s authorized dealer.
side of the vehicle. This center contains cartridge
fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers.
Fuse numbers are labeled next to each fuse cavity,
fuse descriptions correspond with the following
chart.
Interior PDC Location

* If Equipped
F01 – – Spare
F02 25 Amp Clear – MTR Sunshade Sunroof Dual Pane / MTR sunroof single Pane
F03 – 15 Amp Blue MOD Seat Heater Frt (Steering Wheel)*
F04 – 10 Amp Red Night Vision Module / Driver Monitoring Camera (DMC)
F05 – – Spare 8
F06 – – Spare
F07 – – Spare
Automatic Gearbox Shifter Module (AGSM) / Steering Column
F08 – 15 Amp Blue
Lock
F09 – – Spare
F10 40 Amp Green – HVAC Blower Motor
F11 – – Spare

* If Equipped
F12 – 20 Amp Yellow Assy Cigar Lighter
Assy Mirror Inside Rearview / Digital TV (DTV) - China - Japan /
F13 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof Single - Dual Pane / Port UC1 Dual USB RR / Interior
Monitoring Camera
F14 – – Spare
F15A – – Spare
F15B – – Spare
F16 – 10 Amp Red MOD ORC
F17 – – Spare
F18 – – Spare
F19 – – Spare
Overhead Console Assy (OHC) W/Sunshade / Intrusion
F20 – 10 Amp Red Module / Intrusion Sensor / Siren / Heads Up Display (HUD) /
Digital TV (DTV) China - Japan
F21 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Electric Brake - After market
F22 – – Spare
F23 – – Spare
F24 – – Spare
F25 – – Spare
F26 – – Spare
F27 – – Spare

* If Equipped
F28 – – Spare
F29 – – Spare
F30 – – Spare
F31 – – Spare
MOD ICS Switch Bank / SW Bank Upper / SW EPB / Aux
F32 – 15 Amp Blue
Switch Bank Module (ASBM)
Transfer case SW / Humidity Rain Light Sensor (HRLS) /
F33 – 15 Amp Blue
Suspension SW*
F34 – – Spare
F35 – 10 Amp Red IRCAM Heater
F36 – – Spare
F37 – – Spare
F38 – – Spare
F39 – – Spare 8
F40 – – Spare
F41A – 10 Amp Red MOD Occupant Class / Steering Column Lock
F41B – 10 Amp Red Spare
Parktronics System MOD (PTS) / MOD Haptic Lane
F42A – 10 Amp Red
Feedback / Trailer Tow Module
F42B – 10 Amp Red MOD HVAC Control / Frt ERC Motor Ctrl / RR ERC Motor Ctrl
F43A – – Spare

* If Equipped
F43B – – Spare
F44 – 15 Amp Blue MOD Cluster CCN / MOD SGW (Cybersecurity)
F45 – – Spare
F46 – – Spare
F47A – – Spare
F47B – – Spare
F48A – – Spare
F48B – – Spare
F49 – 7.5 Amp Brown MOD RF HUB / Module Ignition (MD KIN)
Telematics Box Module (TBM) / MOD Front Passenger Display
F50A – 10 Amp Red
Module (FPDM) / MOD DCSD*
F50B – 10 Amp Red Port Diagnostics 1 & 2
F51A – – Spare
F51B – – Spare
F52 – – Spare
F53 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD CMCM (Radio)
F54A – – Spare
F54B – – Spare
F55 – – Spare
F56 – – Spare

* If Equipped
F57 – – Spare
F58 – – Spare
F59 – – Spare
F60 – – Spare
F61 – – Spare
F62A – – Spare
F62B – – Spare
Media HUB #1 Frt / Port UC1 Dual USB Frt / Wireless
F63A – 15 Amp Blue
Charging Pad MOD (WCPM) - High/Premium Only
F63B – 15 Amp Blue Spare
F64A – 10 Amp Red MOD ORC
F64B – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)
F65 – 5 Amp Tan MOD SGW (Cybersecurity)
F66 – – Spare 8
CB1 – – Spare
CB2 – – Spare
CB3 – – Spare
CB4 – – Spare
CB5 – – Spare
CB6 – – Spare
Rear Power Distribution Center NOTE:

CAUTION! Fuses for safety systems must be serviced by an
The Rear Power Distribution Center is located
 When installing the power distribution center underneath the passenger seat. This center authorized dealer.
cover, it is important to ensure the cover is contains cartridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and
properly positioned and fully latched. Failure circuit breakers. The following chart corresponds
to do so may allow water to get into the power to the fuses inside.
distribution center and possibly result in an
electrical system failure.

* If Equipped
F03 Shunt – Auxiliary Battery Feed *
F05 150 Amp Gray – Underhood PDC Feed *
F06 – – Spare
F07 – – Spare
F08 – – Spare
F09 – – Spare
F10 – – Spare
F11 50 Amp Red – Mod BCM Feed #2
F12 – – Spare
F13 – – Spare
F14 – – Spare
F15A – – Spare
Hands Free Liftgate / Rear Window Switches / MOD HVAC
F15B – 10 Amp Red
Cntrl Frt

* If Equipped
F16 – – Spare
F17 40 Amp Green – Mod BCM Feed #3
F18 30 Amp Pink – Power Liftgate Module
F19A – 10 Amp Red L2+ Driver Alert Lighting Module
F19B – – Spare
F20A – 15 Amp Blue Central ADAS Decision Module (CADM) - LO
F20B – – Spare
F21A – – Spare
F21B – – Spare
F22 – – Spare
F23 – 10 Amp Red Media Hub #2 (RR) / #3 (LR)
F24 – – Spare
F25 30 Amp Pink – Mod Door MUX Passenger
8
F26 20 Amp Blue – Headrest Dump 3rd Row (LT & RT)*
F27 – – Spare
F28 30 Amp Pink – MOD Memory / Power Seat (Passenger Frt)
F29A – 10 Amp Red MOD ICS Switch Bank Rear (Frt Console)
F29B – – Spare
F30 30 Amp Pink – MOD Memory / Power Seat (Driver Frt)
F31 – – Spare

* If Equipped
F32 – – Spare
F33 – – Spare
F34 30 Amp Pink – MOD Door MUX Driver
F35 25 Amp Clear – Trailer Tow Module #2
F36A – 10 Amp Red Intelligent Event Base Lighting Module
F36B – 10 Amp Red Port Pwr USB Console (USB CH Only) / Port UCI Dual USB Rear
F37 25 Amp Clear – Trailer Tow Module #1
F38 – – Spare
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 30 Amp Green Mod Audio Amplifier #1A
F41 – – Spare
F42A – – Spare
Rear Entertainment Screens 1 (Res1) / (Res2) / Media Hub
F42B – 10 Amp Red #2 RR Wake Up / Media Hub #3 Wake Up / APO Illumination /
2nd - 3rd Row Seat Switches-Illumination
F43 – – Spare
F44A – 20 Amp Yellow 12 Volt Power Outlet Cargo Area (Ign)
F44B – 20 Amp Yellow 12 Volt Power Outlet Cargo Area (Battery)
F45 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD CRSM (Heated Seat RR RT)
F46 30 Amp Pink – WL75 Folding Seat Module 3rd Row Feed #1*
F47 – – Spare

* If Equipped
F48 – – Spare
F49 – – Spare
Seat Massage Driver Mod (SSMD) / Seat Massage Passenger
F50 – 15 Amp Blue
Mod (SSMP)*
F51 – 30 Amp Green MOD IAir Suspension (Valves)
F52 – 20 Amp Yellow MOD CRSM (Heat Seat RR LT)*
F53 30 Amp Pink – Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD) Rear #1
F54 – – Spare
F55 30 Amp Pink – MOD Inverter
F56 30 Amp Pink – WL75 Folding Seat Module 3rd Row Feed #2*
F57 – – Spare
3rd Row Additional USB charge (Only LT - RT) / Port Pwr USB
F58 – 15 Amp Blue
Console UBS (CH Only)
F59 – – Spare 8
F60 – – Spare

* If Equipped
F61 – – Spare
F62 – 20 Amp Yellow Module Seat Heater Frt (Driver)*
F63 30 Amp Pink – Assy Trailer Tow Receptacle B+
F64 – – Spare
F65 – – Spare
F66 20 Amp Blue – MOD Door MUX Passenger Rear - Smart Motor
F67 – 30 Amp Green MOD Audio Amplifier #1B
F68 – – Spare
F69 – 20 Amp Yellow L2+ Central ADAS Decision Module (CADM) MID*
Video Routing Module (VRM) / Port Power - USB IP (USB Ch
F70 – 10 Amp Red
Only)
F71 – – Spare
F72 – – Spare
F73 – – Spare
F74 – 5 Amp Tan L2+ Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS) - 2*
F75 – – Spare

* If Equipped
F76 – – Spare
F77 – – Spare
F78 50 Amp Red – MOD IAir Suspension
F79 – – Spare
F80 – – Spare
F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Module Seat Heater Frt (PASS)*
F82 – 10 Amp Red SW Seat Heater (RR RT - RR LT)*
F83 – – Spare
F84 – – Spare
F85 – – Spare
F86 – 15 Amp Blue Lumbar Support Driver - Passenger SW*
F87 – – Spare
F88 20 Amp Blue – MOD Door MUX Driver Rear - Smart Motor
8
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution center cover, it is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water
to get into the power distribution center and possibly result in an electrical system failure.
BULB R EPLACEMENT Tire Markings NOTE:

 P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on US
Replacement Bulbs, Names, And Part design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter
Numbers “P” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
In the instance a bulb needs to be replaced, this designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
section includes bulb description and replacement  European — Metric tire sizing is based on Euro-
part numbers. pean design standards. Tires designed to this
Interior Bulbs standard have the tire size molded into the side-
wall beginning with the section width. The letter
NOTE:
"P" is absent from this tire size designation.
The Interior lights are LED, for replacement of any
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LED lamps, see an authorized dealer.
 LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on
Exterior Bulbs Tire Markings US design standards. The size designation for
NOTE: LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires
The exterior lights are LED, for replacement of any 1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
except for the letters “LT” that are molded into
LED lamps, see an authorized dealer. (TIN) the sidewall preceding the size designation.
2 — Size Designation Example: LT235/85R16.
TIRES 3 — Service Description  Temporary spare tires are designed for tempo-
rary emergency use only. Temporary high pres-
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION 4 — Maximum Load
sure compact spare tires have the letter “T” or
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the 5 — Maximum Pressure “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size
following information: Tire Markings, Tire 6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera- designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and ture Grades  High flotation tire sizing is based on US design
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading. standards and it begins with the tire diameter
molded into the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
TIRE SIZING CHART
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
 Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
 "R" means radial construction, or
 "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) 8
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
 A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
 A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
 The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading,
road conditions, and posted speed limits)
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
 XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
 LL = Light load tire or
 C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
 This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
EXAMPLE:
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
 01 means the year 2001
 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could
represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa
(kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
Maximum Inflation Pressure
this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. 8
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
Tire Placard
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure This placard tells you important information
about the:
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on 1. Number of people that can be carried in the
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the vehicle.
driver's side door. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire, including 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
the spare tire (if equipped), at least monthly and
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear,
inflate to the recommended pressure for your
and spare tires.
vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar) Loading
Tire And Loading Information Placard The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your
vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load carrying
capacity if you adhere to the loading conditions,
tire size, and cold tire inflation pressures specified
on the Tire and Loading Information placard in
Ú page 186.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, Gross
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded.
For further information on GAWR, vehicle loading,
Tire And Loading Information Placard and trailer towing, refer Ú page 186.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of (4) The resulting figure equals the Metric Example For Load Limit
your vehicle, locate the statement “The combined available amount of cargo and luggage For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and
weight of occupants and cargo should never
load capacity. For example, if “XXX” there will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle,
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading the amount of available cargo and luggage load
Information placard. The combined weight of amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
capacity is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as
occupants, cargo/luggage and trailer tongue be five 150 lb passengers in your
shown in step 4.
weight (if applicable) should never exceed the vehicle, the amount of available cargo
weight referenced here. and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. NOTE:
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)  If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from
Steps For Determining Correct Load your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Limit— (5) Determine the combined weight of The following table shows examples on how to
(1) Locate the statement “The combined luggage and cargo being loaded on the calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing
weight of occupants and cargo should vehicle. That weight may not safely capacities of your vehicle with varying seating
exceed the available cargo and luggage configurations and number and size of occu-
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your pants. This table is for illustration purposes only
vehicle's placard. load capacity calculated in Step 4.
and may not be accurate for the seating and
(2) Determine the combined weight of (6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load carry capacity of your vehicle.
the driver and passengers that will be load from your trailer will be transferred  For the following example, the combined weight
riding in your vehicle. to your vehicle. Consult this manual to of occupants and cargo should never exceed
determine how this reduces the 865 lbs (392 kg).
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
available cargo and luggage load 8
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
capacity of your vehicle.
XXX lbs.

Safety NOTE:
WARNING!
 Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. WARNING! cause erratic and unpredictable steering
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle  Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and response.
handling, and increase your stopping distance. can cause collisions.  Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
Use tires of the recommended load capacity for
 Underinflation increases tire flexing and can cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
your vehicle. Never overload them.
result in overheating and tire failure. Fuel Economy
 Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to cushion Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
TIRES — G ENERAL I NFORMATION resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes
Tire Pressure can cause damage that result in tire failure. Tread Wear
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the  Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire resulting in loss of vehicle control. resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
pressure:
 Unequal tire pressures can cause steering Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
 Safety problems. You could lose control of your Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable
 Fuel Economy vehicle. ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
 Tread Wear  Unequal tire pressures from one side of the uncomfortable ride.
 Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to Tire Inflation Pressures
drift to the right or left. 8
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
 Always drive with each tire inflated to the the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the driver's
recommended cold tire inflation pressure. side door.
NOTE:
Both underinflation and overinflation affect the The recommended pressures may be different for
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of the front and rear axles.
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the
steering.
At least once a month: Check tire pressures more often if subject to a

wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire WARNING!
 Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not pressures vary with temperature changes. High speed driving with your vehicle under
make a visual judgment when determining Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi maximum load is dangerous. The added strain
proper inflation. Tires may look properly inflated (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. on your tires could cause them to fail. You could
even when they are under-inflated. Keep this in mind when checking tire pressure have a serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle
inside a garage, especially in the Winter. loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous
 Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
damage. Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
CAUTION! the cold tire inflation pressure should be increased Radial Ply Tires
by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
every 12°F (7°C) for this outside temperature WARNING!
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
condition.
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the Combining radial ply tires with other types of
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem. Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce handle poorly. The instability could cause a
this normal pressure buildup or your tire pressure collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
will be too low. four. Never combine them with other types of
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation tires.
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) speeds and within posted speed limits. Where Tire Repair
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The cold speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if
tire inflation pressure must not exceed the can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct it meets the following criteria:
maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased
sidewall.  The tire has not been driven on when flat.
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be
required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to  The damage is only on the tread section of your
an authorized tire dealer or original equipment tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
vehicle dealer for recommended safe operating  The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures. (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs See the Tire Pressure Monitoring System section
and additional information. for more information Ú page 264.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have Tire Spinning
experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions,
immediately with another Run Flat tire of identical
do not spin your vehicle's wheels above 30 mph
size and service description (Load Index and
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure sensor
continuously without stopping.
as well as it is not designed to be reused.
For further information Ú page 328.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive WARNING! Tire Tread
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss of 1 — Worn Tire
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run 2 — New Tire
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation pressure is
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) These indicators are molded into the bottom of the
reaches the run flat mode it has limited driving
for more than 30 seconds continuously when tread grooves. They will appear as bands when the
capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately.
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm).
A Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run flat tire
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
is changed after driving with underinflated tire
indicators, the tire should be replaced.
condition, please replace the TPMS sensor as it is
not designed to be reused when driven under run Tread Wear Indicators For further information Ú page 388. 8
flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition. Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment
NOTE: tires to help you in determining when your tires
TPMS sensor must be replaced after driving the should be replaced.
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at
full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the
run flat mode.
Life Of Tire NOTE: It is recommended to replace the two front tires or

Wheel valve stem must be replaced as well when two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
installing new tires due to wear and tear in existing seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever
factors including, but not limited to:
tires. replace a wheel, make sure that the wheel’s
 Driving style specifications match those of the original wheels.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as
 Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pres- little exposure to light as possible. Protect tires It is recommended you contact an authorized tire
sures can cause uneven wear patterns to from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline. dealer or original equipment dealer with any
develop across the tire tread. These abnormal questions you may have on tire specifications or
wear patterns will reduce tread life, resulting in Replacement Tires
capability. Failure to use equivalent replacement
the need for earlier tire replacement. The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of tires may adversely affect the safety, handling, and
 Distance driven
many characteristics. They should be inspected ride of your vehicle.
regularly for wear and correct cold tire inflation
 Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V pressures. The manufacturer strongly
or higher, and Summer tires typically have a
WARNING!
recommends that you use tires equivalent to the
reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires per originals in size, quality and performance when  Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly replacement is needed Ú page 387. Refer to the speed rating other than that specified for your
recommended. Tire and Loading Information placard or the vehicle. Some combinations of unapproved
Vehicle Certification Label for the size designation tires and wheels may change suspension
WARNING! of your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol for dimensions and performance characteristics,
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after your tire will be found on the original equipment resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
six years, regardless of the remaining tread. tire sidewall. braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpre-
Failure to follow this warning can result in dictable handling and stress to steering and
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the “Tire
sudden tire failure. You could lose control and suspension components. You could lose
Safety Information” section of this manual for
have a collision resulting in serious injury or control and have a collision resulting in
more information relating to the Load Index and
death. serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
Speed Symbol of a tire.
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
(Continued)
Summer Or Three Season Tires — Snow Tires

WARNING!
If Equipped Some areas of the country require the use of snow
 Never use a tire with a smaller load index or tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
capacity, other than what was originally by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a sidewall.
snow or on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with
smaller load index could result in tire over-
Summer tires, be aware these tires are not If you need snow tires, select tires
loading and failure. You could lose control and
designed for Winter or cold driving conditions. equivalent in size and type to the original
have a collision.
Install Winter tires on your vehicle when ambient equipment tires. Use snow tires only in
 Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads sets of four; failure to do so may
adequate speed capability can result in are covered with ice or snow. For more adversely affect the safety and handling of your
sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle control. information, contact an authorized dealer. vehicle.
Summer tires do not contain the all season Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the what was originally equipped with your vehicle and
CAUTION! tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; should not be operated at sustained speeds over
Replacing original tires with tires of a different failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph
size may result in false speedometer and handling of your vehicle. (120 km/h) refer to original equipment or an
odometer readings. authorized tire dealer for recommended safe
WARNING! operating speeds, loading and cold tire inflation
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. pressures.
TIRE TYPES
You could lose vehicle control, resulting in While studded tires improve performance on ice, 8
All Season Tires — If Equipped severe injury or death. Driving too fast for skid and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons conditions also creates the possibility of loss of may be poorer than that of non-studded tires.
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction vehicle control. Some states prohibit studded tires; therefore, local
levels may vary between different all season tires. laws should be checked before using these tire
All season tires can be identified by the M+S, M&S, types.
M/S or MS designation on the tire sidewall. Use all
season tires only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
SPARE T IRES — IF E QUIPPED Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

WARNING!
NOTE: The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is Compact and collapsible spares are for
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit instead temporary emergency use only. With these
equipped with a compact spare by looking at the
of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire Service Kit” in spares, do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/
spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
“In Case Of Emergency” for further information. h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life.
Information Placard located on the driver’s side
door opening or on the sidewall of the tire. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
CAUTION! indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do letter “T” or “S” preceding the size designation. be replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings,
not take your vehicle through an automatic car Example: T145/80D18 103M. which apply to your spare. Failure to do so could
wash with a compact or limited use temporary result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire control.
spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result. Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first Collapsible Spare Tire — If Equipped
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire The collapsible spare is for temporary emergency
opportunity.
designated for temporary emergency use use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
Ú page 194. Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, equipped with a collapsible spare by looking at the
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire since the wheel is designed specifically for the spare tire description on the Tire and Loading
And Wheel — If Equipped compact spare tire. Do not install more than one Information Placard located on the driver’s side
compact spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and
wheel equivalent in look and function to the given time. Collapsible spare tire description
original equipment tire and wheel found on the example: 165/80-17 101P.
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If
your vehicle has this option, refer to an authorized
tire dealer for the recommended tire rotation
pattern.
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original Full Size Spare — If Equipped
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced) WARNING!
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first Limited use spares are for emergency use only.
only. This tire may look like the originally equipped
opportunity. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
tire on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is not. This spare tire may have limited tread life. vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive
properly installed to the vehicle. Inflate the When the tread is worn to the tread wear more than the speed listed on the limited use
collapsible tire using the electric air pump before indicators, the temporary use full size spare tire spare wheel. Keep inflated to the cold tire
lowering the vehicle. needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as inflation pressures listed on your Tire and
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the Loading Information Placard located on the
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of the
conventional tire on the collapsible spare wheel,
at the first opportunity. driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
equipment tire at the first opportunity and
collapsible spare tire. Limited Use Spare — If Equipped reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
The limited use spare tire is for temporary result in loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a label
Compact and Collapsible spares are for located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
temporary emergency use only. With these contains the driving limitations for this spare. This WHEEL A ND WHEEL TRIM CARE
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph tire may look like the original equipped tire on the All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread Installation of this limited use spare tire affects regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to
wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as your
needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
maintain their luster and to prevent corrosion. 8
Wash wheels with the same soap solution
warnings, which apply to your spare. Failure to original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle recommended for the body of the vehicle and
do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of at the first opportunity. remember to always wash when the surfaces are
vehicle control. not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including NOTE:
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for an
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals and extended period after cleaning the wheels with
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on dirt equipment to prevent damage to the wheels. wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply the
roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild soap to Mopar® Wheel Treatment or Mopar® Chrome brakes to remove the water droplets from the
wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh chemicals or Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or brake components. This activity will remove the
a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for red rust on the brake rotors and prevent vehicle
protective coating that helps keep them from aluminum or chrome wheels. vibration when braking.
corroding and tarnishing. Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low
CAUTION! Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
Avoid products or automatic car washes that use brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These CAUTION!
acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or products may damage the wheel's protective If your vehicle is equipped with these specialty
harsh brushes. Many aftermarket wheel finish. Such damage is not covered by the New wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners, abrasives,
cleaners and automatic car washes may Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, or polishing compounds. They will permanently
damage the wheel's protective finish. Such Mopar® Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is damage this finish and such damage is not
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle recommended. covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar® HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP AND
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recommended. WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular
basis; this is all that is required to maintain this
finish.
SNOW TRACTION D EVICES

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance, the following snow traction devices are recommended. Follow these
recommendations to guard against damage:
 Snow traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as recommended by the snow traction device manufacturer.
 No other tire sizes are recommended for use with the snow traction device.
 Please see the following table for the recommended tire size, axle and snow traction device:
Snow Traction Device (maximum

4x2
Axle Tire/Wheel Size projection beyond tire profile or
Trim Level
equivalent)
P245/70R17
LAREDO
265/60R18
S Class
LIMITED 265/60R18
Rear
OVERLAND 265/50R20
265/50R20 20” - S Class
SUMMIT
275/45R21XL 21” - 12mm
8
Snow Traction Device (maximum

4x4
Axle Tire/Wheel Size projection beyond tire profile or
Trim Level
equivalent)
P245/70R17
LAREDO
265/60R18
TRAILHAWK 265/60R18 S Class
LIMITED Rear 265/60R18
OVERLAND 265/50R20
265/50R20 20” - S Class
SUMMIT
275/45R21XL 21” - 12mm
WARNING! CAUTION! CAUTION!

Using tires of different size and type (M+S, To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe  Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Snow) between front and rear axles can cause the following precautions:
 Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
unpredictable handling. You could lose control
 Because of restricted traction device clear- large bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.
and have a collision.
ance between tires and other suspension
 Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
components, it is important that only traction
pavement.
devices in good condition are used. Broken
devices can cause serious damage. Stop the  Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could instructions on the method of installation,
indicate device breakage. Remove the operating speed, and conditions for use.
damaged parts of the device before further Always use the suggested operating speed of
use. the device manufacturer’s if it is less than
30 mph (48 km/h).
 Install device as tightly as possible and then
retighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).  Do not use traction devices on a compact
(Continued) spare tire.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS All passenger vehicle tires must conform

The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
to Federal safety requirements in
operate at different loads and perform different addition to these grades.
steering, handling, and braking functions. For TREADWEAR
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of The Treadwear grade is a comparative
tires. The benefits of rotation are especially rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such as when tested under controlled conditions
those on On/Off-Road type tires. Rotation will on a specified government test course.
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow, Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross) For example, a tire graded 150 would
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
wear one and one-half times as well on
smooth, quiet ride.
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION the government course as a tire graded
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper
maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES 100. The relative performance of tires
permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or depends upon the actual conditions of
The following tire grading categories their use, however, and may depart
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation
being performed. were established by the National significantly from the norm due to
Highway Traffic Safety Administration. variations in driving habits, service
NOTE:
The premium Tire Pressure Monitoring System will
The specific grade rating assigned by the practices, and differences in road
automatically locate the pressure values displayed tire's manufacturer in each category is characteristics and climate. 8
in the correct vehicle position following a tire shown on the sidewall of the tires on
rotation. your vehicle.
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward
cross” shown in the following diagram.
TRACTION G RADES Sustained high temperature can cause STORING THE VEHICLE
the material of the tire to degenerate
The Traction grades, from highest to and reduce tire life, and excessive
If you are storing your vehicle for more than three
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades temperature can lead to sudden tire
weeks, we recommend that you take the following
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's
failure. The grade C corresponds to a battery:
pavement, as measured under level of performance, which all
controlled conditions on specified  Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
passenger vehicle tires must meet
government test surfaces of asphalt and under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
 Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A run the air conditioning system at idle for about
traction performance. represent higher levels of performance five minutes in the fresh air and high blower
WARNING! on the laboratory test wheel, than the setting. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
minimum required by law. cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based damage when the system is started again.
on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and WARNING!
does not include acceleration, cornering,
The temperature grade for this tire is
BODYWORK
hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
established for a tire that is properly inflated and PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation,
TEMPERATURE G RADES or excessive loading, either separately or in AGENTS
combination, can cause heat buildup and Vehicle body care requirements vary according to
The Temperature grades are A (the possible tire failure. geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
make roads passable in snow and ice and those
resistance to the generation of heat and that are sprayed on trees and road surfaces during
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested other seasons are highly corrosive to the metal in
under controlled conditions on a your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes your
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on
which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold
weather and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody
protection.
The following maintenance recommendations will To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses
enable you to obtain maximum benefit from the and reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry CAUTION!
corrosion resistance built into your vehicle. cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap  Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning mate-
solution followed by rinsing. rials such as steel wool or scouring powder
What Causes Corrosion?
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, that will scratch metal and painted surfaces.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive material to  Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
of paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
clean the lenses. (8,274 kPa) can result in damage or removal
The most common causes are:
PRESERVING T HE BODYWORK of paint and decals.
 Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
 Stone and gravel impact. Washing Special Care
 Insects, tree sap and tar.  Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your
 If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
 Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
vehicle in the shade using Mopar® Car Wash, or drive near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage
a mild car wash soap, and rinse the panels
 Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants. at least once a month.
completely with water.
 It is important that the drain holes in the lower
BODY A ND UNDERBODY M AINTENANCE  If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
edges of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar® kept clear and open.
Cleaning Headlights Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to remove.
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights  If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the
 Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as Mopar®
and fog lights that are lighter and less susceptible paint, touch them up immediately.
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to
to stone breakage than glass headlights. protect your paint finish. Use precautions to not  If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or 8
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and scratch the paint. similar cause that destroys the paint and protec-
therefore different lens cleaning procedures must tive coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon
 Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
be followed. as possible.
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin out
the paint finish.
 If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, Seat Belt Maintenance PLASTIC A ND C OATED PARTS
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
materials are well packaged and sealed.
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the
 If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, fabric. Sun damage can also weaken the fabric. CAUTION!
consider mud or stone shields behind each If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution
wheel.  Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repel-
or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from
lents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the
 Use Mopar® Touch Up Paint on scratches as the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.
plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or interior may cause permanent damage. Wipe
touch up paint to match the color of your if the buckles do not work properly. away immediately.
vehicle.
WARNING!  Damage caused by these type of products
INTERIORS A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
Use Mopar® Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
and carpeting. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Lenses
Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt The lenses in front of the instruments in this
WARNING! system. If your vehicle is involved in a collision, vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When cleaning
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning or if you have questions regarding seat belt or the lenses, care must be taken to avoid scratching
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and retractor conditions, take your vehicle to an the plastic.
if used in closed areas they may cause authorized FCA dealer or authorized FCA
Certified Collision Care Program facility for Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
respiratory harm. may be used, but do not use high alcohol content
inspection.
or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean
with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a soft cloth.
LEATHER S URFACES NOTE: GLASS SURFACES

If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
Mopar® Total Clean is specifically recommended show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular
for leather upholstery. transfer more so than darker colors. The leather is basis with Mopar® Glass Cleaner, or any
The leather upholstery can be best preserved by designed for easy cleaning, and the manufacturer commercial household-type glass cleaner. Never
regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small recommends Mopar® total care leather cleaner use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
particles of dirt can act as an abrasive and damage applied on a cloth to clean the leather seats as cleaning the inside rear window equipped with
the leather upholstery and should be removed needed. electric defrosters or windows equipped with radio
promptly with a damp cloth. Stubborn soils can be antennas. Do not use scrapers or other sharp
removed easily with a soft cloth and Mopar® Total CAUTION! instruments that may scratch the elements.
Clean. Care should be taken to avoid soaking your Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner
leather upholstery with any liquid. Please do not Ketone based cleaning products to clean leather on the towel or cloth that you are using. Do not
use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, upholstery, as damage to the upholstery may spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean result.
your leather upholstery.
8
400
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) BRAKE SYSTEM TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
The VIN is found on a label located on the left front Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic brake Lug Nut/Bolt **Lug Nut/ Lug Nut/Bolt
corner of the instrument panel pad, visible from systems. If either of the two hydraulic systems lose Torque Bolt Size Socket Size
outside of the vehicle through the windshield. normal capability, the remaining system will still
130 Ft-Lb
function. However, there will be some loss of M14 x 1.50 22 mm
(176 N·m)
overall braking effectiveness. You may notice
increased pedal travel during application, greater
pedal force required to slow or stop, and potential **Use only authorized dealer recommended lug
activation of the Brake Warning Light. nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil
In the event power assist is lost for any reason the before tightening.
brakes will still function. However, the effort Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
required to brake the vehicle will be much greater mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
than that required with the power system loose particles.
operating.
Windshield VIN Label Location WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE: Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN. ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to the
vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and
reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/bolts
should be torqued using a properly calibrated
torque wrench using a six-sided (hex) deep wall
socket.
Wheel Mounting Surface
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 401
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until

each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
FUEL REQUIREMENTS 3.6L E NGINE
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/bolt While operating on gasoline with the required Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater
(do not insert it half way). octane number, hearing a light knocking sound than 15% in this engine.
from the engine is not a cause for concern. This engine is designed to meet all
NOTE:
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy emission regulations and provide
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have them
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use of optimum fuel economy and performance
checked with a torque wrench by an authorized
gasoline with an octane number lower than when using high quality unleaded regular
dealer or service station.
recommended octane can cause engine failure gasoline having a posted octane number of 87 as
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt and may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as higher octane premium gasoline is not required, as
properly tightened.
hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you it will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline
experience these symptoms, try another brand of in these engines.
gasoline before considering service for the vehicle.
5.7L E NGINE
2.0L E NGINE Do not use E-85 flex fuel or ethanol blends greater
This engine is designed to meet all than 15% in this engine.
emission requirements, and provide This engine is designed to meet all
satisfactory fuel economy and emission regulations and provide
performance, when using high-quality satisfactory fuel economy and
unleaded regular gasoline having an octane rating performance when using high-quality
of 87, as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The unleaded gasoline having an octane range of 87 to
Torque Patterns use of 91 or higher octane premium gasoline will 89 as specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
allow these engines to operate to optimal 89 octane plus gasoline is recommended for
9
performance. This increase in performance is most optimum performance and fuel economy.
WARNING!
noticeable in hot weather or other heavier load
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the conditions, such as while towing.
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow
this warning may result in personal injury.
402 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
REFORMULATED G ASOLINE Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents Problems that result from using gasoline
should be avoided. Many of these materials containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
Many areas of the country require the use of intended for gum and varnish removal may contain gasoline containing methanol are not the
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as active solvents or similar ingredients. These can responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials. not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
contains oxygenates and are specifically blended Warranty.
to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
quality.
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with
DO N OT U SE E-85 IN N ON-FLEX F UEL
The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. oxygenates such as ethanol. VEHICLES
Properly blended reformulated gasoline will
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with
provide improved performance and durability of CAUTION! gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Use
engine and fuel system components.
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing methanol, of gasoline with higher ethanol content may void
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL or gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(E-15). Use of these blends may result in starting If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper and drivability problems, damage critical fuel E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of these
octane rating, gasolines that contain detergents, system components, cause emissions to exceed symptoms:
corrosion and stability additives are the applicable standard, and/or cause the
recommended. Using gasolines that have these  Operate in a lean mode.
Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. Please
additives will help improve fuel economy, reduce observe pump labels as they should clearly  OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on.
emissions, and maintain vehicle performance. communicate if a fuel contains greater than  Poor engine performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline 15% ethanol (E-15).
 Poor cold start and cold drivability.
contains a higher level of detergents to
further aide in minimizing engine and  Increased risk for fuel system component
fuel system deposits. When available, corrosion.
the usage of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is
recommended. Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list
of TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
CNG AND LP F UEL SYSTEM FUEL S YSTEM CAUTIONS CAUTION!

MODIFICATIONS  The use of fuel additives, which are now being
CAUTION!
Modifications that allow the engine to run on sold as octane enhancers, is not recom-
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid Propane Follow these guidelines to maintain your mended. Most of these products contain high
(LP) may result in damage to the engine, vehicle’s performance: concentrations of methanol. Fuel system
emissions, and fuel system components. Problems  The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by damage or vehicle performance problems
that result from running CNG or LP are not the Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can impair resulting from the use of such fuels or addi-
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void or engine performance and damage the emis- tives is not the responsibility of the manufac-
not be covered under the New Vehicle Limited sions control system. turer and may void or not be covered under
Warranty. the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
 An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a pungent NOTE:
MANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) I N Intentional tampering with the emissions control
burning odor or some light smoke, your engine
GASOLINE may be out of tune or malfunctioning and may system can result in civil penalties being assessed
require immediate service. Contact an autho- against you.
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive
that is blended into some gasoline to increase rized dealer for service assistance.
octane. Gasoline blended with MMT provides no (Continued)
performance advantage beyond gasoline of the
same octane number without MMT. Gasoline
blended with MMT reduces spark plug life and
reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that 9
gasoline without MMT be used in your vehicle. The
MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on
the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your
gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains
MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 23 Gallons 87 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.0L Engine 5 Quarts 4.7 Liters
Cooling System *
2.0L Engine Intercooler 4.4 Quarts 4.2 Liters
3.6L Engine – Without Trailer Tow
10.8 Quarts 10.2 Liters
Package
3.6L Engine – With Trailer Tow
11.1 Quarts 10.5 Liters
Package
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Engine Coolant (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the
requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend using Mopar® Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Intercooler (240,000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent
meeting the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend using Mopar® API SP/GF-6A Certified SAE 5W-30 Full
Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the requirements of the manufacturer
Material Standard MS-13340. Equivalent full synthetic SAE 5W-30 API SP
Engine Oil — 2.0L Engine engine oil can be used but must have the API Donut trademark Ú page 344.
CAUTION!
Failure to use the recommended API SP/GF-6A or equivalent oil can cause
engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
We recommend using Mopar® SAE 0W-20 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which
meets the requirements of the manufacturer Material Standard MS-6395.
Engine Oil – 3.6L & 5.7L Engine
Equivalent full synthetic SAE 0W-20 engine oil can be used but must have the
API Starburst trademark Ú page 344.
9

We recommend using a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar® Engine Oil Filter
Engine Oil Filter is unavailable only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter
Performance Requirements.
Fuel Selection — 2.0L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15%
Fuel Selection – 5.7L Engine
Ethanol (Do not use E-85).
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Use only Mopar® ZF 8 & 9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or
Automatic Transmission equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Transfer Case – 1-Speed or 2-Speed Transfer Case We recommend using Mopar® ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front-Rear) - Without Electronic Limited Slip Differential
We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant, SAE 75W-85.
(ELSD)
We recommend using Mopar® GL-5 Synthetic Axle Lubricant, SAE 75W-85
Axle Differential (Rear) - With Electronic Limited Slip Differential (ELSD)
with friction modifier additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend using Mopar® DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703.
407
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE Any communication to FCA US LLC's customer
center should include the following information:
FOR YOUR VEHICLE FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally  Owner's name and address
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be
 Owner's telephone number (home, mobile, and
PREPARE F OR T HE APPOINTMENT happy with our products and services.
office)
All work to be performed may not be covered by the Warranty service must be done by an authorized
dealer. We strongly recommend that you take the  Authorized dealer name
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the
service manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle to an authorized dealer. They know your  Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
vehicle's service history. This can often provide a vehicle the best, and are most concerned that you  Vehicle delivery date and mileage
clue to the current problem. get prompt and high quality service. FCA US LLC's
authorized dealers have the facilities, FCA US LLC CUSTOMER CENTER
PREPARE A L IST factory-trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed P.O. Box 21–8004
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or the correctly and in a timely manner. Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
specific work you want done. If you've had an
accident or work done that is not on your This is why you should always talk to an authorized Phone: (877) 426-5337
dealer’s service manager first. If for some reason
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
you are still not satisfied, talk to the general
FCA C ANADA INC. C USTOMER CENTER
BE R EASONABLE WITH REQUESTS manager or owner of the authorized dealer. They P.O. Box 1621
want to know if you need assistance. If an
If you list a number of items and you must have Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern,
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
you may contact FCA US LLC's Customer
situation with the service advisor and list the items (800) 387-9983 French
Assistance center.
in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you 10
may obtain a rental vehicle (additional charges
may apply). If you need a rental, it is advisable to
make these arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
408 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
MEXICO Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
require assistance can use the special needs relay contract you may have purchased from another
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240 service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY manufacturer. If you require service after the
Sante Fe C.P. 05109 teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice callers, FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires,
dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay please refer to the contract documents, and
Mexico, D. F.
Service operator. contact the person listed in those documents.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
SERVICE CONTRACT We appreciate that you have made a major
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568 investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
You may have purchased a service contract for a authorized dealer has also made a major
PUERTO R ICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of investment in facilities, tools, and training to
FCA Caribbean LLC unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New Vehicle ensure that you are absolutely delighted with the
P.O. Box 191857 Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar® Vehicle ownership experience.
Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle extended
San Juan 00919-1857 protection plans authorized, endorsed and backed WARNING!
Phone: (877) 426-5337 by FCA US LLC to provide additional protection
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
Fax: (787) 782-3345 beyond your vehicle’s warranty. If you purchased a
only), some of its constituents, and certain
Mopar® Vehicle Protection Plan, you will receive
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in
known to the State of California to cause cancer
HEARING O R S PEECH I MPAIRED the mail within three weeks of the vehicle delivery
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In
date. If you have any questions about the service
(TDD/TTY) contract, call FCA US LLC’s Service Contract
addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and
certain products of component wear contain, or
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
emit, chemicals known to the State of California
FCA US LLC has installed special Telecommu- (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
to cause cancer and birth defects, or other
nication Devices for the Deaf (TDD) equipment at English / (800) 387-9983 French).
reproductive harm.
its customer center. Any hearing or speech
impaired customer, who has access to a TDD or a
conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United
States, can communicate with FCA US LLC by
dialing 1-800-380-2479.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 409
WARRANTY INFORMATION REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to
I N T HE 50 U NITED STATES AND 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
this vehicle and market. Refer to WASHINGTON, D.C. 1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.mopar.com/om for further information. www.safercar.gov; or write to:
If you believe that your vehicle has a Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
See the Warranty Information for the terms and defect that could cause a crash or cause
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
injury or death, you should immediately D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en/ for further inform the National Highway Traffic information about motor vehicle safety
information. Safety Administration (NHTSA) in from http://www.safercar.gov.
For French, refer to www.owners.mopar.ca/fr for
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
further information. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it I N C ANADA
Use this QR code to access your may open an investigation, and if it finds If you believe that your vehicle has a
digital experience. that a safety defect exists in a group of safety defect, you should contact the
vehicles, it may order a recall and Customer Service Department
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA immediately. Canadian customers who
cannot become involved in individual wish to report a safety defect to the
problems between you, an authorized Canadian government should contact
dealer or FCA US LLC. Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
MOPAR® PARTS 1-800-333-0510 or go to
Mopar® original equipment parts & accessories wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
and factory filled fluids are available from an PCDB-BDPP.
authorized dealer. They are recommended for your
10
vehicle to keep it operating at its best and maintain
its original condition.
410 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS To access your Owner's Information online, visit

www.mopar.com/om (US) or
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Development
To order the following manuals, you may use either www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). applicables aux appareils radio exempts de
the website or the phone numbers listed below. licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
Or Call Tech Authority toll free at:
Service Manuals conditions suivantes:
 1-800-890-4038 (US)
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide a 1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
Owner's Manuals, Radio Manuals and Warranty et
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
Information Books can be ordered through
system, and/or components and is written in 2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
Archway at:
straightforward language with illustrations, brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
diagrams, and charts.  1-800-387-1143 (Canada) brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals le fonctionnement.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
GENERAL INFORMATION
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These The following regulatory statement applies to all
siguientes dos condiciones:
manuals make it easy to find and fix problems on Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. vehicle: 1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
They show exactly how to find and correct cause interferencia perjudicial y
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules
problems, using step-by-step troubleshooting and and with Innovation, Science and Economic 2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests and Development Canada license-exempt RSS cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
a complete list of all tools and equipment. standard(s). Operation is subject to the following pueda causar su operación no deseada.
To order a hard copy of your Service or Diagnostic two conditions:
NOTE:
Procedure manuals, visit: 1. This device may not cause harmful Changes or modifications not expressly approved
www.techauthority.com (US and Canada). interference, and by the party responsible for compliance could void
Owner's Manuals 2. This device must accept any interference the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
received, including interference that may
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared with
cause undesired operation.
the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA
vehicles.
411
INDEX
A Redundant Air Bag Warning Light............. 278 Alterations/Modifications
About Your Brakes .........................................400 Side Air Bags ............................................ 285 Vehicle .........................................................12
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection .....................348 Transporting Pets ..................................... 306 Amazon FireTV ..................................... 235, 240
Active Driving Assist System ..........................155 Air Bag Light......................................... 277, 306 Amazon FireTV Built-in .................................. 235
Active Lane Management Air Cleaner, Engine Ambient Light
System........................................ 114, 118, 173 (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) ............................. 345 Multicolor.....................................................64
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)..... 115, 118, 144 Air Conditioner Maintenance ........................ 345 Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .................. 353, 404
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............354 Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 345, 346 Disposal .................................................... 355
Adding Fuel ....................................................185 Air Conditioner System ................................. 345 Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .............. 114, 249
Additives, Fuel ...............................................402 Air Conditioning................................................68 Anti-Lock Warning Light ................................ 114
Adjust Max .............................................................67 Apps .............................................................. 234
Down ........................................................... 42 Rear.............................................................72 Arming System
Forward ....................................................... 42 Air Conditioning Filter ..............................74, 345 Security Alarm .............................................26
Rearward..................................................... 42 Air Conditioning System ...................................73 Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 256
Up................................................................ 42 Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................74 Audio Systems (Radio) ......................... 106, 203
Air Bag ...........................................................110 Air Filter ........................................................ 345 Auto Down Power Windows ..............................82
Air Bag Operation ......................................280 Air Pressure Auto Hold ....................................117, 118, 128
Air Bag Warning Light ...................... 277, 280 Tires ......................................................... 385 Automatic Folding Mirrors ................................53
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................285 Alarm Automatic Headlights .......................................60
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 288, 333 Arm The System ................................... 26, 27 Automatic High Beams.....................................59
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................333 Disarm The System .....................................26 Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............73
Front Air Bag .............................................280 Rearm The System ......................................27 Automatic Transmission....................... 122, 130
If Deployment Occurs ................................288 Security Alarm .......................................... 113 Adding Fluid .............................................. 357
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................285 Alarm System Fluid And Filter Change............................. 357
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............289 Security Alarm .............................................26 Fluid Change............................................. 357 11
Maintenance .............................................289 Fluid Level Check...................................... 357
412
Fluid Type ........................................ 357, 406 Warning Light ........................................... 110 Checks, Safety .............................................. 305
Special Additives .......................................357 Brake/Transmission Interlock ...................... 130 Child Restraint .............................................. 290
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Bulb Replacement ........................................ 378 Child Restraints
Mode .............................................................132 Bulbs, Light ................................................... 308 Booster Seats ........................................... 293
AutoPark ........................................................123 Child Seat Installation............................... 302
Autostick........................................................133 C How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ..... 300
Operation ..................................................133 Camera, Front ............................................... 178 Infant And Child Restraints ....................... 292
AUX Cord.......................................................... 77 Camera, Night Vision .................................... 180 Locating The LATCH Anchorages .............. 297
Auxiliary Driving Systems ...............................257 Camera, Rear ....................................... 176, 183 Lower Anchors And Tethers For
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) .......... 79 Camera, Rear Washer................................... 176 Children ................................................ 294
Auxiliary Power Outlet ...................................... 79 Camera, Surround View ................................ 183 Older Children And Child Restraints.......... 292
Axle Fluid .......................................................406 Capacities, Fluid ........................................... 404 Seating Positions ...................................... 294
Caps, Filler Child Safety Locks ............................................31
B Oil (Engine) ............................................... 339 Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 402
Battery ................................................. 111, 343 Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ..................... 354 Cleaning
Charging System Light...............................111 Car Washes................................................... 397 Wheels ...................................................... 391
Keyless Key Fob Replacement .................... 19 Carbon Monoxide Warning............................ 308 Climate Control ................................................67
Battery Saver Feature ...................................... 62 Care And Maintenance ................................. 396 Automatic ....................................................67
Belts, Seat .....................................................306 Cargo Area Cover ...................................... 92, 93 Rear .............................................................70
Body Mechanism Lubrication ........................348 Cargo Area Storage ..........................................91 CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications ........ 403
Bodywork .......................................................396 Cargo Compartment ........................................91 Cold Weather Operation ................................ 125
B-Pillar Location.............................................382 Cargo Tie-Downs ..............................................91 Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 390
Brake Assist System ......................................251 Cellular Phone .............................................. 248 Contract, Service ........................................... 408
Brake Control System, Electronic ..................251 Chains, Tire ................................................... 393 Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 354
Brake Fluid .......................................... 356, 406 Charging Cooling System ............................................. 353
Brake System ...................................... 356, 400 Wireless.......................................................81 Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 354
Anti-Lock (ABS) ..........................................400 Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 379 Coolant Level ............................................ 355
Fluid Check ...............................................356 Check Engine Light Cooling Capacity ....................................... 404
Master Cylinder .........................................356 (Malfunction Indicator Light) ......................... 121 Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 355
Parking ......................................................126 Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 305 Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 353
413
Inspection ....................................... 353, 355 Tips........................................................... 200 Compartment .........................339, 340, 341
Points To Remember .................................355 DrowsyDriverDetection ................................. 250 Compartment Identification ....339, 340, 341
Pressure Cap .............................................354 Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 112
Radiator Cap .............................................354 E Cooling...................................................... 353
Selection Of Coolant Electric Brake Control System....................... 251 Exhaust Gas Caution ................................ 308
(Antifreeze) ........................ 353, 404, 405 Anti-Lock Brake System ............................ 249 Fails To Start............................................. 124
Corrosion Protection ......................................396 Electronic Roll Mitigation ................. 252, 257 Flooded, Starting ...................................... 124
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ......................144 Electric Parking Brake................................... 126 Fuel Requirements .......................... 401, 404
Cruise Light ......................................... 118, 119 Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) .........79 Jump Starting ........................................... 322
Customer Assistance .....................................407 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ......... 114, 252 Oil .................................................... 344, 404
Customer Programmable Features................204 Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect.................... 136 Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 339
Cybersecurity .................................................203 Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light...... 111 Oil Filter .................................................... 344
Emergency Oil Selection............................344, 404, 405
D Engine Overheating .................................. 326 Oil Synthetic.............................................. 344
Daytime Running Lights ................................... 59 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ............................ 328 Overheating .............................................. 326
Defroster, Windshield ....................................306 Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 309 Starting ..................................................... 122
De-Icer, Remote Start ...................................... 25 Jump Starting ........................................... 322 Enhanced Accident Response
De-Icer, Windshield.......................................... 67 Manual Park Release ............................... 326 Feature ................................................ 288, 333
Diagnostic System, Onboard .........................120 Refueling .................................................. 325 Ethanol.......................................................... 402
Dipsticks Tow Hooks ................................................ 331 Exhaust Gas Cautions ................................... 308
Oil (Engine) ................................................342 Towing A Disabled Vehicle ........................ 329 Exhaust System ................................... 308, 351
Disposal Emergency Braking ....................................... 263 Extend, Seats ...................................................43
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .......................355 Emergency, In Case Of Exterior Lights ............................... 58, 308, 378
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles ...402 Jacking ..................................................... 313
Door Ajar........................................................111 Emission Control System Maintenance ........ 121 F
Door Locks ............................................... 27, 31 Engine........................................................... 339 FamCam System ........................................... 179
Child-Protection Door Lock — Rear Doors .... 31 Air Cleaner ................................................ 345 Filters
Doors ............................................................... 27 Block Heater ............................................. 125 Air Cleaner ................................................ 345 11
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 36 Break-In Recommendations ..................... 125 Air Conditioning ........................ 74, 345, 346
Driving ...........................................................200 Checking Oil Level .................................... 342 Engine Oil ................................................. 344
414
Engine Oil Disposal ...................................344 Methanol .................................................. 402 Delay ...........................................................61

FireTV ............................................................240 Octane Rating........................................... 401 High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........59
Flashers Requirements .................................. 401, 404 Leveling .......................................................62
Turn Signals .................................... 119, 308 Specifications ........................................... 405 Lights On Reminder .....................................61
Flash-To-Pass .................................................. 60 Tank Capacity ........................................... 404 On With Wipers ............................................60
Flooded Engine Starting ................................124 Fuel Saver Technology .................................. 142 Passing ........................................................60
Fluid Capacities .............................................404 Fuel System Cautions ................................... 403 Switch ..........................................................58
Fluid Leaks ....................................................308 Fueling .......................................................... 185 Heads Up Display (HUD)................................ 107
Fluid Level Checks Fuses ............................................................ 359 Heated Mirrors .................................................53
Brake ........................................................356 Heated Seats ...................................................46
Engine Oil ..................................................342 G Heated Steering Wheel ....................................33
Fluids And Lubricants ....................................406 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) .....................54 Heater, Engine Block..................................... 125
Fog Lights ...............................................62, 118 Gasoline, (Fuel) ............................................. 401 Hill Descent Control ............................. 119, 254
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................. 36 Gasoline, Clean Air........................................ 402 Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 254
Forward Collision Warning .......... 116, 117, 261 Gasoline, Reformulated ................................ 402 Hill Start Assist .............................................. 256
Four Wheel Drive ............... 115, 118, 134, 137 Gear Ranges ................................................. 131 Hitches
Operation ..................................................134 Glass Cleaning .............................................. 399 Trailer Towing ........................................... 190
Shifting ......................................................118 Gross Axle Weight Rating .............................. 188 Hold ’N Go ..................................................... 128
System ......................................................134 Gross Combination Weight Rating ................ 188 HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .....................54
Four Wheel Drive Operation...........................134 Gross Trailer Weight ..................................... 188 Hood
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................328 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ......................... 187 Closing ...................................................... 112
Front And Rear ParkSense System ................161 GVWR............................................................ 186 Opening .................................................... 112
Front Axle (Differential) ..................................358 Hood Release...................................................87
Front View Camera ........................................178 H HUD............................................................... 107
Fuel ...............................................................401 Hands-Free Liftgate .........................................90
Additives ...................................................402 Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 309 I
Clean Air ....................................................402 Head Restraints ...............................................47 Ignition .............................................................22
Ethanol ......................................................402 Headlights .......................................................58 Key Fob Battery Low Or Dead ......................22
Gasoline ....................................................401 Automatic ....................................................60 Key Fob Not Detected..................................22
Materials Added ........................................402 Cleaning ................................................... 397 Keyless Ignition ...........................................22
415
Keyless Push Button ................................... 22 K Light Bulbs .................................................... 308

Push Button Ignition .................................... 22 Key Fob Lights ............................................................ 308
Switch ......................................................... 22 Arm The System ..........................................26 Air Bag ....................................110, 277, 306
Ignition Park Interlock ....................................130 Disarm The System .....................................26 Ambient .......................................................63
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) .................................. 21 Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............21 Ambient, Mutlicolor......................................64
Inside Rearview Mirror ............................50, 309 Key Fob Battery Service Automatic Headlights ..................................60
Instrument Cluster ........................................... 98 (Remote Keyless Entry) ....................................19 Brake Assist Warning................................ 254
Descriptions ..............................................119 Key Fob Programming Brake Warning .......................................... 110
Display ........................................................ 99 (Remote Keyless Entry) ....................................21 Bulb Replacement .................................... 378
Home ........................................................104 Keyless Enter 'n Go™ .................................... 122 Cruise .............................................. 118, 119
Menu Items ...............................................104 Passive Entry ...............................................28 Daytime Running .........................................59
Instrument Cluster Display Passive Entry Programming .........................28 Dimmer Switch ............................................63
Vehicle Info ...............................................105 Keys .................................................................17 Dimmer Switch, Headlight ...........................58
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ....................398 Replacement ...............................................21 Electric Power Steering ............................. 111
Interior And Instrument Lights ......................... 63 Sentry (Immobilizer) ....................................21 Electronic Stability Control ........................ 114
Interior Appearance Care...............................398 Exterior .............................................. 58, 308
Interior Lights .................................................. 63 L Fog..................................................... 62, 118
Interior Monitoring Camera ...........................179 Lane Change Assist .........................................62 Hazard Warning Flasher ........................... 309
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) .................. 65 Lane Management System ........................... 173 Headlights On With Wipers ..........................60
Intersection Collision Assist ...........................264 Lap/Shoulder Belts ....................................... 271 High Beam ................................................ 120
Inverter Latches ......................................................... 308 High Beam/Low Beam Select ......................59
Power .......................................................... 81 Lead Free Gasoline ....................................... 401 Hill Descent Control Indicator .......... 119, 254
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ................................... 77 Leaks, Fluid .................................................. 308 Interior .........................................................63
Life Of Tires................................................... 388 Lights On Reminder .....................................61
J Liftgate ...................................................88, 112 Low Fuel ................................................... 114
Jack Location .................................................314 Adjustable Height ........................................89 Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ....... 115
Jack Operation ...............................................318 Closing.........................................................88 NEUTRAL .................................................. 117
Jacking And Tire Changing Instructions .........313 Hands-Free ..................................................90 Night Vision.............................112, 115, 118 11
Jacking Instructions .......................................318 Opening .......................................................88 Oil Temperature ........................................ 112
Jump Starting ................................................322 Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer .......................66 Park ................................................... 60, 118
416
Passing........................................................ 60 M Modifications/Alterations
Reading ....................................................... 63 Main Menu ................................................... 104 Vehicle .........................................................12
Seat Belt Reminder ...................................113 Maintenance ............................................. 85, 87 Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...................... 264
Security Alarm ...........................................113 Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 343 Mopar Parts .................................................. 409
SelecSpeed Control ...................................119 Maintenance Schedule ................................. 334 Multi-Function Control Lever ............................59
Service ......................................................378 Malfunction Indicator Light
Sport Mode ...............................................119 (Check Engine) ..................................... 115, 121 N
StopStart ...................................................119 Manual Navigation ..................................................... 106
Sway Bar ...................................................117 Service ..................................................... 410 Neutral .......................................................... 117
Sway Bar Fault ..........................................117 Massage New Vehicle Break-In Period ......................... 125
Traction Control .........................................254 Seats ...........................................................45 Night Vision Camera ..................................... 180
Transmission Temperature .......................113 McIntosh ....................................................... 234
Turn Signals ..............................62, 119, 308 Memory Feature (Memory Seats) ....................34 O
Vanity Mirror ................................................ 51 Memory Seat ...................................................34 Occupant Restraints ..................................... 269
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .....................108 Memory Seats And Radio.................................34 Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel)...................... 401
Load Shed Battery Saver On ..........................108 Methanol ...................................................... 402 Off Road Pages ............................................. 245
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ............108 Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Accessory Gauges..................................... 246
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ............108 Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline ...................... 403 Pitch And Roll ........................................... 246
Loading Vehicle .............................................186 Mirrors .............................................................50 Selec Terrain............................................. 247
Tires ..........................................................382 Automatic Dimming Rearview .....................50 Status Bar................................................. 245
Locks Digital Rearview...........................................50 Suspension ............................................... 247
Child Protection ........................................... 31 Exterior Folding............................................52 Vehicle Dynamics ..................................... 246
Manual ........................................................ 27 Heated.........................................................53 Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement) ................... 106
Power Door.................................................. 28 Outside ........................................................52 Oil Change Indicator ...................................... 101
Lubrication, Body ...........................................348 Power ..........................................................52 Reset ........................................................ 101
Lug Nuts/Bolts ..............................................400 Power Folding ..............................................52 Oil Filter, Change ........................................... 344
Luggage Carrier ............................................... 94 Rearview.............................................50, 309 Oil Filter, Selection ........................................ 344
Tilt Side Mirrors ...........................................53 Oil Pressure Light .......................................... 112
Vanity ..........................................................51 Oil, Engine ..................................................... 344
Capacity .................................................... 404
417
Checking ...................................................342 Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 382 R

Dipstick .....................................................342 Power Radial Ply Tires.............................................. 386
Disposal ....................................................344 Brakes ...................................................... 400 Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............ 354
Filter ..........................................................344 Distribution Center (Fuses) .....359, 367, 372 Radio
Filter Disposal ...........................................344 Door Locks ..................................................28 Off Road Pages ......................................... 245
Identification Logo.....................................344 Inverter ........................................................81 Settings .................................................... 204
Materials Added To ...................................344 Mirrors .........................................................52 Sound Setting ........................................... 224
Pressure Warning Light .............................112 Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ................79 Radio Operation ............................................ 248
Recommendation ............................ 344, 404 Seats ...........................................................42 Radio Remote Controls ................................. 229
Synthetic ...................................................344 Steering .................................................... 142 Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...........................66
Viscosity ....................................................404 Sunroof.................................................84, 85 Rear Air Conditioning .......................................72
Onboard Diagnostic System ..........................120 Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column................32 Rear Axle (Differential) .................................. 358
Operating Precautions ...................................120 Windows ......................................................82 Rear Camera ........................................ 176, 183
Operator Manual Power Seats Rear Camera, Washer ................................... 176
Owner's Manual ........................................410 Down ...........................................................42 Rear Cross Path ............................................ 260
Outside Rearview Mirrors ................................ 52 Forward .......................................................42 Rear ParkSense System................................ 161
Rearward .....................................................42 Rear Seat Entertainment .............................. 235
P Up ................................................................42 Rear Wiper/Washer .........................................66
Paint Care ......................................................396 Power Seats, Third Row ...................................44 RearSeatReminderAlert ................................ 251
Parking Brake ................................................126 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 275 Reclining Front Seats .......................................37
ParkSense Preparation For Jacking ................................ 313 Recreational Towing...................................... 196
Front And Rear ..........................................161 Pressure Washing ......................................... 343 Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 402
ParkSense Active Park Assist ........................169 Pretensioners Refrigerant .................................................... 346
ParkSense System, Rear ...............................161 Seat Belts ................................................. 275 Release, Hood..................................................87
Passenger Screen .........................................229 Profile ........................................................... 207 Reminder, Seat Belt ...................................... 270
Passive Entry ................................................... 28 Programmable Features ............................... 204 Remote Control
Pedestrian Warning System ..........................263 Starting System ...........................................23
Permissions ...................................................229 Q Remote Keyless Entry ......................................17 11
Pets ...............................................................306 Quadra-Lift ........................................... 117, 138 Arm The Alarm .............................................26
Pinch Protection ....................................... 85, 87 Quadra-Trac .................................................. 134 Disarm The Alarm ........................................26
418
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............. 21 Child Restraints ........................................ 290 Vented .........................................................46
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control .........229 Energy Management Feature ................... 275 Ventilated ....................................................46
Remote Starting Extender ................................................... 274 Second Row USB .............................................79
Exit Remote Start Mode .............................. 24 Front Seat............................... 270, 271, 273 Security Alarm ........................................ 26, 113
Remote Starting System .................................. 23 Inspection................................................. 306 Arm The System ...........................................26
Replacement Bulbs .......................................378 Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation.................... 273 Disarm The System......................................26
Replacement Keys........................................... 21 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting................... 273 Selec-Terrain ................................................. 137
Replacement Tires.........................................388 Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................. 271 Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................21
Reporting Safety Defects ...............................409 Operating Instructions .............................. 273 Sentry Key Replacement ..................................21
Restraints, Child ............................................290 Pregnant Women ...................................... 275 Service Assistance ........................................ 407
Restraints, Head .............................................. 47 Pretensioners ........................................... 275 Service Contract ............................................ 408
Roll Over Warning ............................................ 11 Rear Seat ................................................. 271 Service Manuals ........................................... 410
Roof Luggage Rack .......................................... 94 Reminder.......................113, 118, 119, 270 Settings ................................................ 106, 204
Rotation, Tires ...............................................395 Seat Belt Extender.................................... 274 Shift Paddles................................................. 133
Seat Belt Pretensioner ............................. 275 Shifting .......................................................... 129
S Seat Belt Reminder .................................. 119 Automatic Transmission .................. 129, 130
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .........................306 Untwisting Procedure ............................... 273 Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N) ............................. 198
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......................307 Seat Belts Maintenance ............................... 398 Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N) ......................... 199
Safety Defects, Reporting ..............................409 Seats ................................................. 36, 42, 46 Shoulder Belts .............................................. 271
Safety Information, Tire .................................378 Adjustment ...........................................36, 42 Side Distance Warning .................................. 167
Safety Tips .....................................................305 Bolster Adjustment ......................................43 Signals, Turn ........................................ 119, 308
Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................................308 Easy Entry ....................................................43 Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 393
Schedule, Maintenance .................................334 Extend .........................................................43 Snow Tires .................................................... 389
Screen, Passenger.........................................229 Heated.........................................................46 Spare Tires ..................................315, 390, 391
Seat Belts ............................................ 270, 306 Massage ......................................................45 Speed Control
Adjustable Shoulder Belt ...........................274 Memory .......................................................34 Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ............................. 148
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ......274 Rear Folding ................................................36 Sport Mode ................................................... 134
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Reclining......................................................37 Starting .................................................. 23, 122
Anchorage .............................................274 Seatback Release .......................................36 Button..........................................................22
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ............275 Tilting...........................................................36 Cold Weather ............................................ 125
419
Engine Block Heater ..................................125 Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 344 Replacement ............................................ 388
Engine Fails To Start .................................124 System, Remote Starting .................................23 Rotation .................................................... 395
Remote ....................................................... 23 Run Flat .................................................... 387
Starting And Operating ..................................122 T Safety .............................................. 378, 385
Starting Procedures .......................................122 Telescoping Steering Column ..........................32 Sizes ......................................................... 379
Steering ........................................................... 32 Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC).............73 Snow Tires ................................................ 389
Power ........................................................142 Third Party Apps ............................................ 234 Spare Tires .............................315, 390, 391
Tilt Column .................................................. 32 Third Row USB .................................................79 Spinning ................................................... 387
Wheel, Heated............................................. 33 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ....................................91 Trailer Towing ........................................... 194
Wheel, Tilt ................................................... 32 Tilt Steering Column ........................................32 Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 387
Wheel, Voice Recognition ............................ 33 Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 382 Types ........................................................ 389
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ......................229 Tire Identification Number (TIN) .................... 380 Wheel Nut Torque ..................................... 400
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Tire Markings ................................................ 378 To Open Hood ..................................................87
Controls .........................................................229 Tire Safety Information ................................. 378 Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ............. 188, 192
Stop/Start................................... 116, 119, 143 Tire Terminology And Definitions .................. 381 Towing ........................................................... 187
Storage ............................................................ 75 Tires ...................................307, 385, 390, 395 Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 329
Cargo Area .................................................. 91 Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................. 388 Guide ........................................................ 190
Storage, Vehicle.............................................396 Air Pressure .............................................. 385 Recreational ............................................. 196
Storing Your Vehicle ......................................396 Chains ...................................................... 393 Weight ...................................................... 190
Streaming ......................................................235 Changing .................................................. 313 Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 196
Sun Roof ............................................ 84, 85, 87 Compact Spare......................................... 390 Towing Eyes .................................................. 331
Opening ....................................................... 84 General Information ........................ 385, 390 Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Sun Visor ......................................................... 51 High Speed ............................................... 386 Vehicle .......................................................... 196
Sunglasses Storage ......................................... 76 Inflation Pressure ..................................... 385 Traction Control ............................................ 257
Sunshade Operation .......................... 77, 85, 86 Life Of Tires .............................................. 388 Traffic Sign Assist System ............................. 153
Surround View Camera ..................................183 Load Capacity ........................................... 382 TrailCam System ........................................... 178
Sway Bar Disconnect Pressure Monitoring System Trailer Frontal Area ....................................... 188
Electronic ..................................................136 (TPMS) ........................................ 116, 264 Trailer Sway Control (TSC) .................... 188, 257 11
Sway Control, Trailer ......................................257 Quality Grading ......................................... 395 Trailer Towing ................................................ 187
Symbol Glossary .............................................. 12 Radial ....................................................... 386 Hitch Cover Removal ................................ 192
420
Hitches ......................................................190 U W
Minimum Requirements............................193 Uconnect (Radio) .......................................... 203 Warning Lights
Tips ...........................................................195 Uconnect 5/5 NAV ........................................ 203 (Instrument Cluster Descriptions) ................. 110
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................192 Uconnect Settings ......................................... 204 Warning Lights And Messages ...................... 110
Weight-Carrying Hitch ................................188 Customer Programmable Features ...... 28, 31 Warnings, Roll Over ..........................................11
Weight-Distributing Hitch...........................188 Passive Entry Programming .................. 28, 31 Warranty Information .................................... 409
Wiring ........................................................194 Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 395 Washers, Windshield .................... 64, 115, 342
Trailer Weight ................................................190 Universal Garage Door Opener Washing Vehicle ............................................ 397
Transfer Case ................................................358 (Homelink®) — If Equipped b .......................54 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........................... 391
Fluid ..........................................................406 Unleaded Gasoline ....................................... 401 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........................... 391
Maintenance .............................................358 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................... 273 Wind Buffeting .................................................83
Transmission .................................................130 USB Window Fogging ...............................................74
Automatic ........................................ 130, 357 Second Row ................................................79 Window Lockout Switch ...................................83
Fluid ..........................................................406 Third Row ....................................................79 Windows ..........................................................82
Maintenance .............................................357 USB Port ..........................................................77 Power...........................................................82
Shifting ......................................................129 Reset Auto-Up ..............................................83
Transporting Pets ..........................................306 V Windshield Defroster .................................... 306
Tread Wear Indicators ...................................387 Vanity Mirrors ..................................................51 Windshield DeIcer ............................................67
Trip Computer ................................................105 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............. 400 Windshield Washers .............................. 65, 342
Turn Signals ...................................................119 Vehicle Loading ................................... 186, 382 Fluid.......................................................... 342
Vehicle Maintenance .................................... 343 Windshield Wiper Blades .............................. 349
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ....................12 Windshield Wipers ...........................................64
Vehicle Security Alarm .....................................26 Wipers Blade Replacement ........................... 349
Vehicle Settings ............................................ 204 Wipers, Intermittent .........................................65
Vehicle Storage ............................................. 396 Wipers, Rain Sensitive .....................................66
Voice Command...............................................33 Wireless Charging Pad .....................................81
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................33
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any device
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the or feature that may take their attention off the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers, portable radios,
right to make changes in design and specifications, and/or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing any vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious accident. Texting
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured. while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you find yourself unable to devote your full
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc. attention to vehicle operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of
used in substitution therefore. cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s Manual, This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep® brand vehicle and to provide a convenient
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. reference source for common questions.
U.S. Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit mopar.com/om (U.S.), owners.mopar.ca
Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 or by contacting your dealer. Replacement kits can be purchased by visiting www.techauthority.com. (Canada) or your local Jeep® brand dealer.
Canadian Residents: If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the
Warranty Booklet or purchase a replacement kit by calling 1-800-387-1143 or by contacting your dealer.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a rideshare, a friend
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, or use public transportation.
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area WARNING
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing what
steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of 2022 GRAND CHEROKEE/GRAND CHEROKEE L
your Jeep® brand vehicle. Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly OWNE R ’S MANUAL
to the App Store® or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
2022 GRAND CHEROKEE

GRAND CHEROKEE L
U. S. Canada
DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

RADIO AND WARRANTY BOOKS
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
©2021 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés. Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une Second Edition
marque déposée de FCA US LLC. App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google. 22_WL_OM_EN_USC

2022 Jeep Grand Cherokee L 92

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2022 Jeep Grand Cherokee L 92

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s heritage, knowing

2022 GRAND CHEROKEE

DOWNLOAD THE MOST UP-TO-DATE OWNER’S MANUAL,

2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................17 2

3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 95 3

4 STARTING AND OPERATING ............................................................................................... 122 4

INTRODUCTION VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — DRIVER AND PASSENGER MEMORY

VEHICLE LOADING ............................................186 Recreational Towing — Quadra-Trac I 3RD PARTY APPS................................................234

Rear Screen Entertainment with SAFETY IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE TIRES..................................................................... 378 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ................................ 407 WARRANTY INFORMATION................................409

SYMBOLS KEY ROLLOVER WARNING

Rollover Warning Label

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS Red Warning Lights

Air Bag Warning Light Liftgate Open Warning Light

Brake Warning Light Night Vision Animal Warning Light

Battery Charge Warning Light Night Vision Pedestrian Warning Light

Red Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights

Oil Temperature Warning Light Electric Park Brake Warning Light

Vehicle Security Warning Light Active Lane Management Warning Light

Low Washer Fluid Warning Light

Yellow Warning Lights Yellow Warning Lights

Service 4WD Warning Light Air Suspension Fault Warning Light

Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Warning Light

Sway Bar Indicator Light

4WD Low Indicator Light

Air Suspension Active Indicator Light

Yellow Indicator Lights Green Indicator Lights

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Target Detected

Air Suspension Entry/Exit Indicator Light Auto HOLD Indicator Light

Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light Front Fog Indicator Light

NEUTRAL Indicator Light Parking/Headlights On Indicator Light

Green Indicator Lights White Indicator Lights

Sport Mode Indicator Light Rear Seat Unoccupied Indicator Light

Stop/Start Active Indicator Light Selec-Speed Control Indicator Light

Turn Signal Indicator Lights Active Driving Assist On Indicator Light

Active Driving Assist - Driver Attentive Indicator Light

High Beam Indicator Light

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Indicator Light

Night Vision Suppressed Indicator Light

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

In case the ignition switch does not change NOTE: NOTE:

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19

Emergency Key Removed

20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

3. Next, locate the gap on the right side of the key

Battery Removal Pocket Key Fob Battery Replacement

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21

The system uses a key fob, keyless push button

22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

1 — OFF  Replacement of the key fob battery is

KEYLESS ENTER ‘N GO™ IGNITION

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23

24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: All of the following conditions must be met before

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25

26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27

If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the

28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Passenger Power Door Locks

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29